Software Input Output Reference Maintenance Avaya Communication Server 1000

7.5 NN43001-711, 05.04 April 2011

 2011 Avaya Inc. All Rights Reserved. Notice While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya assumes no liability for any errors. Avaya reserves the right to make changes and corrections to the information in this document without the obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes. Documentation disclaimer Documentation means information published by Avaya in varying mediums which may include product information, operating instructions and performance specifications that Avaya generally makes available to users of its products. Documentation does not include marketing materials. Avaya shall not be responsible for any modifications, additions, or deletions to the original published version of documentation unless such modifications, additions, or deletions were performed by Avaya. End User agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya, Avaya's agents, servants and employees against all claims, lawsuits, demands and judgments arising out of, or in connection with, subsequent modifications, additions or deletions to this documentation, to the extent made by End User. Link disclaimer Avaya is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced within this site or documentation provided by Avaya. Avaya is not responsible for the accuracy of any information, statement or content provided on these sites and does not necessarily endorse the products, services, or information described or offered within them. Avaya does not guarantee that these links will work all the time and has no control over the availability of the linked pages. Warranty Avaya provides a limited warranty on its Hardware and Software (Product(s)). Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avayas standard warranty language, as well as information regarding support for this Product while under warranty is available to Avaya customers and other parties through the Avaya Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com. Please note that if you acquired the Product(s) from an authorized Avaya reseller outside of the United States and Canada, the warranty is provided to you by said Avaya reseller and not by Avaya. Licenses THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE, HTTP://SUPPORT.AVAYA.COM/LICENSEINFO/ ARE APPLICABLE TO ANYONE WHO DOWNLOADS, USES AND/OR INSTALLS AVAYA SOFTWARE, PURCHASED FROM AVAYA INC., ANY AVAYA AFFILIATE, OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER (AS APPLICABLE) UNDER A COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT WITH AVAYA OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER. UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY AVAYA IN WRITING, AVAYA DOES NOT EXTEND THIS LICENSE IF THE SOFTWARE WAS OBTAINED FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN AVAYA, AN AVAYAAFFILIATE OR AN AVAYA AUTHORIZED RESELLER; AVAYA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO TAKE LEGAL ACTION AGAINST YOU AND ANYONE ELSE USING OR SELLING THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT A LICENSE. BY INSTALLING, DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE, OR AUTHORIZING OTHERS TO DO SO, YOU, ON BEHALF OF YOURSELF AND THE ENTITY FOR WHOM YOU ARE INSTALLING, DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE (HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO INTERCHANGEABLY AS YOU AND END USER), AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND CREATE A BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND AVAYA INC. OR THE APPLICABLE AVAYA AFFILIATE ( AVAYA).

Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise, no use should be made of materials on this site, the Documentation, Software, or Hardware provided by Avaya. All content on this site, the documentation and the Product provided by Avaya including the selection, arrangement and design of the content is owned either by Avaya or its licensors and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws including the sui generis rights relating to the protection of databases. You may not modify, copy, reproduce, republish, upload, post, transmit or distribute in any way any content, in whole or in part, including any code and software unless expressly authorized by Avaya. Unauthorized reproduction, transmission, dissemination, storage, and or use without the express written consent of Avaya can be a criminal, as well as a civil offense under the applicable law. Third-party components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements (Third Party Components), which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product (Third Party Terms). Information regarding distributed Linux OS source code (for those Products that have distributed the Linux OS source code), and identifying the copyright holders of the Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on the Avaya Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com/Copyright. Preventing Toll Fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party (for example, a person who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor, or is not working on your company's behalf). Be aware that there can be a risk of Toll Fraud associated with your system and that, if Toll Fraud occurs, it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services. Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by Toll Fraud and you need technical assistance or support, call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at +1-800-643-2353 for the United States and Canada. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com. Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to: [email protected]. Trademarks The trademarks, logos and service marks (Marks) displayed in this site, the Documentation and Product(s) provided by Avaya are the registered or unregistered Marks of Avaya, its affiliates, or other third parties. Users are not permitted to use such Marks without prior written consent from Avaya or such third party which may own the Mark. Nothing contained in this site, the Documentation and Product(s) should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right in and to the Marks without the express written permission of Avaya or the applicable third party. Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya Inc. All non-Avaya trademarks are the property of their respective owners, and Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Downloading Documentation For the most current versions of Documentation, see the Avaya Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com. Contact Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your Product. The support telephone number is 1-800-242-2121 in the United States. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya Web site: http://support.avaya.com.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Contents Chapter 1: New in this release................................................................................................11

Other changes.................................................................................................................................................13 Revision History......................................................................................................................................13

Chapter 2: Customer service..................................................................................................17

Navigation.......................................................................................................................................................17 Getting technical documentation.....................................................................................................................17 Getting product training...................................................................................................................................17 Getting help from a distributor or reseller........................................................................................................17 Getting technical support from the Avaya Web site........................................................................................18

Chapter 3: Introduction...........................................................................................................19
Note on legacy products and releases............................................................................................................19 Subject............................................................................................................................................................19 Format and structure.......................................................................................................................................19 The Basic commands Table...................................................................................................................20 The Alphabetical list of commands Table...............................................................................................20 Applicable systems.........................................................................................................................................21 System migration....................................................................................................................................21 Intended audience...........................................................................................................................................22 Conventions....................................................................................................................................................22 Terminology............................................................................................................................................22 Notational conventions...........................................................................................................................23 Related information.........................................................................................................................................24 Documentation.......................................................................................................................................24 Online.....................................................................................................................................................24

Chapter 4: Communicating with the system.........................................................................25

Changing the IP scheme on the ELAN...........................................................................................................25 Accessing the system.....................................................................................................................................26 Logging in and out..................................................................................................................................26 Local and remote access........................................................................................................................26 HOST mode access...............................................................................................................................27 Line mode interface log in procedure.....................................................................................................27 Access through the maintenance telephone..........................................................................................28 Accessing Meridian Mail.........................................................................................................................30 System memory and disk space.....................................................................................................................30 Legend:...................................................................................................................................................30 Low memory and disk warnings.............................................................................................................31 System Look up messages.............................................................................................................................31 Multi-User Login..............................................................................................................................................32 User commands.....................................................................................................................................32 Maintenance display codes.............................................................................................................................33 Time and date of fault......................................................................................................................................33 Applications that use SFTP.............................................................................................................................33

Chapter 5: Alphabetical list of packages..............................................................................35 Chapter 6: Overlay loader and Multi-User Login..................................................................47

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Overlay loader.................................................................................................................................................47 Overlay loader commands......................................................................................................................47 Multi-User Login commands...........................................................................................................................48 Multi-User commands.............................................................................................................................48

Chapter 7: LD 01: Template audit...........................................................................................51

Consistency Checks........................................................................................................................................51 User Count Scan....................................................................................................................................51 Duplicate Template Scan........................................................................................................................51 Template Checksum Audit......................................................................................................................52 Key Lamp Strip Audit..............................................................................................................................52 Template Pointer Audit...........................................................................................................................52 Operating parameters.............................................................................................................................52 Sample operation...................................................................................................................................53

Chapter 8: LD 30: Network and Signaling Diagnostic..........................................................55

Program operation..........................................................................................................................................55 How to use LD 30...................................................................................................................................56 Fibre Network Fabric..............................................................................................................................56 Basic commands.............................................................................................................................................57 Contents.................................................................................................................................................57 Large System and Avaya Communication Server 1000E commands............................................................57 Superloop commands.....................................................................................................................................58 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) commands............................................................................................................58 Alphabetical list of commands.........................................................................................................................59

Chapter 9: LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console Diagnostic......................................65

M2006 and M2008 Telephone test..................................................................................................................65 M2216, M2016S, and M2616 Telephone test.................................................................................................68 M2317 Telephone test.....................................................................................................................................71 M2250 Console test........................................................................................................................................75 M2250 Console test........................................................................................................................................77

Chapter 10: LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic...................................81

Overlay 32 linkage..........................................................................................................................................82 Using Enable/Disable commands...................................................................................................................83 Fibre Network Fabric.......................................................................................................................................83 Basic commands.............................................................................................................................................84 Contents..........................................................................................................................................................84 Basic commands.............................................................................................................................................84 Large System and Avaya Communicatuon Server 1000E System commands..............................................85 Superloop commands.....................................................................................................................................87 ISDN BRI MISP commands............................................................................................................................88 ISDN BRI SILC/UILC commands....................................................................................................................89 ISDN BRI BRSC commands...........................................................................................................................90 System commands..........................................................................................................................................91 Alphabetical list of commands.........................................................................................................................92 Output Example:...................................................................................................................................122

Chapter 11: LD 33: Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic for Fiber Remote IPE...................135
Fiber Remote IPE diagnostic........................................................................................................................135 Midnight routine operation....................................................................................................................135

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Fibre Network Fabric............................................................................................................................136 Basic commands for Fiber Remote IPE........................................................................................................136 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................137

Chapter 12: LD 34: Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver Diagnostic................143
Fibre Network Fabric.....................................................................................................................................143 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................144 Contents...............................................................................................................................................144 Large System and Avaya Communication Server 1000E System commands.............................................144 Extended Tone Detector (XTD) commands..................................................................................................145 Maintenance telephone commands..............................................................................................................146 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................147

Chapter 13: LD 36: Trunk Diagnostic...................................................................................155

When to use LD 36.......................................................................................................................................155 Trunk error thresholds...................................................................................................................................156 Fibre Network Fabric.....................................................................................................................................156 Basic commands (LD 36)..............................................................................................................................157 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................158

Chapter 14: Input/Output Diagnostic...................................................................................161

Intelligent links (APL, HSL, and LSL)............................................................................................................161 D-channel Expansion....................................................................................................................................162 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................162 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands.......................................................................................164 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................164

Chapter 15: LD 38: Conference Circuit Diagnostic............................................................167

Fibre Network Fabric.....................................................................................................................................167 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................168 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................168

Chapter 16: LD 39: Intergroup Switch and System Clock Generator Diagnostic............173
Group, loop, and Peripheral Signaling card relationship...............................................................................173 Fibre Network Fabric............................................................................................................................174 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................174 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................176

Chapter 17: LD 43: Equipment Datadump...........................................................................183

When the datadump fails..............................................................................................................................183 Low memory warning...........................................................................................................................183 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................184 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................185

Chapter 18: LD 44: Software Audit......................................................................................189

Running software audit.................................................................................................................................189

Chapter 19: LD 45: Background Signaling and Switching Diagnostic.............................191

Using the manual extended continuity (XCON) command............................................................................191 Fibre Network Fabric............................................................................................................................192 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................195 XCON sub-prompts.......................................................................................................................................196 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................200

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of XCON sub-prompts.........................................................................................................202

Chapter 20: LD 46: Multifrequency Sender Diagnostic for Automatic Number Identification .................................................................................................................................................205
Fibre Network Fabric.....................................................................................................................................205 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................206 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................206

Chapter 21: LD 48: Link Diagnostic.....................................................................................209

Automatic Call Distribution Links...................................................................................................................209 ACD High speed and low speed link monitor................................................................................................209 APL monitor..................................................................................................................................................209 Integrated Messaging System Links.............................................................................................................210 Command and Status Links (CSL)................................................................................................................210 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL).........................................................................................................210 Application Module Link (AML)......................................................................................................................211 AML/CSL monitor..........................................................................................................................................211 ISDN BRI monitor..........................................................................................................................................211 Single Terminal Access (STA).......................................................................................................................211 Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA)...........................................................................................................211 Fibre Network Fabric.....................................................................................................................................212 D-channel Expansion....................................................................................................................................212 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................212 Contents...............................................................................................................................................212 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................213 ACD High speed and low speed link commands..........................................................................................217 ACD High speed and low speed link monitor commands.............................................................................218 AML commands............................................................................................................................................218 AML over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) commands.............................................................................................219 AML/CSL monitor commands.......................................................................................................................220 Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) commands...................................................................................................221 APL monitor commands................................................................................................................................222 D-channel Expansion commands.................................................................................................................222 Intercept Computer Update (ICU) commands...............................................................................................224 ISDN BRI monitor commands.......................................................................................................................225 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands.......................................................................................226 Single Terminal Access (STA) commands....................................................................................................226 Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) commands........................................................................................227 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................227

Chapter 22: LD 51: Intercept Computer Update.................................................................259

Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................259 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................259

Chapter 23: LD 54: Multifrequency Signaling Diagnostic..................................................261

Hardware Initialization after SYSLOAD.........................................................................................................261 Loop around test during daily routines.................................................................................................262 Loop around test by command.............................................................................................................262 MFC/MFE error handler and counter....................................................................................................263 Fibre Network Fabric............................................................................................................................263 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................263 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................264

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 24: LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic........267
Channel Timeslot Mapping............................................................................................................................267 Fibre Network Fabric............................................................................................................................268 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................268 DTI/PRI commands..............................................................................................................................268 Clock controller commands..................................................................................................................269 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................270

Chapter 25: LD 61: Message Waiting Lamps Reset...........................................................281

G command...................................................................................................................................................281

Chapter 26: LD 75: Digital Trunk Maintenance...................................................................283

Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................283 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................285

Chapter 27: LD 77: Manual Print..........................................................................................289

When to use LD 77.......................................................................................................................................289 LD 77 Output format.............................................................................................................................289 Abbreviations for LD 77........................................................................................................................290 LD 77 Input format........................................................................................................................................290 Fibre Network Fabric.....................................................................................................................................291 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................291 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................292

Chapter 28: LD 80: Call Trace...............................................................................................299

Enhanced Trace commands.........................................................................................................................299 Calling Line ID on Analog Trunks for Singapone, Australia and Hong Kong ................................................300 When to use LD 80.......................................................................................................................................300 Originating and terminating information........................................................................................................301 Example 1 Trace a call placed to a 500-type set..................................................................................301 Example 2 Trace an outgoing ISDN call...............................................................................................302 Example 3 Enhanced Trace command output......................................................................................302 Example 4 Trace a call from an IP Media Services Ad Hoc Conference loop:.....................................303 VoIP Trace command output.........................................................................................................................303 Example 1 Trace a call placed from IP Phone to IP Phone within a single system..............................304 Example 2 Trace a Outgoing Virtual Trunk Call between TDM Phone and VGW Resource on Different Systems................................................................................................................................................304 Example 3 Trace an Incoming Virtual Trunk Call between two different systems................................305 Example 4 Trace an IP Phone to Local TDM Device...........................................................................305 Example 5 Trace a call scenario between two Avaya Communication Server 1000E Media Gateways: 306 Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs...........................................................................................................306 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................310 Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T commands.............................................................311 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................312

Chapter 29: LD 92: Automatic Trunk Maintenance.............................................................317

Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................317 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................318

Chapter 30: LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic...........................................................................321

Monitoring.....................................................................................................................................................321 D-channels....................................................................................................................................................321

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

B-channels and ISL channels.......................................................................................................................322 ISDN features................................................................................................................................................322 D-channel DN tracing....................................................................................................................................323 Message types..............................................................................................................................................324 Setting output format levels...........................................................................................................................325 Deactivate monitor from a maintenance telephone.......................................................................................327 Get monitor status.........................................................................................................................................328 Example: Status of D-channel monitor..........................................................................................................328 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL).........................................................................................................328 D-channel Expansion....................................................................................................................................329 CS 1000S Survivable IP................................................................................................................................329 D-channel commands...................................................................................................................................329 D-channel Expansion commands.................................................................................................................332 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands.......................................................................................335 Multipurpose Serial Data Link D-channel commands...................................................................................336 D-channel call trace commands....................................................................................................................336 Outgoing messages......................................................................................................................................337 Incoming messages......................................................................................................................................338 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................339

Chapter 31: LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management......................................................361

Command format..........................................................................................................................................361 Alarm Management capability.......................................................................................................................362 Feature packaging................................................................................................................................362 The Event Collector..............................................................................................................................362 The Event Server..................................................................................................................................362 Escalation and suppression thresholds.........................................................................................................364 Global window timer length..................................................................................................................364 TTY output format of events..........................................................................................................................364 Fancy format output..............................................................................................................................364 Unformatted Output..............................................................................................................................365 Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol.............................................................................................................366 How to Configure Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol.......................................................................366 Command descriptions.................................................................................................................................369 Object descriptions........................................................................................................................................369 How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S.........................................................................................370 Point-to-Point configuration - Call Server, Bootp is used......................................................................371 Recommended BootP configuration for Layer 2 LAN configuration - Call Server only........................371 Manual Layer 2 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S.................................................................372 Manual Layer 3 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S.................................................................374 Auto-Negotiate on 100BaseT ports......................................................................................................376 IP command descriptions..............................................................................................................................377 NTP Command descriptions.........................................................................................................................392 Alphabetical list of Administration commands...............................................................................................393 Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands.................................................................................................485

Chapter 32: LD 135: Core Common Equipment Diagnostic..............................................501

Possible OOS messages..............................................................................................................................501 Adding a group to an Option 81C/81C CPII..................................................................................................502 Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................502 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................505

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 33: LD 137: Core Input/Output Diagnostic............................................................515

Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................516 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................518

Chapter 34: LD 143: Customer Configuration Backup and Restore.................................527

Basic commands...........................................................................................................................................527 Alphabetical list of commands.......................................................................................................................529

Chapter 35: Media Card command line interface commands...........................................539

Contents........................................................................................................................................................539 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................540 Overview.......................................................................................................................................................540 ITG-SA command line interface commands.................................................................................................541 OAM security shell commands.............................................................................................................541 PDT security shell commands..............................................................................................................561 MC32S Command Line Interface commands...............................................................................................561 OAM security shell commands.............................................................................................................561 PDT security shell commands..............................................................................................................569

Chapter 36: Media Gateway Controller command line interface commands..................581

Contents........................................................................................................................................................581 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................582 Level One (OAM) CLI commands.................................................................................................................582 OAM Command groups........................................................................................................................582 OAM Commands..................................................................................................................................583 Level Two (LDB) CLI commands..................................................................................................................591 LDB Command groups.........................................................................................................................591 LDB Commands...................................................................................................................................592

Chapter 37: Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands................................599

Contents........................................................................................................................................................599 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................600 Level One (OAM) CLI commands.................................................................................................................601 OAM Command groups........................................................................................................................601 OAM Commands..................................................................................................................................604 Level Two (PDT) CLI commands..................................................................................................................645 PDT Command groups.........................................................................................................................645 PDT Commands...................................................................................................................................647 Accounts commands: user account administration commands............................................................647 PDT built-in commands: PDT built-in...................................................................................................647 PDT Patcher commands: patcher........................................................................................................648 PDT RID commands: remote iset diagnostics......................................................................................650 PDT cds commands: Converged Desktop Service module..................................................................650 disk commands: file system maintenance and diagnostics..................................................................652 PDT nrsDB commands: Network Routing Service...............................................................................652 rdtools commands: rd tools..................................................................................................................655 PDT sipnpm commands: SIP Network Protocol Module......................................................................656 PDT system commands: System administration..................................................................................658 PDT ums commands : UMS module commands..................................................................................660 PDT iset commands: iset module commands......................................................................................661 CLI commands in Linux.................................................................................................................................663

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 38: UDT Universal Digital Trunk card Command Line Interface.........................665
Command Line Interface...............................................................................................................................665 Main menu....................................................................................................................................................666 ls command..........................................................................................................................................667 ? command...........................................................................................................................................667 System Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................667 ls command..........................................................................................................................................668 ? command...........................................................................................................................................668 System Test..........................................................................................................................................668 crestart command.................................................................................................................................669 mreport command................................................................................................................................670 showerr command................................................................................................................................670 qver command......................................................................................................................................671 ttad command.......................................................................................................................................672 stad command......................................................................................................................................672 UDT Administration.......................................................................................................................................672 ls command..........................................................................................................................................673 ? command...........................................................................................................................................673 E1T1Settings command.......................................................................................................................673 UDT Maintenance.........................................................................................................................................674 ls command..........................................................................................................................................674 ? command...........................................................................................................................................675 Alarm Status command........................................................................................................................675 ChannelStatus command.....................................................................................................................675 Lpbck command...................................................................................................................................676 PLLStatus command............................................................................................................................676 SpanStatus command..........................................................................................................................676 UdtConfig command.............................................................................................................................677 Remote access to the UDT card...................................................................................................................677

Chapter 39: Linux base CLI commands..............................................................................679 Index.......................................................................................................................................687

10

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 1: New in this release

The following sections detail whats new in this document for Avaya Communication Server 1000 Release 7.5.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

11

New in this release

LD 80: Call Trace for Extended Local Calls VoIP Trace command output

12

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Other changes

Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs

EXTENDED LOCAL CALL is printed out if call traces are printed for Extended Local Call.

Other changes
There are no other changes in this release.

Revision History
April 2011 Standard 05.04. This document is up-issued to support Avaya Communication Server 1000 Release 7.5. Added SCHD to GRDRC in LD 117. January 2011 Standard 05.03. This document is up-issued to support Avaya Communication Server 1000 Release 7.5. Various commands associated with obsolete features are removed. December Standard 05.02. This document is up-issued to support Avaya 2010 Communication Server 1000 Release 7.5. Various commands associated with obsolete features are removed. November Standard 05.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication 2010 Server 1000 Release 7.5. July 2010 Standard 04.02. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0. June 2010 Standard 04.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0. March 2010 Standard 03.12. This document is up-issued to reflect changes made to the section LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management. February 2010 Standard 03.11. This document is up-issued to reflect changes made to the section AML/CSL monitor commands. February 2010 Standard 03.10. This document is up-issued to reflect changes made to the section Overlay 48 commands. January 2010 Standard 03.09. This document is up-issued to reflect changes made to the section LD 117: Time Interval. December Standard 03.08. This document is up-issued to reflect changes made to 2009 the section LD117: Ethernet and Alarm Management. October 2009 Standard 03.07. This document is up-issued to support MG XPEC. September Standard 03.06. This document is up-issued to update the section D2009 channel call trace commands.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

13

New in this release

July 2009 Standard 03.05. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 6.0. June 2009 Standard 03.04. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 6.0. June 2009 Standard 03.03. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 6.0. May 2009 Standard 03.02. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 6.0. May 2009 Standard 03.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 6.0. January 2009 Standard 02.11. This document is up-issued to reflect changes in technical content in section Communicating with the system. November Standard 02.10. This document is up-issued to reflect changes in 2008 technical content in section Alphabetical list of Administration commands. October 2008 Standard 02.09. This document is up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. October 2008 Standard 02.08. This document is up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. October 2008 Standard 02.07. This document is up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. September Standard 02.06. This document is up-issued to reflect changes in 2008 technical content in the section LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic. April 2008 Standard 02.05. This document is up-issued for editing changes. March 2008 Standard 02.04. This document is up-issued for editing changes. March 2008 Standard 02.03. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 5.5. January 2008 Standard 02.02. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. In LD117: - in STIP TYPE command, removed "1240" as an argument - added CHG SUPPRESS_ALARM command with arguments and description - in CHG ADMIN_COMM command, changed indicated value for DEFAULT(1) from "Public" to admingroup1 - in PRT SEL command removed "ALL" as an argument (Category) and indicated that ALL is the default when no Category argument is specified

14

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Other changes

- added PRT SUPPRESS_ALARM command with arguments and description - added TEST ALARM command with arguments and description December Standard 02.01. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 2007 Release 5.5. November Standard 01.07. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. In 2007 LD117, syntax of an argument for the SYNC NTP command changed from BKGD to BACKGROUND. October 2007 Standard 01.06. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. July 2007 Standard 01.05. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. June 2007 Standard 01.04. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. June 2007 Standard 01.03. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. May 2007 Standard 01.02. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. March 2007 Standard 01.01. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 5.0. This document contains information previously contained in the following legacy document, now retired: Software Input/Output: Maintenance (553-3001-511). October 2006 Standard 15.00. This document is up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. LD32 - STAT command expanded. LD43 - clarification of Datadump / Datadownload process. LD80 - TRCR command added. July 2006 Standard 14.00. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. LD117 - ZDST: Note concerning last week of the month value = 5. LD117 - SHELLS: Warning concerning disabling shells. LD143 - KSTT, KSHO, KDIF, KNEW, KRVR, KOUT, KUPL: New definitions added and procedure for CP PIV. August 2005 Standard 13.00. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5. September Standard 12.00. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 2004 Release 4.0. October 2003 Standard 11.00. Up-issued to support Succession 3.0. November Standard 10.00. Up-issued to include content changes for Meridian 1 2002 Release 25.4x and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise 1000, Release 2.0. January 2002 Standard 9.00. This is a global document and is up-issued for Release 25.40.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

15

New in this release

December Standard 8.00. Up-issued for X11 Release 25.3x and now contains 2000 information on small system IP Expansion. April 2000 Standard 7.00. This is a global document and is up-issued for X11 Release 25.0x. Document changes include removal of: redundant content; references to equipment types except Options 11C, 51C, 61C and 81C; and references to previous software releases. June 1999 Standard 6.00. Up-issued to include updates and changes required for X11 Release 24.2x. March 1999 Standard 5.00. Up-issued to include updates and changes required for X11 Release 24.0x. October 1997 Standard 4.00. Up-issued to include updates and changes required for X11 Release 23.0x. August 1996 Standard 3.00. Up-issued to include updates and changes required for X11 Release 22.0x. December Standard 2.00. Up-issued to include updates and changes required for 1995 X11 Release 21.1x. July 1995 Standard 1.00. This document is issued to include updates and changes required for X11 Release 21.0x. This document has a new number 553-3001-511 and replaces document number 553-2301-511.

16

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 2: Customer service

Visit the Avaya Web site to access the complete range of services and support that Avaya provides. Go to www.avaya.com or go to one of the pages listed in the following sections.

Navigation
Getting technical documentation on page 17 Getting product training on page 17 Getting help from a distributor or reseller on page 17 Getting technical support from the Avaya Web site on page 18

Getting technical documentation

To download and print selected technical publications and release notes directly from the Internet, go to www.avaya.com/support.

Getting product training

Ongoing product training is available. For more information or to register, go to www.avaya.com/support. From this Web site, locate the Training link on the left-hand navigation pane.

Getting help from a distributor or reseller

If you purchased a service contract for your Avaya product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

17

Customer service

Getting technical support from the Avaya Web site

The easiest and most effective way to get technical support for Avaya products is from the Avaya Technical Support Web site at www.avaya.com/support.

18

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 3: Introduction
This document is a global document. Contact your system supplier or your Avaya representative to verify that the hardware and software described are supported in your area.

Note on legacy products and releases

This document contains information about systems, components, and features that are compatible with Avaya Communication Server 1000 software. For more information on legacy products and releases, click the Technical Documentation link under Support on the Avaya home page: www.avaya.com

Subject
This document covers system commands that are entered to: view and print status of switch information perform background tests disable, enable and test system hardware (e.g. a particular phone) When a data administrator loads a Maintenance overlay into memory on a Terminal, the administrator may then type in any command documented in that overlay. The system responds to command entries either by changing the status of hardware or by presenting information on the Terminal. (The term "overlay" is synonymous with the terms "load" and "overlay program".) A list of available Feature Packages is included in this document. An alphabetical listing (sorted by Package mnemonic) of Feature Packages can be found in Alphabetical list of packages on page 35.

Format and structure

This document presents only maintenance overlays and text supplementary to these overlays. Overlay programs are identified by LD XX or LD XXX where XX or XXX is the overlay number.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

19

Introduction

Maintenance overlays are arranged in numerical order and appear in this document as separate modules. Two general tables appear in each Load. The first general table is titled "Basic commands". It appears at the front of each load and often follows introductory text. The second general table concludes each Maintenance Load and is titled "Alphabetical list of commands".

The Basic commands Table

This table presents an abbreviated listing of that load's entire command selection. A brief description of the command is presented beside each command. Shown below is an excerpt from a "Basic commands" table:
CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL Clears the maintenance display on active CPU to .... Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers

Note that in a Basic commands table: There are no column headings. The list is always arranged in alphabetical order. The corresponding comment is typically brief. "Basic commands" are presented in more detail in the "Alphabetical list of commands" table.

The Alphabetical list of commands Table

This table provides a more detailed description of a given command. Shown below is an excerpt from an Alphabetical list of commands table:
Command DISI loop c Description Disable carrier c on RPE loop when idle. The number of channels still busy on the carrier may be checked using the STAT command. The message ... Lock IP Expansion cabinet or Media Gateway in its operating mode. Where x is: 1, 2, 3, or 4 For Small System For CS 1000S For MG 1000T sipe-25 basic-1.0 basic-4.00 Pack/Rel rpe-1

LOCK x

20

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Applicable systems

Note that in an Alphabetical list of commands table: The description is often expansive. The package and release column provides the mnemonic of the package that must be equipped on the switch in order to receive this prompt. (In this example, the "rpe" package must be equipped to enter the DISI loop c command.) The number following the hyphen ("1" in this example) denotes the Release of software in which the package was made available. The package and release column provides the mnemonic of the package that must be equipped on the switch in order to receive this prompt. (In this example, the "basic" package must be equipped to view REQ.) The number following the hyphen ("1" in this example) denotes the Release of software in which the package was made available. When there are two or more entries in the package and release column for a prompt, the Description column provides clarification. In this example, the command LOCK x was introduced to Small Systems with "sipe-25", to CS 1000S with "basic-1.0" and MG 1000T with basic-4.00.

Applicable systems
This document applies to the following systems: Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG) Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG) Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E) Meridian 1 PBX 61C Meridian 1 PBX 81C Note: When upgrading software, memory upgrades can be required on the Signaling Server, the Call Server, or both.

System migration
When particular Meridian 1 systems are upgraded to run Avaya CS 1000 software and configured to include a Signaling Server, they become CS 1000 systems. Table 1: Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000 systems on page 22 lists each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade path to a CS 1000 system.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

21

Introduction

Table 1: Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000 systems

This Meridian 1 system... Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet Meridian 1 PBX 61C Meridian 1 PBX 81C Maps to this CS 1000M system CS 1000E CS 1000E CS 1000M Single Group CS 1000M Multi Group

For more information, see the following documentss: Avaya CS 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrades Overview, NN43021-458 Avaya Communication Server 1000E Upgrades, NN43041-458 Avaya Communication Server 1000E Upgrade - Hardware Upgrade Procedures, NN43041-464

Intended audience
This document is intended for individuals responsible for the maintenance of CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems.

Conventions
Terminology
In this document, the following systems are referred to generically as "system": Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E) Communication Server 1000M (CS 1000M) Meridian 1 The following systems are referred to generically as "Large System": Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG) Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG) Meridian 1 PBX 61C Meridian 1 PBX 81C

22

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Conventions

In this document, the following circuit cards are referred to generically as Gateway Controller: Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card Common Processor Media Gateway (CP MG) card Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC) card In this document, the commands for MGC apply to all Gateway Controller platforms unless otherwise specified.

Notational conventions
Both upper and lower case are used in this book to distinguish between Prompts, Commands, and Variables. Lowercase variables are used in this book to represent many possible responses. The following table lists a few key variables that appear throughout this document:
Variable aa aaa bbb c c (u) cu c00u dn hh mm loop l s c (u) lscu mmm nnn xxx xxx x...x yy mm dd Text string Alphabetic or alphanumeric characters Customer Number Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T Terminal Number (TN) Card, Unit; where unit is optional Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T Terminal Number (TN) Card and Unit Terminal Number (TN) for Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T. A TN consists of a card, two filler digits, and a unit. Directory Number (DN) Hours (0 - 23) and Minutes (00 - 59) Network Loop Number Large System and CS 1000E Terminal Number (TN), Loop, Shelf, Card, Unit; where unit is optional Large System and CS 1000E Terminal Number (TN) (loop, shelf, card, and unit number) Month (JAN - DEC) when used in a date. Numeric characters Numeric value of set number of digits Numeric value of several digits Year (00 - 99), Month (1 - 12) and Day (1 - 31) Meaning

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

23

Introduction

<CR> denotes that the carriage return key is to be depressed without inputting any data. The carriage return leaves the existing value unchanged, or enters the default value if there is no existing value. <space> denotes that the space bar is to be depressed instead of <CR>. <value> denotes a variable value, generally for a prompt response. For example, <NIPN> is the value responded to the NIPN prompt and <min> is a minimum value. Default values are shown in parentheses. A range of numbers is denoted by giving the lower and upper limits of the range. For example, given the range 0 - (2) - 3, the user may manually enter 0, 1, 2, or 3, or carriage return (press <CR>) to enter the default of 2. Default values are shown in brackets in the response column where applicable. Pressing <CR> enters the default. Where applicable, precede an entry with an X to delete that entry or set your entry to default value.

Related information
This section lists information sources that relate to this document.

Documentation
The following technical publications are referenced in this document: Avaya Features and Services, NN43001-106 contains information on features and the testing of features and services for telephone sets and attendant (ATT) consoles. Avaya Software Input/Output Reference - Administration, NN43001-611 contains information on Administration overlay programs. Avaya Software Input/Output Reference - System Messages, NN43001-712 contains information on system error messages.

Online
To access Avaya documentation online, click the Documentation link under Support on the Avaya home page: www.avaya.com

24

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 4: Communicating with the system

To communicate with the system, the following input/output devices at either on-site (local) or remote locations are required: TTY or VDT terminal as an input/output device RS-232-C compatible printer as an output only device Maintenance telephone set as an input only device Element Manager for Avaya CS 1000E, Avaya Communication Server 1000S and AvayaCS 1000M Optivity Telephony Manager (OTM) The input/output system can operate with terminals having the following characteristics: Interface: RS-232-C Code: ASCII Speed: 110, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600 baud Loop Current: 20 mA

Changing the IP scheme on the ELAN

When changing the IP scheme of all the components of the CS 1000, maintain the order below: 1. Call server - LD 117 2. Gateway Controllers - use mgcsetup command to change the ELAN. Use Element Manager to change the TLAN. Refer to Avaya Media Gateway 1000E PRI Gateway Installation and Commissioning, NN43041-311. 3. COTS server - use Install menu in CD 4. MC32 and MC32s - refer to Avaya Signaling Server IP Line Applications Fundamentals, NN43001-125.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

25

Communicating with the system

Accessing the system

Logging in and out
When you access the system through a system terminal, a login procedure is required (refer to Logging in and out on page 28). All system passwords are initially set as 0000, but you can change passwords through the Configuration Record (LD 17). See also "Limited Access to Overlays" in the Avaya Features and Services, NN43001-106. Level 1 password. This general password is used in the log in sequence to provide general access to the system by service personnel. Once the system is accessed, the service personnel may then perform any necessary administration or maintenance tasks. Level 2 password. This administrative password is known and used only by the data administration manager. The password is used to protect the system configuration record and is required when using LD 17 to change either the general or the administrative passwords.

Local and remote access

Input/output terminals may operate either locally or remotely. However, data modems are required for terminals located more than 50 feet (15 meters) from the central control interface. Both local and remote terminals interface with the system through Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards. Many devices can be installed at local and remote locations. When a system terminal is installed locally, it is connected directly to a SDI Card. When a system terminal is installed at a remote location, modems (or data sets) and a telephone line are required between the terminal and the SDI card. Figure 1: Local and remote access to a system terminal on page 27 shows typical system terminal configurations. Multiple devices can simultaneously communicate with the system if Multi User Login is enabled. Refer to Avaya System Management Reference, NN43001-600 for details regarding the Multi User Login Feature.

26

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Accessing the system

Figure 1: Local and remote access to a system terminal

HOST mode access

A system terminal is connected through an SDI port. SDI ports are defined in LD 17 and may be configured for different types of outputs. For example, one terminal may be defined for traffic reports, another for maintenance messages. Two ports may be defined for the same output. It is possible to log in as a HOST. When in the HOST mode, the outputs defined for the port are only output to that port. This is useful for applications, which require high speed ports. Once the HOST port has logged out, the outputs to the other ports are restored. To configure a system terminal, see the "System and limited access passwords" in the configuration record (LD 17). See also OVL403 and OVL404 messages, which are output to the ports affected by a HOST log in.

Line mode interface log in procedure

Line Mode interface gives the ability to edit entries made on the command line. With Line Mode enabled (LON), the backspace can be used to edit input. The entered information (responses, for example) is not processed until the <CR> is entered. When the Line Mode is disabled (LOF), the system terminal interface does not allow correction on the command line. Note: Line Mode interface requires the setting: seven data bits, space parity and one stop bit. The Serial Data Interface (SDI) application on the Multi-Purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card offers the Line Mode Editing (LME) function. With the LME function enabled (FUNC=LME), the

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

27

Communicating with the system

backspace can be used to edit input. The LME function is only supported on VT200 type terminals running EM200 emulation mode.

Logging in and out

1. Press <CR> a. If the response is: OVL111 nn TTY or OVL111 nn SL-1 That means: Someone else is logged into the system. When they have logged off, press <CR> and go to Step 2. b. If the response is: OVL111 nn IDLE or OVL111 nn BACKGROUND That means: You are ready to log into the system. Go to Step 2. c. If the response is: OVL000 > That means: This is the program identifier which indicates that you are have already logged into the system. Go to Step 4. 2. Enter: LOGI, then press <CR> The normal response is: PASS ? If there is any other response, refer to the message text in the System Error Messages document. 3. Enter: Level 1 or Level 2 password and press <CR>. If the password is correct, the system responds with the prompt: > 4. Load a program by entering: LD XXX(where XXX represents the overlay program number). 5. Perform tasks 6. End the program by entering: END or **** 7. Always end the log in session with: LOGO The background routines are then loaded automatically.

Access through the maintenance telephone

A telephone functions as a maintenance telephone when you define the class-of-service as MTA (maintenance telephone allowed) in the Multi-line Telephone Administration program (LD 11). A maintenance telephone allows you to send commands to the system, but you can only use a subset of the commands that can be entered from a system terminal. You can test tones and outpulsing through the maintenance telephone. Specific commands for those tests are given in the Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver Diagnostic (LD 34). To access the system using the maintenance telephone, see Procedure 2. T o enter commands, press the keys that correspond to the letters and numbers of the command (for example, to

28

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Accessing the system

enter LD 42 return, key in 53#42##). Table 2: Translation from keyboard to dial pad on page 29 shows the translation from a keyboard to a dial pad. The following overlays (LDs) ARE accessible from a maintenance telephone: 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38, 42, 43, 45, 46, 60, 61, and 62 The following overlays (LDs) ARE NOT accessible from a maintenance telephone: 31, 40, 48, 77, 80, 92, 96, 135, 137 Note: To use the maintenance telephone, the loop for that telephone must be operating. Table 2: Translation from keyboard to dial pad
Keyboard 1 A D G J M P,Q T W B E H K N R U X C F I L O S V Y,Z 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Space or # Return * Note: There is no equivalent for Q or Z on a dial pad. Dial pad 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 # ## *

Accessing through the maintenance telephone

1. Press the prime DN key. 2. Place the set in maintenance mode by entering: xxxx91 Where: "xxxx" is the customer Special Prefix (SPRE) number. It is defined in the Customer Data Block and can be printed using LD 21. The SPRE number is typically "1" (which means you would enter 191). 3. Check for busy tone by entering "return": ##

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

29

Communicating with the system

a. If there is no busy tone, go to Step 4. b. If there is a busy tone, a program is active. To end an active program and access the system enter: **** 4. Load a program by entering: 53#xx## "xx" represents the number of the overlay program 5. Perform tasks. 6. To exit the program and return the telephone to call processing mode, enter: **** Background routines are then loaded automatically.

Accessing Meridian Mail

Small Systems allow access to Meridian Mail Administration & Maintenance through a shared terminal. To access the Meridian Mail system, log in and enter: AX. To exit from Meridian Mail, press the Control key and the closed square bracket ( ] ) simultaneously.

System memory and disk space

The following memory information is output when an administration program is loaded. This information is used to plan the addition of new features, such as speed call lists, which require memory and disk space. MEM AVAIL: (U/P): pppppp USED: qqqqqq TOT: rrrrr or (depending on the total amount of memory) MEM AVAIL: (U-ppppp1 P-ppppp2): USED: qqqqqq TOT: rrrrr DISK RECS AVAIL: xxxxx, for Small Systems DISK SPACE NEEDED: nnnnn KBYTES, for Large Systems

Legend:
Element ppppp1 ppppp2 ppppp qqqqq Definition Amount of unprotected memory available for use (in words) Amount of protected memory available for use (in words) Total memory available for use (ppppp1 + ppppp2) (in words) Total amount of memory used (in words)

30

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

System Look up messages

Element rrrrrr xxxxx nnnnn

Definition Total amount of memory (in words) Records available for storage of additional data (Small Systems) Records available for storage of additional data (Large Systems)

Low memory and disk warnings

If the amount of memory or disk space is low, the following messages are output on the systems. WARNING: LOW MEMORY WARNING: LOW DISK WARNING: LOW MEMORY/DISK Note: The LOW DISK messages will not be displayed after sysload until a data dump is performed. Warning: When the LOW MEMORY, LOW DISK, or LOW MEMORY/DISK messages appear, avoid performing further administration changes which require more memory and disk space. These changes may be lost during the next data dump. When low memory or disk problems occur, a review of system memory is recommended. Memory may be reclaimed by removing unused features. For example, the system may have speed call lists which are no longer used and can be removed. Depending on the data storage type required (e.g., protected/ unprotected), it may be necessary to perform an initialize or sysload to access the reclaimed data store space. A disk record stores approximately 500 words of protected data store. A single 3.5 inch high density floppy disk can hold a maximum of 1425 records. When the software detects that more than one floppy disk is required, the data will be compressed during the backup, thereby reducing the number of disks required.

System Look up messages

On systems equipped with System Errors and Events Lookup package 245, it is possible to display system messages on screen. System messages must first be loaded into the switch by entering ERR <CR>. Specific system messages may then be viewed on screen if the user

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

31

Communicating with the system

enters the desired system error code and <CR>. The following example shows the data entries necessary to view error message SCH946: Login to switch PASS(Enter only your password) ERR <CR>(The user must type "ERR" and press return) SCH946 <<CR>(The user must type "SCH946" and press return) The screen will now display the error message corresponding to SCH946. In this case, that message is:
Invalid User Type

For further information on system messages refer to the Avaya Software Input Output Reference - System Messages, NN43001-712.

Multi-User Login
Meridian 1 Multi-User Login (MULTI_USER) (package 242) enables up to five users to log in, load, and execute overlays simultaneously. These three users are in addition to an attendant console or maintenance terminal. The multi-user capability increases the efficiency of crafts persons by enabling them to perform tasks in parallel. To facilitate this operating environment, Multi-User Login includes significant functionality: Database conflict prevention Additional user commands TTY log files TTY directed I/O For further information refer to the Overlay Loader and Multi-User Login section in this Guide.

User commands
User commands are available at the > prompt (after login but with no overlay executing), or from within an overlay. To issue a command from within an overlay, precede the command with an exclamation point (!). For example, to issue the WHO command from within an overlay, type: !WHO For more information on User commands, refer to the Overlay Loader and Multi-User Login section in this guide.

32

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Maintenance display codes

Maintenance display codes

Maintenance displays are located on the faceplate of certain circuit cards. A maintenance display code is a one-, two-, or three-digit alphanumeric code which can indicate the status of the system and identify faulty equipment. For a detailed definition of these codes, see the section titled "HEX" in the System Error Messages document.

Time and date of fault

The system identifies the time that faults are detected. When a diagnostic message is output, a timestamp is output within 15 minutes. The format is:
TIMxxx hh:mm dd/mm/yy CPU x

xxx is the system ID The time, date, and system ID are set in LD 2.

Applications that use SFTP

The SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) is a network protocol that provides confidentiality and integrity to the data (such as files or commands) transmitted between an SFTP client and a server. SFTP also allows a client and a server to authenticate each other using passwords. The following applications used FTP prior to CS 1000 Release 6.0, but use SFTP in Release 6.0 and later: From CS to all devices - Account DB - Banner - SYSCFG.DB CS Redundancy: PSDL file update (applicable to Call Server Redundancy only) Other devices - MGC DB files transfer from CS - ITG OMM (Operation Measure Module) file transfer - Personal Directory

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

33

Communicating with the system

- PDT disk/file command transfer - ITG log file, UMS transfer - ITG commands, boot file, configuration, F/W, SNMP - MGC, MC32S bootfile, configuration, loadware, installation file transfer - IP phone F/W file transfer - EM patching handler - Manufacturing delivery patch distribution

34

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 5: Alphabetical list of packages

The following list is a comprehensive alphabetical list of packages that can be equipped on your system.
Mnemonic AA AAA AAB ABCD ACDA ACDB ACDC ACDD ACDE ACLI ACNT ACRL ADMINSET ADSP AFNA AINS ALRM_FILTER ANI ANIR AOP APL ARDL ARFW ARIE Feature Name Attendant Administration Attendant Alternative Answering Automatic Answerback 16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Telephone Automatic Call Distribution, Package A Automatic Call Distribution, Package B Automatic Call Distribution Package C Automatic Call Distribution Package D ACD/DN Expansion Analog Calling Line Identification Automatic Call Distribution, Account Code AC15 Recall Set Based Administration ACD Night Call Forward without Disconnect Supervision Attendant Forward No Answer Automatic Installation Alarm Filtering Automatic Number Identification ANI Route Selection Attendant Overflow Position Auxiliary Processor Link Automatic Redial Attendant Remote Call Forward Aries Digital Sets Number 54 174 47 144 45 41 42 50 388 349 155 236 256 289 134 200 243 12 13 56 109 304 253 170 Release 1 15 1 14 1 1 1 2 25.4 24 13 20 21 23 14 16 19 1 1 1 10 22 20 14

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

35

Alphabetical list of packages

Mnemonic ATAN ATM ATX AUXS AWU BACD BARS BASIC BAUT BGD BKI BNE BQUE BRI BRIL BRIT BRTE BTD CAB CALL ID CASM CASR CBC CCB CCDR CCOS CDP CDR CDRE CDRQ CDRX

Feature Name Attendant Announcement Automatic Trunk Maintenance Autodial Tandem Transfer Automatic Call Distribution Package D, Auxiliary Security Automatic Wake-Up Basic Automatic Call Distribution Basic Alternate Route Selection Basic Call Processing Basic Authorization Code Background Terminal Attendant Break-In/Trunk Offer Business Network Expansion Basic Queuing Basic Rate Interface BRI line application ISDN BRI Trunk Access Basic Routing Busy Tone Detection Tone Charge Account/Authorization Code Call ID (for AML applications) Centralized Attendant Services (Main) Centralized Attendant Services (Remote) Call-by-Call Service Collect Call Blocking Calling line Identification in Call Detail Recording Controlled Class Of Service Coordinated Dialing Plan Call Detail Recording Call Detail Recording Expansion (7 digit) ACD CDR Queue Record Call Detail Recording Enhancement

Number 384 84 258 114 102 40 57 0 25 99 127 367 28 216 235 233 14 294 24 247 26 27 117 290 118 81 59 4 151 83 259

Release 25.4 7 20 12 10 1 1 1 1 10 1 25 1 18 18 18 1 21 1 19 1 1 13 21 13 7 1 1 13 3 20

36

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Mnemonic CHG CHINA CHTL CISMFS CIST CNAME CNUMB COOP CORENET CDIR CPCI CPGS CPIO CPND CPP CPP_CNI CPRK CPRKNET CSL CTY CUST CWNT DASS2 DBA DCON DCP DDSP DHLD DI DISA DKS

Feature Name Charge Account for CDR China Attendant Monitor Package China Toll Package Commonwealth of Independent States Multifrequency Shuttle Signalling Commonwealth of Independent States - Trunk Calling Name Delivery Calling Number Delivery Console Operations Core Network Module Corporate Directory Called Party Control on Internal Calls Console Presentation Group Call Processor Input/Output (Option 81C) Calling Party Name Display Calling Party Privacy CP Pentium Backplane for Intel Machine Call Park Call Park Networkwide Command Status Link Call Detail Recording on Teletype Terminal Multiple-Customer Operation Call Waiting Notification (Meridian 911) Digital Access Signaling System 2 Data Buffering and Access M2250 Attendant Console Directed Call Pickup Digit Display Deluxe Hold Dial Intercom Direct Inward System Access Digit Key Signaling

Number 23 285 292 326 221 333 332 169 299 381 310 172 298 95 301 368 33 306 77 5 2 225 124 351 140 115 19 71 21 22 180

Release 1 21 21 23 21 23 23 14 21 25 22 15 21 10 21 25 2 22 8 1 1 19 16 24 15 12 1 4 1 1 1

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

37

Alphabetical list of packages

Mnemonic DLDN DLT2 DMWI DNDG DNDI DNIS DNWK DNXP DPNA DPNSS189I DPNSS DPNSS_ES DRNG DSET DTI2 DTD DTOT EAR ECCS ECT EDRG EES EMUS ENS EOVF ESA ESA_CLMP ESA_SUPP ETSI_SS EURO

Feature Name Departmental Listed Directory Number M2317 Digital Sets DPNSSI Message Waiting Indication Do-Not-Disturb, Group Do-Not-Disturb, Individual Dialed Number Identification System DPNSS Network Services Directory Number Expansion (7 Digit) Direct Private Network Access Enhanced DPNSS1 Gateway Digital Private Network Signaling System 1 DPNSS Enhanced Services Distinctive Ringing M2000 Digital Sets 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface Dial Tone Detector DID to Tie (Japan only) Enhanced ACD Routing Enhanced Controlled Class of Service Enhanced Call Trace Executive Distinctive Ringing End-To-End Signaling Enhanced Music Enhanced Night Service ACD Enhanced Overflow Emergency Services Access Emergency Services Access Calling Number Mapping Emergency Services Access Supplementary Euro Supplementary service Euro ISDN

Number 76 91 325 16 9 98 231 150 250 284 123 288 74 88 129 138 176 214 173 215 185 10 119 133 178 329 331 330 323 261

Release 5 9 23 1 1 10 16 13 21 20 16 21 4/9 7 10 10 16 17 15 18 16 1 12 20 15 23 23 23 22 20

38

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Mnemonic Extended MGP Resources FAXS FCC 68 FCA FCBQ FCDR FDID FFC FFCSF FGD FIBN FMCL FNP FRTA FTC FTDS FXS GCM GPRI GRP GRPRIM GRSEC GCM H323_VTRK HA HIST HOSP HOT HSE HVS

Feature Name Extended Media Gateway PRI Resources HiMail Fax Server FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision Forced Charge Account Flexible Call Back Queuing New Format CDR Flexible DID Flexible Feature Codes Boss Secretary Filtering (FFC activation) Feature Group D Fiber Network Converged Mobile Users Flexible Numbering Plan French Type Approval Flexible Tones and Cadences Fast Tone and Digit Switch Flexible Services Package General Call Monitor International 1.5/2.0 Mb/s Gateway Group Call Geographic Redundancy Primary system Geographic Redundancy Secondary system Global Call Monitoring H323 Virtual Trunk High Availability History File Hospitality Management Enhanced Hot Line Hospitality Screen Enhancement Meridian Hospitality Voice Service

Number 418 195 223 52 61 234 362 139 198 158 365 414 160 197 125 87 152 344 167 48 404 405 344 399 410 55 166 70 208 179

Release 5.5 18 17 1 1 18 24 15 15 17 25 5.5 14 15 16 7 25 24 18 1 4.0 4.0 24 3.0 5.0 1 16 4/10 17 16

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

39

Alphabetical list of packages

Mnemonic IAP3P ICDR ICON_PACKAGE ICP IDA IDC IEC IMS INBD INTR IPEX IPMG IPRA ISDN ISDN INTL SUP ISL ISPC IVR JDMI JPN JTDS JTTC KD3 L1MF LAPW LLC LMAN LNK LNR

Feature Name Integrated Services Digital Network Application Module Link for Third Party Vendors Internal CDR M3900 Full Icon Support Intercept Computer Interface Integrated Digital Access Incoming DID Digit Conversion Inter-Exchange Carrier Integrated Message System UST and UMG are part of IMS Package. International nB+D Intercept Treatment IP Expansion IP Media Gateway International Primary Rate Access Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Supplementary Features ISDN signaling Link ISDN Semi-Permanent Connection Hold in Queue for IVR Japan Digital Multiplex Interface Japan Central Office Trunks Japan Tone and Digit Switch

Number 153 108 397 143 122 113 149 35 255 11 295 403 202 145 161 147 313 218 136 97 171

Release 13 10 3.0 10 16 12 13 2 20 1 25 4.0 15 13 14 13 22 18 14 9 14 23 20 15 16 10 1 2 8

Japan Telecommunication Technology Committee 335 Spanish KD3 DID/DOD interface X08 to X11 Gateway Limited Access to Overlays Line Load Control Automatic Call Distribution Load Management (C2) ACDD, Auxiliary Link Processor Last Number Redial 252 188 164 105 43 51 90

40

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Mnemonic LOCX LSCM LSEL M3900_PROD_ENH M3900_RGA_PROG M911 ENH MAID MASTER MAT MC32 MCBQ MCMO MCT MED_LANG MEET MFC MFE MINT MLIO MLM MLMS: Brazilian MLMS: Chinese (PRC) MLMS: Chinese (ROC) MLMS: Dainish MLMS: Dutch MLMS: Finnish MLMS: Canadian French MLMS: European French MLMS: German MLMS: Italian

Feature Name Location Code Expansion Local Steering Code Modifications Automatic Line Selection M3900 Phase III Productivity Enhancement M3900 Ring Again M911 Enhancement Display Maid Identification Euro ISDN Trunk - Network Side MAT 5.0 Meridian Companion Enhanced Capacity Network callback Queuing Meridian 1 Companion Option Malicious Call Trace M3904 Mediterranean Language group MCDN End to End Transparency Multifrequency Compelled Signaling Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel Message Intercept Multi-Language I/O Package Meridian Link Modular Server Brazilian Chinese (PRC) Chinese (ROC) Dainish Dutch Finnish Canadian French European French German Italian

Number 400 137 72 386 396 249 210 309 296 350 38 240 107 395 348 128 135 163 211 209 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273

Release 4.0 10 4 25.4 3.0 25 17 22 22 24 2 19 10 3.0 24 9 10 15 16 16 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

41

Alphabetical list of packages

Mnemonic MLMS: Japanese MLMS: Korean MLMS: Norwegian MLMS: Russian MLMS: European Spanish MLMS: Latin Am. Spanish MLMS: Swedish MLWU MOBX MPH MPO MQA MR MSB MSDL MSDL SDI MSDL STA MSMN MULTI_USER MUS MUSBRD MWC MWI M911 NACD NARS NAS NAUT NCOS Japanese Korean Norwegian Russian

Feature Name

Number 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 206 412 248 141 297 101 17 222 227 228 370 242 44 328 46 219 224 207 58 159 63 32

Release 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 16 5.5 19 20 21 10 1 18 19 19 25 19 1 23 1 19 19 15 1 20 1 1

European Spanish Latin American Spanish Swedish Multi-Language Wake Up Mobile Extensions Meridian 1 Packet Handler Multi-Party Operations Multiple Queue Assignment PPM/Message Registration Make Set Busy Multipurpose Serial Data Link MSDL Serial Data Interface MSDL Single Terminal Access Mobility Networking Multi-User Login Music Music Broadcast Message Waiting Center Message Waiting Indication Interworking with DMS Meridian 911 Network Automatic Call Distribution Network Alternate Route Selection Network Attendant Service Network Authorization Code Network Class Of Service

42

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Mnemonic NFCR NGCC NGEN NI2 NI-2 CBC NI-2 Name NMCE NMS NSC NSIG NTRF NTWK NXFR OAS ODAS OHOL OHQ OOD OPAO OPCB OPEN ALARM OPTF ORC_RVQ OVLP PAGENET PAGT PBXI PCA PEMD PHTN PLDN

Feature Name New Flexible Code Restriction Symposium Call Center Next Generation Connectivity North America National ISDN Class II Equipment NI-2 Call By Call Service Selection NI-2 Name Display Supplementary Service NGenR2/Meridian Communication Exchange Connectivity Network Message Services Network Speed Call Network Signaling Network Traffic Measurements Advanced ISDN Network Services Network Call Transfer Observe Agent Security Office Data Administration System On Hold On Loudspeaker Off-Hook Queuing Optional Outpulsing Delay Outpulsing, asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#) Operator Call Back (China #1) Open Alarms Optional Features Remote Virtual Queueing

Number 49 311 324 291 334 385 364 175 39 37 29 148 67 394 20 196 62 79 104 126 315 1 192

Release 2 22 22 21 23 25.4 24 16 2 2 1 13 3 3.0 1 20 1 5

14 22 1 18 15 22 12 5 3.0 18 20 15

Overlap Signaling (M1 to M1 and M1 to 1TR6 CO) 184 Call Page Networkwide Automatic Call Distribution, Priority Agent 1.5 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface Personal Call Assistant Pulsed E&M (Indonesia, French Colise) Phantom TN Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL 307 116 75 398 232 254 120

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

43

Alphabetical list of packages

Mnemonic PLUGIN PMSI PONW POVR PQUE PRA PRI2 PVQM PXLT QSIG QSIG GF QSIG SS RAN RANBRD RCK REMOTE_IPE RMS ROA RPA RUCM RVQ SACP SAMM SAR SBO SCC SCDR SCI SCMP SECL SIP Plug-In

Feature Name

Number 366 103 389 186 60 146 154 401 92 263 305 316 7 327 193 286 100 36 187 353 192 181 262 162 390 66 251 80 121 191 406

Release 24 10 25.4 20 1 13 14 4.0 8 20 22 22 1 23 15

Property Management System Interface Priority Network Override Priority Override/Forced Camp-On Network Priority Queuing Primary Rate Access (CO) 2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface Proactive Voice Quality Management Pretranslation Q reference signaling point Interface QSIG Generic Functional protocol QSIG Supplementary service Recorded Announcement Recorded Announcement Broadcast Ringing Change Key Remote IPE Room Status Recorded Overflow Announcement Radio Paging Russian Call Monitoring Remote Virtual Queuing Semi-Automatic Camp-On Stand-alone Meridian Mail Scheduled Access Restrictions Branch Office Tone Detector Special Common Carrier Station Activity Records Station Category Indication Station Camp-On Series Call SIP Gateway and Converged Desktop

10 2 15 24 18 15 20 20 2.0 7 20 7 20 15 4.0

44

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Mnemonic SIPL_AVAYA SIPL_3RDPARTY SLP SMS SNR SOFTSWITCH SR SSAU SS5 SS25 SSC STA STS SUPP SUPV SVCT SYS_MSG_LKUP TAD TATO TBAR TDET TENS TFM THF TLSV TMON TOF TSET TVS TWR1 UIGW Avaya SIP Lines

Feature Name

Number 415 416 106 346 64 402 53 229 73 18 34 228 380 131 93 189 245 8 312 132 65 86 182 157 413 168 111 89 110 347 283

Release 5.5 5.5 10 24 3 4.0 1 19 4 1 2 19 25 9 8 20 19 1

Third Party SIP Lines Station Loop Preemption Short Message Service Stored Number Redial Soft Switch Set Relocation Station Specific Authorization Codes 500 Set Dial Access to Features 2500 Set Features System Speed Call Single Term Access Set to Set Messaging International Supplementary Features Supervisory Attendant Console Supervisory Console Tones System Errors and Events Lookup Time and Date Trunk AntiTromboning Trunk Barring Tone Detector Multiple-Tenant Service Trunk Failure Monitor Trunk Hook Flash (Centrex) Telephony Services Traffic Monitoring Automatic Call Distribution, Timed Overflow Queuing M3000 Digital Sets Trunk Verification from Station Taiwan R1 Universal ISDN Gateways

20 7 7 15 14 5.5

10 7 9.32 24 20

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

45

Alphabetical list of packages

Mnemonic UK UUI VAWU VMBA VIR_OFF_ENH VIRTUAL_OFFICE VNS VO VOE XCT0 XCT1 XPE ZCAC United Kingdom

Feature Name

Number 190 393 212 246 387 382 183 382 387 204 205 203 407

Release 16 3.0 17 19 25.4 25 16 3.0 3.0 15 15 15 4.50

Call Center Transfer Connect VIP Auto Wake Up Voice Mailbox Administration M3900 Phase III Virtual Office Enhancement Virtual Office Virtual Network Services Virtual Office Virtual Office Enhancement M1 Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS M1 Superloop Administration (LD 97) Meridian 1 XPE Zone Call Admission Control

46

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 6: Overlay loader and Multi-User Login

Overlay loader
The Overlay loader becomes active after the login sequence and password, it will then accept input commands from the Serial Data Interface Terminals (SDI) after the ">" prompt (after login but with no overlay executing).

Overlay loader commands

The Overlay loader commands are as follows:
Command ERR ERR x..x FDLC LD xxx Description Display the last error message given. Only available on systems with System Errors and Events Lookup package 245 equipped. Specific system messages are displayed (package 245 required). Where: x..x = specific error type and number (ex. ERR SCH1001) Cancel or stop system wide flash download for M39xx units. Load overlay program into the overlay area, then the loaded program assumes control. Where: xxx = number of the desired overlay program. Disable Line Mode interface (TTY setup: 7 data bits, space parity, 1 stop bit). Exit overlay loader and Log-off the system. Enable Line Mode interface (TTY setup: 7 data bits, space parity, 1 stop bit). Aborts the current overlay program, allowing another overlay program to be loaded into the overlay area.

LOF LOGO LON ****

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

47

Overlay loader and Multi-User Login

Multi-User Login commands

Multi-User Login enables up to five users to log in, load, and execute overlay programs simultaneously. These three users are in addition to an attendant console or maintenane terminal. The Multi-User capability also introduces several user commands. With these commands, the user has the ability to: determine who is logged into the system communicate with other connected users halt and resume background and midnight routines initiate and terminate terminal monitoring change printer output assignment Note: MULTI_USER must be enabled in LD 17. With multiple overlays operating concurrently, there is the potential for a database conflict if two or more overlays attempt to modify the same data structure. Multi-User Login software prevents such conflicts. When a user requests that an overlay be loaded, the software determines if it could pose a potential conflict with an overlay that is already executing. If no conflict exists, the requested overlay is loaded. If a conflict does exist, the system issues the following message: OVL429-OVERLAY CONFLICT The user can try again later, or try to load a different overlay. For Release 6.5 and greater, the overlay conflict resolution check is relaxed to allow Multi User Overlays to operate concurrently with LD 43 if only the database backup is performed on the Overlay. For example, backup to removable storage media, CCBR or GR backup.

Multi-User commands
A user can issue any of the commands listed in the following table from Overlay loader or from any position within an overlay. Precede the command with an exclamation point (!) to issue a command from within an overlay. For example, to issue the WHO command from within an overlay, type: ! >WHO > <CR> takes user back to the same position in current overlay

48

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Multi-User Login commands

Command WHO SEND xx

Description Displays user name, port ID, and overlay loaded for each logged-in terminal, as well as the user's MON and SPRT commands (see below). Sends a message to logged-in terminal xx. When the system responds with a " SEND MSG: " prompt, enter the message text yy...yy (up to 80 characters). The text of a message is considered private and therefore is not written to any log file. Sends a message to all logged-in terminals. When the system responds with a " SEND MSG: " prompt, enter the message text yy...yy (up to 80 characters). The text of a message is considered private and therefore is not written to any log file. Prevents messages sent by other terminals from appearing at the user's terminal. Enables messages sent by other terminals to appear at the user's terminal. Forces terminal xx to log off (the requesting user must log in with LAPW or a level 2 password). Stops background and midnight routines during a login session. Resumes halted background and midnight routines. Initiates monitoring for terminal xx (the requesting user must log in with LAPW or a level 2 password). The monitored terminal receives a message at the beginning and end of the monitored period. Turns off the monitor function. Assigns printer output to port xx. Resets printer output assignment.

SEND ALL

SEND OFF SEND ON FORC xx HALT HALT OFF MON xx

MON OFF SPRT xx SPRT OFF

Note: For detailed information about Multi-user login, see Avaya System Management Reference, NN43001-600

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

49

Overlay loader and Multi-User Login

50

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 7: LD 01: Template audit

Templates are used to store data that is common to many telephones. This data includes items such as key functions and Class of Service. The Template Audit program saves protected memory by eliminating unused or duplicate telephone templates.

Consistency Checks
LD 1 also performs the following consistency checks.

User Count Scan

All telephones in the system are scanned to find the total number of users for a template. If a template is found to have no users, the entire template is removed with the warning message 'NO USERS FOUND'. If a template is found to have an incorrect user count, the correct user count is written to the template, and the warning message 'USER COUNT LOW' or 'USER COUNT HIGH' is output. If the user count is accurate, the message 'USER COUNT OK' is output.

Duplicate Template Scan

Each template is checked against every other template for possible duplication. A template is considered a duplicate of another if all of the following conditions are met: the checksums are the same the template lengths and the hunt offsets are the same all template entries are the same If a match is found, the warning message 'DUPLICATE OF xxxx' is output. A scan is then initiated to locate all users of the current template and move them to the matched template. For each of these users found, the template number in the telephone data block and the user count is updated. After all of the users of the current template are moved to the matched template, the current template is removed.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

51

LD 01: Template audit

Template Checksum Audit

A checksum is a binary sum of the template length, hunt offset, and template entries. The checksum is calculated for each template and compared with the existing template checksum. If the existing checksum is correct, the message 'CHECKSUM OK' is output. Otherwise, the checksum is corrected with the warning message 'CHECKSUM WRONG'.

Key Lamp Strip Audit

Two checks are made to correct Key Lamp Strip (KLS) corruption. First, the template length is compared to the number of KLS indicated in the protected line block. The second check verifies that the last word of the template reflects a 'NULL' key. If these checks detect any discrepancies, they are corrected with the warning message 'CORRPTED KLS'. These corrections alter the checksum of the template. This is identified and corrected by the checksum audit.

Template Pointer Audit

Telephone data blocks contain a pointer to the template block that they use. These pointers are checked to insure they are correct for the template number stored in the same block. Any errors are reported and corrected. Following is an example of the system information which is generated during a Template Pointer Audit:
STARTING TEMPLATE POINTER SCAN BAD SL1 TEMPLATE PTR CORRECTED

TEMPLATE 0006

Operating parameters
Due to the Real Time impact of this program and the large amount of data being scanned, the template audit should be run during low traffic hours. The template audit should not be aborted unless it is critically necessary. If it does become necessary to interrupt execution of the audit, be aware that the templates may be corrupted. If a system initialization occurs during the template audit, the program is automatically aborted. It should be restarted as soon as possible after this occurs.

52

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Consistency Checks

The audit printout only appears on the TTY that requested the template audit program run. Template Audit cannot be run as a background task. To confirm that extraneous templates have been removed and that all counts have been corrected to their proper value, re-run the audit program. A datadump (LD 43) should be run after a template audit is executed.

Sample operation
The audit begins when the program (LD 1) is loaded. All templates are scanned in the following sequence, beginning with template one: 1. Single line telephones 2. Multi-line telephones Following is an example of the system information which is generated during a Template Audit:
TEMPLATE AUDIT CONFIRM TEMPLATE AUDIT NOW? (Y/N) Y STARTING PBX TEMPLATE SCAN TEMPLATE AUDIT STARTING PBX TEMPLATE SCAN TEMPLATE 0001 USER COUNT LOW CHECKSUM OK TEMPLATE 0002 USER COUNT HIGH CHECKSUM OK TEMPLATE 0003 NO USERS FOUND STARTING SLl TEMPLATE SCAN TEMPLATE 0001 USER COUNT OK CHECKSUM OK TEMPLATE 0067 USER COUNT OK CHECKSUM WRONG TEMPLATE 0068 USER COUNT OK CHECKSUM OK DUPLICATE OF 0014 TEMPLATE 0082 USER COUNT OK CHECKSUM OK TEMPLATE 0120 USER COUNT OK TEMPLATE AUDIT COMPLETE

Note: The report does not print out that template inconsistencies have been corrected.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

53

LD 01: Template audit

54

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 8: LD 30: Network and Signaling Diagnostic

This program is used to maintain Network loops. It can be run in background, loaded during the daily routines or loaded manually to enter commands.

Program operation
When invoked automatically by the system, the program performs the following tests: network memory of each enabled network card continuity of the speech path to each IPE shelf (for enabled loops only) signaling channel to each line or trunk card (on enabled loops only) signaling channel through each Integrated Services digital line card to each Digital telephone or data TN clock controllers are switched (if either DTI2 or PRI2 are used when LD 30 is run in midnight mode, clock controllers will not be switched) For the Integrated Voice Messaging System (IVMS), the program does not test Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) positions when the positions belong to IVMS-DN groups. Digital telephones that pass the signaling test have their date and time updated to match the system clock. Any SL-1 telephone or card that fails the signaling test may be disabled by this program. Use LD 32 to re-enable them. If two or more IPE cards are disabled on a loop, an NWS101 message is printed without the associated NWS301 messages to indicate card failures. However, the shelves that failed are known from the NWS201 messages. Therefore, the state of the individual cards can be determined by manually retesting using the SHLF command. If NWS301 indicates a failure of the Peripheral Buffer or Controller card, the message may not be correct. Therefore the card should be retested using the SHLF command. This program does not test attendant consoles. Equipment that has been disabled, due either to overload or manual request, is not tested. On Small Systems and CS 1000S systems, a continuity test and signaling test on the IPE shelf is performed when LD 30 is invoked automatically.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

55

LD 30: Network and Signaling Diagnostic

How to use LD 30
When invoked manually on systems, the Overlay may be used to: conduct a complete test, as when the program is invoked automatically, except for switching the clocks conduct a test on a specific IPE shelf get the enable/disable status of network loops enable or disable network loops clear alarm indications and the maintenance display download peripheral software on superloops clear contents of the Controller maintenance display read contents of the Controller maintenance display When invoked manually on a Small System, the program may be used to: conduct a complete test, as when the program is invoked automatically, except for switching the clocks clear alarm indications and the maintenance display perform a signaling test on a specific card or unit perform a continuity test and signaling test on the Small SystemIPE shelf

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric Expansion extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 non-blocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

56

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Basic commands

Basic commands
Contents
Section Large System and Avaya Communication Server 1000E commands on page 57 Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T commands Superloop commands Basic Rate Interface (BRI) commands Small Systemand CS 1000S BRI commands

Large System and Avaya Communication Server 1000E commands

The following commands are applicable to all Large System and Avaya CS 1000E Systems:
CDSP CMAJ CMIN CMIN ALL DISL loop DISL sl END ENLL loop ENLL sl LDIS LENL Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Disable loop Disable specified superloop Abort current test Enable network loop Enable specified superloop List disabled loops List enabled loops

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

57

LD 30: Network and Signaling Diagnostic

LOOP loop, ALL SHLF l s STAT STAT loop

Test network memory on one or all loops Test loop l, shelf s Get status of all network loops Get status of specified loops

Superloop commands
The following commands are used with Controllers (NT8D01) and Network Cards (NT8D04 or NT8D18):
CPED l s DISL loop END ENLL loop (v) LDIS LENL LOOP loop, ALL RPED l s SHLF l s STAT STAT (loop) UNTT l s c (u) Clear contents of Controller maintenance display on loop l shelf s Disable loop Abort current test Enable superloop, download peripheral software version v List disabled loops List enabled loops Test network memory on one or all loops Read contents of the Controller maintenance display Test loop l, shelf s Get status of all network loops Get status of specified loop Do a signaling test on specified card or unit

Basic Rate Interface (BRI) commands

The following commands are used with Multi-purpose ISDN Signal Processor (MISP), S/TInterface Line (SILC), and U-Interface Line (UILC) cards:
SLFT l s c Invoke self-test on ISDN BRI line card

58

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

SLFT l s c type

Selftest ISDN BRI line card. The card must be disabled. Response is: NWS637 selftest passed or NWS632 selftest failed. Where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, and type = self-test type (Long or Short) Query the Terminal Endpoint Identifiers, and their corresponding USIDs This command queries the TEIs, and their corresponding USIDs on the specified DSL with an established D-channel data link layer with the MISP. Output looks like:
MISP 111 TEI USID -----nnn nnnn

STEI l s c u

SLFT loop type

Invoke self-test on MISP loop. Where: type = 1 (comprehensive test) or type = 2 (power on reset) Perform TEI check on Digital Subscriber Loop, where: l = (0-255) Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric u = 0-7

TEIT l s c u

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CDSP Description Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. Pack/Rel basic-1

CMAJ

Clear major alarm, reset power fail transfer and clear power basic-1 fault alarm. Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers alrm_filter-22 basic-1

CMIN CMIN ALL CPED l s

Clear contents of Controller maintenance display on loop l xpe-15 shelf s, where: l = 0-252 and must be a superloop (multiple of 4), Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric This also clears the buffer printed with the command RPED. fnf-25

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

59

LD 30: Network and Signaling Diagnostic

Command DISL loop

Description

Pack/Rel

basic-1 Disable loop. All calls in progress on this loop are disconnected. Peripheral cards remain software enabled and no LEDs are lit. Disable specified superloop. basic-21 Active calls on the superloop specified will be disconnected and line transfer will occur at the remote end. Abort current test. If no test is in progress, message NWS002 is output. basic-1

DISL sl

END

ENLL loop

basic-1 Enable network loop. This enables the network, performs a network memory test and tests continuity and signaling to all shelves on the loop. If it passes the test, OK is output. This does not re-enable any disabled cards on the loop. Use LD 32 ENLS or ENXP commands or enable each card individually. When enabling a network loop serving ISDLC cards, the ISDLC cards must be individually disabled, then reenabled to ensure that service is restored to digital telephones. Service may also be restored to digital telephones by disconnecting and then reconnecting the telephone's line cord. Enable superloop, download peripheral software version v. If version v is not specified, the software downloaded is current (c) or latest (l) version as defined in LD 97. Enable specified superloop. OK is output if superloop has been enabled. Establishing service of individual voice-and-data-capable carriers is dependant on the F/W state of that carrier. List disabled loops, where: loop = 0-255, Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric Response is: xpe-15

ENLL loop (v)

ENLL sl

basic-21

LDIS

basic-1 fnf-25

l1, l2, ln: loop is a disabled loop, or NONE: If no cards are enabled.
LENL List enabled loops, where: basic-1

60

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description loop = 0-255, Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric Response is: l1, l2, ln: l is an enabled loop, or NONE: if no cards are enabled

Pack/Rel fnf-25

LOOP loop, ALL Performs a network memory test, continuity test and signaling test on all XOPS cards on specified loop. If ALL is specified, every loop currently enabled is tested. If no errors are detected, OK is output, where: loop = 0-159 loop = 0-255, Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric Out-of-Service units are not tested when this command is used. RPED l s Read contents of the Controller maintenance display, where: l = 0-252 and must be a superloop (multiple of 4), Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric This command lists the current and last 15 clock tracking states of the NT8D01 Controller. The tracking is indicated on the Controller maintenance display. The possible tracking modes are: C0 = Controller is tracking to the network connected to port 0 C1 = Controller is tracking to the network connected to port 1 C2 = Controller is tracking to the network connected to port 2 C3 = Controller is tracking to the network connected to port 3 CF = Controller is not tracking any network. See HEX messages for the interpretation of Controller maintenance display codes. SHLF l s basic- 20 Test loop l, shelf s. Performs a network memory test, continuity test and signaling test only on loop l shelf s. All line cards, idle trunk xpe-15 fnf-25 fnf-25 basic- 20

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

61

LD 30: Network and Signaling Diagnostic

Command

Description cards, XOPS cards and idle SL-1 telephones are tested. If no errors are detected, OK is output. Out-of-service units are not tested when this command is used.

Pack/Rel

Performs a network memory test, continuity test and signalling test on loop 0-255 and shelf only for Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 SLFT card Invoke self-test for ISDN BRI line card. The card must be disabled, where response is: NWS632 self-test failed NWS637 self-test passed (Small System) SLFT l s c Invoke self-test for ISDN BRI line card. The card must be disabled. bri-18 bri-18

SLFT l s c type Self-test ISDN BRI line card. The card must be disabled, where:

rsc/bri-19

l = loop, 0-255, Multi Group systems with Fibre Network fnf-25 Fabric s = shelf c = card type = self-test type (Long or Short) Response is: NWS637 selftest passed, or NWS632 selftest failed, where: SLFT card type Invoke self-test for MISP card on Small System. The comprehensive test is run automatically when the MISP is enabled. The card must be disabled, where: cardtype = 1 (comprehensive) cardtype = 2 (power-on-reset) Response is: NWS632 self-test failed NWS637 self-test passed SLFT loop type Invoke self-test for MISP card, where: bri-18 fnf-25 bri-18

62

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description l = 0-255, Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric type is: - 1 (comprehensive) - 2 (power-on-reset) The comprehensive test is run automatically when the MISP is enabled. The card must be disabled, where response is: NWS632 self-test failed NWS637 self-test passed

Pack/Rel

STAT

Gives status of network loops (circuits), indicating how many are enabled and how many are disabled. Response is: x ENBL, y DSBL Get status of a network loop, where:

basic-1

STAT loop

basic-1

l = 0-255, Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 Response is one of the following: UNEQ = loop is unequipped DSBL: RESPONDING = loop is disabled and the Network card is responding. The loop may have been disabled because of: - DISL command - associated Peripheral Signaling (PS) card is disabled - overload condition on associated loop. In this case an OVD message is output. An attempt to enable the loop may result in a recurrence of the overload. DSBL: NOT RESPONDING = loop is disabled and the Network card is not responding. The card is missing, disabled by the faceplate switch or is faulty. x BUSY, y DSBL = loop is enabled with x channels busy, y channels disabled. CTYF l1, l2... = loop specified in the STAT command cannot receive speech from one or more loops (l1, l2). This usually indicates the LD 30 continuity test failed. Probable fault is the network card. STEI l s c d Query the Terminal Endpoint Identifiers, and their corresponding USIDs, where: brsc-19

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

63

LD 30: Network and Signaling Diagnostic

Command

Description

Pack/Rel

l = 0-255, Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 This command queries the TEIs, and their corresponding USIDs on the specified DSL with an established D-channel data link layer with the MISP. Output looks like:
MISP 111 TEI USID -----nnn nnnn

TEIT c u

Perform TEI check on Digital Subscriber Loop on Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, where: u = 0-7 This test is carried out on a single specified DSL interface. It checks the existence of the defined TEIs and any possible duplication of TEIs. Duplicate TEIs are removed by the layer 2 task on the MISP.

bri-18

TEIT l s c u

Perform TEI check on Digital Subscriber Loop, where:

bri-18

l = 0-255, Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 u = 0-7 This test is carried out on a single specified DSL interface. It checks the existence of the defined TEIs and any possible duplication of TEIs. Duplicate TEIs are removed by the layer 2 task on the MISP. TEST Perform a continuity test and signaling test on Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T IPE shelf. Do a signaling test on specified card or unit on Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, or MG 1000T. Do a signaling test on specified XOPS card or unit. This command applies only to superloops, where: basic-1

UNTT c (u)

xpe- 20

UNTT l s c (u)

xpe- 20

l = 0-255, Multi Group systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 u = 0-31, but only 0-7 are allowed on the XOPS card Out-of-service units are not tested when this command is used.

64

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 9: LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console Diagnostic

This program tests the keys and lamps of telephone sets and attendant consoles. The tests consist of pressing keys on a telephone and checking for the correct response. After loading the program, any telephone in the system may invoke the test by dialing SPRE 92, (SPRE is the Special Service Prefix Code for the customer). No further inputs from the TTY are needed. If commands are input, the system responds with TRM001 indicating an invalid command. To start the test: 1. Load program 31. 2. Dial SPRE 92 from the telephone to be tested. 3. Perform the steps given in the appropriate Table. The expected responses for LCD lamps, displays and tones are given. Each key need only be operated momentarily. The volume keys (VOL UP and VOL DOWN) have eight levels. The level is adjusted by operating a key once for a change in one level. These keys control the audible level for ring volume, buzz volume and speech/tone volume. Note: When enabling a network loop with ISDLC cards, the ISDLC cards must be individually disabled and then re-enabled to restore service to digital telephones. Service may also be restored to digital telephones by disconnecting then reconnecting the telephone's line cord.

M2006 and M2008 Telephone test

The M2006 and M2008 faceplate is shown in Figure 2: Meridian M2006 and M2008 set on page 66. The M2006 test is provided in Table 3: Meridian M2006 Telephone test on page 66. The M2008 test is provided in Table 4: Meridian M2008 Telephone test on page 67.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

65

LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console Diagnostic

Figure 2: Meridian M2006 and M2008 set

Table 3: Meridian M2006 Telephone test

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Key operated Feature keys: Key 0 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 5 lit, (if key 5 is not a Program key for data option) turn on Message Waiting LED turn off Message Waiting LED LCD location and response Display and Tones

Keypad keys: 7 8 9 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit

66

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

M2006 and M2008 Telephone test

Step 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Key operated Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key 0 Key * Key # Fixed keys:

LCD location and response LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 0 and 4 lit LCD 1 and 4 lit LCD 2 and 4 lit LCD 3 and 4 lit LCD 1 and 4 lit all LCDs lit all LCDs off

Display and Tones

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

HLD Release Off-hook On-hook Off-hook On-hook HLD HLD

LCD 0 to 4 lit all LCDs off all LCDs flash all LCDs fast flash all LCDs lit all LCDs off LCD 0 to 4 lit end of test

dial tone

dial tone from handset only dial tone form speaker

buzzer

Table 4: Meridian M2008 Telephone test

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Key operated Feature keys: Key 0 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Keypad keys: LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 5 lit LCD 6 lit LCD 7 lit display upper case letters display lower case letters display clear display darkens top line of display darkens turn Message Waiting LED on turn Message Waiting LED off LCD location and response Display and Tones

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

67

LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console Diagnostic

Step 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Key operated Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key 0 Key * Key # Fixed keys:

LCD location and response LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 5 lit LCD 6 lit LCD 0 and 6 lit LCD 1 and 6 lit LCD 2 and 6 lit all LCDs lit all LCDs off

Display and Tones 1 on display 2 on display 3 on display 4 on display 5 on display 6 on display 7 on display 8 on display 9 on display 0 on display bottom line of display darkens display clear

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

HLD Release Off-hook On-hook Off-hook On-hook HLD HLD

LCD 0 to 4 lit all LCDs off all LCDs flash all LCDs fast flash all LCDs lit all LCDs off LCD 0 to 4 lit end of test display clear dial tone from handset only dial tone form speaker display darkens display clear buzzer

M2216, M2016S, and M2616 Telephone test

The set faceplate is shown in Figure 3: M2216, M2016S and M2616 set on page 69. The M2216 test is provided in Table 5: M2216 Telephone test on page 69. The M2016S and M2616 set test is provided in Table 6: M2016S and M2616 Telephone test on page 70.

68

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

M2216, M2016S, and M2616 Telephone test

Figure 3: M2216, M2016S and M2616 set

Table 5: M2216 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

Note: Do not test key 7 Feature keys: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Key 0 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key n>7 Keypad keys: 9 Key 1 LCD 0 lit 1 on display LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 5 lit LCD 6 lit LCD n lit display upper case letters display lower case letters display clear display darkens top line of display darkens turn Message Waiting LED on turn Message Waiting LED off

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

69

LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console Diagnostic

Step 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Key operated Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key 0 Key * Key # Fixed keys:

LCD location and response LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 5 lit LCD 6 lit LCD 0 and 6 lit LCD 1 and 6 lit LCD 2 and 6 lit all LCDs lit all LCDs off

Display and Tones 2 on display 3 on display 4 on display 5 on display 6 on display 7 on display 78 on display 9 on display 0 on display bottom line of display darkens display clear

21 22 23

HLD HLD HLD

LCD 0 to 4 lit LCD 0 to 4 lit end of test

dial tone buzzer

Table 6: M2016S and M2616 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

Note: Do not test key 7 Feature keys: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Key 0 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key n>7 Keypad keys: LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 5 lit LCD 6 lit LCD n lit display upper case letters display lower case letters display clear display darkens top line of display darkens turn Message Waiting LED on turn Message Waiting LED off

70

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

M2317 Telephone test

Step 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Key operated Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key 0 Key * Key # Fixed keys:

LCD location and response LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 5 lit LCD 6 lit LCD 0 and 6 lit LCD 1 and 6 lit LCD 2 and 6 lit all LCDs lit all LCDs off

Display and Tones 1 on display 2 on display 3 on display 4 on display 5 on display 6 on display 7 on display 8 on display 9 on display 0 on display top line of display darkens display clear

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

Handsfree Release HLD Off-hook On-hook Off-hook On-hook HLD HLD

LCD 15 lit all LCDs off LCD 0 to 4 lit all LCDs flash all LCDs fast flash all LCDs lit all LCDs off LCD 0 to 4 lit end of test dial tone from speaker dial tone from handset dial tone from speaker display darkens display clear buzzer

M2317 Telephone test

The key and LCD layout is shown in Figure 4: M2317 Series Telephone Key and LCD Layout on page 72. The test is provided in Table 7: M2317 Telephone test on page 72.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

71

LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console Diagnostic

Figure 4: M2317 Series Telephone Key and LCD Layout

Table 7: M2317 Telephone test

Step 1 2 3 4 Key operated Press * Off-hook On-hook Off-hook LCD location & response All LCD are lit All LCDs flash (except Key 11) All LCDs fast flash (except Key 11) All LCDs lit 192 192 All 80 character elements (40 characters x 2 lines) are fully lit. Each character element is made up of 35 dots in a 5 x 7 dot array. All 80 character elements are off Display and Tones Blank

On-hook

All LCDs off

Dial Pad Keys: 6 7 8 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit 1 12 123

72

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

M2317 Telephone test

Step 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

Key operated Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key 0 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key 0 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key 0

LCD location & response LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 5 lit LCD 6 lit LCD 7 lit LCDs 0 & 7 lit LCDs 1 & 7 lit LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 5 lit LCD 6 lit LCD 7 lit LCDs 0 & 7 lit LCDs 1 & 7 lit LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 5 lit LCD 6 lit LCD 7 lit LCDs 0 & 7 lit LCDs 1 & 7 lit 1234

Display and Tones 12345 123456 1234567 12345678 123456789 1234567890 12345678901 123456789012 1234567890123 12345678901234 123456789012345 1234567890123456 12345678901234567 123456789012345678 1234567890123456789 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 1 12345678901234567890 12 12345678901234567890 123 12345678901234567890 1234 12345678901234567890 12345 12345678901234567890 123456 12345678901234567890 1234567 12345678901234567890 12345678 12345678901234567890 123456789 12345678901234567890 1234567890

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

73

LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console Diagnostic

Step 36 37 38 39

Key operated Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4

LCD location & response LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit LCD 3 lit

Display and Tones 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 1 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 12 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 123 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 1234 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 12345 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 123456 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 1234567 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 12345678 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 123456789 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 1234567890 88888888888888888888 88888888888888888888 Display clears

40

Key 5

LCD 4 lit

41

Key 6

LCD 5 lit

42

Key 7

LCD 6 lit

43

Key 8

LCD 7 lit

44

Key 9

LCDs 0 & 7 lit

45

Key 0

LCDs 1 & 7 lit

46 47

Key * Key #

All LCD lit (except Key 11) All LCD go off

Programmable Keys: 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Key 0 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 LCD 0 lit LCD 1 lit LCD 2 lit LCD 3 lit LCD 4 lit LCD 5 lit LCD 6 lit Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank

74

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

M2250 Console test

Step 55 56 57 58

Key operated Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key 10 Soft Keys:

LCD location & response LCD 7 lit LCD 8 lit LCD 9 lit LCD 10 lit

Display and Tones Blank Blank Blank Blank

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67

Key 0 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4

LCD 0 flashes 60 ipm LCD 1 flashes 60 ipm LCD 2 flashes 60 ipm LCD 3 flashes 60 ipm LCD 4 flashes 60 ipm

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST UVWXYZABCDEFGH Display clears abcdefghijklmnopqrst uvwxyzabcdefghijklmn Display clears Display clears Dial tone heard through speaker

Press HOLD key LCD 0 to 4 light steadily (Key 11 lit) Handset offhook Handset onhook Press HANDSFREE key Press RELEASE key

All LCD flash at 60 ipm (Key 11 Dial tone heard through off) handset All LCD fast flash at 120 ipm (Key 11 on) LCD 0 to 2 light steadily Dial tone heard through speaker

68 69 70

All LCD go off Buzz heard through speaker

Press HOLD key LCD 0 to 4 light steadily Press HOLD key End of test

M2250 Console test

The M2250 faceplate is shown in Figure 5: M2250 Console - Key and LCD Layout on page 76. The tests are provided in the Table 8: M2250 Console test on page 77.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

75

LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console Diagnostic

Figure 5: M2250 Console - Key and LCD Layout

76

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

M2250 Console test

M2250 Console test

Table 8: M2250 Console test
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Key operated Select idle loop key Enter SPRE code 92 Press dial pad # Press dial key 1 Press dial key 2 Press dial key 3 Press dial key 4 Press dial key 5 Press dial key 6 Press dial key 7 Press dial key 8 Press dial key 9 Press dial key 0 Repeat step 4 untilb oth lines of the display are full Press dial pad * Press dial pad # Press AK key 0 Press AK key 1 Press AK key 2 Press AK key 3 Press AK key 4 All LCDs lit except F1 All LCD blank AR0 lit AR1 lit AR2 lit AR3 lit AR4 lit All LCDs lit except F1 All off D1 lit E1 lit D2 lit E2 lit D3 lit E3 lit D4 lit E4 lit D5 lit E5 lit 888888888888888888. . . 888888888888888888. . . Active 1 12 123 1234 12345 123456 1234567 12345678 123456789 1234567890 12345678901234567. . . 12345678901234567. . . 888888888888888888. . . 888888888888888888. . . ACTIVE ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP. . . NOPQRSTUVWXYZAB. . . abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwn opqrstuvwxyzabcdefg Display shows series of dark squares ACTIVE ACTIVE LCD location and response Display and Tones

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

77

LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console Diagnostic

Step 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

Key operated Press AK key 5 Press AK key 6 Press AK key 7 Press AK key 8 Press AK key 9 Press BK key 0 Press BK key 1 Press BK key 2 Press BK key 3 Press BK key 4 Press BK key 5 Press BK key 6 Press BK key 7 Press BK key 8 Press BK key 9 Press CK key 0 Press CK key 1 Press CK key 2 Press CK key 3 Press CK key 4 Press CK key 5 Press CK key 6 Press Icon key 1 Press Icon key 2 Press CK key 0 Press GK key 0 Press GK key 1 Press GK key 2 Press GK key 3 Press GK key 4 Press GK key 5

LCD location and response AR5 lit AR6 lit AR7 lit AR8 lit AR9 lit BR0 lit BR1 lit BR2 lit BR3 lit BR4 lit BR5 lit BR6 lit BR7 lit BR8 lit BR9 lit C0 lit C1 lit C2 lit C3 lit C4 lit C5 lit C6 lit

Display and Tones ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE IDLE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE C/H and ACTIVE BUSY

C0 lit GRO lit GR1 lit GR2 lit GR3 lit GR4 lit GR5 lit

IDLE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE

78

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

M2250 Console test

Step 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82

Key operated Press GK key 6 Press GK key 7 Press GK key 8 Press GK key 9 Press FK key 1 Press AK key 0 Press AK key 1 Press AK key 2 Press AK key 3 Press AK key 4 Press AK key 5 Press AK key 6 Press AK key 7 Press AK key 8 Press AK key 9 Press GK key 0 Press GK key 1 Press GK key 2 Press GK key 3 Press GK key 4 Press GK key 5 Press GK key 6 Press GK key 7 Press GK key 8 Press GK key 9 Press Hold key Press Hold key Press Hold key Press CK key 1 Dial SPRE 92

LCD location and response GR6 lit GR7 lit GR8 lit GR9 lit G9 and F1 lit AL0 and F1 lit AL1 and F1 lit AL2 and F1 lit AL3 and F1 lit AL4 and F1 lit AL5 and F1 lit AL6 and F1 lit AL7 and F1 lit AL8 and F1 lit AL9 and F1 lit GL0 and F1 lit GL1 and F1 lit GL2 and F1 lit GL3 and F1 lit GL4 and F1 lit GL5 and F1 lit GL6 and F1 lit GL7 and F1 lit GL8 and F1 lit GL9 and F1 lit F1 and B0-4 lit F1 and B0-4 lit F1 and C0 lit F1 and C1 lit All LCDs lit

Display and Tones ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] ACTIVE [S] Busy tone in handset [S] Buzz in speaker [S] NIGHT or BUSY [S] NIGHT or BUSY 888888888888888888. . . 888888888888888888. . .

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

79

LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console Diagnostic

Step 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

Key operated Press dialpad # Press FK key 1 Press FK key 2 Press FK key 2 Press FK key 2 Press FK key 2 Press Icon key 8 Press Icon key 7 Press FK key 5 Press Icon key 7 Press FK key 5 Press FK key 6 Press FK key 6 Handset out Handset in Handset out

LCD location and response F1 lit

Display and Tones [S] ACTIVE ACTIVE

All LCDs lit except F1 LCDs Flash at 120 ipm LCDs Flash at 60 ipm LCDs Flash at 30 ipm All LCDs off B0-4 lit All LCDs off B0-4 lit All LCDs off B0-4 lit All LCDs off All LCDs off B0-4 lit All LCDs off

888888888888888888. . . 888888888888888888. . . Flash ACTIVE/NIGHT 888888888888888888. . . 888888888888888888. . . Flash ACTIVE/NIGHT ACTIVE ACTIVE, dial tone ACTIVE, dial tone ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE, busy tone ACTIVE, Buzz in speaker NIGHT

Handset in other side B0-4 lit of console Press Hold key Press Hold key Press Hold key End of test B0-4 lit B0-4 lit C0 lit

80

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 10: LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

LD 32 performs checks and maintenance functions on network and Peripheral Signaling equipment. LD 32 will allow commands to be used for XTD cards. The STAT command will produce an output which has XTD, LDC or LGD appended where required. On Small Systems, Avaya Communication Server 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, this program can be used to: get the status of peripheral equipment cards and units enable and disable peripheral equipment cards and units initiate or cancel flash downloads for M39xx units query and print the firmware versions currently on M39xx units reset or clear directory password for M39xx units test message waiting lamps on 500/2500 telephone sets print set and card IDs convert packed TNs in hex to the card and unit format On Large Systems and CS 1000E Systems, this program is used to: get the status of Peripheral Signaling (PS), Controller and network cards get the status of IPE shelves cards and units disable and enable PS, Controller and network cards disable and enable IPE shelves, cards and units initiate or cancel flash downloads for M39xx units query and print the firmware versions currently on M39xx units reset or clear directory password for M39xx units test message waiting lamps on 500/2500 sets test Message Waiting Lamps (MWL) on 2500 sets during midnight routines print set and card IDs on superloops convert packed TNs in hex to the loop, shelf, card, unit format Note: Disabled DID trunks are placed in the answer state while disabled.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

81

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Note: If Recorded Telephone Dictation (RTDT) cards are to be software enabled or disabled, the Outof-Service (OS) lead should be connected to ground. On completion of the task, ground can be removed. Note: Card ID information is presented as follows:
CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS

Where: CCCCCCCC = is the order code RR = is the release number SSSS = is the serial number Note: After making any changes to the route data block, IPE TRUNK CARDS MUST BE DOWNLOADED by issuing the ENLC l s c command. Note: When getting the status of a card relating to a trunk error (STAT), the term RVSD may appear with the trunk information. RVSD indicates that the software detected a reversed wired trunk for that unit.

Overlay 32 linkage
Overlay programs 10, 11, 20 and 32 are linked, thus eliminating the need to exit one Overlay and enter another. Once one of the aforementioned Overlays has been loaded, it is possible to add, print and obtain the status of a set without having to exit one Overlay and load another. Input processing has also been enhanced. Prompts ending with a colon (:) allow the user to enter either: 1. a question mark (?) followed by a carriage return (<CR>) This entry will present you with a list of valid responses to that prompt. 2. an abbreviated response The system responds to this entry with the nearest match. If there is more than one possible match, the system responds with SCH0099, the input followed by a question mark, and a list of possible responses. The user can then enter a valid response.

82

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Using Enable/Disable commands

Using Enable/Disable commands

All units on a loop go into maintenance busy mode when disabled using the DISL command. The shelves on a loop must be individually re-enabled via the ENLS command. Any telephones that were in lockout mode show as idle, then go into lockout mode again 30 seconds after any unit on the shelf requests dial tone. On Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T the DISL and ENLL commands are not available. Instead, use the DISS, ENLC, DISC and ENLS commands as described below. When enabling a network loop serving ISDLC cards, the ISDLC cards must be individually disabled then re-enabled to ensure that service is restored to digital telephones. Service may also be restored to digital telephones by disconnecting, and then reconnecting the telephone's line cord. Note: When the Trunk Failure Monitor (TFM) package is enabled, a failed trunk is displayed as BUSY. The enable/disable command does not enable or disable the failed trunk unit (it stays in the BUSY state.) Note: When the French Type Approval package (FRTA 197) is enabled then CO trunk units are not busied when they are disabled.

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 nonblocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

83

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Basic commands

Contents
Section The following commands are applicable to all systems. Large System and Avaya Communicatuon Server 1000E System commands on page 85 Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T commands Superloop commands on page 87 ISDN BRI MISP commands on page 88 Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T BRI MISP commands ISDN BRI SILC/UILC commands on page 89 Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T BRI SILC/UILC commands ISDN BRI BRSC commands on page 90 System commands on page 91

Basic commands
The following commands are applicable to all systems.
CMIN CMIN ALL CONV tn DIS VTRM <cust> <rout> Disables all IP Peer Virtual Trunk TNs in the specified route associated with the specified customer and the associated DCIP. END Abort current test Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Convert packed TN (in hex) to loop, shelf, card and unit format

84

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Large System and Avaya Communicatuon Server 1000E System commands

ENL VTRM <cust> <rout> Enables all IP Peer Virtual Trunk TNs in the specified route associated with the specified customer and the associated DCIP. FDLC FDLS FSUM FSUM ALL Cancel or stop the sytem wide flash download for M39xx units Initiate system wide flash download according to the FDL schedule programmed in Overlay 97 Print summary report of firmware versions currently on M39xx units Print complete report of all M39xx sets based on parameters specified in LD 97.

STAT VTRM <cust> <route> <starting member> <number of members> Displays the status of the virtual trunks for a customer's route starting from a specified starting member for the number of members specified.

Large System and Avaya Communicatuon Server 1000E System commands

CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL CONV tn CONV l s c u CPWD l s c u Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Convert packed TN (in hex) to loop, shelf, card and unit format Convert loop, shelf, card and unit format to packed TN (in hex) Reset or Clear directory password for M3903, M3904 and M3905 telephone Disable specified peripheral card Disable specified card when it is idle Disable network loop Disable specified shelf Disable specified unit Disable automatic background continuity tests for superloop Disable network card containing specified loop

DISC l s c DISI l s c DISL l DISS l s DISU l s c u DSCT l DSNW l

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

85

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

DSPS x DSXP x END ENLC l s c ENLG x ENLL l ENLR l s c u

Disable Peripheral Signaling card x Disable controller x and all connected cards Abort current test Enable and reset specified peripheral card Enable group x Enable network loop Enable specified DTR/MFR card or unit. Note: This is a small systems specific command.

ENLS l s ENLU l s c u ENNW l ENPS x FDLC FDLF l s c u FDLI l s c u FDLU l s c u FDLS FSUM FSUM ALL FWVU l s c u

Enable specified shelf Enable specified unit Enable network card with specified loop Enable PS card x and associated loops Cancel or stop the sytem wide flash download for M39xx units Initiate forced download to one M39xx unit regardless of version or state Initiate download to one M39xx unit when the set becomes idle, if the set's firmware is not current. Initiate download to one M39xx unit, if the set's firmware is not current. Initiate system wide flash download according to the FDL schedule programmed in Overlay 97 Print summary report of firmware versions currently on M39xx units Print complete report of all M39xx sets based on parameters specified in LD 97. Query and print the firmware versions currently on M39xx terminal List TN of all PBX units on specified shelf, with lamps flagged as defective. List TNs of all busy units on specified shelf List TNs of all disabled units on specified shelf List TNs of all idle units on specified shelf List TNs of 500/2500 sets with defective MWLs

LBD l s LBSY l s LDIS l s LIDL l s LLBD l s

86

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Superloop commands

LMNT l s PBXH PBXT ALL PBXT l (s c u) STAT STAT l STAT l s STAT l s c STAT l s c u STAT NWK l STAT PER x TRK l s c u

List TNs of all maintenance busy units on specified shelf Message Waiting lamp maintenance Test all Message Waiting lamps Test Message Waiting lamps on loop (or shelf or card or unit) Get status of all configured loops in system Give status of one or all loops Get idle, busy or disabled status of units on specified shelf Get status of specified card Get status of specified unit Check status of network card with specified loop Get status of PS card x Seize specified trunk for outpulsing

Superloop commands
Note: The Loop level commands are not supported for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T systems.
DISL sl DSCT sl DSXP x ENCT sl ENLL sl (v) ENLL sl ENXP x (v) ENXP XPC x (v) Disable specified superloop Disable automatic background continuity tests for a superloop Disable Controller x and all associated IPE cards Enable automatic background continuity tests for a superloop Enable superloop, download peripheral software version v Enable specified Superloop Enable Controller x and associated IPE cards, download software version v Enable Controller x, do not enable the associated IPE cards, download software version v Print Card ID for superloop and associated Controller(s) Print card ID for IPE card

IDC sl IDC l s c

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

87

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

IDC sl IDCS x IDU l s c u IDU <TN>

Get card id of LCI sl and its associated RCI Print card ID for all cards on shelf controlled by Controller x Print set ID Prints the MAC address, Model Vendor, software version, Set IP address. List TNs of all busy units on specified shelf List TNs of all disabled units on specified shelf List TNs of all idle units on specified shelf Get status of superloop and separate carriers on that superloop Print data for one or all superloops Do self-test of Network card for specified superloop Do self-test on Controller x Print data for one or all Controllers

LBSY l s LDIS l s LIDL l s STAT sl SUPL (sl) XNTT sl XPCT x XPEC (x)

Note: If a trunk unit is controlled by APNSS, the STAT commands will indicate this is an APNSS trunk and will also display the status of the D-channel. The display format remains the same.

ISDN BRI MISP commands

The following commands are available for ISDN Basic Rate Interface Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) cards.
DISL l DISL (appl) l DISL (appl) l 1 DISL (appl) l REM DLIF l x ENLL l ENLL l FDL Disable MISP loop Disable specified application on MISP loop Disable and remove specified application from MISP loop Disable and remove specified application from MISP loop Download an UIPE BRI trunk interface data file to an MISP loop Enable MISP loop Enable specified MISP loop and force download (FDL) basecode

88

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ISDN BRI SILC/UILC commands

ENLL (appl) l ENLL (appl) l 1 ENLL (appl) l FDL

Enable specified application on MISP loop Enable specified application on MISP loop and force download the application loadware onto the MISP Enable specified application on MISP loop and force download the application loadware onto the MISP Print MISP card ID Upload error log for specified MISP Get idle, busy or disabled status of units on specified shelf Get status of MISP loop (and application)

IDC l PERR (appl) l STAT l s STAT (appl) l

ISDN BRI SILC/UILC commands

The following commands are available for ISDN Basic Rate Interface S/T-Interface line (SILC) or U-Interface line (UILC) cards and the associated Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL).
DIS AUTO l s c u DISC l s c DISI l s c DISU l s c d DSRB l s c d DSTS l s c d Disable automatic link recovery option of a DSL Disable S/T-Interface line (SILC) or U-Interface line (UILC) card Disable specified card when it is idle Disable specified Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL) (0-7) Disable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL Disable Remote Loop Back test mode for specified BRI Trunk DSL Enable automatic link recovery option of a DSL Enable S/T-Interface line (SILC) or U-Interface line (UILC) card Enable specified unit Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL) (0-7) Enable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL Enable Remote Loop Back test mode for the specified BRI Trunk DSL Establish D-channel link for specified DSL

ENL AUTO l s c u ENLC l s c ENLU l s c d ENRB l s c d ENTS l s c d ESTU l s c d

FDIS NCAL <l s c DSL#> <conn_ID> Force disconnect the specified call-independent connection

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

89

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

IDC l s c PCON l s c d PERR (appl) l s c PLOG l s c d PMES l s c d PTAB l s c d PTAB l s c d <tbl #> PTRF l s c d RLBT l s c d RLSU l s c d STAT l s c STAT l s c d STAT NCAL <l s c DSL#>

Print SILC/UILC card ID Print configuration and LAPD parameters for specified BRI Trunk DSL Print protocol log for specified BRI line card Print protocol log for specified BRI Trunk DSL Print Layer 3 message log for specified BRI Trunk DSL Upload and print Layer 3 Message configuration IE table for specified BRI Trunk DSL Upload and print specified Layer 3 Message configuration IE table for specified BRI Trunk DSL Print traffic data for specified BRI Trunk DSL Perform Remote Loop Back test on specified BRI Trunk DSL Release D-channel link for specified DSL Get status of specified SILC or UILC Get status of specified Digital Subscriber Loop 0-7

List all current call-independent connections on a given BRI DSL. Note: This is applicable for UIPE protocol-based DSLs only, for which the CS 1000 supports call-independent connections ("GF capability"). STAT NCAL <l s c DSL#> <conn_ID> List information pertaining to a specific call-independent connection

ISDN BRI BRSC commands

The following commands are available for the ISDN Basic Rate Signaling Concentrator (BRSC) card.
DISC BRI l s c DISC (BASE) l s c Disable the BRSC ISDN BRI application. Disable specified card.

90

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

System commands

ENLC (BASE) l s c (FDL/NST) ENLC BRI l s c (FDL) IDC l s c STAT l s c

Enable specified card. Enable the BRSC ISDN BRI application. Print BRSC card and loadware version. Get status of specified card.

System commands
The following commands are available:
DSRM <cust #> <route #> Disables all route members in a customer's route. It will disconnect all active calls associated with the trunks, disable all route members on the call server, unregister all trunks and remove them from the RLM table. On the Signaling Server side, all trunks will be removed from the Signaling Server list.

ECNT CARD l s c <customer> Prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified card. If <customer> is specified, the count is specific to that customer (note that a card must be specified to enter a customer.) Otherwise, the count is across all customers. If no parameters are entered, the count is printed for all zones. A partial TN can be entered for the card (L or L S) which then prints the count per that parameter (a customer cannot be specified in this case). ECNT NODE nodeNum Prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified node. If no parameter is entered, the count is printed for all nodes. Prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified signaling server. If no parameter is entered, the count is printed for all signaling servers. Note: If the hostName variable contains an underscore (_), then an NPR001 error message is returned, as an underscore is considered to be an invalid character. ECNT ZONE zoneNum <customer>

ECNT SS <hostName>

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

91

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified zone. If <customer> is specified, the count is specific to that customer (note that a zone must be specified to enter a customer). Otherwise, the count is across all customers. If no parameters are entered, the count is printed for all zones. If the IP Phone is in VO login state, and Current Zone (CUR_ZONE) is different from the Configured Zone (CFG_ZONE), both zones are counted for the ECNT command. ENRM <cust #> <route #> Enable all the virtual trunk route members in a customer's route. It will enable all route members, register them and put them into the RLM table. On the Signaling Server side, all trunks will be put on the Signaling Server list.

STVT <cust #> <route #> <starting member> <number of members> Displays the status of the virtual trunks for a customer's route starting from a specified starting member for the number of members specified. STAT VTRM <cust #> <route #> <start member> <end member> Display the status of the virtual trunks specified by customer, route, start member and end member numbers.

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CDSP Description Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Convert packed TN (in hex) to l s c u, or vice versa. Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T Convert packed TN (in hex) to l s c u Convert packed TN (in hex) to tn xpe-15 Pack/Rel basic-1

CMIN CMIN ALL CONV tn cu CONV tn lscu

alrm_filter-22 basic-1 xpe-15

92

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description The command format is: CONV tn - convert packed TN CONV l s c u - convert unpacked TN Where: l = 0-255, System with Fibre Network Fabric

Pack/Rel

fnf-25 basic-24

CPWD l s c u cu

Reset or Clear directory password Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T

Allows the Directory password of the specified set to be reset to default (12345678). This allows a user to access the Directory if the password has been forgotten or if the user wants to change the current password. Applies to M3903, M3904, M3905, and IP Phone 2004. itg-25 For M3900 Phase 3 terminals the Directory password is cleared. Where: l = 0-255, System with Fibre Network Fabric DIS AUTO l s c u Disable automatic link recovery option of a DSL cu Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T format Disable application on Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T). Where: appl =BRIL (Basic Rate Interface Line), BRIT (Basic Rate Interface Trunk), or BRIE (UIPE Basic Rate Interface Trunk) bri-18 fnf-25 bri-18

DISC (appl) c

DISC (appl) c REM Disable and remove application from Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T). Where: appl =BRIL (Basic Rate Interface Line), BRIT (Basic Rate Interface Trunk), or BRIE (UIPE Basic Rate Interface Trunk) DISC (BASE) lsc

bri-18

Disable specified BRSC card or to disable the ISDN Basic bri-18 Rate Interface Signaling Concentrator (BRSC) card, where: BASE = Disable only the basecode. If not specified, both the basecode and application are disabled. The application is disabled first unless BASE is entered. l = loop

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

93

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command s = shelf c = card

Description

Pack/Rel

The card faceplate LED is turned on to indicate the card is disabled, and the IPC channel is eliminated. The "." prompt is given when the process is complete. DISC BRI l s c Disable the BRSC ISDN BRI application. bri-18 All active and transient ISDN BRI calls are dropped, and all signaling and packet channels are torn down. The DSL software state remains the same, but the ISDN BRI line cards receive a disable message. Disable specified DTR/MFR card. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) This command is also used for Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP). If BRI reference clock source is configured on this SILC the user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON DSL #, PROCEED? ,

DISC c

basic-1

Where # = unit 0-7 For Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T: DISC 0 disables all configured units on card 0 DISC l s c Disable specified peripheral card. If BRI reference clock source is configured on this SILC the user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON DSL #, PROCEED? ,

basic-1

Where # = unit 0-7 Note: For MGX, cards 8,9 and 10 are treated as one card. Issuing a command for card 8 also affects cards 9 and 10. Issuing a command for card 9 also affects card 10. Issuing a command for card 10 only affects card 10. DISI c Disable specified card when it is idle. (Small Systems, CS basic-1 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) If BRI reference clock source is configured on this SILC the user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON DSL #, PROCEED? ,

Where # = unit 0-7 DISI l s c Disable specified card when it is idle. basic-1

94

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description Where: l = 0-255, System with Fibre Network Fabric If BRI reference clock source is configured on this SILC the user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON DSL #, PROCEED? ,

Pack/Rel fnf-25

Where # = unit 0-7 Note: For MGX, cards 8,9 and 10 are treated as one card. Issuing a command for card 8 also affects cards 9 and 10. Issuing a command for card 9 also affects card 10. Issuing a command for card 10 only affects card 10. DISL (appl) l Disable application on MISP loop. Where appl = BRIL (Basic Rate Interface Line), or BRIT (Basic Rate Interface Trunk) DISL (appl) l 1 Disable MISP loop. Where: appl =BRIL (Basic Rate Interface Line), BRIT (Basic Rate Interface Trunk), or BRIE (UIPE Basic Rate Interface Trunk). Applicable if SUPP package 131 is not equipped. Disable MISP application and loop. Where: appl = optional application name (BRIL) 1 = force download the application DISL (appl) l REM Disable and remove application from Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP.) Applicable if SUPP package 131 is equipped. DISL l Disable network loop. See "Using the Enable/Disable commands" in the introduction. This command is also used for superloops and MISPs. basic-1 bri-18 bri-18 bri-18

DISL (appl) l 1

bri-18

DISL sl

Disable specified superloop. Active calls on the superloop basic-21 will be disconnected and line transfer will occur at the remote end. Disables specified shelf. See "Using the Enable/Disable basic-1 commands" in the introduction.

DISS l s

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

95

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command DISS m

Description

Pack/Rel

Disables specified module. Where: m = 0 for Main or m = basic-1 1-4 for Expansion module. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) See "Using the Enable/ Disable commands" in the introduction. Disable ISDN BRI BRSC card. Disable specified Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7). (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T). If BRI reference clock source is configured on the DSL, the user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON THIS DSL, PROCEED?

DISU BRI l s c DISU c d

brit-19 bri-18

DISU c u

Disables specified unit. See "Using the Enable/Disable basic-1 commands" in the introduction. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) For Small System: 0-15 may be accepted as input for card 0. Disable specified Digital Subscriber Loop 0-7. If BRI reference clock source is configured on the DSL the user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON THIS DSL, PROCEED?

DISU l s c d

bri-18

DISU l s c u

Disable specified unit. See "Using the Enable/Disable commands" in the introduction.

basic-1

DIS VTRM <cust> <rout> Disables all IP Peer Virtual Trunk TNs in the specified route associated with the specified customer and the associated DCIP. DLIF c Download a UIPE BRI trunk interface data file to MISP card (Small System).

basic-4.00

bri-18

DLIF l x

Download an UIPE BRI trunk interface data file to a MISP bri-18 loop. The MISP specified must have the BRIT UIPE loadware application. Where x may be: (0) = UIPE SL1 1 = ETSI QSIG 2 = ISO QSIG

96

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description 28 = ETSI QSIG GF 29 = ISO QSIG GF To achieve a successful download: 1. the MISP basecode must be enabled 2. the specified MISP must have the UIPE BRI trunk loadware configured 3. the interface must be inactive (interpret this to mean that either the UIPE BRI trunk application must be disabled or no DSL of this interface type can be enabled) 4. QSIG package 263 is required to have ETSI and ISO options.

Pack/Rel

DSCT l

Disable automatic background continuity tests for a superloop.

xpe-15

Where: loop = 0-252 and must be a superloop (multiples of 4), System with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 DSIF L PDL2 l s Disables the SAPI 16 interface number for BRSC on l s c bri-19 c for the MPH on loop L. DSIF L PDL2 L1 Disables SAPI 16 interface number for BRIL on Loop L1 bri-19 for MPH on loop L. DSIF l s c DSL BCH x Disables the link interface for B-channel x for DSL l s c bch. Where: x = 12 DSIF l s c DSL DCH x Disables the link interface number for USID x for the DSL bri-19 on l s c dch. DSIF l PDNI Y Disable the link interface number Y for PDNI on Loop Y (1-3) Disable network card containing specified loop, where "loop" is the number of the even or odd loop. Not applicable to superloops. Disables Peripheral Signaling (PS) card x and loops serviced by the card. Where: bri-19 bri-19

DSNW l

basic-1

DSPS x

basic-1

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

97

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description x = 0-9, Option 51C, 61C x = 0-15, System with Fibre Network Fabric

Pack/Rel

Disabling PS card 0 interrupts service on loops 0 to 15. fnf-25 To re-enable the card, use the ENPS x command. If this fails, a system initialization may be required. Use the disable command with discretion. Disabling a PS card disables up to 16 loops. The following lists the group/PS/loop relationship: Group 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 PS Loops 0 to 15 16 to 31 32 to 47 48 to 63 64 to 79 80 to 95 96 to 111 112 to 127 128 to 143 144 to 159 160 to 175 176 to 191 192 to 207 208 to 223 224 to 239

DSRB c d

Disable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL bri-18 (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Disable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL bri-18

DSRB l s c d DSRM <cust #> <route #>

For CS 1000S

basic-2

98

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description Disables all route members in a customer's route. It will disconnect all active calls associated with the trunks, disable all route members on the call server, unregister all trunks and remove them from the RLM table. On the Signaling Server side, all trunks will be removed from the Signaling Server list. Note: Not available for CS 1000 Release 4.0 or later.

Pack/Rel

DSTS c d

Disable Remote Loop Back test mode for specified BRI Trunk DSL (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Disable Remote Loop Back test mode for specified BRI Trunk DSL Disable Controller x and all connected cards.

bri-18

DSTS l s c d

bri-18

DSXP x ECNT CARD l s c <customer>

xpe-15

For CS 1000S Prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified card. If <customer> is specified, the count is specific to that customer (note that a card must be specified to enter a customer.) Otherwise, the count is across all customers. If no parameters are entered, the count is printed for all zones. A partial TN can be entered for the card (L or L S) which then prints the count per that parameter (a customer cannot be specified in this case). ECNT NODE nodeNum For CS 1000S Prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified node. If no parameter is entered, the count is printed for all nodes. ECNT SS <hostName> For CS 1000S

basic-2

basic-2

basic-2

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

99

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description Prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified signaling server. If no parameter is entered, the count is printed for all signaling servers. Note: If the hostName variable contains an underscore (_), then an NPR001 error message is returned, as an underscore is considered to be an invalid character.

Pack/Rel

ECNT ZONE zoneNum <customer> For CS 1000S Prints the number of IP Phones registered for the specified zone. If <customer> is specified, the count is specific to that customer. Otherwise, the count is across all customers. If no parameters are entered, the count is printed for all zones. ENCT l Enable automatic background continuity tests for loop. Where: loop = 0-159 loop = 0-252 and must be a superloop (multiples of 4), System with Fibre Network Fabric END Abort current test. Stops outputting. Stops current test. fnf-25 xpe-15 basic-2

basic-1

ENIF L PDL2 l s bri-19 c Enables the SAPI 16 interface number for BRSC on l s c for MPH on loop L. ENIF l s c DSL BCH x Enables the link interface for B-channel x for DSL l s c bch. Where: x = 12 ENIF l s c DSL DCH x Enables the link interface number for USID x for the DSL bri-19 on l s c dch. bri-19

100

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command ENIF l PDNI Y

Description

Pack/Rel

Enables the link interface number Y for PDNI on Loop Y bri-19 (1-3). Enable automatic link recovery option of a DSL (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) bri-18 Enable automatic link recovery option of a DSL. bri-18

ENL AUTO c d

ENL AUTO l s c u

ENLC (appl) c

bri-18 Enable specified application on Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) card. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T). Where: appl = optional application name BRIL (Basic Rate Interface Line) or BRIT (Basic Rate Interface Trunk) bri-18 Enable and force download loadware for specified application on Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) card. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T). Where: appl = BRIL (optional application name: Basic Rate Interface Line), or appl = BRIT (Basic Rate Interface Trunk)

ENLC (appl) c FDL

ENLC (BASE) l s c (FDL/NST)

brit-19 Enable specified card. If the card resides on a disabled shelf, the status is output and enable is not performed. If card has been disabled by overload, the overload status entry is cleared. Used to enable the ISDN Basic Rate Interface Signaling Concentrator (BRSC) card. The command format is shown here. ENLC (BASE) l s c u (FDL/NST) Where: BASE = enable only the BRSC basecode. If not specified, both the basecode and the application will be enabled. l = loop s = shelf c = card

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

101

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description FDL = force download the basecode NST = No self-test The card faceplate is turned off to indicate the card is enabled, and the IPC channel is built.

Pack/Rel

ENLC BRI l s c (FDL)

brit-19 Enable the BRSC ISDN BRI application. Where: BRI = the BRSC ISDN BRI application l = loop s = shelf c = card FDL = force download the application The application is force downloaded if: FDL is entered, or No application currently exists on the BRSC card, or There is a version number mismatch between the applications in the software and on the card.

ENLC c

Enable and reset specified DTR/MFR card. (Small basic-1 Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) If the card resides on a disabled shelf, the status is output and enable is not performed. If card has been disabled by overload, the overload status entry is cleared. This command is also used for Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP)., S/T-Interface (SILC), and U-Interface (UILC) line cards. This command causes the card to perform a self test. If the card self test passes, the LED will blink 3 times. If it fails, the LED will be lit solidly. A XMI message will be issued to indicate that the XMFR card has powered up. This command can be used to enable a XMFR card. ENLC 0 enables all units (0-15) on TDS card 0 if enabled. The TDS card can be enabled by entering the command ENLX 0 in LD 34. Enable Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) bri-18 and force download basecode.(Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Enable and reset specified peripheral card. basic-1

ENLC c FDL

ENLC l s c

102

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description If the card resides on a disabled shelf, the status is output and enable is not performed. If card has been disabled by overload, the overload status entry is cleared. This command causes the card to perform a self test. If the card self test passes, the LED will blink 3 times. If it fails, the LED will be lit solidly. A XMI message will be issued to indicate that the XMFR card has powered up. This command can be used to enable a XMFR card. This command is also used for the S/T-Interface (SILC) and U-Interface (UILC) line cards. For MGX, cards 8,9 and 10 are treated as one card. Issuing a command for card 8 also affects cards 9 and 10. Issuing a command for card 9 also affects card 10. Issuing a command for card 10 only affects card 10.

Pack/Rel

ENLG x

Enable group x. Equivalent to two ENPS commands. basic-1 Refer to DSPS command for the relationships of groups, PS cards and loops. Where: x = Group 0-7, System with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

ENLL (appl) l

Enable specified application on Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) loop. Where: appl = BRIL (Basic Rate Interface Line), or appl = BRIT (Basic Rate Interface Trunk)

bri-18

ENLL (appl) l 1

bri-18 Enable MISP application, and loop. Where: appl = optional application name (BRIL) loop = loop number 1 = force download the application

ENLL (appl) l FDL

bri-18 Enable and force download loadware for specified application on Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) loop. Applicable if SUPP package 131 is equipped.

ENLL (appl) l 1

Enable MISP loop. Where:

bri-18

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

103

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description appl = optional application name (BRIL) 1 = force downloads the application Applicable if SUPP package 131 not equipped.

Pack/Rel

ENLL l

Enable network loop. See "Using the Enable/Disable commands" in the introduction. This command is also used for Multipurpose ISDN Signaling Processors (MISP). Enable MISP and force download basecode.

basic-1

ENLL l FDL ENLL l (v)

bri-18

Enable superloop, download peripheral software version xpe-15 v. If version v is not specified, the software downloaded is current (c) or latest (l) version as defined in LD 97. Enable specified Superloop. OK is output if the operation basic-21 is successful. Enable the specified DTR/MFR card. (Small Systems, CS basic-21 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) System software will issue a message to request XMFR to perform an echo test only when ENLR is issued to enable the XMFR card. Enable the specified DTR/MFR card. basic-21 System software will issue a message to request XMFR to perform an echo test only when ENLR is issued to enable the XMFR card. Note: This is a Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T specific command.

ENLL sl

ENLR c u

ENLR l s c u

ENLS l s

Enable specified shelf. Where: l = loop and s = shelf. If basic-1 the shelf is disabled by overload, the overload status entry is cleared. Enable the specified module. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, basic-1 MG 1000B, and MG 1000T). Where: m = 0 for base module or m = 1-4 for expansion module. If the module is disabled by overload, the overload status entry is cleared. Enable Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7) (Small Systems, CS bri-18 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T)

ENLS m

ENLU c d

104

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command ENLU c u

Description

Pack/Rel

Enable specified unit. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG basic-1 1000B, and MG 1000T) ENLU c u accepts units 0-15 as input. Units can only be enabled if TDS 0 is enabled. Note: For Slot 0, the TDS must first be enabled by entering the command ENLX 0 in LD 34 (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T).

ENLU l s c d ENLU l s c u

Enable Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7). Enable specified unit. If the unit resides on a disabled shelf or card, the status is output and enable is not performed. If the unit to be enabled is a 500/2500 message waiting telephone, test the unit prior to enabling. basic-4.00 Enables all IP Peer Virtual Trunk TNs in the specified route associated with the specified customer and the associated DCIP.

bri-18 basic-1

ENL VTRM <cust> <rout>

ENNW l

Enable network card with specified loop, where loop is basic-1 the even or odd numbered loop on the network card. Not applicable to superloops. Enables PS card x and all loops that were enabled at time basic-1 of last DSPS command. Refer to DSPS command to find the relationships of groups, PS cards and loops. Where: x = 0-15, Enable PS card and clear PBX_LAMP BADBITS for System with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

ENPS x

ENRB c d

Enable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18 (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Enable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18

ENRB l s c d ENRM <cust #> <route #>

For CS 1000S Enable all the virtual trunk route members in a customer's route. It will enable all route members, register them and put them into the RLM table. On the Signaling Server side, all trunks will be put on the Signaling Server list.

basic-2

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

105

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description Note: Not available for CS 1000 Release 4.0 or later.

Pack/Rel

ENTS c d

Enable Remote Loop Back test mode for specified BRI bri-18 Trunk DSL. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Enable Remote Loop Back test mode for specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18

ENTS l s c d

ENXP x (v)

Enable Controller x and associated IPE cards, download xpe-15 software version v. Enable all IPE cards connected to Controller x and the Controller itself. If version v is not specified, the software downloaded to the Controller is current (c) or latest (l) version as defined in LD 97.

ENXP XPC x (v) Enable Controller x, do not enable the associated IPE xpe-15 cards, download software version v. The cards connected to the Controller are not enabled by this command. If version v is not specified, the software downloaded to the Controller is current (c) or latest (l) version as defined in LD 97. ESTU c d Establish D-channel link for the specified Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7). (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Establish D-channel link for the specified Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7). qsig gf-22 bri-18

ESTU l s c d

bri-18

FDIS NCAL <c DSL#> <conn_id>

Force disconnect the specified call-independent connection (as defined by its connection ID number) Note that the command format for an Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T is:

STAT NCAL <c 0 0 DSL#><conn_id#>

FDIS NCAL <l s c DSL#> <conn_id> qsig gf-22

Force disconnect the specified call-independent connection (as defined by its connection ID number)

106

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command FDLC

Description

Pack/Rel

Cancel or stop the sytem wide flash download for M39xx arie- 25 units. Units include: M3902, M3903, M3904 and M3905. Initiate forced download to one M39xx unit regardless of arie- 25 version or state. Units include: M3902, M3903, M3904 and M3905. Initiate download to one M39xx unit when the set becomes idle, if the set's firmware is not current. Units include: M3902, M3903, M3904 and M3905. arie- 25

FDLF l s c u

FDLI l s c u

FDLU l s c u

Initiate download to one M39xx unit, if the set's firmware arie- 25 is not current. Units include: M3902, M3903, M3904 and M3905. Initiate system wide flash download according to the FDL arie- 25 schedule programmed in Overlay 97 Print summary report of firmware versions currently on M39xx units. Units include: M3902, M3903, M3904 and M3905. Print complete report of all M39xx sets based on parameters specified in LD 97. arie- 25

FDLS

FSUM

FSUM ALL

arie-25

FWVU l s c u

Query and print the firmware versions currently on M39xx arie- 25 terminal. Print MISP or IPE card ID. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) The MISP card ID output format is: CARDID: xxx. . . x BASECODE VERSION: xxx. . . x BRI LINE/TRUNK VERSION: xxx. . . x BOOTCODE VERSION: xxx. . . x The MISP card ID output format is: CARDID: xxx. . . x BASECODE VERSION: xxx. . . x BRI LINE/TRUNK VERSION: xxx. . . x BOOTCODE VERSION: xxx. . . x bri-18

IDC c

IDC l

Print ID of Network and Peripheral Controller

fnf-25

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

107

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description Where: l = 0-252 and must be a superloop (multiple of 4), System with Fibre Network Fabric.

Pack/Rel

IDC l s c

brit-19 Print BRSC card and loadware version. This command, queries the BRSC card ID, the basecode, and the application version number. Where: l = loop, s = shelf, and c = card. Output example: BOOTCODE VERSION xx . . . x BASECODE VERSION xx . . . x BRI APPL VERSION xx . . . x

IDC l s c

Print MISP or IPE card ID. The MISP card ID output format is: CARDID: xxx. . . x BASECODE VERSION: xxx. . . x BRI LINE/TRUNK VERSION: xxx. . . x BOOTCODE VERSION: xxx. . . x The IPE card ID output format is:
=> XXXX CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS

bri-18

Where: XXXX = card type (i.e., XDTR, XUT, etc.) CCCCCCCC = order code RR = release number SSSS = is the serial number IDC l s c d IDC sl Print ID of Digital Subscriber Loop 0-7. For Copper Connections Print Network ID and Controller for a superloop. Output format for superloop card ID:
XNET VERS => xxx RUNNING FROM yyy FW IS SANE CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS XPEC0 VERS => xxx RUNNING FROM yyy FW IS SANE XPECz CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS

bri-18 xpe-15

108

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description
XPEC1 VERS => xxx RUNNING FROM yyy FW IS SANE XPECz CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS

Pack/Rel

Where: xxx = loadware version yyy = RAM or ROM z = 2 or 4 CCCCCCCC = order code RR = release number SSSS = is the serial number IDC sl For Carrier Connections rem_ipe-21 Get card id of Local Carrier Interface (LCI) superloop and its associated Remote Carrier Interface (RCI). Output format for LCI superloop card ID:
LCI VERS => xxx FW IS SANE aaaaaaaaaaaa

Output format for RCI superloop card ID:

XPEC VERS=>xxx FW IS SANE aaaaaaaaaaaa

Where: xxx = loadware version aaaaaaaaaaaa = contents of ID EEPROM (LCI or RCI) IDC sl For Fiber Connections Print card ID of optical packets and main boards for Fiber superloop and associated Controller(s). The output format for the superloop card ID including optical packets is:
FNET VERS => xxx FW IS SANE aaaaaaaaaaaaa PRIM: pppppppp SEC: ssssssss XPEC VERS => xxx FW IS SANE aaaaaaaaaaa

rem_ipe-22

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

109

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command
PRIM: pppppppp SEC: ssssssss

Description

Pack/Rel

Where: 1. xxx = loadware version 2. aaaaaaaaaaaaa = contents of ID EEPROM (FNET or FPEC) 3. PRIM: pppppppp = contents of ID EEPROM primary packet (if present) 4. SEC: ssssssss = contents of ID EEPROM secondary packet (if present) IDC l s c Print card ID for IPE card. The format is: IDC l s c print ID of specified line card The format of the card ID is CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS , where: CCCCCCCC = order code RR = release number SSSS = serial number For example, a Network Card (NT8D04AA) with a release of 01 and serial number of 00001 will have a card ID with: NT8D04AA-010001 For BRI MISP cards, the output is: CARDID: xxx...x BASECODE VERSION: xxx...x BRI LINE/TRUNK VERSION: xxx...x BOOTCODE VERSION: xxx...x IDCS x Print card ID for all cards on shelf controlled by Controller xpe-15 x. The card ID for all cards in shelf controlled by Controller x is output. The IPE card ID output format is:
=> XXXX CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS

xpe-15

Where: XXXX = card type (i.e., XDTR, XUT, etc.) CCCCCCCC = order code RR = release number SSSS = is the serial number

110

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command IDU c d

Description Print set ID for Digital Subscriber Loop d (0-7) (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Print set ID for Digital Subscriber Loop d (0-7) Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T format Print set ID. Print ID applies to the following set types: M2006, M2008, M2016, M2216 and M2616. The output format of the set ID (M2008 for example) is: ARIES TN: l s c u TN ID CODE: M2008 NT CODE: NT2K08WC COLOR CODE: xx RLS CODE: xx SER NUM xxxxxx The color codes are: 03 is black 35 is chameleon ash 93 is dolphin grey

Pack/Rel bri-18

IDU l s c d cu

bri-18

IDU l s c u

xpe-15

IDU <TN>

Prints the MAC address, Model Vendor, software version, basic-3.0 Set IP address. List TN of all PBX units on specified shelf, with lamps flagged as defective. List TNs of all busy units on specified shelf. fnf-25

LBD l s

LBSY l s LBSY m

basic-1

List TNs of all busy units in specified module. (Small basic-16 Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T). Where: m = 0 for Base module or 1 for Expansion module. List TNs of all disabled units on specified shelf. basic-1

LDIS l s LDIS m

List TNs of all disabled units on specified module. (Small basic-16 Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T). Where: m = 0 for Base module or 1 for Expansion module. List TNs of all idle units on specified shelf. basic-1

LIDL l s

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

111

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command LIDL m

Description List TNs of all idle units in specified module. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T). Where: m = 0 for Base module or 1 for Expansion module. List TNs of all maintenance busy units on specified shelf. List TNs of all maintenance busy units on specified module. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T). Where: m = 0 for Base module or m = 1 for Expansion module. Message Waiting lamp maintenance.

Pack/Rel

LMNT l s

basic-1

LMNT m

PBXH

basic-1

PBXT (c u), ALL Tests 500/2500 Message Waiting lamp on specified card basic-1 or unit. This is required after failed lamp is fixed. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) PBXT ALL Test all Message Waiting lamps on 500/2500 telephones basic-5 on all loops Where: ALL = loops 0-255, System with Fibre Network Fabric PBXT l (s c u) fnf-25

Tests 500/2500 Message Waiting lamp on specified loop, basic-5 shelf, card or unit. This is required after failed lamp is fixed. Upload and print configuration and LAPD parameters for bri-18 specified DSL. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Upload and print configuration and LAPD parameters for bri-18 specified DSL. This command requires the specified DSL to be configured for the BRI Trunk Application. See example below:
PCON 6 0 0 6 .DSL: 6 0 0 6 LINL PARAM CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10 INTERFACE: SL-1 OPER MODE: USR T200: 2 T203: 20 N200: 3 N201: 260 K: 1 PROT #: 1

PCON c d

PCON l s c d

112

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command PERR (appl) c

Description Upload and print Layer 2 error log for specified SILC, UILC or MISP card. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Where (appl): BRIE for UIPE Basic Rate Interface Trunk BRIT for NON-UIPE Basic Rate Interface Trunk

Pack/Rel bri-18

PERR (appl) l

Upload and print Layer 2 error log for specified MISP. Where (appl): BRIE for UIPE Basic Rate Interface Trunk BRIT for NON-UIPE Basic Rate Interface Trunk

bri-18

PERR (appl) l s c

Upload and print Layer 2 error log for specified SILC or bri-18 UILC. This command requires the specified MISP or line card to be configured for the BRIT Application. Where (appl): BRIE for UIPE Basic Rate Interface Trunk BRIT for NON-UIPE Basic Rate Interface Trunk If error log is requested for a line card the error log for each DSL is printed. If error log is requested for a MISP the application global log is also printed. Interpretation of error logs: 1st byte is DSL number or "80" for Application log. 2nd byte is number of non-zero logs. If errors were logged the subsequent information is printed for each error type: 3rd byte is counter type code 4th byte is "HIGH" byte of count 5th byte is "LOW" byte of count Examples follow :
PERR brie 6 .DSL: 6 0 0 6 ERR LOG CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10 00 00 01 00 06 ^ DSL 6 00 07 00

^ ^ DSL 0 DSL 1 for all DSLs)

^ DSL 7 (no errors

PERR brie 3

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

113

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description
.DSL: 5 0 0 2 ERR LOG CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10 80 01 4D 00 09

Pack/Rel

Where: 1st byte - 80 - indicates Application global log 2nd byte - 01 - is number of error logs 3rd byte - 4D - is counter type code 4th bye - 00 - is "HIGH" byte count 5th byte - 09 - is "LOW" byte counts for all DSLs PLOG c d Upload and print protocol log for specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18 (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Upload and print protocol log for specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18 The protocol log keeps record of up to 32 protocol types. Only non-zero counters are uploaded and printed. This command requires the specified MISP or line card to be configured for the BRIT Application. See example below:
PLOG 6 0 0 6 .DSL: 6 0 0 6 PROTOCOL CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10 17 117 <--Counter 17 shows 117 SABME frames received with incorrect C/R bit 18 141 <--Counter 18 shows 141 supervisory frames received with F=1 19 84 <--Counter 19 shows 84 unsolicited DM responses with F=1

PLOG l s c d

PMES c d

Upload and print Layer 3 message log for specified DSL. bri-18 (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Upload and print Layer 3 message log for specified DSL. bri-18 This command requires the specified DSL to be configured for the BRI Trunk Application. Each time a valid Layer 3 message is received by the MISP, a counter for that particular message is incremented. The log keeps track of up to 20 message types. Only non-zero items are uploaded and printed. Making trunk calls will create a printable log. In the following example, 2 calls were made:
PMES 6 0 0 6 .DSL: 6 0 0 6 MSG LOG CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10 ALERT: 2 PROC: 2 CONNECT: 2

PMES l s c d

114

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command
DISCONN: 2 REL COP: 2

Description

Pack/Rel

PTAB c d

Upload and print Layer 3 Message configuration IE table bri-18 for specified BRI trunk DSL. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Upload and print Layer 3 Message configuration IE table bri-18 for specified BRI trunk DSL. PTAB uploads what was downloaded when the Application was enabled.

PTAB l s c d

PTAB c d <tbl #> Upload and print specified Layer 3 Message configuration bri-18 IE table for specified BRI trunk DSL. Where: <tbl #> = table number. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) PTAB l s c d <tbl bri-18 #> Upload and print specified Layer 3 Message configuration IE table for specified BRI trunk DSL. PTAB uploads what was downloaded when the Application was enabled. Where: <tbl #> = table number. PTRF c d bri-18 Upload and print traffic report for specified BRI Trunk DSL. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) The following traffic information is output: CONNECTED NCALLS : Total number of established call-independent connections Upload and print traffic report for specified BRI Trunk DSL. This command requires the specified DSL to be configured for the BRI Trunk Application. See example below:
PTRF 6 0 0 6 .DSL: 6 0 0 6 TRAFFIC CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10

PTRF l s c d

bri-18

PEAK_I_US: 0 <-- Peak link usage (over a 5 second period) for incoming traffic since the last time the traffic data was uploaded. An integer 0 - 100 which represents the percentage of the link capacity used. AVRG_I_US: 0 <-- Average link usage for incoming traffic since the traffic was last uploaded. PEAK_O_US: 0 <-- Peak link usage (over a 5 second period) for outgoing traffic since the last time the traffic

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

115

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description data was uploaded. An integer 0 - 100 which represents the percentage of the link capacity used. AVRG_O_US: 0 <-- Average link usage for outgoing traffic since the traffic was last uploaded. TIME: 0 <-- time since last traffic upload query CONNECTED CALL: 2 <-- number of successfully connected trunk calls

Pack/Rel

RLBT c d

Perform Remote Loop Back Test on specified BRI Trunk bri-18 DSL. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Perform Remote Loop Back Test on specified BRI Trunk bri-18 DSL. Release D-channel link for specified Digital Subscriber bri-18 Loop (0-7). (Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) Release D-channel link for specified Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7). bri-18

RLBT l s c d

RLSU c d

RLSU l s c d

RMIF L PDL2 l s bri-19 c Disables and removes the SAPI 16 interface number for BRSC on l s c for MPH on loop L. RMIF L PDL2 L1 Disables and removes the SAPI 16 interface number for bri-19 BRIL on Loop L1 for MPH on loop L. RMIF l s c DSL BCH x bri-19 Disables and removes the link interface for B-channel x for DSL l s c bch; where: x = 12 RMIF l PDNI Y Disables and removes the link interface number Y for PDNI on Loop Y (1-3) Get status of all configured loops in system bri-19

STAT STAT (appl) c

basic-1

Get status of MISP card and application. (Small Systems, bri-18 CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) See STAT (appl) loop for possible responses.

116

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command STAT (c)

Description

Pack/Rel

Get status of all cards or (specified card). (Small Systems, basic-1 CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) See STAT (loop) and STAT l s c for possible responses. STAT 0 provides the status of TDS 0 and units 0-15 for card 0. Get status of specified DSL. (Small Systems, CS 1000S, bri-18 MG 1000B, and MG 1000T) See STAT l s c d for possible responses. Get status of specified unit. For Small System For CS 1000S STAT c u accepts units 0-15 as input for card 0. Refer to STAT l s c u for additional output examples IP Phone registration and login status. The response format is x[y[z]] Output Example: x, y, Login Status Where: x= IDLE BUSY UNEQ DSBL y= REGISTERED UNREGISTERED LOCAL REGISTERED LOCAL UNREGISTERED z= 0 - Initialize status 1 - Branch User Login 2 - Branch User Local Mode Test 3 - Branch User Config 5 - Branch User Forced Logout (F/W Download) 6 - Branch User No Branch Password Provisioned 7 - Branch User Locked from Branch Password Retry 8 - Branch User No Main Password Provisioned 9 - Branch User Locked from Main Password Retry basic-1 basic-2

STAT c d

STAT c u

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

117

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description 10 - Branch User Gatekeeper Unreachable 11 - Branch User ID unrecognized by Gatekeeper 12 - Branch User Main Office TPS Unreachable 13 - Branch User ID - TN combination unrecognized by Main Office Call Server 14 - Branch User Firmware Out of Sync 30 - Virtual Office Login 32 - Virtual Office Locked from Login With release 4.5 Active Call Failover status is output as: ACF STATUS <status> TMR <timer> where status is: - UNREG for unregistered calls - HREG for half-registered calls - HREB for half-rebuilt calls - REB for rebuilt calls - PREB for partially-rebuilt calls where <timer> is: - an integer value if the timer exists for the call - N/A if there is no Call Server ACF timer attached

Pack/Rel

basic-4.50

STAT command example output basic-4.50 .stat 81 1 BUSY UNREGISTERED 00 ACF STATUS UNREG TMR 110 .stat 81 2 BUSY REGISTERED 00 ACF STATUS HREG TMR N/A .stat 81 3 BUSY REGISTERED 00 ACF STATUS REB TMR N/A STAT (appl) l Get status of MISP loop and application. If appl = BRIL, the status of the BRI Line application is output. If appl = BRIT, the status of the BRI Trunk application is output. Typical response is: loop = MISP loop for Large System and CS 1000E System
mm DSBL nn BUSY MISP lll : ENBL ACTIVATED timestamp BRIL : ENBL BRIT : ENBL

bri-18

If the card has been manually disabled, the response is:

118

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel

loop = MISP loop for Large System and CS 1000E System

DISABLED RESPONDING MAN DSBL

If the card has been disabled by the system, the response is: loop = MISP loop for Large System and CS 1000E System
DISABLED RESPONDING SYS DSBL - aaa...a

Where aaa...a is the reason as follows: 1. BOOTLOADING = basecode is being downloaded to the MISP 2. FATAL ERROR = MISP has a serious problem 3. OVERLOAD = MISP overload (card inoperable) 4. RESET THRESHOLD = too many resets (card inoperable) 5. SELF TESTING = card is performing self-test 6. SELFTEST FAILED = self-test failed 7. SELFTEST PASSED = successfully completed self-test 8. SHARED RAM TEST FAILED = MISP memory problem (card inoperable) 9. STUCK INTERRUPT = MISP hardware failure (replace card) With the STAT BRIL or STAT BRIT option, the response is one of the following: APPLICATION ENBL APPLICATION NOT CONFIGURED APPLICATION NOT RESPONDING APPLICATION MAN DSBL (manually disabled) APPLICATION SYS DSBL - aaa..a (system disabled) Where aaa...a is the reason as follows:

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

119

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description 1. CLOSED = application is closed by basecode on the card 2. CLOSED ERR = error in closing the application 3. CORRUPTED = application is corrupted on the card 4. DOWNLOADING = application is being downloaded 5. ENABLED = application is in active state 6. INACTIVE = application is in inactive state 7. MNT BUSY = application is in maintenance busy state 8. WAIT DSBL = application is in process of being disabled 9. WAIT ENABLE = application is in process of being enabled 10. WAIT ERASE = application is being erased from the card 11. WAIT REMOVE = application is being removed from the card

Pack/Rel

STAT (l)

Give status of one or all loops. Response is one of the following: 1. x BUSY, y DSBL = loop enabled with x channels busy and y channels disabled. 2. UNEQ = loop unequipped. 3. CTYF: l1 l2 = loop specified in STAT command is unable to receive data from loops l1, l2, etc. (i.e., continuity test failed in most recent LD 45 loop test). Probable fault in network card. 4. DSBL: NOT RESPONDING = loop disabled. Network card not responding. Card missing, disabled by switch or faulty. 5. DSBL: RESPONDING = loop disabled but the network card responds. Loop may have been disabled due to: a. manual request (DISL) b. associated Peripheral Signaling card being disabled c. overload condition on associated loop

basic-1

120

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description Note: Overload conditions are indicated by OVD messages. An attempt to enable a loop which was disabled due to overload may result in a recurrence of the overload condition: the system's service may be impaired for about 2 minutes. Note: For MISP loops see STAT (appl) loop command.

Pack/Rel

STAT l s

Get idle, busy or disabled status of units on specified shelf. Displays number of units idle, busy, disabled and maintenance busy for the specified shelf.

basic-1

STAT l s c

bri-18 Get status of any specified IPE card. (e.g., digital line, analog, DTR, etc.) When getting the status of a card relating to a trunk error (STAT), the term RVSD may appear with the trunk information. RVSD indicates that the software has detected a reversed wired trunk for that unit. When getting the status of a card where ACD sets are defined, the printout will include MSB LOG OUT, MSB LOG IN, LOG IN, OR LOG OUT, according to the ACD set state. The output format for either a S/T-Interface line card (SILC) or an U-Interface line card (UILC) is: For BRI trunks: ll = UNIT ll = DSL/UNIT number on the card =
swstate type L2_state L1_state dch_state clk (mode)

For BRI lines: ll = UNIT ll = DSL/UNIT number on the card =

swstate type L2_state L1_state

If you are analyzing a SILC or an UILC card, Table 9: STAT l s c Field and Response Definitions on page 122 lists and defines output fields and field responses. For an example of output, see Output Example: on page 122. The output format for an ISDN BRI card is: loop = UNIT sw_state DSL misp_state brsc/basic-19

LC_state
With ISDN BRI BRSC cards, the basecode and application status are output.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

121

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description

Pack/Rel

If you are analyzing an ISDN BRI card , see "STAT l s c d" command for a list of possible states.

Output Example:
00 = UNIT 00 = IDLE LINE ESTA UP 01 = UNIT 01 = IDLE TRNK ESTA UP 02 = UNIT 02 = IDLE LINE ESTA DOWN 03 = UNIT 03 = UNEQ 04 = UNIT 04 = UNEQ 05 = UNIT 05 = UNEQ 06 = UNIT 06 = DSBL TRNK DSBL UNEQ RLS 7 = UNIT 07 = DSBL TRNK DSBL UNEQ RLS ESTA SREF (TE)

(NT) (TE)

Table 9: STAT l s c Field and Response Definitions

Field Field Definition Response Response Definition no active call active with a call unequipped maintenance busy BRI line BRI trunk unequipped no active call active with a call maintenance busy disabled D-channel link is established

swstate

state of DSL/UNIT in software IDLE

BUSY UNEQ MBSY type

DSL type

LINE TRNK

L2_state

Layer 2 state of DSL/UNIT in UNEQ MISP loadware

IDLE

BUSY MBSY DSBL ESTA

122

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Field

Field Definition

Response

Response Definition D-channel link is released test mode remote loop back application disabled associated MISP disabled associated MISP not responding unable to send message to MISP unequipped Layer 1 is down line card not responding Layer 1 is up undefined DSL state Associated XPEC is disabled unable to send message to MISP D-channel link is established D-channel link is released test mode idle test mode remote loop back

RLSU TEST RLBT APDB MPDB MPNR UTSM L1_state

Layer 1 state of line card

UNEQ DOWN LCNR UP UNDN XPDB UTSM

dch_state

State of D-channel link in software

ESTA RLSU TESTIDLE TESTRLBT

clk

Clock mode

DSBL PREF SREF

disabled primary reference secondary reference Network Termination Terminal Equipment

mode

Layer 1 mode of DSL

NT TE

STAT l s c d

Get status of specified Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7).

bri-18

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

123

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

When getting the status of an unit where ACD sets are defined, the printout will not include MSB LOG OUT, MSB LOG IN, LOG IN, OR LOG OUT, according to the ACD set state. If SUPP package 131 is not equipped, Tthe output format is:
DSL sw_state misp_state lc_state B1 status B2 status

If SUPP package 131 is equipped, the output format is:

DSL type: swstate L2_state L1_state dch_state clk b1_state b2_state

Table 10: STAT l s c d Field Definitions on page 124 defines output fields. Table 11: STAT l s c d Response Definitions: SUPP package 131 is not equipped on page 125 lists and defines possible responses when SUPP package 131 is not equipped. Table 12: STAT l s c d Response Definitions when SUPP package 131 is equipped on page 125 lists and defines possible responses when SUPP package 131 is equipped.

Table 10: STAT l s c d Field Definitions

Field Definition DSL software state DSL state on the MISP card DSL state on the BRI line card State of DSL/UNIT in software Layer 2 state of DSL/UNIT in MISP loadware Layer 1 state of line card State of D-channel link in software Clock mode State of first B-channel State of second B-channel

sw_state misp_state lc_state swstate L2_state L1_state dch_state* clk* b1_state b2_state

* these fields are output only for BRI trunks

124

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Table 11: STAT l s c d Response Definitions: SUPP package 131 is not equipped
Response Definition MISP call application is disabled Call is active Link layer is not established DSL is disabled Link layer is established No active calls Line card is not responding DSL is in maintenance busy mode MISP is disabled MISP not responding or message is lost DSL is not assigned to a MISP Link layer is not established DSL is in an undefined state Unequipped Link layer is established CPU is unable to send message to MISP or line card Superloop is disabled Controller is disabled

APDB BUSY DOWN DSBL ESTA IDLE LCNR MBSY MPDB MPNR NTAN RLS UNDN UNEQ UP UTSM XTDB XPDB

Table 12: STAT l s c d Response Definitions when SUPP package 131 is equipped
Field Response Definition BRI line BRI trunk no active call active with a call unequipped maintenance busy unequipped

type

LINE TRNK

swstate

IDLE BUSY UNEQ MBSY

L2_state

UNEQ

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

125

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Field

Response

Definition no active call active with a call maintenance busy disabled D-channel link is established D-channel link is released test mode remote loop back application disabled associated MISP disabled associated MISP not responding unable to send message to MISP unequipped Layer 1 is down line card not responding Layer 1 is up undefined DSL state associated XPEC is disabled unable to send message to MISP D-channel link is established D-channel link is released test mode idle test mode remote loop back disabled primary reference secondary reference unequipped active with a call

IDLE BUSY MBSY DSBL ESTA RLSU TEST RLBT APDB MPDB MPNR UTSM L1_state uneq DOWN LCNR UP UNDN XPDB UTSM dch_state ESTA RLSU TEST-IDLE TEST-RLBT clk DSBL PREF SREF b1_state UNEQ BUSY

126

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Field

Response

Definition disabled maintenance busy no active call unequipped active with a call disabled maintenance busy no active call

DSBL MBSY IDLE b2_state UNEQ BUSY DSBL MBSY IDLE

STAT l s c u Get status of specified unit. Table 13: STAT lscu responses on basic-1 page 127 defines possible responses to STAT lscu.

Table 13: STAT lscu responses

Type Normal Response Definition Idle IP Phone is registered. IP Phone is not registered. Maintenance busy Disabled Virtual terminal disabled by Server IP Phone is registered, but is disabled. IP Phone is not registered and is disabled. In use by call processing Barring is applied to trunk with BARA Class of Service Terminal not defined in software Line is 500/2500 type Line is DECT/MCMO type Digital cordless set

IDLE IDLE REGISTERED IDLE UNREGISTERED MBSY DSBL DSBL DSBL REGISTERED DSBL UNREGISTERED BUSY BUSY BARRED UNEQ L500 W500 DCS

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

127

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

Type

Response

Definition DECT mobility card Maintenance set Normal SL-1 telephone Trunk Attendant console Digitone Receiver Console power unit Card x disabled due to overload Do Not Disturb feature is active Shelf disabled due to overload Outgoing signal fault detected on PS card under examination.

DMC MBCS BCS TRK ATTN DTR PWR

Abnormal

CARD x DSBL (OVD) DND xxx xxx SHELF DSBL(OVD) SIG FAULT

WARNING: CRPTR TN's data is corrupted. Check BUG messages relating to the TN. NOT IN RANGE
Responses caused by invalid equipment choice:

EXT DSBL LOOP NOT TERM LOOP UNEQ SHELF UNEQ SHELF UNEQ W/ PBX CARDS CARD UNEQ CARD NOT PBX UNIT UNEQ FOR MW PER UNEQ UNIT UNEQ
STAT NCAL <c DSL#>

Extender disabled Loop is not a terminal loop Loop is unequipped Shelf is unequipped No 500 cards on shelf Card is unequipped Card is not a PBX card Unequipped for Message Waiting PS card is unequipped Unit is unequipped

qsig gf-22

128

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

List all current call-independent connections on a given BRI DSL. (Small System) Note: This is applicable for UIPE protocol-based DSLs only, for which the CS 1000 supports callindependent connections ("GF capability"). The response format is as follows: NCALL CONN ID : a number in the range of 1-9999 that identifies the call independent connection on a given DSL CREF : call reference number in HEX identifying independent connection STATE : current state of all call-independent connections ( IDLE , CONN_REQ , CONN_EST ) TIME : year month day hour:minute:second (the time when call independent connection request is made) APPL : applications using the call-independent connection (e.g., NACD, NMS,...) ORIG : originator DEST : destination The command format for a Small System is:

STAT NCAL <c 0 0 DSL#>

To receive information from this command, "GF capability" is required. The QSIG protocols require QsigGF package 305. EuroISDN protocols, for which the CS 1000 supports GF transport, support a smaller set of features, but do not require the QsigGF package. STAT NCAL <l s c DSL#> List all current call-independent connections on a given BRI DSL. Note: This is applicable for UIPE protocol-based DSLs only, for which the CS 1000 supports callindependent connections ("GF capability"). The response format is as follows: NCALL CONN ID : a number in the range of 1-9999 that identifies the call independent connection on a given DSL CREF : call reference number in HEX identifying independent connection qsig gf-22

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

129

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

STATE : current state of all call-independent connections ( IDLE, CONN_REQ, CONN_EST ) TIME : year month day hour:minute:second (the time when call independent connection request is made) APPL : applications using the call-independent connection (e.g., NACD, NMS,...) ORIG : originator DEST : destination To receive information from this command, "GF capability" is required. The QSIG protocols require QsigGF package 305. EuroISDN protocols, for which the CS 1000 supports GF transport, support a smaller set of features, but do not require the QsigGF package. STAT NCAL <l s c DSL#> <conn_ID> List information pertaining to a specific callindependent connection (as defined by its connection ID) The response format is as follows: NCALL CONN ID : a number in the range of 1-9999 that identifies the call independent connection on a given DSL CREF : call reference number in HEX identifying independent connection STATE : current state of all call-independent connections ( IDLE, CONN_REQ, CONN_EST ) TIME : year month day hour:minute:second (the time when call independent connection request is made) APPL : applications using the call-independent connection (e.g., NACD, NMS,...) ORIG : originator DEST : destination To receive information from this response, "GF capability" is required. The QSIG protocols require QsigGF package 305. EuroISDN protocols, for which the CS 1000 supports GF transport, support a smaller set of features, but do not require the QsigGF package. qsig gf-22

130

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

STAT NWK l

Check status of network card with specified loop, where loop is the even or odd numbered loop on the network card. Get status of PS card x. x = 0-15, System with Fibre Network Fabric If the PS card is disabled, the response is changed from DSBL to either: 1. DSBL : NOT RESPONDING = PS card x is either missing, faulty or disabled via the faceplate switch. If there is a fault in the extender pair for the network shelf, the status of the PS card will also be: DSBL: NOT RESPONDING. 2. DSBL : RESPONDING = The PS card is disabled and responding to the CPU. The PS may have been disabled by manual request (DSPS) or the associated extender pair may have been manually disabled. If neither of these conditions exists, the card may have been disabled because of an overload condition on the associated shelf. Check for OVD messages appearing in previous TTY output. An attempt to enable a PS card which was disabled because of an overload may result in a recurrence of the overload condition: the system's service may be impaired for approximately 2 minutes.

basic-1

STAT PER x

basic-1

fnf-25

STAT sl

Get current status of superloop and separate carriers rem_ipe-21 on that superloop, based on data previously sent by the Carrier Interface F/W (LCIM). For each carrier, the following fields will be displayed:

S/W State, SPARE Status, NND Status, TSA (Time Slot Availability) and CALS. TTSA = Number of Traffic Timeslots currently
available for voice and data calls out of a possible: 21 for T-1 and 27 for T-E. SPARE Status indicates whether the carrier is spared and which carrier it is spared in. NND Status indicates whether new data calls are disallowed on the timeslots being transmitted by the carrier. STAT VTRM <cust> <route> <starting member> <number of members> basic-4.00 Displays the status of the virtual trunks for a customer's route starting from a specified starting member for the number of members specified.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

131

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

STIF L PDL2 l s c Displays link status for SAPI 16 interface of BRSC I s c for MPH on loop L. STIF L PDL2 L1 Displays the link status for SAPI 16 interface of BRIL L1 for MPH on loop L. STIF l PDNI y Displays the link status for interface Y for PDNI. Where: Loop Y = 1-3

bri-19

bri-19

bri-19

STIF l s c DSL DCH x Displays the link status for B-channel X for the DSL l s c D. Where: BCH stands for B-channel and X = 1 2. STAT VTRM <cust #> <route #> <start member> <end member> Display the status of the virtual trunks specified by customer, route, start member and end member numbers. STVT <cust #> <route #> <starting member> <number of members> Display the status of the virtual trunks specified by customer, route, start and end member number. Note: Not available for CS 1000 Release 4.0 or later. SUPL (l) Print data for all or specified superloop(s).

bri-19

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

xpe-15

loop = 0-252 and must be a superloop (multiples of fnf-25 4), System with Fibre Network Fabric TRK l s c u cu Seize specified trunk for outpulsing. Small System format Command is valid at a maintenance telephone only. The specified trunk is connected to the maintenance telephone and a test call may be performed on the trunk. When the test call is completed, access sequence SPRE 91 must be redialed to use the maintenance telephone to input more commands. Do self-test of Network card for specified superloop. The Network card must be disabled before the selftest. xpe-15 basic-1

XNTT l

132

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

loop = 0-252 and must be a superloop (multiples of fnf-25 4), System with Fibre Network Fabric XPCT x Do self-test on Controller x. The NT8D01 Controller must be disabled before the self-test. Print data for all or specified Controller(s). xpe-15

XPEC (x)

xpe-15

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

133

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

134

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 11: LD 33: Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic for Fiber Remote IPE
This module contains commands to perform diagnostic tests of 1.5 Mb/s and fiber remote Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. Note: Program 33 is not supported on Small Systems and CS 1000S system.

Fiber Remote IPE diagnostic

The craftsperson may complete any of the following Fiber Remote IPE maintenance operations: Enable or disable optical packlets. Manually invoke protection switching, at the local or remote side. Query status of cards and optical packlets. Conduct the loop-back test on the optical receiver-transmitter (EOI) to determine the source of the fault as being the optical fiber span or Fiber remote equipment. Run loopback test and continuity tests on optical interface.

Midnight routine operation

Overlay 33 can be scheduled to run at midnight if included in midnight routines. The following actions take place during midnight operation: Send Time of Day message to loadware (L/W). Print performance monitoring report. Run non-service-impacting test on the standby link. Run MNSN and MNSP commands to cause protection switching. When these commands are run, continuity tests check both links alternately.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

135

LD 33: Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic for Fiber Remote IPE

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 nonblocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

Basic commands for Fiber Remote IPE

AHIN sl AHIP pc CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL CLPM sl DSOP sl PRI DSOP sI SEC ENOP sI PRI ENOP sI SEC FDEF sl FNET ALL FNET sl FNTT sl FPCT pc FPEC pc Print all history file (log file) of Fiber superloop sl Print all history file of Fiber Peripheral Controller pc Clears the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears all performance monitoring counters of Fiber superloop sl (FNET) and its associated FPEC Disable optical link of Fiber superloop sl, link Primary Disable optical link of Fiber superloop sl, link Secondary Enable optical link of Fiber superloop sl, link Primary Enable optical link of Fiber superloop sl, link Secondary Query default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of Fiber superloop sl Print current status of all Fiber superloops Print status of Fiber superloop sl (FNET) and its optical packlets Test specified Fiber superloop sl (FNET) Test specified Fiber peripheral controller pc (FPEC) Print status of Fiber peripheral controller pc (FPEC) and its optical packlets

136

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

FSTA sl FSTP sl FTST sl test (h/m/s) MNSN sl MNSP sl NHIN sl NHIP pc PRPM sl SDEF sl LOC SDEF sl REM

Print the transmission test status of Fiber superloop sl Stop the transmission test. Print test status of Fiber superloop sl Perform a transmission test of Fiber superloop sl for time h/m/s Manual switch on Fiber superloop sl (FNET) Manual switch on Fiber peripheral controller pc (FPEC) Print new history file of Fiber superloop sl (FNET) Print new history file of Fiber peripheral controller pc (FPEC) Print performance monitoring report for Fiber superloop sl (FNET) and its associated FPEC Set default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of Fiber superloop sl: MMI mode (Local) Set default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of Fiber superloop sl: SL-1 mode (Remote)

Alphabetical list of commands

Command AHIN sl AHIP pc CDSP Description Print all history file (log file) of Fiber superloop sl. Print all history file of Fiber Peripheral Controller pc. Clears the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. Clears all performance monitoring counters of Fiber superloop sl (FNET) and its associated FPEC. Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Pack/Rel rem_ipe-22 rem_ipe-22 rpe-1

CLPM sl

rem_ipe-22

CMIN CMIN ALL DSOP sl PRI

alrm_filter-22 rpe-1

rem_ipe-22 Disable optical link of Fiber superloop sl, link Primary. If that link is active, protection switching occurs. If protection switching is not available, and the FNET is enabled, the command is refused.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

137

LD 33: Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic for Fiber Remote IPE

Command DSOP sl SEC

Description

Pack/Rel

rem_ipe-22 Disable optical link of Fiber superloop sl, link Secondary. If that link is active, protection switching occurs. If protection switching is not available, and the FNET is enabled, the command is refused. Enable optical link of Fiber superloop sl, link Primary. rem_ipe-22 The command fails if the packet is not physically there. Enable optical link of Fiber superloop sl, link Secondary. The command fails if the packlet is not physically there. rem_ipe-22

ENOP sl PRI

ENOP sl SEC

FDEF sl

Query default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of Fiber rem_ipe-22 superloop sl. The system response is:
FNET: L/R FPEC: L/R

Where: L = local and R = remote FNET ALL Print current status of all Fiber superloops. The same rem_ipe-22 as FNET sl but repeated for all Fiber superloops in the system. Print status of Fiber superloop sl (FNET) and its optical rem_ipe-22 packlets. The first line prints the general status of the card and includes: enable/disable status (known by Software) PLL status NNDC (indicates that new data calls are disallowed on this superloop) The next two lines print the status of the packlets: enable/disable status (known by Firmware) activity (if selected as active for incoming voice/data) ALM_LVL - alarm level ALM_EOI - alarm Electro-Optical Interface (EOI) Presented below is an example of this general Output format, showing possible values. Bold characters indicate fixed titles. FNET: n enabled/disabled locked/ unlocked NNDC/ <blank>

FNET sl

138

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

PACKLETS: Primary:

F/W State enabled disabled transmission tested enabled disabled transmission tested Where:

Activity RCV idle

ALM_LVL unequipped S.F. S.D. No alarm unequipped S.F. S.D. No alarm

ALM_EOI Rx Tx Rx Tx No alarm Rx Tx Rx Tx No alarm

Secondary:

RCV idle

1. unequipped = the optical packlet is physically absent. Firmware treats this as Signal Fail. 2. S.F. = Signal Fail = Out of service. Loadware either switches to the other link or declares "No active link" if Protection Switching (PS) was not possible. 3. S.D. = Signal Degradation = Deteriorated performance. Firmware either switches to the other link, or else the data calls are disallowed if Protection Switching (PS) was not possible. Software handles this state as NNDC. 4. Rx = Receiver alarm 5. Tx = Transmitter alarm FNTT sl rem_ipe-22 Test specified Fiber superloop sl (FNET). The Firmware performs a self-test of hardware components and reports results to software. Optical packlets, if present, are also tested. If the FNET is enabled, only the non-active packlet is tested without affecting service. The response may be:
TEST PASSED or TEST FAILED REASON <reason#>

FPCT pc

Test specified Fiber peripheral controller pc (FPEC). rem_ipe-22 The Firmware performs a self-test of hardware components and reports results to software. Optical packlets, if present, are also tested. If the FPEC is enabled, only the non-active packlet is tested without affecting service. The response may be:
TEST PASSED or TEST FAILED REASON <reason#>

FPEC pc

Print status of Fiber peripheral controller pc (FPEC) rem_ipe-22 and its optical packlets. The first line prints the general status of the card. The next two lines print the status

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

139

LD 33: Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic for Fiber Remote IPE

of the packlets. See FNET description for more detail. FSTA sl Print the transmission test status of Fiber superloop sl. Stop the transmission test. Print test status of Fiber superloop sl. rem_ipe-22

FSTP sl

rem_ipe-22

FTST sl test (h/m/s) Perform specified transmission test of Fiber superloop sl for time tm. Where: test = 1 for FNET primary packlet ; 2 for FPEC primary packlet ; 3 for FNET secondary packlet ; 4 for FPEC secondary packlet tm = H/M/S = test duration. This field is optional. The duration can be either: - H for hours (1-24) - M for minutes (1-255) - S for seconds (1-255) If a duration is not entered, then Firmware performs a quick test and reports the results to software. The system response will then be TEST SUCCESS or TEST FAILED . If duration is entered, then firmware starts testing and sends an acknowledge message to software. The system response will be TEST STARTED . These transmission tests can only be executed on the standby or disabled link. MNSN sl

rem_ipe-22

Manual switch on Fiber superloop sl (FNET). The rem_ipe-22 FNET loadware switches between the active link and the standby link. Manual switch on Fiber peripheral controller pc (FPEC). The FPEC loadware switches between the active link and the standby link. Print new history file of Fiber superloop sl (FNET) Print new history file of Fiber peripheral controller pc (FPEC) Print performance monitoring report for Fiber superloop sl (FNET) and its associated FPEC. rem_ipe-22

MNSP pc

NHIN sl NHIP pc

rem_ipe-22 rem_ipe-22

PRPM sl

rem_ipe-22

140

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

SDEF sl LOC

Set default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of Fiber superloop sl : MMI mode (Local) Set default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of Fiber superloop sl : SL-1 mode (Remote)

rem_ipe-22

SDEF sl REM

rem_ipe-22

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

141

LD 33: Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic for Fiber Remote IPE

142

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 12: LD 34: Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver Diagnostic
This program tests circuit cards used in generating and detecting tones in the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 system. If loaded automatically in background or as part of the daily routines, it tests the hardware and performs fault detection and isolation. If invoked manually, commands can be issued to conduct the entire test or only certain parts of the test and to change card status. The program tests the following circuit cards: Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Digitone Receiver (DTR) Tone Detector Dial Tone Detector Extended Tone Detector (XTD) TDS circuit card outpulsers and channels are checked for timing errors, memory faults and Digitone frequency accuracy. Digitone receivers are checked for response to all Digitone frequencies. Tones and outpulses are tested from a maintenance set.

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 nonblocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

143

LD 34: Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver Diagnostic

Basic commands
Contents
Section Large System and Avaya Communication Server 1000E System commands on page 144 Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T commands Extended Tone Detector (XTD) commands on page 145 Maintenance telephone commands on page 146

Large System and Avaya Communication Server 1000E System commands

The following commands are applicable to all Large System and Avaya CS 1000E Systems.
CDSP CMAJ CMIN CMIN ALL DISD l s c DISD l s c u DISL loop DISR l s c (u) DISM (sulp) s DISX l DTD l s c u Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Disable the specified Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 Tone Detector card Disable specified Dial Tone Detector Disable tone and digit loop Disable specified DTR/MFR card or unit. Applies to DTR or XTD cards. Disable configured Media Gateway TDS loops on IPMG Disable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1 Test specified Dial Tone Detector unit. Applies to DTD and XTD cards.

144

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Extended Tone Detector (XTD) commands

DTR l s c (u)

Test specified Digitone receiver card or unit. Applies to DTR and XTD cards. Stop execution of current command Enable Tone Detector on specified card or unit Enable tone and digit loop Enable the DTR/MFR card or unit. Applies to DTR and XTD cards. Enable configured Media Gateway TDS loops on IPMG Enable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1 Test all Automatic Number Identification Feature Group D Multifrequency receiver units Test all Automatic Number Identification Feature Group D Multifrequency receiver units on specified loop Test Automatic Number Identification Feature Group D Multifrequency card or unit Get status of specified DTR/MFR or XTD card or unit. List all disabled Tone Detector units Get status of Tone Detector card or unit List TNs of all disabled DTRs and MFRs Get status TDS loop Perform self-test and tone detection on specified card or unit Test outpulsers and channels on specified loop

END ENLD l s c (u) ENLL loop ENLR l s c (u) ENLM (sulp) s ENLX l MFR MFR loop MFR l s c (u)

SDTR l s c (u) STAD STAD l s c (u) STAT STAT loop TDET l s c (u) TDS loop

Extended Tone Detector (XTD) commands

The following commands are applicable to the NT5K20 and NT5K48 XTD cards:
DISR l s c (u) DTR l s c u ENLR l s c (u) SDTR SDTR l s c (u) Disable the specified XTD card (or unit) Test the specified XTD unit as a Digitone receiver unit Enable the specified XTD card (or unit) List Terminal Numbers (TN) of all disabled DTR units List the status of the specified XTD card (or unit)

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

145

LD 34: Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver Diagnostic

Maintenance telephone commands

The following commands are used from a Maintenance telephone to test and hear the various tones. Both the command and the dial pad equivalents (in parantheses) are shown.
ANNx#loop## (266x#loop##) Provides signals coming through source number x of KAPSCH Digital Announcer or Music Interface. Where loop = Tone and Digit Switch loop number) BSY#loop## (279#loop##) Provide busy tone from tone and digit loop. C## (2##) Remove any active tone. basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-6

CMP#loop## (267#loop##) Provide Camp-On tone from loop. CUST#xx## (2878#xx##) Test outpulsing for customer XX. CWG#loop## (294#loop##) Give call waiting tone from loop. DIA#loop## (342#loop##) Provide dial tone from tone and digit loop. DRNG#loop## (3764#loop##) Provide distinctive ringing from loop. ITN#loop## (486#loop##) Provide intrusion tone from loop. JDRG#loop## (5374#loop##) Provide distinctive ringing from loop. JIDT#loop## (5438#loop##) Provide interrupted dial tone from loop. OPS#loop#x## (677#loop#x##) Test outpulsing from Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 to idle trunk. ORD#loop## (673#loop##) Provide override tone from loop.

basic-1

basic-1

basic-1

basic-1

basic-1

basic-8

basic-8

basic-1

basic-1

146

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

OVF#loop## (683#loop##) Provide overflow tone from loop. PCRT#loop## (7278#loop##) Test the Paid Call Restriction (PCR) tone after the TABL command. RBK#loop## (725#loop##) Provide ringback tone from loop. RNG#loop## (764#loop##) Provide ring tone from loop. SDL#loop## (735#loop##) Give special dial tone from loop. TABL#xx## (8225#xx##) Select table number xx. If this command is not issued before any tone request command, then table 0 is assumed (Generic software with supplementary features). TLP#loop## (857#loop##) Provide tone to last party from the tone and digit loop. TST#loop## (878#loop##) Provide test tone from loop. XCTT#loop#t#c## (9288#loop#t#c##) Test tone and cadence number on Conference/TDS/MFS card.

basic-1

pcr-7

basic-1

basic-1

basic-1

basic-1

basic-4

basic-1

xct-15

Alphabetical list of commands

Command ANNx#loop## (266x#loop##) Provides signals coming through source number x of KAPSCH Digital Announcer or Music Interface. Where:loop = Tone and Digit Switch loop number. BSY#L## (279#L##) Provide busy tone from tone and digit loop L. basic-1 Description Pack/Rel basic-6

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

147

LD 34: Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver Diagnostic

Command C## (2##) CDSP

Description Remove any active tone. Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. Clear major alarm, reset power fail transfer and clear power fault alarm. Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers

Pack/Rel basic-1 basic-1

CMAJ

basic-1

CMIN CMIN ALL

alrm_filter-22 basic-1 basic-1

CMP#loop## (267#loop##) Provide Camp-On tone from loop. CUST#xx## (2878#xx##) Test outpulsing for customer XX. CWG#loop## (294#loop##) Give call waiting tone from loop. DIA#L## (342#L##) Provide dial tone from tone and digit loop L. DISD l s c Disable the specified Tone Detector card. Disables both units and lights the LED. Disable specified Dial Tone Detector. If both units on the card are disabled, the LED lights. DISL loop Disable tone and digit loop. For Conference/TDS/MFS cards see note with ENLL command. DISM (sulp) s DISR l s c (u) DISX l

basic-1

basic-1

basic-1 basic-1

DISD l s c u

basic-1

basic-1

Disable configured Media Gateway TDS loops on IPMG. ipmg-5.00 Disable specified DTR/MFR or XTD card or unit. xtd-8

xct-15 Disable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1. Disables the entire combined Conference, Tone and Digit Switch, and MF Sender (NT8D17) card. Both the even numbered TDS/MFS loop and adjacent conference loop are disabled. loop = 0, 2, 4,. . . 254

148

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description ]The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even number loop for the TDS/MFS functions. However, this only prevents the loop from being used by software and does not affect the hardware status of the card. The DISX and ENLX commands are recommended. The ENLX command must be used if the DISX command was used to disable the card. This command can be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46.

Pack/Rel

DRNG#loop## (3764#loop##) Provide distinctive ringing from loop. DTD l s c u Test specified Dial Tone Detector unit. Applies to DTD and XTD cards. The Dial Tone Detector Test (DTDT) parameters must be configured in the configuration record (LD 17). Faulty DTD cards are disabled. Only 50% of all Dial Tone Detectors in the system may be disabled.

basic-1

xtd-8

DTR l s c (u)

xtd-8 Test specified unit on Digitone receiver card or unit. This test may be performed while the card is enabled or disabled. If a disabled card passes the test, it is enabled automatically. This command also applies to the XTD. Stop execution of current command. Enable Tone Detector on specified card or unit. basic-1 basic-1

END ENLD l s c (u) ENLL l

Enable tone and digit switch loop l. basic-1 For Conference/TDS/MFS cards the DISX and ENLX commands must be used whenever the faceplate switch of the card has been toggled. ENLL will software enable the card but the card will not be properly reset. Enable configured Media Gateway TDS loops on IPMG. ipmg-5.00

ENLM (sulp) s ENLR c (u)

Enable the DTR/MFR or XTD card or specified unit. xtd-8 This command applies to any units on card 0 regardless of its configured type. Enable the DTR/MFR or XTD card or specified unit. xtd-8

ENLR l s c (u) ENLX c

Enable the TDS/MFS card basic-22 This command enables TDS and alll units on card 0. For Card 0, this command initiates the card reset sequence: it downloads any parameters required for any configured MFC/MFE/MFK5/MFK6 units.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

149

LD 34: Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver Diagnostic

Command ENLX l

Description

Pack/Rel

xct-15 Enable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1. This command can be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46. Enables the entire combined Conference, Tone and Digit Switch, and MF Sender (NT8D17) card. Both the even numbered TDS/MFS loop and adjacent conference loop are enabled. (loop = 0, 2, 4,. . . 254) The Conf/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is inserted. Both loops must have been previously disabled. This command initiates card tests and the download of software. The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even number loop for the TDS/MFS functions. However, this only prevents the loop from being used by software and does not affect the hardware status of the card. The DISX and ENLX commands are recommended. The ENLX command must be used if the DISX command was used to disable the card. Enabling more than 16 conference loops may cause the system to lock-up. basic-1

ITN#loop## (486#loop##) Provide intrusion tone from loop. JDRG#loop## (5374#loop##) Provide distinctive ringing from loop. JIDT#loop## (5438#loop##) Provide interrupted dial tone from loop. MFR Test all Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Multifrequency receiver units. Test all Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Multifrequency receivers on this loop. Test Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Multifrequency receiver card or unit.

basic-8

basic-8

fgd-17

MFR loop

fgd-17

MFR l s c (u)

fgd-17

OPS#L#xx## (677 #L #xx##) Test outpulsing from Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 to idle trunk. Outpulses from tone and digit loop l using the 10 or 20 pps outpulser to any idle trunk. This command connects the maintenance telephone to the trunk, permitting a test call

basic-1

150

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description on the trunk to be made using the outpulsers selected, where: xx = 10 or 20 representing the trunk class of service (LD 14 CLS = P10 or P20). When the test call is completed, LD 34 must be reloaded by dialing SPRE + 91 before entering another command.

Pack/Rel

ORD#loop## (673#loop##) Provide override tone from loop. OVF#L## (683#L##) Provide overflow tone from loop L. PCRT#loop## (7278#loop##) Test the Paid Call Restriction (PCR) tone after the TABL command. RBK#L## (725#L##) Provide ringback tone from loop L. RNG#L## (764#L##) Provide ring tone from loop L. SDL#loop## (735#loop##) Give special dial tone from loop. SDTR SDTR SDTR l s c (u) List the TNs of all disabled DTR/MFR or XTD units List all disabled DTR units Get status of specified DTR/MFR or XTD card or unit. If no parameters are entered, a list of all DTR/MFR TNs is output. If l s c is input, the status of the DTR/MFR units on the specified card are output. If l s c u is input, the status of the specified unit is output. Applies to DTR and XTD cards. STAD STAD l s c (u) List all disabled Tone Detector units.

basic-1

basic-1 pcr-7

basic-1

basic-1 basic-1

xtd-8 basic-1 basic-1

basic-1

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

151

LD 34: Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver Diagnostic

Command

Description Get status of Tone Detector card or unit. The status is either idle, busy, maintenance busy or not equipped.

Pack/Rel basic-1

STAT

List TNs of all disabled Digitone Receivers. NONE is output if there are no disabled Digitone Receivers. Show TDS status and number of disabled or busy tone transmitter channels. The STAT c command is used for the SSTD or CPU card. Get status TDS loop. The response may include OPS DSBL, indicating that the outpulsing function of the TDS card has been disabled.

basic-1

STAT c

basic-1

STAT loop

basic-1

TABL#xx## (8225#xx##) Select table number xx. If this command is not issued before any tone request command, then table 0 is assumed. (Generic software with supplementary features). TDET l s c (u)

basic-1

Perform self-test and tone detection on specified card or basic-1 unit. Performs the self-test and basic tone detection functions of the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 Tone Detector card or unit. This test may be performed while the card is enabled or disabled. If a disabled card passes the test, it is enabled automatically. TDS loop Test outpulsers and channels on specified loop. Tests the outpulsers and channels of the tone and digit switch at loop. Outpulsers and tones are tested with a maintenance telephone (see commands from maintenance telephone). basic-1

TDS card

Test outpulsers and channels on specified card. basic-1 When the Fast Tone and Digit Switch (FTDS) package 87 is equipped, it: tests the outpulsers and channels of the tone and digit switch outpulses 32 digits to a DTR, receives and stores the 32 digits from the DTR

152

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description tests that the time to outpulse 32 digits is within an acceptable range compares the outpulsed 32 digits with those received and displays OK if they match

Pack/Rel

TLP#loop## (857#loop##) Provide tone to last party from the tone and digit loop. TST#loop## (878#loop##) Provide test tone from loop. XCTT# L#t#c## (9288# L#t#c##) Test tone and cadence number on Conference/TDS/MFS card, where: L = loop number of Conference/TDS/MFS (NT8D17) card t = tone number c = cadence number Refer to Flexible Tone and Digit Switch cards (553-2711-180) for the Conference/TDS tone and cadence numbers.

basic-4

basic-1

xct-15

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

153

LD 34: Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver Diagnostic

154

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 13: LD 36: Trunk Diagnostic

This program allow trunks to be tested from either the system site or a remote test center. When testing from a system, individual trunks can be seized and a test call can be performed on the trunk in the normal manner. When testing from a remote test center, a speech path must be set up to monitor the testing. This is accomplished by having the system call a directory number (DN) at the test center. This allows for dial tone, outpulsing and test tones to be monitored as tests are performed on other trunks by inputting commands at the TTY. When a trunk is seized, the system prompts DN? for a DN. When the DN is input, the system calls that number automatically. When the call is answered a pure tone indicates the validity of the speech path. New trunks can be tested in the same manner with the maintenance telephone. Note: When the French (FRTA) package 197 is enabled the units on CO trunks are not busied when they are disabled. Note: When the Trunk Failure Monitor (TFM) package 182 is enabled, a failed trunk is displayed as BUSY. The enable/disable command does not enable or disable the failed trunk unit (it stays in the BUSY state).

When to use LD 36
Use LD 36 to: clear minor alarms and the maintenance display query threshold overflows for specific customers and routes reset thresholds for specific trunks query number of days since an incoming call was received for a specific customer and route or trunk query the trunk with the most number of idle days for a specific customer and route query trunks for which no disconnect supervision was received test Automatic Number Identification (ANI) trunks.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

155

LD 36: Trunk Diagnostic

Note: When defined as a midnight routine, this program searches for trunks not used during the day and updates the total number of days the trunks have been idle. Note: LD 36 can only be used for analog trunks, LD 60 must be used for diagnostics on digital trunks.

Trunk error thresholds

Resident programs monitor all calls and note apparent errors. The errors are accumulated and, if they occur consistently (exceed a threshold) on any trunk, a diagnostic message which identifies the trunk is output to the TTY or printer. The trunk should be suspected of trouble and a manual test should be performed on the trunk. A record is kept in memory for each threshold violation error message. At any time, all trunks which have been identified by such a message may be listed by entering the command LOVF for any trunk route. Once an identifying message has been printed, it will not be repeated for that trunk until the RSET command is entered for that trunk or an initialization has occurred. Potentially, a trunk may fail by not detecting incoming calls. The Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 threshold mechanism cannot be used to detect such failures so the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 maintains for each trunk a count of the number of days since an incoming call was received on each trunk. Thus, customer reports that indicate incoming calls are not being processed can initiate a check for the trunk which has been without an incoming call for the longest interval via the LMAX command. This trunk should be tested first. It is possible to determine for each trunk the number of days since an incoming call was processed via the LDIC command. Subsequent trunk tests should be performed on those trunks showing the highest counts until the trouble is located.

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 nonblocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

156

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Basic commands (LD 36)

Basic commands (LD 36)

The following commands are applicable to all Large System and CS 1000E Systems.
CALL CALL l s c u CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL DISC l s c DISU l s c u END ENLC l s c ENLU l s c u LDIC c r LDIC l s c u LMAX c r LNDS c r LOVF c r RAN c r RLS RSET l s c u STAT l s c TRK l s c u TPPM l s c u Set up monitor link with test center Set monitor link with test center on this trunk Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Disable specified card for replacement Disable specified unit Terminate test in progress Enable specified card Enable specified unit List number of days since last incoming call for specified customer and route List number of days since last incoming call on specified trunk List trunk with maximum idle days for specified customer and route List trunks with no disconnect supervision for specified customer and route List threshold overflows for specified customer and route Test recorded announcement device for specified customer and route Release trunk being tested Reset thresholds for specified trunk Check card's software status Seize trunk for testing Test the specified PPM trunk Note: If a trunk unit is controlled by APNSS, the STAT command will display the status of the D-channel.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

157

LD 36: Trunk Diagnostic

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CALL Description Set up monitor link with test center. Same as the CALL l s c command except any PTRS trunk in the system can be selected. The CALL command must be terminated using the * command. Pack/Rel basic-1

CALL l s c u

This command sets up a monitor link (call) between basic-1 the system and the test center on the trunk specified. The system prompts "DN?" for the directory number. When the PTRS directory number is entered, the system calls up that number automatically. When the call is answered, a pure tone indicates the validity of the link. This sequence can take up to 14 seconds on a trunk without answer supervision. The END command disconnects the call. The CALL l s c u command is not allowed when the diagnostic program is being run from a maintenance telephone. During the CALL command, On-Hook and Off-Hook signals from the maintenance telephone may initiate BUG105. When the monitor is enabled, a failed trunk is displayed as BUSY. The enable/disable command does not enable or disable the failed trunk unit (it stays in the BUSY state). Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or basic-1 blank. Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Disable specified card for replacement. Disable specified unit. Terminate test in progress alrm_filter-22 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1

CDSP

CMIN CMIN ALL DISC l s c DISU l s c u END ENLC l s c

basic-1 Enable specified card. If the card resides on a disabled shelf, its status is output and the enable is not performed. If the card has

158

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description been disabled by an overload, the overload status is cleared.

Pack/Rel

ENLU l s c u

Enable specified unit. If unit resides on a disabled shelf basic-1 or card, then status is output and enable is not performed. List number of days since last incoming call for specified customer (c) and route (r). List number of days since last incoming call on specified trunk. List trunk with maximum idle days for specified customer and route basic-1

LDIC c r

LDIC l s c u

basic-1

LMAX c r

basic-1

LNDS c r

List trunks with no disconnect supervision for specified basic-1 customer and route. (trunks for which no disconnect supervision was received, i.e., terminating party not going On-Hook after a call) List threshold overflows for specified customer and route. The overflows are set when the resident trunk monitor outputs a diagnostic Test recorded announcement device for specified customer and route. Release trunk being tested. Reset thresholds for specified trunk. Check card's software status. Check analog trunk card's software status Test the specified PPM trunk. This command is not applicable when the system is connected to 1 TR 6 international ISDN PRA. basic-1 basic-1 x21-basic-2 basic-1 basic-1

LOVF c r

RAN c r

basic-1

RLS RSET l s c u STAT l s c STAT tn TPPM l s c u

TRK l s c u

Seize trunk for testing. basic-1 Seizes the specified trunk for outpulsing and testing. If the command is issued from a maintenance telephone, dial tone is heard followed by outpulsing when the directory number is entered. If a trunk is to be seized for outpulsing and testing from a remote test center (not a maintenance telephone), a

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

159

LD 36: Trunk Diagnostic

Command

Description monitor link must first be set up using the CALL l s c u command. This must not be over the trunk to be tested. With the monitor link set up, the TRK l s c u command is input to select the trunk to be tested. The system then prompts with "DN?" and the directory number is input via the TTY . Normal speech path connections are made between the monitor link and the trunk being tested. Disconnect by entering END, by going On-Hook if an SL-1 telephone is used or by entering *. END also disconnects the monitor link. This command cannot be used to seize an ISL trunk.

Pack/Rel

160

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 14: Input/Output Diagnostic

This program is used to diagnose faults with disk units, Teletypewriter (TTY) or Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards. It provides enable, disable, status and test functions on these devices. Problems are indicated in IOD messages. When LD 37 is defined as a daily routine, the program runs only once every 5 days and the primary storage device is thoroughly tested. Only some of the commands in this Overlay are supported by Options 51C, 61C, and 81C. Refer to LD 137 for core commands. Refer to LD 48 for I/O ports used with the following applications: Command and Status Links (CSL) Meridian Link Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Integrated System Messaging Link Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) ports

Intelligent links (APL, HSL, and LSL)

A warning message is generated each time an intelligent link is accessed (enable, disable, test). The message is generated for the following types of links: APL ACD-D (HSL/LSL) The message allows the access to be aborted prior to performing the enable, test, etc. The warning appears in the following format: DIS TTY N (link type) LINK (status) (y/n) A response of y disables the hardware of the TTY regardless of the software status of the link. The status field provides the software status of the link. Valid status entries are: BAD = software status is invalid DOWN = link is down MAINT = link is up and in maintenance mode FULL = link is full EMPTY = link is empty NOT EMPTY= link still contains data If LD 37 is run as part of the daily routines, an IOD075 message will be output on systems equipped with disk drives. This message should be disregarded.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

161

Input/Output Diagnostic

D-channel Expansion
With the introduction of D-channel Expansion, new software allows the increase of D-channels past sixty-four. Instead of the Large System having a maximum of 16 I/O addresses, the new software allows 16 physical I/O addresses (0 - 15) per network group for D-channels defined on MSDL. With this enhancement a response to the system response GROUP is required to inform the system of the desired network group. Note: See "D-channel Expansion commands" in LD-48 or LD-96 for a complete description of these commands.

Basic commands
CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL DIS MSG DIS MSGO DIS MSI x DIS PRT x DIS TTY x Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Disable incoming message monitoring for the primary PMSI port. Disable outgoing message monitoring for the primary PMSI port. Disable Mass Storage Interface card x (not valid on Small System) Disable printer x Disable TTY x. (valid only for Card 0 Port 0 TTY on Small Systems and CS 1000S systems) Clear all test activity Enable incoming message monitoring for the primary PMSI port. Enable outgoing message monitoring for the primary PMSI port. Enable Mass Storage Interface x Enable printer x Enable TTY x Test Mass Storage unit x (not valid on Small System)

END ENL MSGI ENL MSGO ENL MSI x ENL PRT x ENL TTY x MSI x

162

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Basic commands

MSI DATA MSI RW x MSI SELF x

Test data validity in primary and backup device. (not valid on Small System) Test READ/WRITE ability of Mass Storage unit x. (not valid on Small System) Perform self-test on MSI card x and report result. (not valid on Small System) Test printer x Set the monitoring display to be in alphanumeric format. This applies to the primary PMSI port.

PRT x SET MON 0

SET MON 1

Set the monitoring display to be in hexadecimal format. This applies to the primary PMSI port.

STAT STAT LINK STAT LINK x STAT MON

Provide status of all input/output devices in system Provide status of all CDR links Provide status of CDR data link x Get the monitoring status for the primary PMSI port. This command displays the status of the message monitoring for the primary port. For example, if MSGI, MSGO, and SET MON 0 are enabled, the display would be as follows. MSGI:ON MSGO: ON ALPH

STAT MSI STAT MSI x STAT PRT STAT PRT x STAT TTY

Provide status of all MSI cards Provide status of MSI card x Provide status of all printers in system Provide status of printer x Provide status of all TTY devices in system This command enables you to get the status of the primary PMSI I/O port, and the Single Terminal Access (STA) administration terminal.

STAT TTY x

Provide status of TTY x This command also provides the status of the primary PMSI port.

STAT XSM TTY x

Provide status of the system monitor Test TTY x

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

163

Input/Output Diagnostic

Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands

The MSDL provides 4 ports for ISDN Primary Rate D-channel (DCH) and Application Module Link (AML). The MSDL commands are listed below, x is the MSDL device number (defined by prompt DNUM in LD 17). These commands are provided in Link Diagnostic (LD 48) and D-channel Diagnostic (LD 96).
DIS MSDL x (ALL) ENL MSDL x (ALL, FDL) RST MSDL x SLFT MSDL x STAT MSDL (x) (FULL) Disable MSDL device x (card) Enable MSDL device x (card, Forced Download) Reset MSDL device x Invoke self-test for MSDL device x Get status of MSDL card (x) (additional information)

Note: See "Alphabetical List of commands" in LD 48 for a complete description of these commands.

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL DIS MSG DIS MSGO Description Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Disable incoming message monitoring for the primary PMSI port. Disable outgoing message monitoring for the primary PMSI port. Pack/Rel basic-1 alrm_filter-22 basic-1 pms-19 pms-19

DIS MSDL x (ALL) Disable MSDL device x

164

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command DIS PRT x DIS TTY x END ENL MSGI ENL MSGO Disable printer x.

Description Disable TTY x. Only valid for Card 0 Port 0 TTY on Small Systems and CS 1000S systems. Clear all test activity. Enable incoming message monitoring for the primary PMSI port. Enable outgoing message monitoring for the primary PMSI port.

Pack/Rel basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 pms-19 pms-19

ENL MSDL x (ALL, FDL) Enable MSDL device x ENL PRT x ENL TTY x PRT x Enable printer x. Enable TTY x. Test printer x. Same as TTY test except that no keyboard input is expected and END command is not required. Where: * denotes that the printer is not yet available Reset MSDL device x Set the monitoring display to be in alphanumeric format. This applies to the primary PMSI port. Set the monitoring display to be in hexadecimal format. This applies to the primary PMSI port. Invoke self-test for MSDL device x Provide status of all input/output devices in system. Get the monitoring status for the primary PMSI port. This command displays the status of the message monitoring for the primary port. For example, if MSGI, MSGO, and SET MON 0 are enabled, the display would be as follows. MSGI:ON MSGO: ON ALPH basic-1 pms-19 pms-19 pms-19 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1

RST MSDL x SET MON 0 SET MON 1 SLFT MSDL x STAT STAT MON

STAT MSDL (x [FULL]) Get MSDL status STAT PRT STAT PRT x STAT TTY Provide status of all printers in system. Provide status of printer x. Provide status of all TTY devices in system. This command enables you to get the status of the primary PMSI I/O port, and the Single Terminal Access (STA) administration terminal. basic-1 basic-1 basic-1

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

165

Input/Output Diagnostic

Command STAT TTY x STAT XSM

Description Provide status of TTY x. This command also provides the status of the primary PMSI port. Provide status of the system monitor. If there are no error conditions, PWR000 is output. Otherwise, the appropriate PWR messages are output. Test TTY x. Response is:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789"#$%*!&()<>.:,.? READY FOR INPUT

Pack/Rel basic-1 xpe-15

TTY x

basic-1

Anything entered on the keyboard will be echoed until END is input.

166

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 15: LD 38: Conference Circuit Diagnostic

This program is used to detect and isolate circuit faults on the conference equipment in the system. LD 38 can detect problems on the conference circuit such as: channel faults on the network card which interfaces a conference card to the system channel faults on the conference card or IP-based conference loop conference faults associated with conferee group numbers switching faults controlling the attenuation feature. The program is used to: enable a specific conference card or IP-based conference loop disable a specific conference card or IP-based conference loop check status of channels and conferee groups clear alarms and displays The program allows complete manual control in establishing a test conference, thus allowing the user to listen for noise and distortion. This includes: selection of a specific conference card or IP-based conference loop selection of a specific conferee group stepping through all free channels and groups with special test conference. Some commands are not valid on Small Systems and CS 1000S, since the conference circuits are always enabled. Note: Loops 29 and 30 are on the CPU/CONF card and loop 31 is on the Expansion Cabinet Data Cartridge (for Small System only).

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 nonblocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

167

LD 38: Conference Circuit Diagnostic

using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

Basic commands
CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL CNFC loop CNFC MAN loop g CNFC STEP DISL loop DISX loop END ENLL loop ENLX loop Clears the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Test conference loop Set up for manual conference on conference group g Ready TTY for testing conferee groups Disable conference loop Disable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop - 1 (Large Systems) Abort all current test activity Enable conference loop Enable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop - 1 (Large Systems) List busy and disabled conferee groups on specified loop Provide status of conference card or IP-based conference loop List conference card and group used by specified TN. (Small System) List conference card or IP-based conference loop and group used by specified TN.

LCNF loop STAT loop STAT c u STAT l s c u

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CDSP Description Clears the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. Pack/Rel basic-1

168

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CMIN CMIN ALL CNFC loop

Description Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Test conference loop. Tests conference loop for channel, group and switching faults. Note: Both the conference loop and the adjacent TDS/ MFS loop must be enabled to run the conference test.

Pack/Rel alrm_filter-22 basic-1 basic-1

CNFC MAN loop g Set up for manual conference on conference group basic-1 g. Only one manual conference is be allowed at a time. The conference group range is 1-15. After this command, any telephone dialing SPRE 93 enters the conference, where SPRE is the special service prefix for the system. Going on-hook from that telephone takes it out of the conference. If going On-Hook causes the conference to go from a three-party to a two-party call processing may remove all conference equipment and establish the remaining two parties as a normal call. The END command, which normally removes all telephones in the manual conference, will no longer affect these two telephones, as they are no longer using the conference card. If the CNFC MAN command is entered from a maintenance set, the telephone automatically becomes part of the manual conference. CNFC STEP basic-1 Ready TTY for testing conferee groups. Readies the TTY into a special command mode for testing various channels and conferee groups audibly, using two telephones: one to monitor and one to act as a signal source. The CNFC MAN command should have been used previously to set up the two-party conference. Entering C on the command input device will step the conference on to the next available channel. Entering G will step to the next available conferee group. Entering an asterisk (*) will revert back to the normal command mode. Entering "END" or aborting LD 38 releases the manual conference.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

169

LD 38: Conference Circuit Diagnostic

Command DISL loop

Description Disable conference loop. For NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS cards, see ENLL command. Note: Disabling an IP conference loop on the Call Server does not change its registration status on the Media Services Controller (MSC). The disabled conference loop is not listed as a conference resource on the Call Server but it still appears in the RLM table on the MSC. You must remove the loop using LD 17 to delete its RLM table entry from the MSC.

Pack/Rel basic-1

DISX loop

Disable NT8D17 Conf/TDS/MFS card. Disables the entire combined Conference, Tone and Digit Switch, and MF Sender (XCT) card. Both the even numbered and adjacent loop are disabled, where: loop = 1, 3, 5,... 255, System with Fibre Network Fabric The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even number loop for the conference function. However, this only prevents the loop from being used by software and does not affect the hardware status of the card. The DISX and ENLX commands are recommended. The ENLX command must be used if the DISX command was used to disable the card. This command can be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46.

xct-15 fnf-25

END

Abort all current test activity. There will be a 30 second basic-1 time-out dial tone for phones still off-hook. Enable conference loop. For NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS cards the DISX and ENLX commands must be used whenever the faceplate switch of the card has been toggled. ENLL will software enable the card but the card will not be properly reset. Enabling more than 16 conference loops may cause system to lock-up. Note: Enabling or disabling an IP conference loop on the Call Server does not change its registration status on the Media Services Controller (MSC). The RLM table entry for the loop on the MSC is not impacted by the ENLL command. basic-1

ENLL loop

170

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command ENLX loop

Description

Pack/Rel

Enable NT8D17 Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop xct-15 fnf-25 - 1. Enables all functions on the NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. Both the even numbered TDS/MFS loop and adjacent conference loop are enabled, where: loop = 1, 3, 5,... 255, System with Fibre Network Fabric If one of the loops is already enabled, it is disabled and then both loops are enabled. The Conf/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is inserted. This command initiates card tests, downloads software and can be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46. The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even number loop for the conference function. However, this only prevents the loop from being used by software and does not affect the hardware status of the card. The DISX and ENLX commands are recommended. Enabling more than 16 conference loops may cause the system to lock-up.

LCNF loop

List busy and disabled conferee groups on specified loop. Provide status of conference card or IP-based conference loop. Output format is: CNFC n DSBL n BUSY = number of conference groups disabled and busy CHAN n DSBL n BUSY = number of channels disabled and busy UNEQ = card is not equipped in the system DSBL = card is disabled in software Output format for IP loop is: IPCNFC n DSBL n BUSY n REG = number of IP conference groups disabled and busy and the registration status of the Media Services Controller Conference Controller, where: - 00 = Media Services Controller Conference Controller is not properly registered with the Call Server

basic-1

STAT loop

basic-1

basic-6.50

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

171

LD 38: Conference Circuit Diagnostic

Command

Description - 16 = Maximum number of IP conferences are registered and available for use IPCHAN n DSBL n BUSY n REG = number of IP channels disabled and busy and the registration status of the Media Services Controller Conference Controller, where: - 00 = Media Services Controller Conference Controller is not properly registered with the Call Server - 30 = Maximum number of IP channels are registered and available for use

Pack/Rel

STAT c u

List conference card and group used by specified TN. (Small Systems and CS 1000S) Lists which conference card and conferee group is being used by the specified terminal number. basic-1

STAT l s c u

172

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 16: LD 39: Intergroup Switch and System Clock Generator Diagnostic
The Intergroup Switch (IGS) and System Clock Generator (SCG) or Clock Controller (CC) diagnostic applies to Multi Group systems. It is used to: determine the status of any Peripheral Signaling, Intergroup Switch (IGS), System Clock Generator (SCG) or Clock Controller (CC) card disable and enable any PS, IGS, SCG or CC card switch the system clock from one SCG or CC to another clear minor alarm indications and the maintenance display on the active CPU All SCG commands can be used for Clock Controllers, although LD 60 is normally used when DTI, CPI or PRI features are installed

Group, loop, and Peripheral Signaling card relationship

Group 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 Shelf 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 PS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Loops 0-15 16-31 32-47 48-63 64-79 80-95 96-111 112-127 128-143 144-159 160-175 176-191

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

173

LD 39: Intergroup Switch and System Clock Generator Diagnostic

Group 6 6 7 7

Shelf 0 1 0 1

PS 12 13 14 15

Loops 192-207 208-223 224-239 240-255

Fibre Network Fabric

During the process of enabling FIJI card, the following tests will be performed: I/O test Check card ID Check Control Status Register Connection memory test for FIJI card Synchronize connection memory for active calls in that group If the card passes the tests, it will be enabled; otherwise, proper error message will be printed. The Fibre Network Fabric extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 nonblocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

Basic commands
ARCV ON/OFF ALRD x CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL DIS ALRM x y (z) Set or reset auto-recovery operation for ring Turn alarm display on or off for all FIJI cards. Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers Disable alarm z (all) for FIJI in group x, side y

174

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Basic commands

DIS FIJI x y DIS IGS x DIS RALM DIS RING x DIS SCG x DISI IGS x DSPS x END ENL ALRM x y (z)

Disables FIJI in group x, side y Disables IGS card x (0 to 19) Disable all alarms for all FIJI cards in ring x Disables all FIJI cards on side x Disable SCG card x (0 or 1) Disables IGS card x (0 to 19) when idle Disable PS card x Stop current operation or test

Enable alarm z (all) for FIJI in group x, side y ENL FIJI x y Enables FIJI in group x, side y

ENL FIJI x y FDL Enables FIJI in group x, side y with Force download. ENL IGS x ENL RALM x ENL RING x ENL SCG x ENPS x IDC x y RSET RSTR SCLK SCLK FRCE STAT ALRM x y Enables IGS card x (0 to 19) Enable all alarms for all FIJI cards in ring x Enables all FIJI cards on side x Enable SCG x (0 or 1) Disable PS card x Get cardid of FIJI card in group x, side y Reset threshold for switchover functionality. Restore Ring(s) Switch clock to other SCG Force clock to switch to other SCG Query alarm condition for FIJI card in group x, side y

STAT ALRM x y FULL Query status of all alarms (active and inactive) for FIJI card in group x, side y STAT FIJI x y Get status of FIJI card in group x, side y

STAT FIJI x y FULL Get status of FIJI card in group x, side y and display the card ID, firmware versions, and SONET status. STAT IGS x Get status of IGS card x (0 to 19)

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

175

LD 39: Intergroup Switch and System Clock Generator Diagnostic

STAT PER x STAT RING x STAT SCG x SWRG y TEST 360 x y z TEST ALL TEST BKPL x y

Print status of PS card x Get status of FIJI cards on side x Print status of SCG x (0 or 1) Switch call processing to ring y Perform 360 test on FIJI card in group x (0-7), side Y (0 or 1) for time z (in 2 second intervals) Perform FIJI diagnostic test Perform Backplane Test on Group X, Side Y

TEST CMEM x y Perform Connection Memory test on the FIJI in group x (0-7) side y (0 or 1). TEST FIJI x y Self-test FIJI card in group x (0-7), side y (0-1)

TEST LINK Gt Gr S <D> Perform Link test to identify FIJI hardware faults and speechpath problems

Alphabetical list of commands

Command ARCV ON/OFF Set or reset auto-recovery operation for ring ALRD x CDSP Alarm display for all FIJI cards where x = ON or OFF fnf-25 Description Pack/ Rel fnf-25

Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or basic-1 blank. Clears minor alarm for all customers Clears minor alarm for all customers alrm_filter-22 basic-1 fnf-25 Disable alarm z (all) for FIJI in group x, side y

CMIN CMIN ALL DIS ALRM x y (z)

DIS FIJI x y DIS IGS x

Disables FIJI in group x (0-7), side y (0-1) Disables IGS card x (0 to 19).

fnf-25 basic-1

176

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command DIS RING x DIS SCG x

Description Disable all FIJI cards on side x (0-1) Disable SCG card x (0 or 1). Not applicable for NTRB53 Clock Controller. Use LD 60 instead.

Pack/ Rel fnf-25 basic-1 basic-25.4

DISI IGS x

Disables IGS card x (0 to 19) when idle. basic-1 Use of this command is recommended instead of DIS IGS, which interrupts calls in progress. The command's progress can be monitored by using the appropriate STAT command. The command's completion is indicated by an output of ISR043 on the maintenance terminal. Disable PS card x (0 to 15). Where: x = 0-15, System with Fibre Network Fabric basic-1 fnf-25

DSPS x

END ENL ALRM x y (z)

Stop current operation or test.

basic-1 fnf-25

Enable alarm z (all) for FIJI in group x (0-7), side y (0-1) ENL FIJI x y ENL FIJI x y FDL Enables FIJI in group x (0-7), side y (0-1) with Force download. ENL IGS x ENL RING x ENL SCG x Enables IGS card x (0 to 19). Enables all FIJI cards on side x (0-1) Enable SCG x (0 or 1). Not applicable for NTRB53 Clock Controller. Use LD 60 instead. Disable PS card x (0 to 15). Get cardid of FIJI card in group x (0-7), side y (0-1) Reset threshold for switchover functionality. basic-1 fnf-25 basic-1 basic-25.4 Enables FIJI in group x (0-7), side y (0-1) fnf-25 fnf-25

ENPS x IDC x y RSET RSTR

basic-1 fnf-25 fnf-25

RestoreRing(s). Restore the rings to the best possible fnf-25 state (best to worst) as follows:

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

177

LD 39: Intergroup Switch and System Clock Generator Diagnostic

Command

Description Both Rings DRIVES HALF (Normal state) Ring 1 DRIVES FULL - Ring 0 DRIVES NONE Ring 0 DRIVES FULL - Ring 1 DRIVES N0NE SURVIVAL state Note: This command can be issued with the rings in any state other than normal (DRIVES HALF)

Pack/ Rel

SCLK

Switch clock to other SCG. Functions with NTRB53 Clock Controller Note: Wait 2 to 3 minutes between clock switches. Ensure both clock controllers are locked by using SSCK (LD 60) before a manual clock switch is performed.

basic-1 basic-25.4

SCLK FRCE

Force clock to switch to other SCG. Functions with NTRB53 Clock Controller Note: Switch occurs regardless of 1 minute clock switch timer being set, or a FIJI alarm preventing a switch is on.

basic-3.0

STAT ALRM x y Query alarm condition for FIJI card in group x, side y. This will display current state of alarms and whether they are disabled or not. STAT ALRM x y FULL

fnf-25

Query status of all alarms (active and inactive) for FIJI fnf-25 card in group x, side y If the X parameter is omitted, the individual alarm status for each FIJI in ring Y is printed, with inactive (OFF) alarms suppressed. Note: The NEWK and NEWZ alarms are always printed. If both X and Y parameters are omitted, the alarm status is printed out for both rings.

178

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command STAT FIJI x y

Description

Pack/ Rel

Get status of FIJI card in group x (0-7), side y (0-1). fnf-25 The FIJI card status and the number of busy junctors will be displayed. Note: x and y are optional parameters.

STAT FIJI x y FULL Get status of FIJI card in group x (0-7), side y (0-1). The FIJI card status, the number of busy junctors, the card ID, the firmware versions, and the SONET status will be displayed. Note: x and y are optional parameters. STAT IGS x

fnf-25

Get status of IGS card x (0 to 19). basic-1 The response of "x DSBL y BUSY" indicates the number of junctor timeslots disabled or busy associated with the specified IGS card. Print status of PS card x (0 to 9). Possible responses: DSBL: NOT RESPONDING = PS card x is either missing, faulty or disabled via the faceplate switch. If there is a fault in the extender pair for the network shelf, the status of the PS card will also be DSBL: NOT RESPONDING. DSBL: RESPONDING = The PS card is disabled and responding to the CPU. The PS may have been disabled by manual request (DSPS) or the associated extender pair may have been manually disabled. If neither of these conditions exist, the card may have been disabled because of an overload condition on the associated shelf. Check for OVD messages appearing in previous TTY output. An attempt to enable a PS card which was disabled because of an overload may result in a recurrence of the overload condition: the system's service may be impaired for approximately 2 minutes. Where: x = 0-15, System with Fibre Network Fabric basic-1 fnf-25

STAT PER x

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

179

LD 39: Intergroup Switch and System Clock Generator Diagnostic

Command STAT RING x

Description Get status of Ring on Side X (0 to 1). State of RING and state of FIJI cards will be displayed. How many times a switchover took place will be displayed. Print status of SCG x (0 or 1). Prints normal status of NTRB53 (not full status) Switch call processing to ring y (0 to 1). This makes ring y drive all 960 inter-group timeslots. Perform 360 test on FIJI card in group x (0-7), side y (0 or 1) for time z (in 2 second intervals) Note: The 360 test sends a test pattern on timeslot 1 thru all FIJI cards on the ring and back to the sending FIJI testing transmission through the whole ring. Output represents success or fail for links 0-7, 8-15, 16-23, 24-31. Example 000000FF indicates failure on links 0-7.

Pack/ Rel fnf-25

STAT SCG x

basic-1 basic-25.4 fnf-25

SWRG y

TEST 360 x y z

fnf-25

TEST ALL

Perform FIJI diagnostic test. Note: Checks all FIJI cards in the system for FIJI hardware faults and speech path problems. The diagnostic test can also be added to the daily routine by adding LD 39 to the DROL prompt in LD 17.

basic-3.0

TEST BKPL x y Perform Backplane test on group x, side y. fnf-25 The specified FIJI card writes a specific pattern to the backplane and reads it back. Result: Each link (0-31) is displayed with PASS or FAIL TEST CMEM x y Perform Connection Memory test on the GFIJI in group (0-7) side y (0 or1). Card must be in disable state. TEST FIJI x y Self-test FIJI card in group x (0-7), side y (0-1) basic-3.0 fnf-25

TEST LINK Gt Gr S <D> Perform Link test to identify FIJI hardware faults and speechpath problems, where:

180

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description Gt = the transmitting group Gr = the receiving group S = the side <D> = the duration parameter in seconds (maximum 10 seconds). If not entered, a default duration is used. Result: Each link (0-31) is displayed with PASS or FAIL

Pack/ Rel

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

181

LD 39: Intergroup Switch and System Clock Generator Diagnostic

182

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 17: LD 43: Equipment Datadump

This program is used to keep data on the system storage device up to date. When the datadump program is invoked, data in the read/write memory (including any that has been changed or added) is written to the storage device at the reserved (or specified, for a Co-resident CS and SS configuration) location reserved for it. The program can be invoked daily as part of the daily routines or loaded manually. An incremental datadump occurs during the daily routines if database changes have been made. Options 61C, and 81C utilize two CMDUs and disk redundancy, LD 43 commands apply to both sides of the system. Refer to the specific commands for the differences between Options 61C, or 81C and other systems. For general information, see Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning, NN43021-310 . Following a successful EDD on Options 61C, and 81C, the "HI" (Hardware Infrastructure) string is output. DATADUMP COMPLETE is output after completing the data dumps and backups to Z Drive. DATADOWNLOAD COMPLETE is output after the databases are sent to the SIPE cabinets.

When the datadump fails

In the event of an unsuccessful initial dump, the office data on the tape or disk is suspect. Another datadump with spool option should be done on the same tape or disk; if successful, a transient error is indicated and normal procedures can be resumed. If this second attempt also fails, DO NOT attempt another datadump until the fault is isolated and corrected. If the storage medium is not proved faulty and the storage device appears serviceable, datadumping to an OLD tape or disk, if available, may help to pinpoint the problem. Except during the troubleshooting phase, storage medium which has failed to datadump successfully must not be left in the storage device. Should a SYSLOAD occur with such a storage medium, the load may terminate abnormally with unpredictable results.

Low memory warning

Unprotected data store equal in size to the length of the records being written (for example, 512 words) must be available to the datadump program.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

183

LD 43: Equipment Datadump

A low memory warning message (SCH603) is issued when spare unprotected data store falls below a given threshold. Once this warning message has been issued, it is not possible to perform a datadump as the system requires spare unprotected data store equivalent to the size of a record on the storage medium (for example, 512 words). Users should ensure that these amounts of spare unprotected data store are available before attempting to perform a datadump.

Basic commands
The following commands are applicable to Large System and CS 1000E Systems.
BKO xxx BKR xx DAT Copy data from primary to backup device Invoke database-replication operation. Print the data issue and creation date of the primary and backup database Invoke datadump program Clear datadump inhibit flag Save CND names (use prior to datadump) Dump patch Get patch Save AWU, RMS and MR data (prior to dump) Inhibits write check: caution Inhibit database backup Inhibit tape far-end spool Write tape data records Complete data dump and bypass software audit Spool tape to farend Invoke CCBR backup process

EDD EDD CLR EDD CN EDD DP xx xx ..xx EDD GP EDD HM EDD IWC EDD NBK EDD NS EDD NX EDD SA EDD SP EDD CCBR PBX CF6 (ALLOWED)

Bit dumped with PBX data block RES xxx Restore files to the primary device from the external backup device Note: This command requires a system INI for restored files to take effect. RSR xx yy SWP Restore the database received from the primary system. Swap (exchange) main and ".bak" data files on the primary flash drive

184

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command BKO xxx Description Pack/Rel

basic-19 The file holding the MIB-II variables, System Navigation variables, and community name strings is copied from the primary device to the backup (external storage) device. Where xxx = removable storage device type. RMD = Compact Flash device USB = USB memory stick Note: This parameter only applies when the Call Processor and SS applications are co-resident on a CP PM server. basic-6.00

BKR xx

Invoke database-replication operation, where: xx = badkup rule number This command is typically entered on the primary system for replication to the secondary system.

grprim-4.0

DAT

Print the creation date of the main, secondary, or backup database.

basic-18

EDD

Invoke datadump program basic-1 The Call Server MIB-II variables, System Navigation variables and community name strings are dumped to disk as a file when this command is executed. As well, this file is backed up to the A: drive floppy or to the internal Z: drive. Invoke datadump program basic-7.00 The Call Server data in the read/write memory (including data that has been changed or added) is written to the storage device at the reserved location as a file when the EDD command is executed. These files are backed-up to the following internal or external storage location:

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

185

LD 43: Equipment Datadump

Command

Description Removable Storage Media (Floppy Disk/Compact Flash or USB memory stick depends on the system platform) Internal /u/ccbr directory as ccbr.gz file used for Customer Configuration Backup and Restore feature if CCBR option is included as part of the EDD command. Important: CCBR.GZ file is not generated during the default data dump. The CCBR.GZ file can be generated by using the EDD option command (EDD CCBR). Internal /u/bkdb/backup directory as bkdata.gz file for Geographic Redundancy feature if Geographic Redundancy Primary Call Server Package (404) is equipped and ABKUP = IMM in Geographic Redundancy Data Base Replication Control (GRDRC in LD 117).

Pack/Rel

EDD CLR

basic-1 Clear datadump inhibit flag and do a datadump This flag is set because SYSLOAD or the conversion programs detect incomplete or inconsistent equipment data. Exercise caution since the use of this option may result in incorrect data being written. Save CND names. EDD CN saves the names associated with DNs for Caller's Name Display. Use Prior to datadump. basic-1

EDD CN

EDD DP xx xx xx... Dump patch Customer data and the specified patches (xx xx...xx) are dumped onto disk. If no patch numbers are specified, then only customer data is dumped. EDD GP Get patches The non-patch customer data from the core memory is placed on the new disk without overwriting the preloaded patches on the disk. Any patches in the system are also ignored.

basic-18

ph-6

EDD HM

Saves Automatic Wake Up (AWU), Room Status basic-1 (RMS) and Message Registration (MR) data. Use prior to datadump, then system load. This should be performed prior to a SYSLOAD or software conversion.

186

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command EDD IWC

Description

Pack/Rel

basic-1 Inhibits write check. Caution: for Emergency Use Only. Inhibits write check. This command is useful when the standard commands for datadump fail and end-of-file cannot be found. It writes an end-of-file on tape and allows other commands to be invoked. Inhibit database backup. basic-1 Indicates that a database backup should not be done after a datadump. (Applicable to hard disk storage with floppy disk backup). basic-1 Inhibit tape far-end spool. Tape will not spool to the far-end and will not perform write test. Default option is SP. Overlay program cannot be aborted until writing has either been completed or has failed. This command applies to systems equipped with tape units. Writes tape data records consistent in size with predefined system values. Default option is NX. basic-1

EDD NBK

EDD NS

EDD NX

EDD SA

This command is used to complete the data dump and basic-18 bypass the software audit of Peripheral Controller and superloop data. Spool tape to far-end. This command applies to basic-1 systems equipped with tape units. Spools tape to the far-end in order to even the tension on the tape. Also writes a test record after the end of existing data to check for any write problems. If errors occur during test, data should remain intact. basic-1

EDD SP

PBX CF6 (ALLOWED) Bit dumped with PBX data block. RES xxx

The file created to store the MIB-II variables, System basic-19 Navigation variables, and community name strings is restored from the backup (external storage) device to the primary device. Where xxx = removable storage device type. RMD = Compact Flash device USB = USB memory stick basic-6.00

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

187

LD 43: Equipment Datadump

Command

Description Note: This parameter only applies when the Call Processor and SS applications are co-resident on a CP PM server. Note: This command requires a system INI for restored files to take effect.

Pack/Rel

RSR xx yy

Restore the database received from the primary system, where: xx = backup rule number on the local system yy = database version number (1). The latest database version is assigned the highest priority. For example: yy = 1 restores the latest backup database; yy = 2 restores the second latest database version. This command is typically entered on the secondary system to restore a database received from the primary system.

grsec-4.0

SWP

basic-19 The new file created to store the MIB-II variables, System Navigation variables, and community name strings is swapped (exchanged) with the ".bak" file on the primary device.

188

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 18: LD 44: Software Audit

The audit program (LD 44) monitors system operation and provides an indication of the general state of system operation. The program is concerned mostly with the system software. When a software problem is encountered, the program outputs an AUD message and attempts to clear the problem automatically. The audit program is changed to recognize and handle various scenarios added by Music or Recorded Announcement Broadcast features. The following checks are performed by audit for broadcasting trunks: Check the list of call registers connected to the broadcasting trunk and verify that the size of this list matches the number of callers connected according to the counter in the unprotected trunk block ensure that a trunk marked as broadcasting does indeed have more than one caller connected to it go through the list of call registers connected to the broadcasting trunk and ensure that the list is linked correctly from beginning to end all call registers in the broadcasting trunk call register list should point back to the broadcasting trunk various checks are done on the connections for a broadcasting call check through the list of call registers queued for and ensure the list is linked correctly from beginning to end

Running software audit

The Audit program is enabled as a Background Program or Daily Routine in the configuration record. See prompts BACKGROUND and DROL in LD 17. To load the Audit program manually, enter: LD 44 Rx x is the number of audit passes required. Enter 0 for continuous auditing. R and x must be separated by a space or the system responds with:
AUD REQ ERR. AUDIT

The Meridian Mail MP data base audit (co-administration) is run during Audit if a data base mismatch is known by the system, or if it is being run manually.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

189

LD 44: Software Audit

190

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 19: LD 45: Background Signaling and Switching Diagnostic

This program performs network continuity tests and outputs detected problems via BSD messages. The Manual Continuity Test (MCT) allows you to isolate intermittent faulty points reported by the Background Continuity Test (BCT). For example, BCT reports faults between A, B, and C. Run the MCT between A and B, then between B and C to determine how often it fails. When run in background, LD 45 tests the following on all enabled network loops: the continuity of the speech path between each network card and its associated IPE shelves is tested the continuity of the speech path between all network card is tested non functioning paths between network cards are identified Note: When running in background, only new faults detected are output. Memory and signaling tests are only performed in LD 30. If LD 45 is included in background or midnight routines it is recommended that LD 30 also be included. By including LD 30, bad memory areas will be flagged before the continuity tests of LD 45 which will improve fault isolation. On Small Systems and CS 1000S systems, this Overlay program is not available. Use Overlay program 30 (LD 30) to perform signaling tests on these systems.

Using the manual extended continuity (XCON) command

The XCON command is used to test various communication paths on or between NT8D04 Network, NT8D01 Controller, Multipurpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP), S/T-Interface Line (SILC) and U-Interface Line (UILC) cards. There are 10 paths XCON may test. Figure 6: XCON test paths on page 194 and Figure 7: XCON test paths (continued) on page 195 on Figure 7: XCON test paths (continued) on page 195 show 8 of these paths. Only 1 XCON test at a time can be run on a superloop. To begin a manual extended continuity test, enter one of the following: XCON 0 = perform test once and output results XCON H hhh = repeat test for hhh hours (hhh = 1-255) XCON M mmm = repeat test for mmm minutes (mmm = 1-255) XCON S sss = repeat test for sss seconds (sss = 1-255)

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

191

LD 45: Background Signaling and Switching Diagnostic

After you enter a XCON command, you are prompted for a combination of the values listed below. The responses to these prompts determine the test performed. Prompt Response Comment DSLT xx Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127) for Network Card associated with detector Controller. GSLT xx Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127) for Network Card associated with generator Controller. JUNC x Junctor number (0-7). LBTN l s c u Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit) to be loopback point. LBTY N/P Loopback address: N = Network Card, P = Controller or terminal. Note: When using XCON Test 9 for ISDN BRI, the possible responses for LBTY are 3 or 4. 3 indicated the test will take place with the DSL enabled; 4 performs the test with the DSL disabled. PATT x T est pattern number (0-7). Signal sent by the generator to the detector. You should run a test several times with varying patterns. SLOT xx Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127). Enter return (<CR>) to select a random timeslot. SUPL l Superloop number (0-156, in multiples of 4). TAG x Tag number (1-15) returned by the system. Tag number 0 is used for one-shot tests (XCON 0). TEST x Test case number (1-8). TN l s c u Controller or terminal (loop, shelf, card, unit) to be the detector. For Controller, enter any valid TN on Controller's shelf. For special loopback channel enter: l s 99 0. TYPD N/P Pattern detector: N = Network Card, P = Controller. TYPG N/P Pattern generator: N = Network Card, P = Controller.

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 nonblocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only. For an existing fully configured machine (5 groups), the existing software takes about 4 hours to complete all 10080 inter-group continuity tests. When the number of groups grows from 5

192

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Using the manual extended continuity (XCON) command

to 8 and the number of junctors between any two groups grows to 32, the number of tests grows to 112896 which will take about 3 days and this is infeasible. The goal is to reduce the number of inter-group continuity tests to achieve the same diagnostic and maintenance functionalities within the same time frame. With new hardware support, this new background continuity test for 8 groups can be done in parallel, instead of sequentially; however, the user interfaces remain unchanged.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

193

LD 45: Background Signaling and Switching Diagnostic

Figure 6: XCON test paths

194

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Basic commands

Figure 7: XCON test paths (continued)

Basic commands
TEST (loop) Perform a complete continuity test for one or all loops. Unpluged cards are not tested for continuity. Perform Extended Continuity test once and output results. User will be prompted for TEST number. XCON sub-prompts on page 196 Repeat Extended Continuity test for hhh hours (hhh = 1-255). User will be prompted for TEST number. XCON sub-prompts on page 196 Repeat Extended Continuity test for mm minutes (mm = 1-255). User will be prompted for TEST number. XCON sub-prompts on page 196 Repeat Extended Continuity test for ss seconds (ss = 1-255). User will be prompted for TEST number. XCON sub-prompts on page 196

XCON 0

XCON H hhh

XCON M mmm

XCON S sss

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

195

LD 45: Background Signaling and Switching Diagnostic

XINF XSTA x XSTP x

Display the tag numbers of all running and completed continuity tests Get the status of manual continuity test with TAG = x Stop manual continuity test with TAG = x

XCON sub-prompts
TEST = 1 Test Path Network Card to Controller. This test uses the Network Card (NT8D04) as a pattern generator and the Controller (NT8D01) as the detector. Response 1 SL x N loop xxx Description Network Card to Controller Test superloop (SL) Pattern (0-7) Network Card is generator 0-156 in multiples of 4 Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127. SLOT appears if Remote IPE package 286 is not equipped. Controller is detector E1 Carrier = Timesot : 0 = 5-31 ; 1 = 37-63 ; 2 = 69-95 T-1 Carrier = Timesot : 0 = 5-25 ; 1 = 37-57 ; 2 = 69-89 Valid TN on the Controller Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system Pack/Rel xpe-15

Prompt TEST TYPE PATT TYPG SUPL SLOT

TYPD TN TAG

P lscu xx

TEST = 2 Test Path Controller to Network Card. This test uses the Controller (NT8D01) as a pattern generator and the Network Card (NT8D04) as the detector. Response 2 x P lscu Description Controller to Network Card Pattern (0-7) Controller is generator Valid TN on the Controller Pack/Rel xpe-15

Prompt TEST PATT TYPG TN

196

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

XCON sub-prompts

TEST = 2 TYPD SUPL SLOT TAG N loop xxx xx Network Card is detector 0-156 in multiples of 4 Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127 Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

TEST = 3 Test Path Network Card to different Network Card. This test uses the Network Card (NT8D04) as a pattern generator and another Network Card as the detector. Response 3 x N loop xxx N loop xxx x xx Description Network Card to different Network Card Pattern (0-7) Network Card is generator 0-156 in multiples of 4 Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127 Network Card is detector 0-156 in multiples of 4 Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127 Junctor if Network cards in different groups Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system Pack/Rel xpe-15

Prompt TEST PATT TYPG SUPL SLOT TYPD SUPL SLOT JUNC TAG

TEST = 4 Test Path Controller to different Controller. This test uses a Controller (NT8D01) as a pattern generator and another Controller as a detector. The pattern is sent through one or two Network Cards (NT8D04). Response 4 x P lscu P lscu xxx Description Controller to different Controller Pattern (0-7) Controller is generator Valid TN on the Controller Controller is detector Valid TN on the Controller Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127 on generator Network Card Pack/Rel xpe-15

Prompt TEST PATT TYPG TN TYPD TN GSLT

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

197

LD 45: Background Signaling and Switching Diagnostic

TEST = 4 DSLT JUNC TAG xxx x xx Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127 on detector Network Card Junctor if Network cards in different groups Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

TEST = 5 Test Path Network Card to Network Card (loop back at backplane). This test uses the Network Card (NT8D04) as a pattern generator and detector. The pattern is sent to the network backplane and back. Response 5 x N loop xxx N loop xxx N xx Description Network Card to Network Card (loop back at backplane) pattern (0-7) Network Card is generator 0-156 in multiples of 4 timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127 Network Card is detector 0-156 in multiples of 4 timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127 through network backplane tag number (1-15) assigned by the system Pack/Rel xpe-15

Prompt TEST PATT TYPG SUPL SLOT TYPD SUPL SLOT LBTY TAG

TEST = 6 Test Path Network Card to Network Card (loop back through Controller). This test uses the Network Card (NT8D04) as a pattern generator and detector. The pattern is looped back through a Controller (NT8D01). Response 6 x N loop xxx N loop Description Network Card to Network Card (loop back through Controller) Pattern (0-7) Network Card is generator 0-156 in multiples of 4 Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127 Network Card is detector 0-156 in multiples of 4 Pack/Rel xpe-15

Prompt TEST PATT TYPG SUPL SLOT TYPD SUPL

198

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

XCON sub-prompts

TEST = 6 SLOT LBTY LBTN TAG xxx P l s 99 0 xx Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127 Through Controller Special Controller loop back channel Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

TEST = 7 Test Path Controller to Controller (special loop back channel). This test uses the Controller (NT8D01) as a pattern generator and detector. The pattern is looped back through a special loop back channel. Response 7 x P l s 99 0 xx Description Controller to Controller (special loop back channel) Pattern (0-7) Controller is generator Special Controller loop back channel Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system Pack/Rel xpe-15

Prompt TEST PATT TYPG TN TAG

TEST = 8 Test Path Network Card to Network Card (special loop back channel). This test uses the Network Card (NT8D04) as a pattern generator and detector. The pattern is looped back through a special channel which is specified by timeslot 128. Response 8 x N loop 128 xx Description Network Card to Network Card (special loop back channel) Pattern (0-7) Network Card is generator 0-156 in multiples of 4 Special Network loop back channel Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system Pack/Rel xpe-15

Prompt TEST PATT TYPG SUPL SLOT TAG

TEST = 9 Test Path Loop back test on Digital Subscriber Loop. This test uses the MISP as a pattern generator and detector. The pattern goes through the Network and Controller Card and is looped back at a single DSL. Both B- and D-channels are looped back. Pack/Rel bri-18

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

199

LD 45: Background Signaling and Switching Diagnostic

TEST = 9 Prompt TEST PATT TYPG SUPL SLOT LBTY LBTN TAG Response 9 x N loop 128 3 lscd xx Description Loop back test on Digital Subscriber Loop Pattern (0-7) Network Card is generator 0-156 in multiples of 4 Special Network loop back channel DSL is requested for loop back Address of DSL Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

TEST = 10 Test Path Loop back test on BRI line card. This test uses the MISP as a pattern generator and detector. The pattern goes through the Network and Controller Card and is looped back at the line card level (i.e., bus loop back). Both B- and D-channels are looped back. Response 10 x 5 loop 128 4 lscd xx Description Loop back test on BRI line card Pattern (0-7) MISP is generator 0-156 in multiples of 4 Special Network loop back channel loop back at line card Address of DSL Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system Pack/Rel bri-18

Prompt TEST PATT TYPG SUPL SLOT LBTY LBTN TAG

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

200

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command TEST (loop)

Description

Pack/Rel

Perform a complete continuity test for one or all loops. Performs basic-1 a complete test and reports all faults detected (even if they have been previously reported), where: loop = 0-225, System with Fibre network Fabric fnf-25

XCON 0

Perform Extended Continuity test once, then output results. xpe-15 After entering this command, you will then be able to select and conduct 1 of 10 possible XCON tests. These XCON tests begin on XCON sub-prompts on page 196. xpe-15 Perform Extended Continuity test for hhh (1-255) hours, then output results. After entering this command, you will then be able to select and conduct 1 of 10 possible XCON tests. These XCON tests begin on XCON sub-prompts on page 196.

XCON H hhh

XCON M mmm Perform Extended Continuity test for mmm (1-255) minutes, then output results. After entering this command, you will then be able to select and conduct 1 of 10 possible XCON tests. These XCON tests begin on XCON sub-prompts on page 196. XCON S sss Perform Extended Continuity test for sss (1-255) seconds, then output results. After entering this command, you will then be able to select and conduct 1 of 10 possible XCON tests. These XCON tests begin on XCON sub-prompts on page 196. XINF

xpe-15

xpe-15

Display the tag numbers of all running and completed tests. The xpe-15 output format (where T# = Tag Number) is:

RUNNING: T# T# T# T#. . . . DONE: T# T# T# T#. . . . SUSPENDED: T# T# T# T#. . . . FREE: x x (number of free tags available [0-15])
XSTA x Get the status of manual continuity test with TAG = x. xpe-15 Individual tests are identified by the tag number the system generates when you complete a sequence of test prompts. See also the XINF and XSTP commands. The test status provides the following format information: PATT x GENERATE: TYPG N/P Pattern number Generator information follows: Network or Controller as pattern generator

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

201

LD 45: Background Signaling and Switching Diagnostic

Command SUPL x SLOT x DETECT: TYPD N/P SUPL x SLOT x RESULTS:

Description Superloop number or TN on Controller Timeslot Detector information follows: Network or Controller as pattern detector Superloop number or TN on Controller Timeslot Results follow:

Pack/Rel

TESTS COMPLETED: xxxxxxxx XSTP x xpe-15 Stop manual continuity test with TAG = x. Individual tests are identified by the tag numbers. The XSTP command outputs the test status. See also XINF and XSTA commands.

Alphabetical list of XCON sub-prompts

Prompt DSLT xxx Response Description Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127) for Network Card associated with detector Controller Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127) for Network Card associated with generator Controller Junctor number (0-7) Where: x = 0-31, System with Fibre Network Fabric LBTN lsculscd Loop back Controller or Terminal Number. Where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit, and d = Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL). Loop back Type (3, 4, N, or P). Where: 3 = Digital Subscriber Loop 4 = Line Card N = Network Card P = Controller or Terminal

GSLT

xxx

JUNC

LBTY

202

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of XCON sub-prompts

Prompt PATT SLOT x xxx

Response

Description Test pattern (0-7) sent by the generator to the detector Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127). Enter return (<CR>) to select a random timeslot. For special loop back slot enter: 128. Superloop number in multiples of 4, where: loop = 0-156 loop = 0-252, System with Fibre Network Fabric

SUPL

loop

TAG

xx

Tag number (0-15) returned by the system. Tag number 0 is used for one-shot tests (XCON 0). XCON test path (1-10). Where: 1 = Network Card to Controller 2 = Controller to Network Card 3 = Network Card to different Network Card 4 = Controller to different Controller 5 = Network Card to Network Card (loop back at backplane) 6 = Network Card to Network Card (loop back through Controller) 7 = Controller to Controller (special loop back channel) 8 = Network Card to Network Card (special loop back channel) 9 = Loop back test on Digital Subscriber loop 10 =Loop back test on BRI line card

TEST

xx

xxx

Perform a complete continuity test for one or all loops. Performs a complete test and reports all faults detected (even if they have been previously reported), where: xxx = 0-255, System with Fibre Network Fabric

TN

lscu

Controller or terminal (loop, shelf, card, unit) to be the detector. For Controller, enter any valid TN on Controller's shelf. For special loop back channel enter: l s 99 0.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

203

LD 45: Background Signaling and Switching Diagnostic

Prompt

Response Where:

Description l = 0-255, System with Fibre Network Fabric

TYPD

Type of Pattern Detector (N or P). Where: N = Network Card and P = Controller. Type of Pattern Generator (5, N, or P). Where: 5 = Multipurpose ISDN Signaling Processor N = Network Card P = Controller

TYPG

204

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 20: LD 46: Multifrequency Sender Diagnostic for Automatic Number Identification
This program is used to maintain the Multifrequency Sender card. The Multifrequency Sender card provides multifrequency signals of Automatic Number Identification (ANI) digits over Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks to a toll switching CAMA, Traffic Operator Position System (TOPS) or Traffic Service Position System (TSPS). The MFS diagnostic program can be run in background, during the daily routines, or manually to enter commands. It performs the following tests: checks that the MF Sender card responds to system I/O functions tests the 30-channel memory locations, the 480 (30 x 16) digit buffer memory locations and the 64 First-in, First-out locations exercises all 15-digit codes with digit strings from 2 to 16 digits long and verifies both the 68 ms pulse width and whether each string outpulses to completion No check is possible on MFS frequencies used in each tone burst due to the lack of receivers in the system. Also, no check can be made as to whether the correct digits are being outpulsed. Overlay 46 is not supported on Small Systems and CS 1000S systems.

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric Expansion extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 non-blocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

205

LD 46: Multifrequency Sender Diagnostic for Automatic Number Identification

Basic commands
CDSP CMAJ CMIN CMIN ALL Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers.

DISL loop DISX loop Disable MFS loop Disable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop + 1 END ENLL loop ENLX loop MFS loop STAT loop TONE loop TONE loop ALL Stop all current testing Enable loop Enable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop + 1 Test and enable MFS loop Get status of MFS loop Enter input mode to provide MF tone bursts Provide MF tone bursts for all digits on specified loop

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CDSP Description Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. Clear major alarm, reset power fail transfer and clear power fault alarm. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Pack/Rel basic-1

CMAJ

basic-1

CMIN CMIN ALL DISL loop

alrm_filter-22 basic-1

Disable MFS loop. For NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS basic-1 cards, see ENLL command, where: loop = 0-254, System with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

206

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command DISX loop

Description Disable NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop + 1. Disables the entire combined Conference, Tone and Digit Switch, and MF Sender (XCT) card. Both the even numbered TDS/MFS loop and adjacent conference loop are disabled, where: loop = 0, 2, 4,. . . 254, System with Fibre Network Fabric The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even number loop for the TDS/MFS functions. However, this only prevents the loop from being used by software and does not affect the hardware status of the card. The ENLX and DISX commands are recommended. The ENLX command must be used if the DISX command was used to disable the card. This command can be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46, where: loop = 0-254, System with Fibre Network Fabric

Pack/Rel xct-15

fnf-25

fnf-25 basic-1 basic-1

END ENLL loop

Stop all current testing. Enable loop. For NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS cards the DISX and ENLX commands must be used whenever the faceplate switch of the card has been toggled. ENLL will software enable the card but the card will not be properly reset, where: loop = 0-255, System with Fibre Network Fabric

fnf-25 xct-15

ENLX loop

Enable NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop + 1. Enables all functions on the NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. Both the even numbered TDS/MFS loop and adjacent conference loop are enabled, where: loop = 0, 2, 4. . . 254, System with Fibre Network Fabric

fnf-25

If one of the loops is already enabled, it is disabled and then both loops are enabled. Enabling more than 16 conference loops may cause system to lock-up. This command initiates card tests, downloads software and can be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46. fnf-25

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

207

LD 46: Multifrequency Sender Diagnostic for Automatic Number Identification

Command

Description The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even number loop for the TDS/MFS functions. However, this only prevents the loop from being used by software and does not affect the hardware status of the card. The ENLX and DISX commands are recommended, where: loop = 0-254, System with Fibre Network Fabric The Conf/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is inserted.

Pack/Rel

MFS loop STAT loop

Test and enable MFS loop. Get status of MFS loop. Response is: LOOP UNEQ loop is unequipped LOOP DSBL loop is disabled CHAN yy number of channels busy xx DSBL yy BUSY number of channels disabled & busy NOT MFS loop is not an MFS loop Where: loop = 0-255, System with Fibre Network Fabric

basic-1 basic-1 fnf-25

TONE loop TONE loop ALL

Enter input mode to provide MF tone bursts.

basic-1

Provide MF tone bursts for all digits on specified loop (1 basic-1 to 9, 0, 11 to 15, in that order).

208

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 21: LD 48: Link Diagnostic

The Link Diagnostic program is used to maintain data links used with various special features and auxiliary data links. A maintenance telephone cannot use LD 48.

Automatic Call Distribution Links

When equipped with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature, the system is supplemented with an Auxiliary Data Store (ADS) minicomputer system. The auxiliary data processor is located external to the system and is connected via a high-speed link and a lowspeed link. The high-speed link is used for transmission of ACD-related messages between the system and the auxiliary processor; the low-speed link is used for transmission of maintenance/error messages between the maintenance TTY (connected to the system) and the auxiliary processor. Note: When enabling a high-speed link (using the command "ENL HSL" or "ENL SDI HIGH" in LD 48 ), the craftsperson must log out of the TTY to receive a message from the system which confirms that the high-speed link (HSL) has been enabled. Each Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) consists of a single Serial Data Interface (SDI) port connected via an interface cable to an interface port on the auxiliary processor.

ACD High speed and low speed link monitor

The ACD monitor diagnoses messages which flow across the link. This tool is useful to someone experienced with message formats and protocols.

APL monitor
The APL monitor is a tool used to diagnose the messages flowing across the link. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats and protocols.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

209

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Integrated Messaging System Links

The link maintenance capabilities provided for Integrated Messaging System (IMS) and Integrated Voice Messaging System (IVMS) links allow the link to be disabled/enabled and put into the maintenance mode. The link software/hardware status can also be displayed. The program allows the craftsman to request that the printouts of all packed and/or unpacked messages be sent over a specified APL link. Using print options (packed/unpacked messages) and observing the patterns of messages sent over the link, the most probable fault location (AUX, Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 or SDI cable) can be determined.

Command and Status Links (CSL)

The Command and Status Link is an application protocol used for communication between the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 CPU and an external Value Added Server such as the Meridian Mail MP. The CSL runs on an Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) card. In addition to the tests in LD 48, resident firmware diagnostics for the CSLs and ESDIs can output CSA, ESDA, ESDI error messages.

Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL)

MSDL provides 4 ports for applications such as ISDN Primary Rate D-channels (DCH) and Application Module Links (AML) and SDI functions. The MSDL commands are listed below, where x is the MSDL device number (defined by prompt DNUM in LD 17). These are provided in Link Diagnostic (LD 48) and D-channel Maintenance (LD 96), and I/O Diagnostic (LD 37). DIS MSDL x (ALL) Disable MSDL card ENL MSDL x (FDL, ALL) Enable MSDL card RST MSDL x Reset MSDL card STAT MSDL (x (FULL)) Get MSDL status SLFT MSDL x Execute a self-test on MSDL card x These are provided in Link Diagnostic (LD 48) and D-channel Maintenance (LD 96), and I/O Diagnostic (LD 37) Overlays.

210

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Application Module Link (AML)

Application Module Link (AML)

An Application Module Link (AML) provides a connection to applications such as Meridian Link. The AML is configured on an Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) or Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card.

AML/CSL monitor
The AML monitor is a tool used to diagnose the messages flowing across the link. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats and protocols.

ISDN BRI monitor

This capability is used to monitor input/output messages to the MISP and SILC/UILC. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats and protocols. A password is required for DGB and MON options. The SETM TNx, RSET TNx and RSET ALL commands are also available for digital telephones. Caution: Use of the SETM MISP loop MON commands may use all system printing registers and cause an initialization.

Single Terminal Access (STA)

Single Terminal Access (STA) is an application available on the MSDL card. The STA application reduces the number of physical devices used to administer and maintain the system and its auxiliary processors.

Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA)

Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) allows for Integrated Voice Mailbox Administration when using Meridian Mail.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

211

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 nonblocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

D-channel Expansion
With the introduction of D-channel Expansion, new software allows the increase of D-channels past sixty-four. Instead of the large system having a maximum of 16 I/O addresses, the new software allows 16 physical I/O addresses (0 - 15) per network group for D-channels defined on MSDL. With this enhancement a response to the system response GROUP is required to inform the system of the desired network group.

Basic commands
Contents
Section ACD High speed and low speed link commands on page 217 ACD High speed and low speed link monitor commands on page 218 AML commands on page 218 AML over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) commands on page 219 AML/CSL monitor commands on page 220 Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) commands on page 221 APL monitor commands on page 222 D-channel Expansion commands on page 222

212

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Basic commands

Section Intercept Computer Update (ICU) commands on page 224 ISDN BRI monitor commands on page 225 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands on page 226 Single Terminal Access (STA) commands on page 226 Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) commands on page 227

Basic commands
CMIN CMIN ALL DACR ALL x DACR AGT l s c u DACR RTE x y DIS AML x DIS AML x AUTO DIS AML x LYR2 DIS AML x LYR7 DIS AML x MDL DIS AML x MON DIS APL x DIS HSL DIS ICP x DIS ISDI x DIS MON DIS MSDL x (ALL) DIS MSGI x DIS MSGO x DIS PACI x Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Release ALL devices on Link x Release Agent Release Route x for Customer y Disable AML x Disable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only) Disable layer two on AML x Disable layer seven on AML x Disable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only) Disable monitor on AML x (MSDL only) Put software AUX link x in maintenance mode Disable the high-speed link Put ICP link x into maintenance mode Disable hardware AUX link SDI x Disable the monitor-bit of high-speed link data Disable MSDL device x Disable the MSGI option Disable the MSGO option Disable the PACI option

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

213

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

DIS PACO x DIS PPRT x DIS PRNT DIS SDI HIGH DIS SDI LOW DIS STA x DIS UPRT x DSC ESDI x DSIC LSTI x DSIC LSTO x DSIC MSGI x DSIC MSGO x DSIC PACI x DSIC PACO x ENIC LSTI x ENIC LSTO x ENIC MSGI x ENIC MSGO x ENIC PACI x ENIC PACO x

Disable the PACO option Disable packet message print option on link x Disable the print-bit of high-speed link data Disable the SDI port for high-speed link Disable the SDI port for low-speed link Disable the STA application. Disable unpacket message print on AUX link x Disconnect the link Disable printing of lost input messages on link x Disable printing of lost output messages on link x Disable printing of input messages on link x at input queue level Disable printing of output messages on link x at output queue level Disable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer level Disable printing of output messages on link x at output buffer level Enable printing of lost input messages on link x Enable printing of lost output messages on link x Enable printing of messages on link x at input queue level Enable printing of messages on link x at output queue level Enable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer level Enable printing of output messages on link x at output buffer level Enable AML x Enable automatic set-up on AML x (ESDI only) Enable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only) Force download loadware to the MSDL card and enable AML x Enable layer two on AML x Enable layer seven on AML x Enable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only) Enable monitor on AML x (MSDL only)

ENL AML x ENL AML x ACMS ENL AML x AUTO ENL AML x FDL ENL AML x LYR2 ENL AML x LYR7 ENL AML x MDL ENL AML x MON

214

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Basic commands

EST AML x ENL APL x ENL HSL ENL ICP x ENL ISDI x ENL MON ENL MSDL x (ALL, FDL) ENL MSGI x ENL MSGO x ENL PACI x ENL PACO x ENL PPRT x ENL PRNT ENL SDI HIGH ENL SDI LOW ENL UPRT x ENLX MSGI x p ENLX MSGO x p ENL STA x (FDL)

Establish layer two on AML x Put software AUX link x in non-maintenance mode Enable the high-speed link Enable ICP link x Enable AUX link SDI x Print software information at maintenance TTY Enable MSDL device x Print incoming messages from link x Print outgoing messages from link x Print incoming messages from link x Print outgoing messages from link x Enable packet message print option on link x Connect high-speed link to TTY Enable SDI port for high-speed link Enable SDI port for low-speed link Enable unpacked message print on link x Output incoming priority p messages from link x Output outgoing priority p messages from link x Enable STA application. The MSDL card must be enabled to implement this command. Set up additional information xxxx to be used in the ICP message Clear previous ICP message set up without sending it Set up ICP DN xxxx to be used in the ICP message Set up IPN number xx to be used in the ICP message Set up ICP link x to be used in the ICP message Set up the intercept transfer reason x to be used in the ICP message Send the defined ICP message number xx, yy times Access ICP maintenance commands Get physical address and card name of one or all AMLs Get information relating to the STA application.

ICP ADD xxxx ICP CLR ICP DN xxxx ICP IPN xx ICP LINK xx ICP RSN x

ICP SEND xx yy ICPM MAP AML (x) MAP STA x

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

215

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

PSWD RLS AML x RSET ALL RSET BRIM RSET IFx 1 PDL2 1 RSET IFx 1 PDNI n RSET IFx l s c u BCH x RSET IFx l s c u DCHx RESET IMSG l s c dsl RSET MISP loop AMO RSET MISP loop DGB RSET MISP loop MNT RSET MISP loop MON RSET MPHM RSET OMSG l s c dsl RSET TNx RST MSDL x SETM BRIM xxxx SETM IFx 1 PDL2 1 SETM IFx 1 PDNI n SETM IFx l s c u BCHx SETM IFx l s c u DCHx SETM IMSG l s c dsl MON x SETM MISP loop AMO SETM MISP loop DBG SETM MISP loop MNT SETM MISP loop MON SETM MPHM xxxx

Enter password to use ICP maintenance commands Release layer two on AML x Stop printing all messages on a line card Stop printing of messages on SILC/UILC, MISP or digital line card Stop printing SAPI 16 interface messages. Stop printing network interface messages. Stop printing B-channel terminal interface messages. Stop printing D-channel terminal interface messages. Disable monitoring on incoming Stop MISP printing of audit messages on MISP card Exit MISP debug Stop MISP printing of status messages on MISP card Stop printing of input/output messages on MISP card Stop all Meridian Packet Handler message monitoring. Disable monitoring on outgoing Stop printing messages on an ISDN BRI line card Reset MSDL device x Set printing of messages on SILC/UILC, MISP or digital line card Set printing of SAPI 16 interface messages Set printing of network interface messages. Set printing of B-channel terminal interface messages. Set printing of D-channel terminal interface messages. Set monitor on incoming msg Set printing of audit messages on MISP card Set debug option on MISP card Set printing of status messages on MISP card Set printing of input/output messages on MISP card Set printing of Meridian Packet Handler messages. Where: xxxx = the MPHs to be monitored

216

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ACD High speed and low speed link commands

SETM OMSG l s c dsl MON Set monitor on outgoing msg x SETM TNx l s c u, 31 Set printing messages on a digital line card unit (u) or ISDN BRI line card (31) Set printing messages on a unit Invoke self-test for AML x Invoke self-test for MSDL device x Get AML status Display status of AUX link x Get status of link monitor/simulator configuration Get status of SDI port x Get status of all Displays on link x Get high-speed link status Display software status of one or all ICP links Get status of hardware AUX link SDI x Get low-speed link status Get status of one or all message monitors Get MSDL status Get status of high-speed link port Get status of low-speed link port Get status of STA application. Switch active (x) and standby (y) AML Upload parameter Table 1 to 4 from AML x (MSDL only)

SETM TNx l s c u, dsl SLFT AML x SLFT MSDL x STAT AML (x) STAT APL x STAT CNFG STAT CSDI x STAT DSP LNK x STAT HSL STAT ICP (x) STAT ISDI x STAT LSL STAT MON (x) STAT MSDL (x [FULL]) STAT SDI HIGH STAT SDI LOW STAT STA x SWCH AML x y UPLD AML x TBL x

ACD High speed and low speed link commands

The following commands are used to enable, disable, test and check the status of an APL link.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

217

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Note: When enabling a high-speed link (using the command "ENL HSL" or "ENL SDI HIGH" in LD 48 ), the craftsperson must log out of the TTY to receive a message from the system which confirms that the high-speed link (HSL) has been enabled.
DIS HSL DIS SDI HIGH DIS SDI LOW ENL HSL ENL SDI HIGH ENL SDI LOW STAT HSL STAT LSL STAT SDI HIGH STAT SDI LOW Disable the high-speed link Disable the SDI port for high-speed link Disable the SDI port for low-speed link Enable the high-speed link Enable SDI port for high-speed link Enable SDI port for low-speed link Get high-speed link status Get low-speed link status Get status of high-speed link port Get status of low-speed link port

ACD High speed and low speed link monitor commands

The monitor is a tool used to diagnose the messages flowing across the link. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats and protocols.
DIS MON DIS PRNT ENL MON ENL PRNT STAT MON (x) Disable the monitor-bit of high-speed link data Disable the print-bit of high-speed link data Print software information at maintenance TTY Connect high-speed link to TTY Get status of one or all message monitors

AML commands
The AML commands are listed below, where x is the AML logical device number (defined by prompt ADAN in LD 17). Some of these commands only apply to AMLs on an MSDL card.

218

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

AML over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) commands

DIS AML x DIS AML x AUTO DIS AML x LYR2 DIS AML x LYR7 DIS AML x MDL DIS AML x MON ENL AML x ENL AML x ACMS ENL AML x AUTO ENL AML x FDL ENL AML x LYR2 ENL AML x LYR7 ENL AML x MDL ENL AML x MON EST AML x MAP AML (x) RLS AML x SLFT AML x STAT AML (x) SWCH AML x y UPLD AML x TBL x

Disable AML x Disable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only) Disable layer two on AML x Disable layer seven on AML x Disable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only) Disable monitor on AML x (MSDL only) Enable AML x Enable automatic set-up on AML x (ESDI only) Enable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only) Force download loadware to the MSDL card and enable AML x Enable layer two on AML x Enable layer seven on AML x Enable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only) Enable monitor on AML x (MSDL only) Establish layer two on AML x Get physical address and card name of one or all AMLs Release layer two on AML x Invoke self-test for AML x Get AML status Switch active (x) and standby (y) AML Upload parameter table 1 to 4 from AML x (MSDL only)

AML over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) commands

DIS ELAN TEST DIS ELAN x TEST ENL ELAN STAT ELAN STAT ELAN xxx Disable ELAN subnet (server task) Disable ELAN subnet link number x (client task) Enable ELAN subnet (server task) Check status of all configured ELAN subnets Check status of ELAN xxx

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

219

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

AML/CSL monitor commands

The AML monitor is a tool used to diagnose the messages flowing across the link. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats and protocols. These commands apply to CSLs or AMLs on ESDI cards and AMLs on MSDL cards.
DIS MSGI x DIS MSGO x Disable output of incoming layer seven messages on AML x Disable output of outgoing layer seven messages on AML x Disable output of incoming layer two messages on AML x Disable output of outgoing layer two messages on AML x Disable inclusive incoming message monitoring Disable inclusive outgoing message monitoring Disable inclusive TN incoming message monitoring

DIS PACI x DIS PACO x

DSIM MSGI <link#> DSIM MSGO <link#> DSIT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u>

DSIT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> Disable inclusive TN outgoing message monitoring DSXM MSGI <link#> DSXM MSGO <link#> Disable all input message monitoring exclusions by the ENXM command. Disable all output message monitoring exclusions by the ENXM command. Disable monitoring of exclusive priorities on incoming messages Disable monitoring of exclusive priorities on outgoing messages Disable exclusive TN incoming message monitoring Disable exclusive TN outgoing message monitoring

DSXP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>... DSXP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>...

DSXT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> DSXT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> ENIM MSGI <link#><msg1><msg2>... ENIM MSGO <link#><msg1><msg2>...

Enable inclusive message monitoring of only those specified incoming messages Enable inclusive message monitoring of only those specified outgoing messages

220

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) commands

ENIT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u>

Enable inclusive monitoring of incoming messages with specified TN

ENIT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> Enable inclusive monitoring of outgoing messages with specified TN ENL MSGI x ENL MSGO x Enable output of incoming layer seven messages on AML x Enable output of outgoing layer seven messages on AML x Enable output of incoming layer two messages on AML x Enable output of incoming layer two messages on AML x Enable message monitoring excluding those specified incoming messages Enable message monitoring excluding those specified outgoing messages Enable incoming message monitoring excluding messages with specified priorities Enable outgoing message monitoring excluding messages with specified priorities Enable message monitoring excluding incoming messages with specified TN Enable input/output message monitoring excluding outgoing messages with specified TN Disable monitor and flash buffers Get status of one or all message monitors

ENL PACI x ENL PACO x

ENXM MSGI <link#><msg1><msg2>... ENXM MSGO <link#><msg1><msg2>... ENXP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>... ENXP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>...

ENXT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> ENXT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> FLSH STAT MON (x)

Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) commands

The following commands are used to enable, disable, test and check the status of an APL link.
DIS APL x DIS ISDI x Put software AUX link x in maintenance mode Disable hardware AUX link SDI x

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

221

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

ENL APL x ENL ISDI x STAT APL x STAT DSP LNK x STAT ISDI x

Put software AUX link x in non-maintenance mode Enable AUX link SDI x Display status of AUX link x Get status of all Displays on link x Get status of hardware AUX link SDI x

APL monitor commands

The APL monitor is a tool used to diagnose the messages flowing across the link. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats and protocols.
DIS PPRT x DIS UPRT x ENL PPRT x ENL UPRT x ENLX MSGI x p ENLX MSGO x p STAT CNFG STAT CSDI x STAT DSP LNK x Disable packet message print option on link x Disable unpacket message print on AUX link x Enable packet message print option on link x Enable unpacked message print on link x Output incoming priority p messages from link x Output outgoing priority p messages from link x Get status of link monitor/simulator configuration Get status of SDI port x Get status of all Displays on link x

D-channel Expansion commands

Command DIS MSDL n all System Response GROUP Description Disable the given MSDL card. All the configured ports should be in the disable state, otherwise the MSDL card can not be disabled. Disable all ports of the MSDL card, and then disable the MSDL card.

DIS MSDL n ALL

GROUP

222

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

D-channel Expansion commands

Command

System Response GROUP

Description

DIS MSDL n AUDM Disable the msdl auditing for the MSDL card.

DIS MSDL n DBG GROUP DIS MSDL n FCTL GROUP DIS MSDL n MSGI GROUP Disable the incoming message monitor option for the MSDL card. Disable the flow control for the MSDL card. Disable the debugger option for the MSDL card.

DIS MSDL n MSGO GROUP Disable the outgoing message monitor option for the MSDL card. Enable the given MSDL card. Enable MSDL card n and all configured ports.

ENL MSDL n ENL MSDL n all

GROUP GROUP

ENL MSDL n AUDM GROUP ENL MSDL n DBG GROUP ENL MSDL n FCTL GROUP ENL MSDL n FDL GROUP Force download all the required Loadware to the MSDL card and enable the MSDL card. Enable flow control for the MSDL card. Enable the debugger option for the MSDL card. Enable the msdl auditing for the MSDL card.

ENL MSDL n MSGO GROUP Enable the outgoing message monitor option for the MSDL card.

ENL MSDL n MSGI

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

223

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command

System Response GROUP

Description Enable the incoming message monitor option for the MSDL card. This command causes a power-on reset on the MSDL card. Power-on reset on the MSDL card, followed by a complete set of self tests. Display status of all MSDL cards in the system. Display status of the given MSDL card as known to the SL1.

RST MSDL n SLFT MSDL n

GROUP GROUP

STAT MSDL STAT MSDL n

GROUP GROUP

STAT MSDL n full GROUP Display status of the given MSDL card as known to the SL1 and available in the shared RAM of the MSDL card.

STAT MSDL n MON GROUP Display the current message monitoring and debug option for the given MSDL card.

Intercept Computer Update (ICU) commands

DIS ICP x DSIC LSTI x DSIC LSTO x DSIC MSGI x DSIC MSGO x DSIC PACI x DSIC PACO x ENIC LSTI x ENIC LSTO x ENIC MSGI x ENIC MSGO x Put ICP link x into maintenance mode Disable printing of lost input messages on link x Disable printing of lost output messages on link x Disable printing of input messages on link x at input queue level Disable printing of output messages on link x at output queue level Disable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer level Disable printing of output messages on link x at output buffer level Enable printing of lost input messages on link x Enable printing of lost output messages on link x Enable printing of messages on link x at input queue level Enable printing of messages on link x at output queue level

224

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ISDN BRI monitor commands

ENIC PACI x ENIC PACO x ENL ICP x ICP LINK xx ICP DN xxxx ICP IPN xx ICP RSN x ICP ADD xxxx ICP CLR ICP SEND xx yy ICPM PSWD STAT ICP (x)

Enable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer level Enable printing of output messages on link x at output buffer level Enable ICP link x Set up ICP link x to be used in the ICP message Set up ICP DN xxxx to be used in the ICP message Set up IPN number xx to be used in the ICP message Set up the intercept transfer reason x to be used in the ICP message Set up additional information xxxx to be used in the ICP message Clear previous ICP message set up without sending it Send the defined ICP message number xx, yy times Access ICP maintenance commands Enter password to use ICP maintenance commands Display software status of one or all ICP links

ISDN BRI monitor commands

These commands are used to monitor input/output messages to the MISP, and SILC/UILC. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats and protocols. A password is required for DGB and MON options. The SETM TNx, RSET TNx and RSET ALL commands are also available for digital telephones. Caution: Use of the SETM MISP loop MON commands may use all system printing registers and cause an initialization.
RSET ALL RSET BRIM RSET MISP x AMO RSET MISP x DGB RSET MISP x MNT RSET MISP x MON Reset (turn off) printing of messages for all terminal numbers associated with TN0-TN6. Stop printing of messages on SILC/UILC, MISP or digital line card. Stop printing of audit messages on MISP specified. Exit MISP debug. Stop printing status messages on MISP specified. Stop printing input/output messages on MISP specified.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

225

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

RSET TNx

Stop printing of messages for terminal number associated with TNx. TNx is associated with the terminal number by the SETM TNx command. Set printing of selected message types for MISP, SILC/UILC or digital line cards. Set printing of audit messages on MISP specified. The SETM TNx command must have been issued before issuing this command. Set debug option for the MISP specified. DISABLE MISP prior to issuing this command, re-enable MISP after command issued. Set printing of maintenance messages for the MISP specified. Set printing of input/output messages for the MISP specified.

SETM BRIM xxxx SETM MISP x AMO SETM MISP x DBG

SETM MISP x MNT SETM MISP x MON

SETM TNx l s c u, dsl Set printing messages on a unit SETM TNx l s c u, 31 Set printing messages on a digital line card unit (u) or ISDN BRI line card (31) SETM TNx y Set printing of messages for specified digital line card unit or ISDN BRI line card.

Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands

The MSDL commands are listed below, x is the MSDL device number (defined by prompt DNUM in LD 17). These commands are also provided in Input/Output Diagnostic (LD 37) and D-channel Diagnostic (LD 96).
DIS MSDL x (ALL) ENL MSDL x (ALL, FDL) RST MSDL x SLFT MSDL x STAT MSDL (x [FULL]) Disable MSDL device x Enable MSDL device x Reset MSDL device x Invoke self-test for MSDL device x Get MSDL status

Single Terminal Access (STA) commands

Single Terminal Access (STA) is an application available on the MSDL card. The STA application reduces the number of physical devices used to administer and maintain the system

226

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) commands

and its auxiliary processors. Refer to Avaya System Management Reference, NN43001-600 for complete details.
DIS STA x ENL STA x (FDL) MAP STA x STAT STA x Disable the STA application Enable STA application Get information relating to the STA application Get status of STA application

Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) commands

Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) allows for Integrated Voice Mailbox Administration when using Meridian Mail. Refer to the Avaya Features and Services, NN43001-106 for complete details.
DIS VMBA <vsid> DIS VMBA <vsid> AUDT DIS VMBA <vsid> UPLD ENL VMBA <vsid> ENL VMBA <vsid> AUDT ENL VMBA <vsid> UPLD STAT VMBA <vsid> STAT VMBA <vsid> AUDT STAT VMBA <vsid> UPLD Disable the Voice Mailbox Administration application Disable the mailbox database audit Disable the mailbox database upload Enable the Voice Mailbox Administration application Enable the mailbox database audit Enable the mailbox database upload Get the status for the Voice Mailbox Administration application Get the status for the Voice Mailbox database audit Get the status for the Voice Mailbox database upload

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CMIN CMIN ALL Description Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Pack/Rel basic-1 basic-1

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

227

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command DACR ALL x

Description Release ALL devices on Link x

Pack/Rel

DACR AGT l s c u Release Agent DACR RTE x y DIS AML x Release Route x for Customer y msdl-18 Disable AML x. Whenever the third parameter (LYR2, LYR7, etc.) is not typed, the overlay defaults the third parameter of the DIS command to LYR2. Therefore, this command is equivalent to DIS AML x LYR2. Refer to DIS AML x LYR2 command definition, for more information. Disable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only). This command is not available for an ESDI AML. Disable layer two on AML x. MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML link state can be any state other than the disabled state, and should not be in the process of self-test. Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must have been executed at an earlier time. MSDL Action: The AML link state is changed to the disable state. The MSDL port on which the AML is configured is disabled. ESDI: The ESDI port is disabled. The port must be idle. msdl-18

DIS AML x AUTO

DIS AML x LYR2

msdl-18

DIS AML x LYR7

Disable layer seven on AML x. msdl-18 The MSDL or ESDI card must be enabled. The AML layer two must be enabled and established, and AML layer seven must also be enabled. Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 followed by EST AML x followed by ENL AML x LYR7 must have been executed at an earlier time. Action: A request to disable the AML layer seven is issued. SL-1 will stop sending polling messages to the far-end. Disable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only). MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML layer two must be enabled. Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must have been executed at an earlier time. MSDL Action: The MSDL AML loadware command to disable the debug monitor is sent to the MSDL card. This command is not available for ESDI AML. msdl-18

DIS AML x MDL

228

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command DIS AML x MON

Description Disable monitor on AML x (MSDL only). MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML layer two must be enabled. Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must have been executed at an earlier time. MSDL Action: The MSDL AML loadware command to disable the debug monitor is sent to the MSDL card. This command is not available for ESDI AML. Put software AUX link x in maintenance mode. Disable the ELAN subnet (server task)

Pack/Rel msdl-18

DIS APL x DIS ELAN TEST

apl-1 nxcc-22 nxcc-22

DIS ELAN x TEST Disable ELAN subnet link number x (client task) Note: This command will disable the client task when the server task is disabled. DIS HSL DIS IALM <vsid> Disable the high-speed link. Disable the integrated alarms application on the specified VAS. A VAS011 message is printed indicating the application has been disabled. Put ICP link x into maintenance mode. Disable hardware AUX link SDI x. Disable the monitor-bit of high-speed link data.

lnk-2 ialm-21

DIS ICP x DIS ISDI x DIS MON DIS MSDL n all

icp-5 apl-1 apl-1

Disable the given MSDL card. All the configured ports basic-25 should be in the disable state, otherwise the MSDL card can not be disabled. Disable all ports of the MSDL card, and then disable the MSDL card. basic-25

DIS MSDL n ALL

DIS MSDL x (ALL) Disable MSDL device. When entered without the optional parameter, the disable MSDL command attempts to disable the MSDL card. Disabling the card via this command is permitted from either the Enabled (ENBL) state or the System Disabled (SYS DSBL) state.

msdl-18

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

229

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command

Description When attempted on an MSDL that does not have any ports enabled, this command will succeed. The only exception to this is when the disable card message needs to be sent to the card, and there is no buffer currently available for building the message (MSDL015 is output to the TTY). In this unusual situation, attempting the command again will most likely result in success. Application Overlays are not erased when the MSDL is disabled. If there are any ports that are still running in the MSDL card, the 'ALL' option must be used to force disable the active ports. As an alternative to this command, the craftsperson can use the commands provided by the applications to disable the ports (D-channels or AML) individually, and then use the 'DIS MSDL x' command. The command 'DIS MSDL x ALL' is not allowed if the active TTY (the terminal from which the command was entered) is supported on the MSDL card in question. Software disable the logical channel prior to disabling the physical DNUM port.

Pack/Rel

DIS MSDL n AUDM Disable the msdl auditing for the MSDL card. DIS MSDL n DBG Disable the debugger option for the MSDL card. DIS MSDL n FCTL Disable the flow control for the MSDL card. DIS MSDL n MSGI Disable the outgoing message monitor option for the MSDL card. DIS MSGI x

basic-25

basic-25 basic-25

basic-25

Disable printing of messages on link x at input queue csl-8 level. Disable output of incoming layer seven messages on AML x. Disable printing of messages on link x at output queue csl-8 level. Disable output of outgoing layer seven messages on AML x. Disable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer level. (disable output of incoming layer two messages on AML x) csl-8

DIS MSGO x

DIS PACI x

230

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command DIS PACO x

Description

Pack/Rel

Disable printing of output messages on link x at output csl-8 buffer level. (disable output of outgoing layer two messages on AML x) Disable packet message print option on link x. Disable the print-bit of high-speed link data. Disable the SDI port for high-speed link. Disable the SDI port for low-speed link. apl-1 apl-1 lnk-2 lnk-2

DIS PPRT x DIS PRNT DIS SDI HIGH DIS SDI LOW DIS STA x

sta-19 Disable the STA application. This command disables the application, the administration port, and any other additional ports. The associated ports must be disabled before using this command. x = the logical ID number identifying the STA application. basic-5.00

DIS TMDI l s c u (ALL) Disable TMDI card. DIS UPRT x DIS VMBA <vsid> Disable the Voice Mailbox Administration application. This command is used to disable the Voice Mailbox Application. Enter the command in the following format: Disable unpacket message print on AUX link x.

apl-1 vmba-19

DIS VMBA <vsid> <NNNN>

Where: vsid = The VAS ID number associated with VMBA. NNNN = AUDT or UPLD for the database audit or upload. AUDT and UPLD are optional entries. The VAS ID must be entered. The Voice Mailbox audit and upload functions are aborted when the application is disabled. Be sure to get the status of those functions before disabling the application. DIS VMBA <vsid> AUDT vmba-19

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

231

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command

Description Disable the mailbox database audit. This command aborts the audit function whether it was invoked manually or automatically.

Pack/Rel

DIS VMBA <vsid> UPLD Disable the mailbox database upload. This command aborts the audit function whether it was invoked manually or automatically. DSIC LSTI x DSIC LSTO x DSIC MSGI x Disable printing of lost input messages on link x. Disable printing of lost output messages on link x. Disable printing of input messages on link x at input queue level.

vmba-19

icp-5 icp-5 icp-5

DSIC MSGO x

Disable printing of output messages on link x at output icp-5 queue level. Disable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer level. icp-5

DSIC PACI x

DSIC PACO x

Disable printing of output messages on link x at output icp-5 buffer level. nxcc-22

DSIM MSGI <link#> Disable inclusive incoming message monitoring DSIM MSGO <link#> Disable inclusive outgoing message monitoring DSIT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> Disable inclusive TN incoming message monitoring DSIT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> Disable inclusive TN outgoing message monitoring DSXM MSGI <link#> Disable all input message monitoring exclusions by the ENXM command. DSXM MSGO <link#>

nxcc-22

nxcc-22

nxcc-22

ncxx-22

ncxx-22

232

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description Disable all output message monitoring exclusions by the ENXM command.

Pack/Rel

DSXP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>... Disable monitoring of exclusive priorities on incoming messages DSXP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>... Disable monitoring of exclusive priorities on outgoing messages DSXT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> Disable exclusive TN incoming message monitoring DSXT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> Disable exclusive TN outgoing message monitoring ENIC LSTI x ENIC LSTO x ENIC MSGI x Enable printing of lost input messages on link x. Enable printing of lost output messages on link x. Enable printing of messages on link x at input queue level.

nxcc-22

nxcc-22

nxcc-22

nxcc-22

icp-5 icp-5 icp-5

ENIC MSGO x

Enable printing of messages on link x at output queue icp-5 level. Enable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer level. icp-5

ENIC PACI x

ENIC PACO x

Enable printing of output messages on link x at output icp-5 buffer level. nxcc-22

ENIM MSGI <link#><msg1><msg2>... Enable inclusive input/output message monitoring of only those specified incoming messages ENIM MSGO <link#><msg1><msg2>... Enable inclusive input/output message monitoring of only those specified outgoing messages ENIT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u>

nxcc-22

nxcc-22

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

233

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command

Description Enable inclusive input/output monitoring of incoming messages with specified TN

Pack/Rel

ENIT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> Enable inclusive input/output monitoring of outgoing messages with specified TN ENL AML x

nxcc-22

Enable AML x. esdi/ msdl-18 For MSDL: If AUTO recovery is off, then this command is the same as the ENL AML x LYR2 command. If AUTO recovery is on, an attempt is made to establish the link (layer two) and the application (layer seven). For ESDI: This is the same as the ENL AML x LYR2 command. esdi-18 Enable automatic set-up on AML x (ESDI only). This command is valid only for ESDI AML and is not available on the MSDL AML.

ENL AML x ACMS

ENL AML x AUTO Enable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only). This command is not available for ESDI AML links. ENL AML x FDL Force download loadware to the MSDL card and enable AML x. MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML link state must be in the disable state. All other MSDL AML links configured on the same MSDL card must be in the disable state. Example: ENL MSDL x must have been executed at an earlier time. MSDL Action: The MSDL AML loadware is downloaded to the MSDL card. While download is in progress a series of dots are output. Once the command is executed successfully the ENL AML x LYR2 command is executed automatically.

msdl-18

msdl-18

ENL AML x LYR2

Enable layer two on AML x. msdl-18 MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML link state must be in the disable state. Example: ENL MSDL x must have been executed at an earlier time. MSDL Action: The AML link state is changed to the release state. The MSDL port on which the AML is configured is enabled. If the ENL AML x command is executed successfully, and MSDL AML auto recovery

234

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description is in the enable state, then the EST AML x is issued automatically. ESDI: The ESDI port is enabled. The ESDI card must first be disabled.

Pack/Rel

ENL AML x LYR7

Enable layer seven on AML x. msdl-18 MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML link should not be in the simulation mode. The AML layer two must be enabled and established, and AML layer seven must be disabled. Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 followed by EST AML x must have been executed at an earlier time. MSDL Action: A request to enable the AML layer seven is issued. Polling messages are sent to the far end. ESDI: Layer seven is enabled for the ESDI AML. The ENL AML x (LYR2) command must be completed successfully first. Enable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only). MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML layer two must be enabled. Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must have been executed at an earlier time. MSDL Action: The MSDL AML loadware command to enable the MDL error reporting is sent to the MSDL card. This command is not available for ESDI AML links. Enable monitor on AML x (MSDL only). MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML layer two must be enabled. Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must have been executed at an earlier time. MSDL Action: The MSDL AML loadware command to enable the debug monitor is sent to the MSDL card This command is not available for ESDI AML links. Put software AUX link x in non-maintenance mode. msdl-18

ENL AML x MDL

ENL AML x MON

msdl-18

ENL APL x ENL ELAN

apl-1

Enable ELAN server task nxcc-22 When the application establishes connection to a Meridian 1 via this ELAN subnet, a client process will be spawned for this application. The APP_IP_ID (Port ID and IP address) of each connection will be passed into the Meridian 1.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

235

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command ENL HSL

Description

Pack/Rel

lnk-2 Enable the high-speed link. When enabling a high-speed link, the craftsperson must log out of the TTY to receive a message from the system which confirms that the high-speed link (HSL) has been enabled. ialm-21 Enable the integrated alarms application on the specified VAS. A VAS011 message is printed if the application is successfully enabled and a VAS012 if it is not.

ENL IALM <vsid>

ENL ICP x ENL ISDI x ENL MON

Enable ICP link x. Enable AUX link SDI x.

icp-5 apl-1

apl-1 Print software information at maintenance TTY. This command causes software information being sent to the auxiliary processor to be printed at the TTY. This information would include counts of Cumulative Negative Acknowledgments (NAKs), time-outs and many other control characteristics of the link. Use this command only when the ACD is handling light traffic. Otherwise, the TTY will be overloaded from the high volume of messages. Enable the given MSDL card. Enable MSDL card n and all configured ports. basic-25 basic-25 msdl-18

ENL MSDL n ENL MSDL n all

ENL MSDL x (FDL, ALL) Enable MSDL card. When entered without any of the optional parameters, the enable MSDL command attempts to enable the MSDL card. Enabling the card via this command is only permitted if the card is currently in the Manually Disabled (MAN DSBL) state. The enable card succeeds if: 1. the card is resident in the shelf 2. it has passed all the self-tests 3. the MSDL base software has been downloaded and is responding If the MSDL base software and any configured application software has not been downloaded, or if the version of the software on the card is different from the version on the system disk, software download

236

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description occurs. While download is in progress, a series of dots (".") are output. If the FDL (forced download) option is entered, the MSDL base software and all the configured applications will be downloaded regardless if the application already exists on the card. Following the download, the card will be enabled. If the ALL option is entered, the card will be enabled (provided the three conditions mentioned above are met), all the applications will be downloaded if necessary and then an attempt will be made to enable all the links/ports configured on the card. Additionally, the enable command with the ALL option can be entered when the card is already in the enabled state. This allows you to enable any disabled links/ ports through one command. It is not possible to use both the ALL and the FDL options in the same command.

Pack/Rel

ENL MSDL n AUDM Enable the msdl auditing for the MSDL card. ENL MSDL n DBG Enable the debugger option for the MSDL card. ENL MSDL n FCTL Enable flow control for the MSDL card. ENL MSDL n FDL Force download all the required Loadware to the MSDL card and enable the MSDL card. ENL MSDL n MSGO Enable the outgoing message monitor option for the MSDL card. ENL MSDL n MSGI Enable the incoming message monitor option for the MSDL card. ENL MSGI x

basic-25

basic-25 basic-25

basic-25

basic-25

basic-25

Print incoming messages from link x. Enable output of csl-8 incoming layer seven messages on AML x. This command allows printing of all incoming message received over link x on the maintenance output device. The SSD signaling messages and the program input are not printed. This is typically used to check the validity of incoming messages for the different queues.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

237

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command ENL MSGO x

Description

Pack/Rel

Print outgoing messages from link x. Enable output of csl-8 outgoing layer seven messages on AML x. This command allows printing for all outgoing messages over link x on the maintenance output device. This is typically used to check the validity of outgoing messages sent from the application layer to the output queue. Print incoming ESDI messages from link x. Enable csl-8 output of incoming layer two messages on AML x. When enabled, all incoming messages received on link x to the ESDI are printed on the maintenance TTY, including SSD signaling messages. Typically this is used to check the correctness of the incoming messages as received from the ESDI in the data block format. csl-8 Print outgoing ESDI messages from link x. Enable output of incoming layer two messages on AML x. When enabled, all outgoing messages are sent through link x to the ESDI and are printed on the maintenance TTY. The message will be printed in the data block format required by the ESDI. apl-1 Enable packet message print option on link x. Printouts can be up to 7 lines in length and are of the form: APLO xxx y xxx. . . x APLI xxx y xxx. . . x Where: APLO = the message is output from the system APLI = the message is input to system from AUX xxx = number of the APL link. y = number from 0 to 6 indicating the printout line number of the message. This field is not used for ACK and NAK messages.

ENL PACI x

ENL PACO x

ENL PPRT x

ENL PRNT

Connect high-speed link to TTY. Disconnects the high-speed link from the AUX and connects it instead to an RS-232-C compatible TTY device. This disrupts communication between the system and the auxiliary processor. It enables ACD related messages (which would normally be sent to

apl-1

238

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description the auxiliary processor) to be printed at the TTY connected to the high-speed link. Normal communication between the system and the auxiliary processor will not continue if the ENL PRNT command is inputted while the system and auxiliary processor are still connected. A different message format is used between the system and the auxiliary processor. This condition will cause the HSL to go down because the auxiliary processor cannot interpret this other message format.

Pack/Rel

ENL SDI HIGH

Enable SDI port for high-speed link. lnk-2 When enabling a high-speed link, the craftsperson must log out of the TTY to receive a message from the system which confirms that the high-speed link (HSL) has been enabled. Enable SDI port for low-speed link. Enable STA application. The MSDL card must be enabled to implement this command, where: x = the logical ID number identifying the STA application. FDL = force download the application. If not invoked, the application is downloaded only when needed lnk-2 sta-19

ENL SDI LOW ENL STA x (FDL)

ENL TMDI l s c u

Enable TMDI card.

basic-5.00 basic-5.00

ENL TMDI l s c u (FDL,ALL) Enable TMDI card. ENL UPRT x Enable unpacked message print on link x. Printouts are of the form: APLMxxx aa b c zzzz. . .

apl-1

z
Where: APLMxxx = indicates unpacked message over link xxx aa = indicates the message length b = indicates the application type c = indicates the message type zzz = these fields are the message body, depending on the application and message type

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

239

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command ENL VMBA <vsid>

Description Enable the Voice Mailbox Administration application. Enter the command in the following format: ENL VMBA <vsid> <NNNN> ALL/xxxx Where: vsid = The VAS ID number associated with VMBA. NNNN = AUDT or UPLD for the mailbox database audit or upload functions. ALL/xxxx = Enable NNNN for ALLDNs with Voice Mailboxes, or a specific DN (xxxx). NNNN and ALL/xxxx are optional entries. The VAS ID must be entered to initiate this command.

Pack/Rel vmba-19

ENL VMBA <vsid> AUDT Enable the mailbox database audit. Enter the command in the following format: ENL VMBA <vsid> AUDT ALL/xxxx The audit can be implemented for a specific Directory. Number by entering the DN following the audit command: ENL VMBA <vsid> AUDT xxxx The upload can also be enabled for all DNs eligible for a Voice Mailbox by entering ALL following the audit command: ENL VMBA <vsid> AUDT ALL ENL VMBA <vsid> UPLD Enable the mailbox database upload. Enter the command in the following format: ENL VMBA <vsid> UPLD ALL/xxxx The upload can be implemented for a specific Directory Number by entering the DN following the upload command: ENL VMBA <vsid> UPLD xxxx The audit can also be enabled for all DNs configured with Voice Mailboxes by entering ALL following the upload command: ENL VMBA <vsid> UPLD ALL ENLX MSGI x p Output incoming priority p messages from link x.

vmba-19

vmba-19

apl-1

240

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description When enabled by the user, all incoming messages received on link x are output, excluding the messages with specified priorities, where "p" is the message priority, and where: 1 = the system priority 2 = signaling priority 3 = call processing priority 4 = administration priority

Pack/Rel

ENLX MSGO x p

Output outgoing priority p messages from link x. apl-1 When enabled by the user, all outgoing messages sent through link x are output, excluding the messages with specified priorities, where "p" is the message priority, and where: 1 = the system priority 2 = signaling priority 3 = call processing priority 4 = administration priority.

EST AML x

msdl-18 Establish layer two on AML x. The layer two is established for the AML configured on the given MSDL port. The layer two is connected for the AML configured on the ESDI card. MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML layer two must be enabled and released. Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must have been executed at an earlier time. MSDL Action: The MSDL AML link state is changed into the established state. If EST AML x executes successfully, and provided that the MSDL AML AUTO recovery is enabled, next the ENL AML x LYR7 is executed automatically. ESDI: Layer two is connected for the ESDI AML. The port must be enabled first. nxcc-22

ENXM MSGI <link#><msg1><msg2>... Enable message input/output monitoring excluding those specified incoming messages ENXM MSGO <link#><msg1><msg2>... Enable message input/output monitoring excluding those specified outgoing messages

nxcc-22

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

241

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command ENXP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>...

Description Enable input/output incoming message monitoring excluding messages with specified priorities

Pack/Rel nxcc-22

ENXP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>... Enable input/output outgoing message monitoring excluding messages with specified priorities ENXT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> Enable input/output message monitoring excluding incoming messages with specified TN ENXT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> Enable input/output message monitoring excluding outgoing messages with specified TN FLSH ICP ADD xxxx Disable monitor and flash buffers Set up additional information xxxx to be used in the ICP message. Enter the time (hhmm) and date (mmdd). ICP CLR Clear previous ICP message set up without sending it. Set up ICP DN xxxx to be used in the ICP message. Set up IPN number xx to be used in the ICP message. Set up ICP link xx to be used in the ICP message.

nxcc-22

nxcc-22

nxcc-22

nxcc-22 icp-5

icp-5

ICP DN xxxx ICP IPN xx

icp-5 icp-5

ICP LINK xx ICP RSN x

icp-5

Set up the intercept transfer reason x to be used in the icp-5 ICP message. Send the defined ICP message number xx, yy times. Where: xx = number/type of ICP message (50-61 to the ICP link, 00-03 to the ICP module) yy = number of times message is to be sent per timeslice (default = 1, maximum = 4) icp-5

ICP SEND xx yy

242

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description The message is only cleared by entering the ICP CLR command or by changing the contents of the message.

Pack/Rel

ICPM

Access ICP maintenance commands. Enter this command and the password (prompt PSWD) to use Intercept Computer Update (ICP) maintenance commands. Get physical address and card name of one or all AMLs. This command outputs the card name and physical card address and ports for one or all AMLs. This information is also output with the STAT AML command. For example: MAP AML AML: 05 ESDI: 04 AML: 12 MSDL:07 PORT:1

icp-5

MAP AML (x)

msdl-18

MAP STA x

Get information relating to the STA application. sta-19 This command displays the logical, physical, and port allocation information related to the STA application. If the ID number (x) is not specified, the information for all existing STAs is given. Enter password to use ICP maintenance commands. icp-5

PSWD RLS AML x

Release layer two on AML x. msdl-18 The layer two is released for the AML link configured on the given MSDL port. The layer two is disconnected for the AML configured on the ESDI card. MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML layer two must be enabled and established. Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 followed by EST AML x must have been executed at an earlier time. MSDL Action: Prior to the execution of the RLS AML x, if the MSDL AML layer seven is enabled, the DIS AML x LYR7 is automatically executed. The MSDL AML state is changed to the release state. ESDI: The layer two is disconnected for the ESDI AML port. The port must be in the connected and idle state first. Stop printing all messages on a line card. arie/ bri-14

RSET ALL

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

243

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command RSET BRIM

Description Stop printing of messages on SILC/UILC, MISP or digital line card.

Pack/Rel bri/ arie-18

RSET IFx 1 PDL2 1 Stop printing SAPI 16 interface messages. RSET IFx 1 PDNI n Stop printing network interface messages. RSET IFx l s c u BCH x Stop printing B-channel terminal interface messages. RSET IFx l s c u DCHx Stop printing D-channel terminal interface messages. RSET IMSG l s c dsl Disable monitoring on incoming RSET MISP x AMO Stop printing of audit messages on MISP specified. Where: x = loop for non-Small System and card for Small System. RSET MISP x DGB Exit MISP debug. Where: x = loop for non-Small System and card for Small System. Where: x = loop 0-254 System with Fibre Network Fabric RSET MISP loop MNT Stop printing of status messages on MISP specified. Where: x = loop for non-Small System and card for Small System. Where: x = loop 0-254 System with Fibre Network Fabric RSET MISP x MON Stop printing of input/output messages on MISP specified. Where: x = loop for non-Small System and card for Small System. Where: x = loop 0-254 System with Fibre Network Fabric

mph-19

mph-19

mph-19

mph-19

bri-18

bri-18

fnf-25 bri-18

fnf-25 bri-18

fnf-25

244

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command RSET MPHM

Description Stop all Meridian Packet Handler message monitoring.

Pack/Rel mph-19

RST MSDL n

This command causes a power-on reset on the MSDL basic-25 card.

RSET OMSG l s c dsl Disable monitoring on outgoing RST TMDI l s c u RSET TNx Reset TMDI card Stop printing messages on an ISDN BRI line card. Where: x = 0-6 (TN0-TN6). basic-5.00 bri-18

RST MSDL x

msdl-18 Reset MSDL card. This command causes a power-on reset on the MSDL, followed by a series of short self-tests. Resetting the card via this command is only permitted if the card is in the Manually Disabled (MAN DSBL) state.

SET IMSG l s c dsl MON x Set monitor on incoming msg SET OMSG l s c dsl MON x Set monitor on outgoing msg SETM BRIM xxxx Set printing of messages on SILC/UILC, MISP, or digital line card. This command is used to select various message types for printing on a given TN (defined by SETM TNx commands). The value of xxxx is a HEX word which determines the message types. bri-18

Bit 0 = Input SSD message from BRI line cards. Bit 1 = Output SSD message to BRI line cards. Bit 2 = Input expedited (high priority) message from BRIL application on MISP. Bit 3 = Output expedited (high priority) message from BRIL application on MISP.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

245

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command

Description Bit 4 = Input ring message from BRIL application on MISP. Bit 5 = Output ring message from BRIL application on MISP Bit 12 = Call processing error message. All other Bits are for future use. Note that the SETM TNx command must have been issued before issuing this command. EXAMPLE: To print input SSD and expedited messages: SETM BRIM 0005 (i.e., 0000000000000101) To print input and output expedited messages: SETM BRIM 000C (i.e., 0000000000001100)

Pack/Rel

SETM IFx 1 PDL2 1 Set printing of SAPI 16 interface messages. SETM IFx 1 PDNI n Set printing of network interface messages. SETM IFx l s c u BCHx Set printing of B-channel terminal interface messages. SETM IFx l s c u DCHx Set printing of D-channel terminal interface messages. SETM MISP x AMO Set printing of audit messages on MISP specified. Where: x = loop for non-Small Systems and non-CS 1000S and card for Small Systems and CS 1000S. These messages are sent from the MISP handler to the MISP basecode. This command is used to turn these messages back on once they have been turned off because: debug or monitor (MON) mode is enabled RSET x AMO command has been issued Where: x = loop 0-254 System with Fibre Network Fabric

mph-19

mph-19

mph-19

mph-19

bri-18

fnf-25

246

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command SETM MISP x DBG

Description Set debug option on MISP specified, where: x = loop.The card must be disabled first. The debug option has the following effect when the MISP is enabled: turns off the sanity timer stops interface handler audit messages no timestamp messages are sent to the MISP card This command requires a password. The "dot" prompt indicates debug mode is turned on.

Pack/Rel bri-18

SETM MISP x MNT Set printing of status messages on MISP specified, where: x = loop for Large Systems and CS 1000E x = card for Small Systems and CS 1000S These messages indicate: error indication messages from the MISP state of L1 on SILC/UILC and L2/L3 on MISP This option setting is lost during an initialization. SETM MISP x MON Set printing of input/output messages on MISP card. Where: x = loop for non-Small System and card for Small System. Both the expedited and ring input/output messages are printed. This command also sets the debug option and requires a password. This command turns on all input/output messages. This may use up all system print registers and may cause system initialization. Therefore use this command with caution. The debug option is turned off by a system initialization. Restarting debug will also restart the input/output monitoring. DISABLE MISP prior to issuing this command, reenable MISP after command issued. SETM MPHM xxxx Set printing of Meridian Packet Handler messages. Where: xxxx = the MPHs to be monitored

bri-18

bri-18

mph-19

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

247

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command SETM TNx l s c u, 31

Description Set printing messages on a digital line card unit (u) or ISDN BRI line card (31). This command is used in conjunction with the SETM BRIM command. The value x is a tag number (0-6). For ISDN BRI line cards, you must enter "l s c 31" for the address.

Pack/Rel arie/ bri-14

SETM TNx l s c u, dsl Set printing messages on a unit. This command is used in conjunction with the SETM BRIM command. The value x is a tag number (0-6). SETM TNx y

arie/ bri-14

bri-18 Set printing messages on a digital line card unit or ISDN BRI line card. Where: x = tag number 0-6 (TN0-TN6) y = l s c u (loop, shelf, card, and unit) or l s c dsl (loop, shelf, card, and digital subscriber loop) for non-Small Systems and non-CS 1000S and c u (card, and unit) or c dsl (card, and digital subscriber loop) for Small Systems and CS 1000S. If u = 31 when a S/T (SILC) or U (UILC) Interface Line Card is specified for the y parameter, then messages for that line card are printed. This command must be issued before the SET BRIM command. msdl-18 Self-test on AML x. This command runs the local loop back test for MSDL AML, and the ESDI self-test for the ESDI AML. MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML layer two must be disabled. Example: ENL MSDL x must have been executed at an earlier time. MSDL Action: The MSDL AML local loop back test is executed and upon completion of the test the MSDL AML port is set to the disable state. Execute a self-test on MSDL card x. msdl-18 This command causes a power-on reset on the MSDL, which ill be followed by a complete set of self-tests. This command only executes self-tests if the card is in the Manually Disabled (MAN DSBL) state. If the self-tests pass, a message indicating this and card id is output. If the self-tests fail, a message is output describing which self-test failed. It is useful to note that the first test that fails will abort the self-test sequence, so this command only indicates one test failure, even if multiple tests might fail.

SLFT AML x

SLFT MSDL x

248

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command SLFT TMDI l s c u Invoke self test STAT AML (x)

Description

Pack/Rel basic-5.00 msdl-18

Get AML status. This command outputs the status of layer two and layer seven of one or all configured AMLs. The designation (DES) of the AML is output if it has been defined for the port in LD 17. Examples:
AML: 01 MSDL: 08 PORT: 00 LYR2: DSBL AUTO: OFF LYR7: DOWN DES: MERIDIAN_MAIL AML: 04 ESDI: 10 LYR2: EST AUTO: ON LYR7: ACTIVE

Where x = 47 (127) STAT APL x STAT CNFG Display status of AUX link x. Get status of link monitor/simulator configuration. Display link monitor/simulator configuration status. The system will respond according to the current configuration as follows: *NOT CONFG - if system is not configured *CNFG INT/SIM CSLAPL x CSLSIM x if the system is in internal maintenance mode; shows link numbers of CSLSIM and CSL application program *CNFG FLD CSL x if the system is in field maintenance mode; shows CSL link number STAT CSDI x STAT DSP LNK x STAT ELAN [<x>] Get status of SDI port x. Get status of all Displays on link x. basic-1 apl-1 apl-1 csl-8

Check status of a configured AML over Ethernet nxcc-22 (ELAN subnet) link. Where <x> = a specific AML over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) link. If no AML over Ethernet link is specified, the statuses of all configured ELAN subnets are checked. Get high-speed link status. Response can be either: lnk-2

STAT HSL

1. UP 2. DOWN, or 3. NOT READY

STAT IALM <vsid> ialm-21

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

249

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command

Description Print the status of the integrated alarms application on the specified VAS, where: ACTIVE = active IALM application INACTIVE = inactive IALM application MANDIS = manually disabled IALM application (disabled in LD 48) LINKOOS = inactive IALM application (because link to the AP is out of service)

Pack/Rel

STAT ICP (x) STAT ISDI x STAT MON (x)

Display software status of one or all ICP links. Get status of hardware AUX link SDI x.

icp-5 apl-1

Get status of one or all message monitors. csl-8 The system will respond with the status. If all monitors are disabled, the response is:
MSGO MSGI PACO PACI X25I X25O DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS

If the monitor function is enabled, for outgoing messages on two links, the response is: MSGO ENL

CSL x
STAT MSDL (x (FULL)) Get MSDL status. This command outputs the status of MSDL cards. Without any optional parameters (no card number, etc.), the status of all MSDL cards in the system is output. When a card number alone is provided with the command, the status of the card is output along with additional information regarding the applications configured on the card. Specifically, for each D-channel or AML configured on the card, the application name, logical number and port status is output. For example:
MSDL x: ENL AML 11 DIS PORT 1 DCH 25 OPER PORT 2 AML 03 OPER PORT 3

msdl-18

250

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command For example:

Description

Pack/Rel msdl-24

MSDL x: ENL SDI 7 OVLD PORT 0 AML 11 DIS PORT 1 DCH 25 OPER PORT 2 AML 03 OPER PORT 3

If the FULL option is entered along with the MSDL number, the system outputs all the information output for the 'STAT MSDL x' command along with the following additional information: card ID bootload firmware version basecode version basecode state when the basecode was activated (if it is active) each application version each application state when each the application was activated (if it is active) The card status is output on the first line and can be any one of the following: MSDL x: ENBL - card is enabled MSDL x: MAN DSBL - card disabled by the DIS MSDL command MSDL x: SYS DSBL reason - card has been disabled by the system The system disabled state may be due to any of the following: 1. SYS DSBL- NOT RESPONDING If the MSDL is in this state, the implication is that the system has attempted to communicate with the MSDL and was not successful. It is possible that the card is not present in the shelf. If it is present, then it is possible that the software on the card is unable to respond to messages from the system. Action: Check to see if the card is properly inserted in its slot. If it is (and has been for more than a few minutes), then check the console output for MSDL or ERR messages and take the appropriate action for the error message.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

251

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command

Description It may be that the rotary switch setting on the MSDL card is not set properly. To keep the system from continuously attempting recovery of the MSDL, use the 'DIS MSDL x' command to put the card in the Manually Disabled (MAN DSBL) state. 2. SYS DSBL- SELF-TESTING If the MSDL is in this state, self-tests are in progress. Action: Wait for self-tests to complete and for the system to examine the results. Under normal circumstances, self-tests take less than one minute to complete. However, when an erasable EPROM on the card has been cleared, self-tests may take between five and six minutes to complete. Therefore, it is prudent not to take any action at this time. 3. SYS DSBL- SELF-TESTS PASSED This is a transient state. A card in a transient state has successfully completed self-tests and the system either is about to begin downloading the MSDL base software, or has just completed downloading the MSDL base software and is about to attempt to enable the card. Action: Wait for the system to begin the next step of recovery. If a more immediate recovery is desired, use the 'DIS MSDL x' command followed by the 'ENL MSDL x' command. This causes essentially the same recovery action to be taken. However, it may be faster (since it is being done as a result of input from the craftsperson). 4. SYS DSBL- SELF-TESTS FAILED If the MSDL is in this state, self-tests have executed and failed on this card. Action: Use the 'STAT MSDL x' command to determine reason for self-test failure. Disable the MSDL card using the 'DIS MSDL x' command, then use the 'SLFT MSDL x' command to execute the self-tests again. If the self-tests pass, attempt to enable the card using the 'ENL MSDL x' command. If the card fails the self-tests again, record the results and replace the card.

Pack/Rel

252

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description 5. SYS DSBL- SRAM TESTS FAILED If the MSDL is in this state, self-tests have executed and passed, however when the system attempted to perform read/write tests to the shared RAM on the MSDL, it detected a failure. Action: Same as for self-test failure. If the attempt to enable the card fails, record the results and replace the card. 6. SYS DSBL- OVERLOAD The system has received too many messages from the MSDL. This is considered to be unacceptable, in that this much of a demand may interfere with other system functions. Action: If the MSDL is left in this state, the system will attempt to bring the card back into service within a few minutes. If this is not desired, disable the card using the 'DIS MSDL x' command. It is also advisable to identify a specific port or application that may be responsible for the overload. The identification can be made by disabling individual links/ports on the MSDL and letting the remaining links/ports operate normally. 7. SYS DSBL- RESET THRESHOLD If the MSDL is in this state, the system has detected more than four resets within ten minutes. This is considered to be unacceptable, as a normally operating card should not reset so often. It is possible that the card may be in this state due to a Fatal Error or Self-test failure from which no recovery was successful. (As the recovery from Fatal Errors and Self-test failures begins with resetting the card, repeated attempts at recovery may cause the reset threshold to be reached.) Action: Disable the card using the 'DIS MSDL x' command and execute the 'SLFT MSDL x' command. If self-tests pass, attempt to enable the card using the 'ENL MSDL x' command. If the problem recurs, try force downloading the

Pack/Rel

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

253

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command

Description software to the MSDL using the 'ENL MSDL x FDL' command. If the problem continues to recur and resets continue because of a repeated fatal error, attempt to isolate the problem by disabling all links/ports controlled by one application (e.g., all D-channels or all AMLs). If no manual intervention is taken by the craftsperson, the system will attempt to bring the card back into service beginning at midnight. 8. SYS DSBL- FATAL ERROR If the MSDL is in this state, the card encountered a fatal condition from which it could not recover. In response to the 'STAT' command, the cause of the fatal error will be displayed. If the 'STAT' command is not entered while the card is in this state, the MSDL302 message printed at the time of the state transition will indicate the cause of the fatal error. Action: The system will attempt to bring the card back into service automatically. While the card is in this state, it is recommended that the craftsperson do nothing. If the system is unable to recover the card, the system disabled substate will be changed to indicate the reason recovery was not possible. The craftsperson should then take the recommended action for that new substate. 9. SYS DSBL- NO RECOVERY ATTEMPTED

Pack/Rel

UNTIL MIDNIGHT
When this is output after the SYS DSBL message, the system has attempted to recover the card but has repeatedly failed. One example of this condition is when the background recovery mechanism has failed to download the MSDL Base Code five times in a row. Action: Disable the card using the 'DIS MSDL x' command, test the card using the 'SLFT MSDL x' command, and if self-tests pass, enable the card using the 'ENL MSDL x' command. If downloading of the MSDL Base Code is necessary, it will be attempted in response to

254

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description the enable command. If no manual intervention is taken, the system will again attempt recovery beginning at midnight.

Pack/Rel

STAT SDI HIGH

Get status of high-speed link port. The response can be either ENL (enabled) or DIS (disabled).

lnk-2

STAT SDI LOW

Get status of low-speed link port. The response can be lnk-2 either ENL (enabled) or DIS (disabled). sta-19 Get status of STA application. When x (STA ID number) is specified, the STA state, port number, port type, port state, and system description are displayed. If x is not specified, and the application is enabled, the state and port information is given. If x is not specified, and the application is in any state other than enabled, only the STA status is given. No port or system information is displayed. Possible output follows: Application state and Target state: ENABLED,

STAT STA x

MANUAL DISABLE, SYSTEM DISABLE, AWAIT DISABLE, AWAIT APPL ENABLE, AWT CONF DOWNLOAD
Port type: ADM, SYS, TTY Port state: NO SDI/STA, DISABLED,

ENABLED, TESTING, KEYBOARD TST, AWAIT VT-200, DTR DOWN, AUTOBAUDING, AWT AUTOBAUD, ABD SCANNING, DEFAULT ABD, NO MODEM, IN SESSION, AWAIT ENABLE
System description is entered as part of the port configuration. For the additional port used to shadow the STA application, the system description is SHADOW TTY. STAT TMDI l s c u Get TMDI status (FULL) STAT VMBA <vsid> [<NNNN>] Get the status for the Voice Mailbox Administration application, where: basic-5.00

vmba-19

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

255

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

Command

Description vsid = the VAS ID where the VMBA is configured NNNN = VMBA audit or upload function, where: - AUDT = mailbox database audit - UPLD = mailbox database upload AUDT and UPLD are optional entries. The VAS ID must be entered. The status output is shown below:

Pack/Rel

STAT VMBA <vsid>

VMBA <ACTIVE or INACTIVE> AUDIT <ACTIVE or INACTIVE> UPLOAD <ACTIVE or INACTIVE>

STAT VMBA <vsid> AUDT AUDIT INACTIVE, or AUDIT ACTIVE

Where: n AUDITED n MISMATCHES FOUND/CORRECTED n ERRORS

STAT VMBA <vsid> UPLD UPLOAD INACTIVE, or UPLOAD ACTIVE

Where: n UPLOADED n DELETED n ERRORS STAT VMBA <vsid> AUDT Get the status for the Voice Mailbox Database audit. Enter the command in the following format. STAT VMBA <vsid> AUDT The status output is shown below: vmba-19

STAT VMBA <vsid> AUDT AUDIT INACTIVE, or AUDIT ACTIVE

Where: n AUDITED n MISMATCHES FOUND/CORRECTED n ERRORS

256

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command STAT VMBA <vsid> UPLD

Description Get the status for the Voice Mailbox Database upload. Enter the command in the following format. STAT VMBA <vsid> UPLD The status output is shown below:

Pack/Rel vmba-19

STAT VMBA <vsid> UPLD UPLOAD INACTIVE,or UPLOAD ACTIVE

Where: n UPLOADED n DELETED n ERRORS SWCH AML x y Switch active (x) and standby (y) AML. This is AML switchover, where x is the active AML switching to standby and y is the standby AML to become active. msdl-18

UPLD AML x TBL y Upload parameter table 1 to 4 from AML x (MSDL only). The MSDL AML maintenance error log table, is uploaded from the MSDL card and is displayed on the TTY screen. The parameter tables are: TBL1 = AML maintenance error log table TBL2 = AML downloaded parameter table TBL3 = AML protocol error log table TBL4 = AML traffic table MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The AML layer two must be enabled. Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must have been executed at an earlier time. Action: MSDL AML table is uploaded and is displayed on the TTY screen. This command is not available for the ESDI card.

msdl-18

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

257

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

258

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 22: LD 51: Intercept Computer Update

This program updates the system with the intercept service interface information that is stored. The program can be run manually or run in the midnight routine for all customers.

Basic commands
CUST ALL CUST c ...c END UPD Update all customers. Update 1 to 5 customers (0-99). Terminate the program. Update the transfer information.

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CUST ALL Update all customers. Description Pack/Rel icp-5 icp-5

CUST c ...c Update 1 to 5 customers (0-99). Repeat the command if more than 5 customers are to be updated. END UPD Terminate the program. Update the transfer information.

icp-5 icp-5

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

259

LD 51: Intercept Computer Update

260

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 23: LD 54: Multifrequency Signaling Diagnostic

Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) or Multifrequency Signaling (MFE) provides a handshaking facility between the system and the Central Office or Public Exchange (CO/PE) or between other PBXs over network/Tie trunks. The XMFC card on a superloop can be used for MFC or MFE. XMFC card has four units. The MFD overlay program is used to diagnose, display or change the status of the MFC or MFE send/ receive (S/R) cards. The program resets all available MFC or MFE cards (for channels on AXMFC card) and performs loop back tests during the midnight routines. After every SYSLOAD or power-up, all available MFC or MFE cards are initialized. The program can be loaded by the system after every power-up (or SYSLOAD), as part of the daily routines, or loaded manually to enter commands.

Hardware Initialization after SYSLOAD

After system power-up, every idle MFC or MFE card is initialized (self-tested). During this test the card is disabled (LED on faceplate ON) and the S/R card microprocessor executes sequential loop back tests on both channels. On power-up SYSLOAD on XMFC, card performs self-test, LED blinks 3 times to indicate selftest pass: Cardlan polling message indicates that XMFC card has powered up. MSL-1 down loads the configuration (E0XXH) MSL-1 enables the card (C000H) Card performs self-test again. If self-test passes (8000H), then LED is OFF and card is enabled. If self-test fails (80XXH), LED is ON and card is disabled. These tests entail looping the sender output of each card to the Receiver input. The sender transmits all thirty tone pairs (1 to 15 digits for both DOD/DID modes) with a default signal level of zero. Each time the receiver detects a tone pair, the microprocessor verifies the digit received. At the end of the test the microprocessor tries to send two test results (one for each channel) to the CPU.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

261

LD 54: Multifrequency Signaling Diagnostic

The CPU cannot receive the results of the test because the card is disabled. A command to enable the card is issued and the microprocessor sends the test results to the CPU.

Loop around test during daily routines

This loop around test is conducted by the system during the midnight routines. The midnight test is identical to the test conducted after power-up except for the following points: the midnight test is conducted on one channel at a time for all available MFC or MFE cards the MFC or MFE S/R card remains enabled (LED on faceplate OFF) the midnight self-test can also be loaded manually by issuing a command on the specified channel

Loop around test by command

The loop around tests are performed by maintenance personnel on a specified channel of the MFC or MFE S/R card. There are two types of tests: one is identical to the midnight test which is conducted on the specific channel the second is conducted on a specific channel for a specified digit and signal level LD 54 also performs the following functions: resets all idle MFC or MFE cards once a day during the midnight routines disables MFC or MFE card or channel. It enables MFC or MFE card or channel determines the status of MFC card or channel lists all disabled MFC or MFE channels handles other common overlay operations (such as clear alarms) Note: Use the DISL command to force-disable the MFC or MFE channel or card. Note: Use the DISI command in LD 32 to disable the card when idle. Note: No more than 50% of MFC channels can be disabled at one time as a result of system or manually initiated tests. However, this constraint does not apply using disable commands.

262

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Basic commands

MFC/MFE error handler and counter

The MFC/MFE error handlers are resident programs that monitor the number of MFC or MFE signaling errors. A one-word error field in the MFC or MFE block is initialized to zero. The Error Handler program allows a maximum of 10 errors. After every successful use of the MFC or MFE channel, the error field will decrement by one, if it is not already at zero. After every failure of the MFC or MFE channel the error field will increment by one. In Generic software, the Error Handler program generates only the ERR700 L S C U message. When an Error Handler code is output, the MFD Overlay must be loaded manually and the MFC or MFE channels tested.

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 nonblocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

Basic commands
ATST l s c u CDSP CMAJ CMIN CMIN ALL DISC l s c DISU l s c u END ENLC l s c ENLU l s c u Invoke automatic loop around test for specified unit Clear maintenance display to 00 or blank Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Disable specified MFC or MFE card Disable specified MFC or MFE channel Stop further testing or cancel active command Enable specified MFC or MFE card Enable specified MFC or MFE channel

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

263

LD 54: Multifrequency Signaling Diagnostic

MIDN 0 MIDN 1 MTST l s c u d l STAT STAT l s c (u)

Reset all idle MFC or MFE cards Initialize all idle MFC or MFE cards Invoke manual loop around test on unit with specified digit and level List all disabled MFC channels in the system Get status of specified MFC or MFE card or unit

Alphabetical list of commands

Command ATST l s c u Description Pack/Rel Invoke automatic loop around test for specified unit. basic-1 Performs automatic loop around test on specified unit with default signal level of zero. All 30 tone pairs are tested and verified by the card microprocessor. Digits 1 to 15 signify Forward Signals 1 to 15 (DOD mode) and digits 16 to 30 signify Backward Signals 1 to 15 (DID mode). The response is OK when the unit passes test and is enabled. If the receiver sends no message within a predefined time period, an error message indicating time-out is printed. If the receiver indicates it has received a different signal than that sent, the failed signal, an error message and the TN are printed. Clear maintenance display to 00 or blank. basic-1

CDSP CMAJ

Clear major alarm, reset power fail transfer and clear basic-1 power fault alarm. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Disable specified MFC or MFE card. LED on card is ON when disabled. alrm_filter-22 basic-1 basic-1

CMIN CMIN ALL DISC l s c

DISU l s c u

Disable specified MFC or MFE channel. basic-1 When the other unit on the card is also in a disabled state in the software, a message is sent to disable the MFC or MFE card. LED on card is ON when disabled.

264

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command END ENLC l s c

Description Stop further testing or cancel active command.

Pack/Rel basic-1

Enable specified MFC or MFE card. Response is OK . basic-1 A message is sent to the MFC or MFE card to turn off the LED. Enable specified MFC or MFE channel. Response is OK . A message is sent to the MFC or MFE card to turn off the LED. basic-1

ENLU l s c u

MIDN 0

Reset all idle MFC or MFE cards. Resets all idle MFC basic-1 or MFE cards and performs loop around tests on all idle channels. Initialize all idle MFC or MFE cards. Recommended after installation. basic-1

MIDN 1

MTST l s c u d l

Invoke manual loop around test on unit with specified basic-1 digit and level. This command performs the manual loop around test on specified unit with specified digit and signal level. MFC-30 tone pairs are tested and verified by the system CPU. Digits 1 to 15 indicate forward signals 1 to 15 (DOD mode) and digits 16 to 30 indicate backward signals 1 to 15 (DID mode). MFE-15 tone pairs are tested and verified. Digits 1-15 represent Forward Signals 1-15 (DID mode). Digit 0 represents the control frequency. Table 14: MFC sender/transmit levels on page 265 presents MFC sender (transmit) levels. These levels are output by the MFC card and do not include any pads that may be put in by the trunk card.

Table 14: MFC sender/transmit levels

Digit level 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Level at S/R card 8 dBm 11 dBm 12 dBm 13 dBm 14 dBm 15 dBm 16 dBm Digit level 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Level at S/R card 4 dBm 5 dBm 6 dBm 7 dBm 9 dBm 10 dBm spare (8) dBm

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

265

LD 54: Multifrequency Signaling Diagnostic

Digit level 7

Level at S/R card 31 dBm

Digit level 15

Level at S/R card spare (8) dBm

The MFE signal level 0 = -10.5 dBm level with skew -7.0 dBm control frequency level. Signal levels 1-7 are used for internal test purposes. The response is OK when the unit passes the test and is enabled. If the unit fails the test, the appropriate error message and the TN are printed. STAT List all disabled MFC channels in the system. basic-1

STAT l s c (u) Get status of specified MFC or MFE card or unit. basic-1 Status is one of: IDLE, BUSY, MBSY, DSBL or UNEQ for both channels.

266

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 24: LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic
The LD 60 diagnostic program can be run in midnight routines or loaded manually to enter commands. On Small Systems and CS 1000S systems, LD 60 is used to maintain: NTAK20 Clock Controller NTAK09 1.5 Mb/s (DTI/PRI) Interface Card NTAK10 2.0 Mb/s (DTI) Interface Card NTAK79 2.0 Mb/s (PRI) NTRB21 TMDI NTAK50 2.0 Mb/s This program is used to maintain the following on other systems: QPC471/775 Clock Controller QPC472 1.5 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) QPC536 2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) QPC720 or DDP2 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) NT8D72AA 2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface (PRI)

Channel Timeslot Mapping

If a system loop is configured with a SYS-12, AXE-10 SWE, NUMERIS, SwissNet D-channel (SWISS), TCNZ, or EuroISDN, then the following message to explain the difference in timeslot to channel mapping between the system and the public network will be printed on loading the Overlay. The heading will differ according to the interface supported by the phase. Refer to Table 15: Channel Timeslot Mapping on page 268 for channel timeslot mapping.

Example Message:
M1/SL-1 SYS-12 AXE-10 SWE

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

267

LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic

NUMERIS SWISS TCNZ EuroISDN

Table 15: Channel Timeslot Mapping

Channel B B D M 1/SL-1 1-15 16-30 31 Network 1-15 17-31 16 Timeslot 1-15 17-31 16

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 nonblocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

Basic commands
DTI/PRI commands
ATLP (0), 1 CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL DISI loop DISL loop Disable (default) or enable midnight auto loop test Clear maintenance display to 00 or blank Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Disable loop when all channels are idle Disable network and DTI/PRI cards of loop

268

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Basic commands

DLBK loop DLBK l ch DSCH l ch ENCH loop ENCH l ch ENLL loop LCNT (loop) LOVF c r RCNT RCNT loop RMST loop RMST l ch RLBK loop RLBK l ch RSET l ch SLFT loop SLFT l ch STAT STAT loop STAT l ch VER (loop)

Disable remote loop back test per RLBK command Disable remote loop back test per RLBK l ch command Disable channel ch of loop Enable all channels on 2.0 Mb/s DTI/PRI Enable channel ch of DTI/PRI loop Enable network and DTI/PRI cards of loop List contents of alarm counters on one or all DTI/PRI loops List threshold overflows for customer c (0-99) and route r (0-511) Reset alarm counters of all DTI/PRI loops Reset alarm counter of DTI/PRI loop Perform self-test on loop Perform self-test on specified channel (2.0 Mb/s DTI/PRI only) Close loop at carrier interface point for testing Close channel ch at carrier interface point Reset thresholds for channel ch Invoke hardware self-test on loop Invoke partial hardware self-test on channel ch Get status of all loops Get status of DTI/PRI loop Get status of channel ch Query existing UDT card firmware version

Clock controller commands

DIS CC n DSCK loop DSYL loop ENCK loop ENL CC x / l s Disable system clock controller n Disables the clock for loop Disable yellow alarm processing for loop Enable the clock for loop Enable system clock controller x OR superloop and shelf

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

269

LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic

<fdl> ENYL loop EREF IDC x MREF RST CC x SEFT CC x SLFT CC x SSCK n / l s <full> SWCK SWCK FRCE TRCK aaa n / l s Switch system clock from active to standby Force system clock to switch from active to standby Set clock controller tracking to primary, secondary or free run Enable yellow alarm processing for loop Enable automatic switchover of system clocks Get card ID of Clock Controller card in side x Disable switchover of system clocks Reset side x of the Downloadable Clock Controller Execute a self test on side x of the Downloadable Clock Controller. Execute a selftest on side x of the Downloadable Clock Controller Get status of system clock n OR superloop and card

Alphabetical list of commands

Command ATLP (0), 1 Description Disable (0) or enable (1) daily routine auto loop test. Where: 1 = loop test enable; causes far-end to raise and clear yellow alarm 0 =run the partial loop test; there is no interaction for far-end loop (default value) LD 60 is included in the daily (midnight) routines if defined by LD 17 prompt DROL. ATLP is only run if LD 60 is included in the daily routines. If ATLP = 1, and all 24 channels on the loop are idle, then the DTI/PRI card is disabled and a self-test is performed on each channel. All DTI/PRI cards are tested, one at a time. If a D-channel is on the loop, it is temporarily released and reestablished. If one or more channels are busy, the test is not performed on the loop. Pack/Rel dti/pra-5

270

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description If ATLP = 0, then an "AUTO TEST DSBL" message is output and only one channel is tested. The channel is randomly selected by software, it cannot be specified.

Pack/Rel

CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL DIS CC 0

Clear maintenance display to 00 or blank. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Disable system clock controller. (does not apply to CS 1000E)

dti/pra-5 alrm_filter-22 dti/pra-5

DIS CC x (0,1) Disable system clock controller 0 or 1. (does not apply to CS 1000E) CPU 0 must be idle to disable CC 0. CPU 1 must be idle to disable CC 1. To switch CPUs, use the SPCU command in LD 135. DIS CC LP SHELF DISI loop Disable system clock. (CS 1000E only)

dti/pra-5

Disable DTI/PRI loop when all channels are idle. dti/pra-5 The network and DTI/PRI cards are then disabled and status LEDs are lit. Channel status is set to BSY. Enter END to abort. When the PRI is physically connected to a DCHI card, the D-channels must be disabled first using LD 96. Disable network and DTI/PRI/DTI2/PRI2 cards of dti/pra-5 loop. (PRI & PRI2 loops cannot be disabled unless associated D-channel is disabled first using LD 96). Active calls are force disconnected by on-hook simulation. All channels are disabled and status LEDs are lit. Disable remote loop back test per RLBK command. Loop remains disabled. Disable remote loop back test per RLBK loop ch command. The channel remains disabled. Disable channel ch of loop l. dti/pra-5

DISL loop

DLBK loop

DLBK l ch

dti/pra-5

DSCH l ch

dti/pra-5

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

271

LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic

Command DSCK loop

Description

Pack/Rel

Disables the clock for loop, which does not have to be dti/pra-5 previously defined as the primary or secondary clock source. Disable yellow alarm processing for loop. Enable all channels on DTI2 loop. dti/pra-5 dti/pra-5

DSYL loop ENCH loop ENCH l ch

dti 2 - 5 Enable channel ch of loop. For TIE trunks with A+B signaling, the channel is set to the same state as the far-end. The far-end refers to the status of the channels as presented by DTI T1 port. With B-channel signaling, channels are placed into the IDLE state and made available for calls. Enables the clock for loop, which must be previously defined as a primary or secondary clock source via service change. Aborts the program. Enable system clock controller, where: x = 0 or 1 l s = superloop and card fdl = Force DownLoad for the NTRB53 card with Release 25.40 and later basic-5.00 dti/pra-5

ENCK loop

END ENL CC x / l s <fdl>

dti/pra-5 dti/pra-5

ENL CC LP SHELF ENLL loop

Enable system clock. (CS 1000E only)

dti/pra-5 Enable network and DTI/PRI/DTI2/PRI2 cards of loop. For TIE trunks with A+B signaling, the channels are set to the same status as the far-end; otherwise, the channels are set to idle status. The far-end refers to the status of the channels as presented by DTI T1 port. Status LEDs are deactivated. With B-channel signaling, channels are placed into the IDLE state and made available for calls. Enable yellow alarm processing for loop. dti/pra-5

ENYL loop EREF

Enables automatic switchover of primary and dti/pra-5 secondary reference clocks. Also enables recovery to

272

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description primary or secondary clocks when loops associated with these clocks are automatically enabled.

Pack/Rel

IDC x LCNT (loop)

Get card ID of Clock Controller card in side x. List contents of alarm counters on one or all of the following cases, where: loop = 0-255, System with Fibre Network Fabric Case 1 1.5 Mb/s DTI/PRI The counters are: BPV = bipolar violation counter SLIPD = frame slip deletion counter SLIPR = frame slip repetition count LOSFA = loss of frame alignment counter OS_BPV = 24-hr bipolar violation counter - For PRI with D2, D3, or D4 framing format, 24-hr bipolar violation counter - For PRI with Extended Superframe Format, 24-hr Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) counter OS_LOSFA = 24-hr loss of frame alignment counter OS_YEL = 24-hr yellow alarm counter Case 2 2.0 Mb/S DTI The counters are: G1 alarms BPV = bipolar violation counter FAP = frame alignment threshold counter SLP = maintenance threshold slip counter CRC = cyclic redundancy threshold counter AIS = alarm indication signal AIS64 = 64 Kb/s alarm indication signal FAL = loss of frame alignment MFAL = loss of multiframe alignment BIT3 = bit 3 error BIT6 = bit 6 error CFAS = loss of crc-4 multiframe alignment

basic-25.4 dti/pra-5 fnf-25

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

273

LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic

Command

Description Case 3 2.0 Mb/s PRI The counters are: BPV = bipolar violation counter CRC = cyclic redundancy threshold counter FAP = frame alignment threshold counter SLP = maintenance threshold slip counter AIS = alarm indication signal LFAS = loss of frame alignment signal LMAS = loss of multiframe alignment signal RAI = remote alarm indication LOS = loss of signal

Pack/Rel

LOVF c r

dti/pra-5 List threshold overflows for customer c (0-99) and route r (0-511). The overflows are set when the resident trunk monitor outputs a diagnostic message. Defined thresholds are HOLD, ILLR, REPT, SEIZ and SVFL (see LD 16). Disable switchover of system clocks. Also disables recovery to primary or secondary reference clocks when loops associated with these clocks are automatically enabled. dti/pra-5

MREF

RCNT (loop)

Reset alarm counters for all or specified loop only. dti/pra-5 If the DTI loop was disabled due to an error threshold overflow and the DTI may be enabled automatically when the counter is cleared, then before performing any command, such as test, that requires the DTI to be disabled you should: 1. disable the DTI 2. list the counters with the LCNT command 3. reset the counters with the RCNT command 4. do the test commands

REST l

Perform self-test on specified loop l where: l = 0-255, System with Fibre Network Fabric

fnf-25

RLBK loop

Close loop at carrier interface point for testing. dti/pra-5 Allows the far-end to perform an external loop back test on the carrier span using the RMST command. This command closes the loop at the carrier interface

274

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description point of the DTI/PRI. The DTI/PRI loop must be disabled first using the DISI or DISL loop commands.

Pack/Rel

RLBK l ch

Close channel ch at carrier interface point. dti/pra-5 Allows the far-end to perform an external loop back test on the carrier span. The loop remains enabled, but closes the specified channel at the carrier interface point of the DTI/PRI. The DTI/PRI channel must be disabled first using the DSCH loop ch command. Perform remote loop back test on loop. The far-end must be in the remote loop back mode. (RLBK command has been issued at the far-end) dti/pra-5

RMST loop

RMST l ch

The far-end channel must be in the remote loop back dti 2 - 14 mode. (RLBK command has been issued at the farend) Reset thresholds for channel ch on loop l. Execute a self test on side x of the Downloadable Clock Controller. dti/pra-5 basic-25.4

RSET l ch SEFT CC x

SLFT loop

Invoke DTI/PRI hardware self-test on loop. dti/pra-5 This command tests speech path continuity, zero code suppression, remote alarm detection, and A&B bit signaling. The loop must be disabled first using the DISI or DISL loop command. Invoke partial hardware self-test on channel ch. The DTI/PRI channel must be disabled first using the DSCH command. Get status of system clock where: x = 0 or 1 l s = superloop and card full = Get full status of clock in side x, including serial number and loadware versions and states. The SSCK command indicates the active controller as basic-25.4 well as active primary or secondary reference clock source or free run. Response may be: basic-5.00 basic-1

SLFT l ch

SSCK x / l s <full>

dti/pra-5

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

275

LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic

Command

Description 1. AUTO SWREF CLK - ENBL = automatic switchover of system clocks enabled 2. AUTO SWREF CLK - DSBL = automatic switchover of system clocks disabled 3. CLOCK ACTIVE = the active controller 4. DSBL = clock disabled 5. ENBL = clock enabled 6. REF CLK ERR = possible faulty cable from CC to DTI/PRI, or faulty Clock Controller 7. SYSTEM CLOCK - FREE RUN, PREF or SREF = clock is in free run mode or tracking to the primary (PREF) or secondary (SREF) reference loop 8. VCXO AGING ERROR = the timing crystal is faulty, replace the clock

Pack/Rel

STAT

Get status of all digital loops. The types of loops are: 1. PRI = Primary Rate Interface 2. PRI2 =2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface 3. DTI = Digital Trunk Interface 4. DTI2 =2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface 5. DLI = Digital Link Interface 6. JDMI = Japan Digital Multiplex Interface

dti/pra-5

STAT loop

Get status of digital loop. Sample output:

AAA TRK LOOP x SERVICE RESTORE: YEL ALM PROCESS: ALARM STATUS: NO BBBB YES/NO YES/NO ALARM/RED(local) ALARM

dti/pra-5

Where: AAA may be :

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. DTI DTI2 PRI PRI2 TIE DID DTI LINK (DTI link loop = DLI)

Where: BBBB may be:

276

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description 1. DSBL = Hardware of specified digital loop is disabled 2. ENBL = Hardware of specified digital loop is enabled 3. RLBK = Hardware of specified digital loop is in remote loop back mode 4. DISI PENDING = DSI command is in progress 5. TRACKING = system clock is tracked to this loop 6. IDLE = Hardware of specified digital loop is idle When AAA = TIE, IDLE ISPC indicates that the channel is an established ISPC link ready to be used by any end-users having access to the associated ISPC route. 7. SERVER RCVY = server has not recovered status of DTI LINK loop. Channels will not be allocated for call processing until this status is removed by the server 8. BUSY = Hardware of specified digital loop is busy When AAA = TIE, BUSY ISPC indicates that the channel is an established ISPC link which is used by end users on the PBXs. When AAA = DID, BUSY ISPC indicates that the ISPC link is established to the Central Office. The status "BUSY" is independent to ISL feature usage of the ISPC link. 9. MSBY = Hardware of specified digital loop is in make busy mode When AAA = TIE, MSBY ISPC indicates that the configured ISPC link is one of the following: a. not established yet b. established, but the ISL D-channel which controls its usage not established Where: SERVICE RESTORE may be: 1. YES = restore service automatically if alarm is removed 2. NO = loop can only be manually enabled Where: YEL ALARM PROCESS may be: 1. YES = yellow alarm processing is enabled 2. NO = yellow alarm processing is disabled

Pack/Rel

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

277

LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic

Command

Description Where: ALARM STATUS may be: 1. NO ALARM = no alarm active 2. RED = red (local) alarm active Action 1: 1. list alarm counters (LCNT command) 2. check for DTA messages 3. go to the fault clearing section Where: YELLOW = yellow (remote) alarm active WAITING = DTI/PRI card is not responding. The card either did not respond to a status check or did not respond when a red alarm was cleared. Go to Action 2. Action 2: 1. check DTI/PRI status again 2. disable, then enable the DTI/PRIPRI
STATE OF SERVICE:

Pack/Rel

OOS = out-of-service NNC = no new call NNDC = no new data call MNT = maintenance When an alarm is present (group 2 error), it is a

REMOTE ALARM
REMOTE ALARM:

NS = alarm indication signal RAI = remote alarm indication

LOCAL ALARM:

LOS = loss of signal LFAS = loss of frame alignment signal LMAS = loss of multiframe alignment signal STAT l ch Get status of channel ch. Status may be: dti/pra-5

278

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description 1. IDLE = channel is enabled and is idle 2. BUSY = channel is enabled and is call processing busy or channel is in a lockout state (far-end is disabled) 3. MBSY = channel is being used for maintenance busy, the D-channel is down, or far-end channel is disabled 4. DSBL = channel is disabled 5. DSBL (SERVER) = channel is being used for server maintenance and is disabled for the duration (1.5 Mb/s DTI digital link interface only) 6. FE MBSY = near end is idle, far-end is maintenance busy 7. FE DSBL = near end is idle, far-end is disabled 8. FE DSBL = far-end B-channel is disabled 9. FE MBSY = far-end B-channel is in maintenance mode 10. UNEQ = channel is not equipped When the loop is a Phantom loop, it is possible to receive the status messages: TIE IDLE ISPC, TIE BUSY ISPC , or TIE MSBY ISPC . Interpret these system responses as they are interpreted for the command STAT loop. See the section which outlines BBBB alternatives for the STAT loop command on 1 on page 277.

Pack/Rel

SWCK

Switch system clock from active to standby. The reference clock source remains unchanged. Note: Wait 2 to 3 minutes between clock switches. Ensure both clock controllers are locked by using SSCK (LD 60) before a manual clock switch is performed..

dti/pra-5

SWCK FRCE

Force system clock to switch from active to standby. Functions with NTRB53 Clock Controller Note: Switch occurs regardless of 1 minute clock switch timer being set, or a FIJI alarm preventing a switch is on.

basic-3.0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

279

LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic

Command

Description

Pack/Rel dti/pra-5 basic-5.00

TRCK aaa n / l s Set clock controller tracking. Where aaa is: PCK = track primary clock (on remote) SCLK = track secondary clock (on remote) FRUN = free run mode PLL1 = track on port 1 IP connection to/from Main PLL2 = track on port 2 IP connection to/from Main PLL3 = track on port 3 IP connection to/from Main PLL4 = track on port 4 IP connection to/from Main Where n is: 0 = Main cabinet clock 1, 2, 3, or 4 = IP expansion cabinet or MG 1000S number Where l s is: l s = superloop and shelf Parameters PLL1, PLL3 and PLL4 can be used with n=0 only. Track primary clock (PCK) or secondary clock (SCLK) as the reference clock or go to free run (FRUN) mode. VER (loop) Query existing UDT card firmware version. UDT loop should be in enabled state in order to successfully perform the command. The response format is: UDT <loop> VER <AAnn>

basic-6.00

280

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 25: LD 61: Message Waiting Lamps Reset

The Message Waiting Lamps Reset (MWL) program can be invoked automatically by the system as part of the daily routines or manually from an input device. It is used to deactivate all active Message Waiting lamps on user stations and reset the associated status in the system. This program cannot be applied to digital sets. When LD 61 is loaded manually, 'G' must be entered to initiate the task.

G command
Starts resetting the trouble status on all Message Waiting lamps. The program does not reset lamp status unless all message center sets are out-of-service (i.e., message center is closed and attendants are in Night Service). Before running this program, all Message Center (MC) telephones must be taken out-ofservice by "make telephone busy" and if attendants are set up to handle message calls, they must be in night mode.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

281

LD 61: Message Waiting Lamps Reset

282

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 26: LD 75: Digital Trunk Maintenance

This program lets you test digital channels, bring a digital (IDA) link into service or take a link out-ofservice. All Overlay 75 commands may be used on Small Systems, CS 1000S, systems by substituting card number for loop number.

Basic commands
CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL DIS DDCS loop DIS DDSL n DIS DTCS loop DIS DTRC l c DIS DTSL n DIS DTVC l c DIS LSSL n DIS MON l DIS MSGI DIS MSGO DIS PRI2 loop DISI DDCS loop DISI DTCS loop ENL DDCS loop ENL DDSL n ENL DTCS loop Clears the maintenance display Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Disables DDCS loop Disables DDSL n Disables DTCS loop Disables real channel c on loop l Disables DTSL n Disables virtual channel c on loop l Disables Low Speed Signaling Link n for APNSS Disables monitoring of level 3 messages on a DDSL loop l Disables monitoring of incoming messages for all DDSL Disables monitoring of outgoing messages for all DDSL Disables PRI2 loop Disables all channels on loop as they become idle Disables all channels on loop as they become idle Enables DDCS loop Enables DDSL n Enables DTCS loop

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

283

LD 75: Digital Trunk Maintenance

ENL DTRC l c ENL DTSL n ENL DTVC l c ENL LSSL n ENL MON l ENL MON l aaaa ENL MSGI ENL MSGO ENL PRI2 loop RCNT (ddsl) STAT DDCS (loop) STAT DDSL (n) STAT DTCS (loop) STAT DTRC l c STAT DTSL (n) STAT DTVC l c STAT LSRC n (x) STAT LSSL n STAT LSVC n (x) STAT PRI2 loop STRT n

Enables real channel c on loop l Enables DTSL n Enables virtual channel c on loop l Enables Low Speed Signaling Link n for APNSS Enable monitoring of level 3 messages on a DDSL loop l in long format Enable monitoring of level 3 messages on a DDSL loop l in aaaa formats Enable monitoring of incoming messages for all DDSL loops Enable monitoring of outgoing messages for all DDSL loops Enables PRI2 loop Reset alarm counters for a specified DDSL only Gives status of all DDCS loops if loop omitted. Gives status of DDCS loop and all channels on loop if loop specified. Gives status of all DDSLs if n omitted. Gives status of DDSL n if n specified. Gives status of all DTCS loops if loop omitted. Gives status of DTCS loop and all channels on loop if loop specified. Gives status of real digital channel c on loop l Gives status of all DTSLs if n omitted. Gives status of DTSL n if n specified. Gives status of virtual digital channel c on loop l Gives status of Real Channel x on Signaling Link n Gives status of Low Speed Signaling Link n for APNSS Gives status of Virtual Channel x on Signaling Link n Status of PRI2 loop Starts DDSL n

Note: If GEC Plessey Telecommunications (GPT) hardware is used, the mnemonic DTSL is used instead of DDSL and the mnemonic DTCS is used instead of DDCS.

284

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CDSP CMIN CMIN ALL DIS DDCS loop DIS DDSL n DIS DTCS loop DIS DTRC l c DIS DTSL n DIS DTVC l c DIS LSSL n DIS MON loop Description Clears the maintenance display. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Disables DDCS loop. Disables DDSL n. Disables DTCS loop Disables real channel c on loop l. Disables DTSL n. Disables virtual channel c on loop l. Disables LSSL n. Disables monitoring of level 3 messages on a DDSL loop Disables monitoring of incoming messages for all DDSL Disables monitoring of incoming messages for all DDSL Disable PRI2 loop dpnss-24 Pack/Rel dpnss-16 alrm_filter-22 dpnss-16 dpnss-16 dpnss-16 dpnss-16 dpnss-16 dpnss-16 dpnss-16 dpnss-16

DIS MSGI

DIS MSGO

dpnss-24

DIS PRI2 loop DISI DDCS loop

basic-5.00

Disables all channels on loop as they become idle. dpnss-16 The message "OK DISABLING" is issued and further commands can be entered. DTM055 is issued when all of the channels are disabled. Disables all channels on loop as they become idle. Enables DDCS loop. dpnss-16 dpnss-16

DISI DTCS loop ENL DDCS loop

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

285

LD 75: Digital Trunk Maintenance

Command ENL DDSL n ENL DTCS loop ENL DTRC l c ENL DTSL n ENL DTVC l c ENL LSSL n ENL MON l Enables DDSL n.

Description

Pack/Rel dpnss-16 dpnss-16 dpnss-16 dpnss-16 dpnss-16 dpnss-16

Enables DTCS loop. Enables real channel c on loop l. Enables DTSL n. Enables virtual channel c on loop l. Enables Low Speed Signaling Link n for APNSS.

Enables monitoring of level 3 messages on a DDSL dpnss-24 loop l (by default, both incoming and outgoing messages are monitored) Enable monitoring of level 3 messages on a DDLS loop l. Where aaaa can be one of the following: shrt = short format long = long format decd = decoded format dpnss-24

ENL MON l aaaa

ENL MSGI

Enables monitoring of incoming messages for all DDSL loops Enables monitoring of outgoing messages for all DDSL loops Enable PRI2 loop Reset alarm counters for a specified DDSL only, where: ddsl = IDA, DASS, DASS2, DPNSS

dpnss-24

ENL MSGO

dpnss-24

ENL PRI2 loop RCNT (ddsl)

basic-5.00 dpnss-25

STAT DDCS (loop) Gives status of all DDCS loops if loop omitted. Gives dpnss-16 status of DDCS loop and all channels on loop if loop specified. STAT DDSL (n) Gives status of all DDSLs if n omitted or specified. dpnss-16

STAT DTCS (loop) Gives status of all DTCS loops if loop omitted. Gives dpnss-16 status of DTCS loop and all channels on loop if loop specified. STAT DTRC l c Gives status of real digital channel c on loop l dpnss-16

286

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command STAT DTSL (n)

Description Gives status of all DTSLs if n omitted. Gives status of DTSL n if n specified. Gives status of virtual digital channel c on loop l Gives status of Real Channel x on Signaling Link n Gives status of Low Speed Signaling Link n for APNSS Gives status of Virtual Channel x on Signaling Link n Status of PRI2 loop Starts DDSL n The message "OK, STARTING" is issued and further commands can be entered. DTM301 is issued when the link is successfully started.

Pack/Rel dpnss-16

STAT DTVC l c STAT LSRC n (x) STAT LSSL n

dpnss-16 dpnss-16 dpnss-16

STAT LSVC n (x)

dpnss-16

STAT PRI2 loop STRT n

basic-5.00 dpnss-16

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

287

LD 75: Digital Trunk Maintenance

288

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 27: LD 77: Manual Print

LD 77 is used to print the signals that come from the peripheral cards to the common equipment. Note: This Overlay is intended for people experienced with the message formats and protocols. Some loop-level commands are not valid on Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000Tsystems, and have been replaced with slot-level commands.

When to use LD 77
LD 77 can be useful in determining which peripheral card (line or trunk) is causing a system overload in situations in which the CPU cannot narrow the problem to a specific Terminal Number (TN). Once the program is loaded from a tape, the user may request the system to print all the input messages from a specific area of Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. Manual Print can also be used to continuously send frequency combinations by defining the loop and terminal number of the MFE card, busying the channel, setting the read/write bit to write, defining the message and repeatedly sending it. This channel will not be available for regular signaling until the message sending is stopped and the channel is idled. When a machine is carrying traffic, there will be a large number of valid messages generated from the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. Thus, the program will be most effective for troubleshooting when: there is little system traffic message address range is restricted (i.e., looks only at one shelf or loop) This program has capabilities which are used by the software designers during development activities. The user is protected from accidental access to these commands (and resulting potential service degradation) as a password is required. This password is not available to customers.

LD 77 Output format
All numerical input/output is in hexadecimal format. The output is in the following format: <loop> <shelf> <card> <terminal> <message> <time-stamp>

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

289

LD 77: Manual Print

The loop, shelf and card fields identify the circuit card generating the message.

Abbreviations for LD 77
The fields are defined as follows: b = bypass bit value cb = continuity bit ch = chip on a given SSD Peripheral Signaling card g = group l s c u = TN: loop, shelf, card, unit ln = link loop = network loop m = module p = page ps = Peripheral Signaling card sh = Multigroup shelf ts = time slot v = desired lamp state; 0 = lit, 1 = dark x = Multigroup bit Some four-letter commands can be abbreviated to a one-letter command when entered from a TTY (but not an SL-1 telephone). The one-letter command is shown in parentheses after the four-letter mnemonic (e. g., ARPS (F) l s 32 can be entered as F l s 32).

LD 77 Input format
All input is in decimal form, except message data which is in hexadecimal form. Space and carriage return are automatically done by the overlay when the expected number of digits are input. Therefore the number of input digits must be strictly entered for each input parameter. The number of letters specified in each parameter field dictate the number of hex or decimal digits that must be entered. For example: Enter for TN 1 0 2 0:

290

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Fibre Network Fabric

001 0 02 00 Enter for TN 156 1 15 30: 156 1 15 30

Fibre Network Fabric

The Fibre Network Fabric extends and enhances the 5-group network architecture to 8 nonblocking (inter-group) Network groups, with a resulting expansion in network capacity to 8k timeslots available for Intergroup traffic. This is achieved by using OC-12 SONET rings, and adding additional network and IPE shelves, cards and cables and software changes to allow using the expanded network capacity. This expansion increases the number of available loops from 160 to 256. This applies to Multi Group systems only.

Basic commands
Only "P" commands can be used on superloops.
ANWK (B) loop ts ANWS (C) loop ts ARPM loop 20 Read/write network card memory Read/write network card memory (short) Print contents of timeslots in RPC

ARPM loop ts b s c u Get contents of timeslot ts, loop ARPS (F) loop ts DFTM (T) s c u DLMP 0/1 DMTN DISC DRTM (N) l s c u KALL KALS KILLx N Read Remote Peripheral Switch memory Define unit to receive signaling messages Turn on/off lamp audit Monitor input and output SSD messages for 1 to 6 TNs Call disconnect Stop printing messages Call set up without specifying timeslots Call set up with specifying timeslots Reset one or all TN being monitored Stop print

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

291

LD 77: Manual Print

P P lll P lll s P lll s cc PRTM (P) l s c u IMSG WCTS loop WMBY l s c u WMUB l s c u XMSG XMII, XMIO XRCL loop XRSH loop XRST loop XTRP loop XTLP loop XWCS loop xxxx

Print all messages Print all messages from specified loop lll Print all messages from specified shelf lll s Print all messages from specified card lll s cc Print messages, as specified l s c u Send input SSD messages from IPE to system CPU Print the current unit scan of loop Write the maintenance bit for the given unit to BUSY Write the maintenance bit for the given unit to NOT BUSY Send output SSD messages from system CPU to IPE Send input/output XMI messages between the CPU and superloops Read contents of RPC control register for loop Read and print contents of SHEN register for loop Read and print contents of STATUS register for loop Test remote RPC processor for loop Test local RPC processor for loop Writes RPC control/SHEN register for loop

Alphabetical list of commands

Command ANWK (B) loop ts Read/write network card memory. Access the specified network card memory to read and print one word. The word format is <cb s c u x ln -->, where: cb = continuity bit s = shelf c = card u = unit x = multigroup bit ln = link Description Pack/Rel basic-1

292

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description You can write in new data. To change the values, rekey the word after the dashes, substituting new values where appropriate.

Pack/Rel

ANWS (C) loop ts Read/write network card memory (short). Access the specified network card memory (short form) to read and print one word. The multigroup bit and continuity field are not used. The word format is: <s c u ln -->, where: s = shelf c = card u = unit ln = link. You can write in new data. To change the values, rekey the word after the dashes, substituting new values where appropriate. ARPM loop 20

basic-1

Prints contents of 32 timeslots in RPC associated with loop (20 basic-1 hexadecimal = 32 decimal). ARPM loop ts b s c u Get contents of timeslot ts, loop. The system prints data in the form "bscu", where b is the current value of the bypass bit in the Remote Peripheral Equipment Controller (RPC) memory (0 or 1) for that shelf, card and unit. The user can enter a new bypass bit for the RPC memory after the dash. ARPS (F) loop ts Read Remote Peripheral Switch memory. Access the specified Remote Peripheral Switch (RPS) memory to read and print one word. The word format is: <cb s c u -->, where: cb = continuity bit s = shelf c = card u = unit. You can write in new data. To change the values, rekey the word after the dashes, substituting new values where appropriate. DFTM (T) s c u Define unit to receive signaling messages. basic-1 basic-1 basic-1

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

293

LD 77: Manual Print

Command DISC

Description Call disconnect. Format is:

DISC TN1 l s c u TN2 l s c u

Pack/Rel xpe-15

This command disconnects the call specified by the TNs. A scan of the connection memory is done prior to disconnecting the call, if no timeslot can be found for the specified TN, nothing is done. TN1 and TN2 are prompted by the program. DLMP 0/1 Turn on/off lamp audit. Format is: DLMP 0 = turn on lamp audit DLMP 1 = turn off lamp audit DMTN xpe-15 Monitor input and output SSD messages for 1 to 6 TNs. This command is used to monitor all SSD messages for the specified TN. TN is automatically prompted by the program. Up to 6 TNs can be monitored at the same time. Enter the DLPM and DMTN commands as follows: DLMP 2 DMTN TNx l s c u TNx Loop 0 00 CH (Digital Trunk Cards), where: x = (1-6), TN index The output format is: OSSD111 TN MSG TIME , where: OSSD111 = header TN = packed TN MSG = SSD message content TIME = real time clock before output when work scheduler gets the input message DPRT c ch Print messages from this digital channel (Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B,MG 1000T). Print messages from this digital card. (Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B,MG 1000T). Stop printing messages from this digital channel. (Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B,MG 1000T). xpe-15 xpe-15

DPRT card

xpe-15

DRTD c ch

xpe-15

DRTD card

Stop printing messages from this digital card (Small System, CS xpe-15 1000S, MG 1000B,MG 1000T). basic-1

DRTM (N) l s c u

294

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description Stop printing messages from the loop, shelf, card and unit. Only loop and shelf numbers are required.

Pack/Rel

IMSG

xpe-15 Send input SSD messages from IPE to system CPU. This command is used to simulate incoming SSD message from the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. The specified TN must be equipped. Format is:

IMSG TN l s c u NUMBER MESSAGES mm # TIMES TO SEND hhh MSG DATA xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx. . . where:
mm = number of SSD messages (1-10) to be sent hhh = number of times (1-999) to simulate the SSD input message xxxx = SSD message content. Number of message contents depends on input of mm

TN, NUMBER MESSAGES, # TIMES TO SEND , and MSG DATA are prompted by the program.
KALL Call set up without specifying timeslots. xpe-15 This command is used to set up a simple call (intra or intergroup). The system finds an available timeslot for the specified TNs. The specified TN must be equipped, enabled and idle. Format is:

KALL TN1 l s c u, TN l s c u Loop 0 00 CH for Digital Trunk Cards. TN2 l s c u, TN l s c u Loop 0 00 CH for Digital Trunk Cards. TN1 and TN2 are
automatically prompted by the program. If AUDIT is running, call(s) are disconnected, and AUD17, AUD18, AUD19, and/or AUD31, AUD32 is printed. Call setup command simply finds the available timeslots and sets up the connection memory and/or junctor memory. BUG105, BUG330 may be printed if illegal sequences are carried out. These commands are designed for lab use only, and should be used cautiously in a live switch. KALS Call set up with specifying timeslots. xpe-15 This command will set up a call specified by the input TNs and the timeslots if both TNs are equipped, enable and idle. The specified timeslots will be used if they are idle, if the specified timeslot are occupied, then the call will not be set up. See Notes with the KALL command. Format:
KALS

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

295

LD 77: Manual Print

Command

Description
TN1 l s c u, TN l s c u, Loop 0 00 CH for Digital Trunk Cards. TN2 l s c u, TN l s c u, Loop 0 00 CH for Digital Trunk Cards. TIMESLOTS ts1 ts2

Pack/Rel

Where: ts1 = specified timeslot of the TN1 ts2 = specified timeslot of the TN2 TN1, TN2 , and TIMESLOTS are prompted by the program. KILLx Reset one or all TN being monitored. Where: x = the TN index xpe-15 number (1-6) entered with the DMTN command. Enter 7 to reset all the output monitored TNs. Stop print. Print all messages. basic-1 basic-1

N P P lll

Print all messages from specified loop. Enter the exact number basic-1 of digits. Example: for loop 4, enter 004 Print all messages from specified shelf. Enter the exact number basic-1 of digits. Example: for loop 4, enter 004. Print all messages from specified card. Enter the exact number basic-1 of digits. Example: for loop 4, enter 004. basic-1

P lll s

P lll s cc

PRTM (P) l s c u Print messages, as specified. Only loop and shelf numbers are required. Enter the exact number of digits. (Example: for loop 4, enter 004.)

WCTS loop Print the current unit scan of specified loop. Outputs shelf, card basic-1 and unit. WMBY l s c u Write the maintenance bit for the given unit to BUSY. WMUB l s c u Write the maintenance bit for the given unit to NOT BUSY. basic-1 basic-1

296

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel xpe-15

XMII, XMIO Send input/output XMI messages between the CPU and superloops. Send input/output XMI messages to the Peripheral Controller (NT8D01) or Network card (NT8D04). Use XMII for input messages from the Network card (NT8D04) to the CPU. Use XMIO for messages from the CPU to the Network. This command is used to simulate input/output XMI message. It may not be useful in LD 77. Format:
XMII or XMIO LOOP lll NUMBER MESSAGES m # TIMES TO SEND hhh MSG DATA cccc xxxx xxxxxxxx cccc xxxx xxxxxxxx cccc xxxx xxxxxxxx

Where: lll = Loop number m = Number of multiple XMI messages (1-6) hhh = Number of times to send XMI messages (1-999) cccc = Control word; cccc is defined as follows:
r ss applic - | -- | -----type | ------- |

Where: r = one bit msg ready flag, always sets to ss = two bit sequence status field. ss may be: a. B.00 : short message b. B.01 : starting a long message (message has 6 or more words of data) c. B.10 : continue a long msg d. B.11 : end of a long msg applic = six bit value for msg's intended application. appl may be: a. B.000001 : for LD 30 b. B.000010 : for LD 32 c. B.000011 : for LD 45 d. B.000100 : for LD 77 e. B.000101 : for XPE parameter download

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

297

LD 77: Manual Print

Command

Description f. B.000110 : for XNET action request type = seven bit value of message type xxxx = message data

Pack/Rel

XMSG

Send output SSD messages from system CPU to IPE. This command is used to send output SSD message to the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment TN. The specified loop of the TN must be enabled and responding. Format:
XMSG TN l s c u, TN l s c u, Loop 0 00 CH for Digital Trunk Cards. NUMBER MESSAGES mm # TIMES TO SEND hhh MSG DATA xxxx xxxx xxxx. . . .

xpe-15

Where: mm = number of SSD messages to be sent (1-10) hhh = number of times to output SSD message (1-999) xxxx = SSD message content. Number of message contents depends on the value of mm TN, NUMBER MESSAGES, # TIMES TO SEND , and MSG DATA are prompted by the program. XRCL loop XRSH loop XRST loop XTLP loop XTRP loop Read contents of RPC control register. Read and print contents of SHEN register. Read and print contents of STATUS register. Test local RPC processor for loop. Test remote RPC processor for loop. basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1

XWCS loop xxxx Writes RPC control/SHEN register for loop with data xxxx in hexadecimal format.

298

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 28: LD 80: Call Trace

LD 80 provides a means of tracing a call by looking at a snap shot of the transient data (such as call register contents) associated with the call. The trace commands operate only when this Overlay is active. If LD 80 is aborted (****), the trace functions stop. Note that when using the enhanced trace commands, the Overlay will not automatically abort (according to the defined time-out period) if calls are being traced. When a system initialization occurs, all trace commands are removed, and the trace operation is stopped. For Network Call Trace see NCT messages.

Enhanced Trace commands.

The enhanced trace function requires Multi-User Login functionality (package 242) to be enabled in LD 17. The enhanced commands are: DALL, DIST, ENTC, ENTD, GOTR, FITR, and STPT. These commands interact with each other only. The enhanced trace commands can be disabled through a maintenance telephone by dialing the following: nn + 9913 + x + yy Where: nn = customer SPRE access code 9913 = feature code to display for message display control x = action code (0 to deactivate) yy = message monitor code (02 for enhanced trace messages) A second dial tone indicate that the command was successful. Overflow tone is heard if the command is entered incorrectly. Once this command has been entered, a user entering FITR from the TTY will receive the period (.) prompt. Some loop-level commands are not valid on Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, and have been replaced with slot-level commands.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

299

LD 80: Call Trace

Calling Line ID on Analog Trunks for Singapone, Australia and Hong Kong
The TRAC program will display the Calling Number for an incoming A-CLID call. Calling Name cannot be displayed. If the calling number is not received i.e. "P" or "O" received as reason for absence of calling number then the route and member number will be displayed as per the existing functionality.

When to use LD 80
There are three basic commands: TRAT for tracing attendant consoles TRAC for tracing sets and trunks TRAD for tracing calls through Computer PBX Interface (CPI), Digital Trunk Interface (DTI), Primary Rate Interface, or Digital Link Interface (DLI) loops. The TRAC command can be used to print the tone detector TN if a tone detector is used at the time of the call trace. Generic software enables the printing of auxiliary data related to a call. The auxiliary data consists of information associated with the NARS/BARS/CDP features, if equipped, and the Ring Again (RGA) feature. This additional data can be retrieved by appending DEV to any of the TRAC commands. Example: TRAC L S C U DEV Note: BRI DNs can be traced with the TRAC C DN command. For TRAC L S C U, enter U = DSL0 to DSL7 for Digital Subscriber Loops. When Music and Recorded Announcement Broadcast trunks are traced, the following information is printed out: indication that the trunk is broadcasting the number of callers connected to the trunk When a caller connected to a broadcasting trunk is traced, the existing trace information is printed out as well as an indication that the trunk is broadcasting.

300

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Originating and terminating information

Originating and terminating information

The Call Trace originating and terminating party information depends on the types of telephone, console or trunk as shown below. Single line telephones: ORIG l s c u cust dn 500 TERM l s c u cust dn 500 Multi-line telephones: ORIG l s c u key# keytype cust dn settype TERM l s c u key# keytype cust dn settype Attendant consoles ORIG l s c u cust att# lpk# ATTN consoletype TERM l s c u cust att# lpk# ATTN consoletype Trunks: ORIG l s c u rtyp RMBR rrr mmm TERM l s c u rtyp RMBR rrr mmm l s c u = TN consoletype = console type (ATT, 2250) cust = customer number dn = directory number key# = multi-line telephone key number keytype = multi-line telephone key type (SCR, MCR, HOT, etc.) lpk# = console loop key number rrr mm = trunk route and member number rtyp = trunk route type (TIE, CO, FX, etc.) settype = multi-line telephone type (SL1, 2008, 2317, etc.)

Example 1 Trace a call placed to a 500-type set

Configuration: active call from key 0 on an M2008, to 500-type telephone Customer number: 06 Originator: telephone type: M2008 TN: 004 0 05 00 DN: 5100 on SCR key 0 Terminator: telephone type: 500 TN: 008 0 03 06 DN: 2121

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

301

LD 80: Call Trace

Trace command: TRAC 4 0 5 0 (l s c u), or TRAC 6 5100 (customer and DN) Output:
ACTIVE TN 004 0 05 00 ORIG 04 0 0 05 00 6 SCR 0 5100 2008 TERM 008 0 03 06 6 2121 500 DIAL DN 2121 MAIN PM ESTD TALKSLOT ORIG 22 TERM 22 QUEUE NONE

Example 2 Trace an outgoing ISDN call

Configuration: outgoing call from key 0 on an M2317, to 500-type telephone Customer number: 05 Originator: telephone type: M2317 TN: 016 0 02 00 DN: 6050 on SCR key 0 Terminator: Dialed DN: 7873107 Outgoing PRI TIE trunk: loop 018 channel 16; route 24 member 12 Trace command: TRAC 5 6050 (customer, DN), or TRAC 16 0 2 0 (l s c u) Output:
ACTIVE TN 016 0 02 00 ORIG 016 0 02 00 5 TERM 018 16 TIE RMBR DIAL DN 7873107 MAIN PM ESTD TALKSLOT ORIG 13 TERM 13 QUEUE NONE ---- ISDN PRA CALL (TERM) ---CAL REF # = 16 BEARER CAP = VOICE CALL STATE = 10 ACTIVE CALLING NO = 4376050 CALLED NO = 7873107 SCR 0 24 12 6050 2317

Example 3 Enhanced Trace command output

The enhanced call trace output includes a time stamp that appears on the first line of the output.

302

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

VoIP Trace command output

The TN or digital trunk prints out only when there has been a change to the call register. The TN or trunk is printed only once. Sample output:
.14:00:02 12/25/1992 KEY 0 MCR MARP ACTIVE TN 001 0 02 01 ORIG 001 02 01 0 SCR MARP 1 5011 SL1 TERM 001 0 02 00 0 MCR MARP 1 5006 SL1 DIAL DN 5006 MAIN_PM ESTD TALKSLOT ORIG 19 TERM 21 QUEU NONE KEY 1 TRN IDLE KEY 2 AO3 IDLE . . . KEY 8 RND KEY 9 RLS .14:00:04 12/25/1992 IDLE TN 015 04

Example 4 Trace a call from an IP Media Services Ad Hoc Conference loop:

The call trace output includes the Media Application Server (MAS) IP address. Trace command: .trac 0 3000 Sample output: ACTIVE VTN 104 0 00 00 ORIG CONF SERVICE 3 CONFEREE GRP 15 CALL ID 0 34999 ORIG 3 15 CONFEREE PORT 10 MAS IP: 47.11.58.228 PORT: 53652 MEDIA PROFILE: CODEC G.711 MU-LAW PAYLOAD 20 ms VAD OFF TERM VTN 104 0 00 00 KEY 0 SCR MARP CUST 0 DN 3000 TYPE 2002P2 SIGNALLING ENCRYPTION: INSEC MEDIA ENDPOINT IP: 47.11.72.125 PORT: 5200 MEDIA PROFILE: CODEC G.711 MU-LAW PAYLOAD 20 ms VAD OFF MAIN_PM ESTD TALKSLOT ORIG 10 TERM 10 JUNCTOR ORIG0 TERM0 ORIG 3 15 CONFEREE PORT 8 MAS IP: 47.11.58.228 PORT: 53664 MEDIA PROFILE: CODEC G.711 MU-LAW PAYLOAD 20 ms VAD OFF

VoIP Trace command output

Static Call Trace Output for calls involving IP Telephony elements.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

303

LD 80: Call Trace

Example 1 Trace a call placed from IP Phone to IP Phone within a single system

Example 2 Trace a Outgoing Virtual Trunk Call between TDM Phone and VGW Resource on Different Systems

304

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

VoIP Trace command output

Example 3 Trace an Incoming Virtual Trunk Call between two different systems

Example 4 Trace an IP Phone to Local TDM Device

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

305

LD 80: Call Trace

Example 5 Trace a call scenario between two Avaya Communication Server 1000E Media Gateways:

Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs

This section provides definitions of the data output by the various call trace commands. A time stamp is added to Call Trace output. The following information is added below the time stamp as necessary: A digital telephone with no active call register shows: IDLE TN l s c u A locked out telephone or digital trunk shows: LOCKOUT TN l s c u (or l ch) A disabled telephone or digital trunk shows: DSBL TN l s c u (or l ch) A telephone or digital trunk that is in maintenance busy state shows: MSBY TN l s c u (or l ch) MSBY TN l s c u (or l ch) MARP shows if the TN is a MARP TN - ACTIVE = the call/key is active - AUX_NARS = Network Automatic Route Selection (NARS) data to follow - AUX_PM = auxiliary progress mark may be any of the following depending on the MAIN_PM: ABSORBING = performing digit manipulation on the call

306

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs

AWAIT ANI = waiting for Automatic Number Identification information AWAITREPLY = CPU is waiting for a response during a dial sequence BSYG = busy tone to originator CDR-CALLRECORD = CPU is outputting a CDR record CDR-TIMING = CPU is computing a CDR record COMPLETE = dialing is complete DNTRANS = DN translation to TN in progress FAREND-OFF = NARS = call is a network call NOOUTPULS = outpulsing complete, originator receiving ringback OUTPULSING = outpulsing digits related to the call OVLF = resources not available, returning overflow to originator PAUSING = timed pause in a trunk call dialing sequence SPEEDCALL = performing speed call TEMPPATH = software timing, occurs when outpulsing digits on trunks TOLLCHECK = checking access restrictions for the call USCR = User Selectable Call Redirection programming, receiving dial tone USCR_DIAL = USCR programming - AUX_RGAT_PM = Ring Again over trunk information - BEARER CAP = bearer capability, such as voice, 64K clear, 64K restricted and 56K - BUSY = unit or DN is busy - CALL REF # = PRI call reference number assigned by the system - CALL STATE = specifies the PRI call as active or inactive - CALLED NO = PRI dialed number - CALLING N0 = PRI home location code and DN of originating party - CONF = conference call - COS_ORIG, COS_TERM = class of service restrictions for originating and terminating party. Possible values are: UNR = Unrestricted TLD = Toll Denied SRE = Semi-restricted FRE = Fully Restricted

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

307

LD 80: Call Trace

FR1 = Fully Restricted class 1 FR2 = Fully Restricted class 2 CUN = Conditionally Unrestricted CTD = Conditionally Toll Denied - CSD = Confree Selectable Display Key - CUST = Customer Number - DARK_CONSOLE = the call is being temporarily released by a console. Also outputs three types of recall: - RLSED = console released the call is getting recall - FLASH = Flash recall - CAMP = Camp-On recall - DIAL DN = the dialed number - DIAL xxx yy TTR zz = TDS on loop xxx and timeslot yy connected to Digitone Receiver timeslot zz - DG_MAN xxx FCA_INDEX xxx TOD x = Digit Manipulation Index, Free Area Screening and Time Of Day value - DIRECT MW_CALL = Message Waiting indication is being given DN = Directory Number - DSBL = the unit has been disabled - DST = console destination information to follow - EMR100 = ACD emergency conference - EXP_ROUTE = identifies if an expensive route is being used for an ESN call - EXTENDED LOCAL CALL is printed out if call traces are printed for Extended Local Call - IDLE = TN or key is idle - HLD = number of calls On-Hold at the console - HOLD = call is On-Hold - KEY = Telephone function key - LOCKOUT = the unit is in lockout state - LOOP = attendant console LPK key - MAIN_PM = this is the main progress mark which identifies the state of the call, possible values are listed below: (See also AUX_PM) BUSY = originator is receiving busy tone CDR = CPU is processing Call Detail Recording records

308

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs

DELAY DIAL = CPU is in a timing sequence while establishing a delay dial start trunk call DIAL = one or more digits have been dialed, system requires more digits ESTD = call is established between the originating and terminating party HALFDISC = Trunk with answer supervision has not received a disconnect signal from the far-end during trunk idling READY = CPU is ready to process a function for the originating TN REOR = originator is receiving intercept treatment RING = originator is receiving ringback tone WAIT = dial tone waiting queue WINKON = CPU is in a timing sequence while establishing a wink start trunk call MARP = indicates the TN is Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime MBSY = unit is in maintenance busy state NARS_PM = NARS call progress mark NEW_RLIST_INDEX NWQ_RLIST_ENTRY = network queue route list index and route list entry NCOS_ORIG, NCOS_TERM = Network Class of Service for originating and terminating party OHQ/CBQ = call is in the Off-Hook queue or Callback queue OSN = On-Site Notification key PRIOITY NWQ_EXT_ROUTE = the priority in the queue and extended route queuing PTY SLOT = TDS priority timeslot; reserved by the CPU while a user is receiving tones (this timeslot may be required by the CPU to further process the call). Normally PTY SLOT is the same timeslot as SLOT. QUEU = a call may be in one of the following CPU timing queues: 128 = 128 ms timing queue 2S = 2 second timing queue CAD = cadence CDR = Call Detail Recording processing queue DIAL = dialing queue IDLE = idle queue NONE = call is not in a timing queue RING = ringing queue RCVR xx SET yy = timeslot to the Digitone Receiver (xx) and the telephone (yy) RGAT_PM = Ring Again progress mark RL_IND xx RL_ENT xx = NARS/BARS route list index and entry number SRC = console source information to follow SBSY = unit is software busy

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

309

LD 80: Call Trace

SLOT = the timeslot used by the originator and terminator TALKSLOT = identifies the timeslot and junctor (if applicable) used by the originator and terminator TDTN = Tone Digit Switch loop and timeslot TERM = originating party information, identifies the TN or DN where the call terminates, output depends on type of telephone or console TGAR_ORIG, TGAR_TERM = Trunk Group Access Restriction for originating and terminating party TTR = Digitone Receiver TN - TYPE = Type of telephone

Basic commands
DALL DIST n ENTC l s c u t ENTD l ch t FITR GOTR STPT TRAC c acod TRAC c dn TRAC c r m TRAC l s c DSLx TRAC l s c u TRAC l s c u k TRAC x yyyy TRAC xx...xx DEV TRAC zzzz TRAD loop ch TRAT c a Disable all enhanced trace commands. Disable the enhanced trace operation. Enable the enhanced trace command for a TN. Enable the enhanced trace command for a digital trunk. Get information about the enhanced trace function. Begin enhanced trace commands. This command starts the trace operation specified with the ENTC and ENTD commands. Stop the enhanced trace command. List route number, type and status of each trunk for customer c Trace calls for customer c Directory Number or Local Steering Code dn Trace calls, customer c, route r, member m Trace calls on Digital Subscriber Loop x (0-7) Trace calls associated with this unit Trace calls associated with key k on specified unit Trace using customer number as DN Print auxiliary data Trace using TN of the set to be traced Trace DTI or DLI calls, channel ch of loop Trace calls, attendant a of customer c

310

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T commands

TRAT c a k TRAT l s c u TRAT l s c u k TRAT xx...xx DEV TRCR l s cu TRCR l ch TRCR 1 TRCR 0 TRIP <ip address>

Trace calls associated with key k of attendant console a for customer c Trace attendant calls, this unit Trace attendant calls on key k Print auxiliary data Trace rejected calls associated with this unit. Trace rejected calls associated with this unit. Trace rejected calls associated with any unit. Cancel trace. Trace IP

Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T commands

On a Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, some loop-level commands are replaced with slot-level commands. Valid commands for these systems are shown here:
TRAC c acod TRAC c dn TRAC c r m TRAD c ch TRAD loop ch TRAK c u TRAK c u k TRAO c u TRAO c u k TRAO xx...xx DEV TRAT c a TRAT c a k TRCR cu TRCR l ch List route number, type and status of each trunk under customer c Trace calls for customer c Directory Number or Local Steering Code dn Trace calls for customer c, route r, member m Trace digital calls, channel ch of card c Trace DTI calls, channel ch of loop Trace calls associated with this unit Trace calls associated with key k on the specified unit Trace attendant calls, this unit Trace attendant calls on key k of unit Print auxiliary data Trace calls for attendant a of customer c Trace calls associated with key k of attendant console a for customer c Trace rejected calls associated with this unit. Trace rejected calls associated with this unit.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

311

LD 80: Call Trace

TRCR 1 TRCR 0 TRDT xx...xx

Trace rejected calls associated with any unit. Cancel trace. Trace the TNs of a call using 4 to 7 consective digits xx...xx.

Alphabetical list of commands

Command DALL Description Pack/Rel basic-19 Disable all enhanced trace commands. This command disables all trace commands enabled with ENTC or ENTD command. You must stop the trace with the STPT command before disabling all the commands with DALL. Disable the enhanced trace operation. basic-19 This command disables the trace command enabled with ENTC or ENTD command. This command is used once a trace command is started then stopped. Where: n = the entry number (as seen with the FITR command) basic-19 Enable the enhanced trace command for a TN. This command enables the trace capability for the TN specified. Note that this command does not start the trace immediately. Use the GOTR command to begin the trace operation. Where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit and t = the length of time the trace command operates. The format for the trace command duration (t) is HHMM, where HH = hours (0-23)and MM = minutes (0-59). For example, for a duration of 5 minutes, t = 0005; for 1 hour, t = 0100 The time duration must be at least 1 minute, and no more than 23 hours. ENTD l ch t Enable the enhanced trace command for a digital basic-19 trunk. This command enables the trace capability for the TN specified. Note that this command does not start the trace immediately. Use the GOTR command to begin the trace operation. Where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit and t = the length of time the trace command operates.

DIST n

ENTC l s c u t

312

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description The format for the trace command duration (t) is HHMM, where HH = hours (0-23)and MM = minutes (0-59). For example, for a duration of 5 minutes, t = 0005; for 1 hour, t = 0100. The time duration must be at least 1 minute, and no more than 23 hours.

Pack/Rel

FITR

basic-19 Get information about the enhanced trace function. This command queries the TNs or Digital trunks being traced with the ENTC and ENTD commands. The output is shown as follows:
ENTRY TN or TRUNK TIME STATUS

For example:
1 2 01 0 01 01 015 04 0030 1200 OFF OFF

GOTR

Begin enhanced trace commands. This command basic-19 starts the trace operation specified with the ENTC and ENTD commands. Stop the enhanced trace command. This command stops the enhanced trace operation specified with the ENTC and ENTD commands. This can be used at any time during the trace operation. This does not disable the commands; they can be restarted with the GOTR command. When they are restarted, the duration timer is reset. For example: the timer is set at 30 minutes, but the trace is stopped after 2 minutes. When the trace is restarted (GOTR) the timer is set to 30 minutes. basic-19

STPT

TRAC c acod List route number, type and status of each trunk for customer c. TRAC c dn

basic-1

Trace calls for customer c Directory Number or Local basic-1 Steering Code dn. With release 4.5 Active Call Failover status is output as: ACF STATUS <status> TMR <timer> ORIG <orig_state> TERM <term_state>, where status is: - UNREG for unregistered calls - HREG for half-registered calls basic-4.50

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

313

LD 80: Call Trace

Command

Description - HREB for half-rebuilt calls - REB for rebuilt calls - PREB for partially-rebuilt call where timer is: - an integer value if the timer exists for the call - N/A if there is no Call Server ACF timer attached where orig_state is: - UNREGISTERED for unregistered calls - REGISTERED for registered calls where term_state is: - UNREGISTERED for unregistered calls - REGISTERED for registered calls

Pack/Rel

basic-4.50 Note: LD 32 shows sample outputs for IP phones involved in unregistered and partial-rebuilt calls Trace command:

.trac 0 8100
Output:
ACTIVE TN 081 0 00 00 V PHYSICAL TN 003 0 00 04 ORIG 008 0 00 00 0 SCR MARP 0 5500 2616 TERM 081 0 00 00 V PHYSICAL TN 000 0 00 00 0 SCR MARP RING ON 0 8100 I2004 DIAL DN 8100 MAIN_PM ESTD TALKSLOT ORIG 17 TERM 14 EES_DATA: NONE QUEU NONE CALL ID 0 197 ACF STATUS UNREG TMR 110 ORIG UNREGISTERED TERM UNREGISTERED

TRAC c r m TRAC l s c DSLx

Trace calls, customer c, route r, member m.

basic-1 bri-18

Trace calls on Digital Subscriber Loop x (0-7).

314

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command TRAC l s c u

Description Trace calls associated with this unit. If a trace is performed on a DTR, an error message is output.

Pack/Rel basic-1

TRAC l s c u k Trace call associated with key k on specified unit. TRAC x yyyy Trace using customer number as DN, where: x = customer number of the set to be traced yyyy = DN of the key to be traced. TRAC xx...xx DEV Print the auxiliary data related to the call for Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) or Ring Again (RGA), where equipped, as well as the normal data for command xx...xx. Command xx...xx can be any of the TRAC commands. When TYP E is output, E = extended route (not expensive). TRAC zzzz Trace using TN of the set to be traced, where: zzzz = TN of the set to be traced. TRAD loop ch Trace DTI or DLI calls, channel ch of specified loop. TRAD c ch Trace digital calls, channel ch of card c. (Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B,MG 1000T). Trace calls associated with this unit. (Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B,MG 1000T).

basic-1

nxcc-22

nxcc-22

nxcc-22

basic-1

TRAK c u

basic-1

TRAK c u k

Trace calls associated with key k on the specified unit. basic-1 (Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B,MG 1000T). Trace attendant calls, this unit. (Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B,MG 1000T). basic-1

TRAO c u

TRAO c u k

Trace attendant calls on key k of unit. (Small System, basic-1 CS 1000S, MG 1000B,MG 1000T). basic-1

TRAO xx...xx DEV

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

315

LD 80: Call Trace

Command

Description Print auxiliary data. (Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B,MG 1000T).

Pack/Rel

TRAT c a TRAT c a k

Trace calls for customer c, attendant a.

basic-1

Trace calls associated with key k of attendant console basic-1 a for customer c. Trace attendant calls, this unit. basic-1

TRAT l s c u TRAT l s c u k

Trace attendant calls on key k. TRAT xx...xx DEV Print auxiliary data. Print the auxiliary data related to the call for Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) or Ring Again (RGA), where equipped, as well as the normal data for command xx...xx. Command xx...xx can be one of the TRAT commands. TRCR cu TRCR l s c u TRCR l ch TRCR 1 TRCR 0 TRDT xx...xx Trace rejected calls associated with this unit. Trace rejected calls associated with this unit. Trace rejected calls associated with this unit. Trace rejected calls associated with any unit. Cancel trace. Trace the TNs of a call using 4 to 7 consective digits xx...xx. Trace IP

basic-1 basic-1

basic-4.50 basic-4.50 basic-4.50 basic-7.00 basic-4.50 basic-7.50

TRIP <ip address>

basic-5.00

316

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 29: LD 92: Automatic Trunk Maintenance

The Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) program tests TIE, CSA, WATS, FEX, DID, and COT trunk routes automatically each day at times scheduled in the ATM schedule block. This program also allows the manual testing of trunks. Some loop-level commands are not valid on Small Systems and CS 1000S systems, and have been replaced with card-level commands. The ATMC command is not supported for 2.0 Mb/s DTI due to the absence of tone detectors for Small System in IPE.

Basic commands
On Small Systems and Avaya Communication Server 1000S systems, some loop-level commands are replaced with card-level commands.
ATMC l ch ATMC l ch l ch ATMR c r ATMR c r m ATMU c u ATMU c u c u ATMU l s c u ATMU l s c u l s c u CLRR c r CLRU c u CLRU l s c u CMAJ END Test DTI channel ch on loop Test specified DTI channel, with reference trunk Test customer c route r Test customer c route r with reference trunk member m Test specified unit. (Small System) Test specified unit, with reference trunk. (Small System) Test specified unit Test specified unit, with reference trunk Clear "ring no answer" count on route r for customer c Clear "ring no answer" count on specified trunk unit. (Small System) Clear "ring no answer" count on specified trunk unit Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer Terminate test in progress

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

317

LD 92: Automatic Trunk Maintenance

PRTR c r PRTU c u PRTU l s c u PSCD l ch RSCD l ch (n)

Get "ring no answer" count for all members on route r for customer c. Get "ring no answer" count on specified unit. (Small System) Get "ring no answer" count on specified unit. Print the current value of the SPC Calls to the Data Interface Counter Restart the Semi Permanent Connections (SPC) calls to Data Interface counter Stop the SPC calls to Data Interface to be performed

SSCD l ch

Alphabetical list of commands

Command ATMC l ch ATMC l ch l ch Description Test DTI channel ch on loop. Test the specified DTI channel (loop and channel of the first field) with the reference trunk (loop and channel of the second field). Test route r of cu7stomer c. Accepts ADM Route numbers. When an ADM Route is entered, member numbers cannot be entered. Pack/Rel atm-7 atm-7

ATMR c r

atm-7

ATMR c r m

Test route r of customer c with reference trunk member atm-7 m. Test specified unit. (Small System) Test specified unit, with reference trunk. (Small System) atm-15 atm-15

ATMU c u ATMU c u c u

ATMU l s c u

Test specified unit. If the unit specified is an ADM trunk atm-7 unit, no reference information can be entered. atm-7

ATMU l s c u l s c u Test the specified unit (l s c u of the first field) using the reference trunk (l s c u of the second field). If the unit specified is an ADM trunk unit, no reference information (l s c u) can be entered.

318

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CLRR c r

Description Clear "ring no answer" count on route r for customer c. Clears the "ring no answer" count for every trunk member in the ADM Route specified. Clear "ring no answer" count on specified trunk unit. (Small System) Clear "ring no answer" count on specified trunk unit.

Pack/Rel atm-7

CLRU c u

atm-15

CLRU l s c u CMAJ

atm-7

Clear major alarm, reset power fail transfer and clear atm-7 power fault alarm. Terminate test in progress. This command can be entered at any time. atm-7

END

PRTR c r

Get "ring no answer" count for all members on route r atm-7 for customer c. Get "ring no answer" count on specified unit. (Small System) Get "ring no answer" count on specified unit. Print the current value of the SPC Calls to the Data Interface Counter. atm-15

PRTU c u

PRTU l s c u PSCD l ch

atm-7 ispc-22

RSCD l ch (n)

Restart the Semi Permanent Connections (SPC) calls ispc-22 to Data Interface counter, where: l = Phantom loop of an SPC link ch = Phantom TN of an SPC link. The RSCD command resets the current counter used to identify the number of calls performed by the system to the Data Interface when an SPC link is configured to convey D-channel signaling and the SPC link is identified as being the SLAVE side. The optional parameter (n) is used to identify the maximum number of calls to the Data Interface before the process automatically stops. When no value has been provided to the parameter (n), up to 40 calls to the Data Interface are performed before this process is automatically stopped. When the value provided to the parameter (n) is zero, it has to stop the process which automatically calls the associated Data Interface.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

319

LD 92: Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Command SSCD l ch

Description Stop the SPC calls to Data Interface to be performed.

Pack/Rel ispc-22

320

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 30: LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

LD 96 is used to test, maintain, and trace D-channel links and the QPC757 or NT6D11AB D-channel Interface (DCHI) card. D-channels can also reside on Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) cards. A set of LD 96 commands are provided to support MSDL cards. The MSDL commands listed in LD 48 can also be used in LD 96.

Monitoring
Selective D-channel message monitoring is used to analyze the Layer 3 protocol messages traveling between the near and far-end D-channels: the D-channel the B- or ISL channel the message types for a specific feature the message types for a specific DN any specific message The following sections describe the various command formats. Note: During high traffic some of the monitored messages may be lost. Note: For the D-channel monitor messages to be displayed, the system terminal must have USER defined as MTC in LD 17.

D-channels
All message types, features and channels associated with a particular D-channel can be monitored for multiple D-channels for both incoming and outgoing messages. Message output can be routed to the terminal or to a log file on the Call Server. The location of the log file is: /e/trace/dch.log. The log file holds 4000 records and can be downloaded from the Call Server by FTP.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

321

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

The LD 96 commands to enable or disable monitoring of all incoming or outgoing messages on a D-channel are: ENL MSGI x enable monitoring of incoming messages ENL MSGO x enable monitoring of outgoing messages DIS MSGI x disable monitoring of incoming messages DIS MSGO x disable monitoring of outgoing messages Where x is the DCHI or MSDL port address (I/O address). For example, to enable monitoring of incoming messages on D-channel 5, enter: ENL MSGI 5 The output includes all messages, features and channels for D-channel 5.

B-channels and ISL channels

You can monitor up to 5 ISL or B-channels, for each direction. If there is no specific channel selected, all channels are monitored. The commands follow: For B-channels on large systems: ENL MSGI x CH loop channel ENL MSGO x CH loop channel DIS MSGI x CH loop channel DIS MSGO x CH loop channel For B-channels on Small Systems, CS 1000S, and MG 1000T systems: ENL MSGI x CH card channel ENL MSGO x CH card channel DIS MSGI x CH card channel DIS MSGO x CH card channel For ISL channels on large systems: ENL MSGI x CH l s c u ENL MSGO x CH l s c u DIS MSGI x CH l s c u DIS MSGO x CH l s c u For ISL channels on Small Systems and CS 1000S systems: ENL MSGI x CH c u ENL MSGO x CH c u DIS MSGI x CH c u DIS MSGO x CH c u ENL = enable monitoring DIS = disable monitoring MSGI = incoming messages MSGO = outgoing messages

ISDN features
You can select specific ISDN applications, such as Network Ring Again, for message monitoring. Only one or all ISDN applications can be monitored per D-channel at one time.

322

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

D-channel DN tracing

The LD 96 commands are listed below, where x is the D-channel (DCHI or MSDL) port number. ENL MSGI x FEAT feature ENL MSGO x FEAT feature DIS MSGI x FEAT feature DIS MSGO x FEAT feature Where "feature" can be: NCT = Network Call Trace NRAG = Network Ring Again NACD = Network Automatic Call Distribution TRO = Trunk Optimization NMS = Network Message Services OHQ = Offhook Queuing RCFW = Network Remote Call Forward NRPA = Network Radio Paging NITC = Network Intercom TAT = Trunk Anti-Tromboning

D-channel DN tracing
The D-channel call trace feature allows the recording of all relevant D-channel messages for incoming/outgoing calls on a particular Directory Number (DN). It aids a craftsperson in troubleshooting problems for calls involving DCHs. For example, if a problem arose when making an outgoing DCH call from extension 4567, then the craftsperson would login to the Call Server associated with the DN, load overlay 96 and use the DCT (DCH Call Trace) command for tracing the call on DN 4567 (ie. DCT 4567). When the call is tried again, the DCH call trace output shows any DCH messages associated with the call. If no DCH messages are generated, then the craftsperson can assume that the problem is within the switch (i.e. routing configuration or user mis-operation). If DCH messages are generated, then the craftsperson can inspect the messages for clues about why the call is failing. It is not expected that the feature to enable/disable incoming/outgoing DCH messages (ENL/ DIS MSGO/I commands) would be used at the same time as the DCT feature. Both features are independent of each other. If both features are turned on, then any DCH message captured by either feature is recorded. However, any given DCH message is only recorded once. Any DCH messages caught by the DCT monitor are recorded in the level format specified by the SET MSGO/I <dch> MON <level> command. The DCT feature has no effect on the format of the messages that are recorded. Any DCH messages are recorded in the usual way (ie. to a TTY and/or log file. The DCT feature has no effect on where the messages are recorded. The DCT monitor data does not survive system cold/warm start. When the system initializes, all DCT data is cleared and the threshold for the number of DCH messages per minute is reset to the default value of 30.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

323

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Message types
You can select specific types of messages to be monitored on a D-channel. The LD 96 commands are listed below, where x is the D-channel (DCHI or MSDL) port number. ENL MSGI x MSG msg1 msg2 msg3 ENL MSGO x MSG msg1 msg2 msg3 DIS MSGI x MSG msg1 msg2 msg3 DIS MSGO x MSG msg1 msg2 msg3 Up to three message types (msg1, msg2, msg3) can be entered per command. The default is "ALL", which is all message types except SVC and SVCA. The message types are: ALER = alerting ALL = all primitives and all messages except SVC and SVCA CAPR = call proceeding CON = connect CONA = connect ack DISC = disconnect FAC = facility FACA = facility ack FACR = facility reject INFO = information NOTF = notify PRIM = all primitives (such as release indication) PROC = call proceeding PROG = progress RLS = release RLSC = release complete RST = restart RSTA = restart ack STAT = status STEN = status enquiry STP = setup STPA = setup ack SVC = service

324

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Setting output format levels

SVCA = service ack UI = user information

Setting output format levels

There are three levels (0-2) of message decoding. The level determines the format of the data output to the system terminal. To set the output level enter the following: SET MSGI x MON (0)-2 SET MSGO x MON (0)-2 Level 0 outputs the message as shown below. DCH x y MSG msgtype REF xxxxxxx CH zzzz TOD hh:mm:ss <more data> x = D-channel number y = "I" for incoming messages, "O" for outgoing messages xxxxxxxx = the call reference number zzzz = the loop and channel number (or TN for ISL channels) <more data> = additional lines of information, such as: CALLED # = called number CALLING # = calling number of originator CAUSE = reason for action taken (e.g, unassigned number) CONNECT # = connected number FEAT = feature (such as Network Ring Again) NUM PLAN = Numbering plan used (such as private) PROGRESS = call progress description REDIR REASON = reason the call was re-directed REDN # = call redirection number STATE = call state STATUS = channel status TYPE = type of channel Level 1 outputs the raw data. The format is: DCH x y MSG msgtype REF xxxxxxxx TN zzzzzz CH# x CK x <more data in hexadecimal>

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

325

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Level 2 output identifies the individual Information Elements (IE) in the messages and their hexadecimal values. The possible IEs are: BCAP = bearer capability CAST = call state CHGA = charge advice CHID = channel ID CHST = change status CLED = called number CLES = called party subaddress CLNG = calling number CLNS = calling party subaddress CNS5 = codeset 5 connected number subaddress CON# = connect number CON5 = codeset 5 connected number CSE = cause DES6 = codeset 6 Destination IE DISP = display FAC = facility IE for codeset 0 FAC6 = codeset 6 facility IE FIND = feature Indication HLYR = higher layer compatibility INFO = information request KYPD = keypad LLYR = low layer compatibility LS5 = locking Shift to codeset 5 LS6 = locking shift to codeset 6 LS7 = locking Shift to codeset 7 NLS5 = codeset 5 non-locking shift NLS6 = codeset 6 non-locking shift NLSO = non-locking shift to codeset 0 NOTI = notify indicator NSF = network specific facility

326

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Deactivate monitor from a maintenance telephone

ORG# = originating called number ORG6 = codeset 6 Originating IE PROG = progress indicator RDG6 = codeset 6 redirecting number REDG = redirecting number REDN = redirection number RETR = codeset 6 reason for return RSTI = restart indicator SHFT = shift SIGN = signal TACG = codeset 6 TTC advice charge TNS = transit network selection UNKN = unknown UUI = user-user information

Deactivate monitor from a maintenance telephone

Once the system has been tied up or flooded with the monitored messages, it is very difficult, if not impossible, to use LD 96 to disable the monitors. In this case, a maintenance telephone with MTA Class of Service can be used to deactivate the monitor. To activate or deactivate the monitor from a maintenance telephone, simply dial: SPRE 9913 x 01 SPRE = special function access code (defined in LD 15) 9913 = feature code to activate or deactivate the monitor x = 0 to deactivate, 1 to activate 01 = DCH monitor ID Note: Dial tone is provided if successful. Note: Use "RST MON" to reactivate the monitor from LD 96. Note: Deactivating the monitor by the maintenance telephone does not disable the monitor, but simply halts the output. If the monitor is deactivated and not disabled using the DIS MSGI

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

327

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

and DIS MSGO commands, then the monitor becomes re-activated after a datadump and sysload.

Get monitor status

To determine the current status of the D-channel monitor, enter the following command, where x is the D-channel (DCHI or MSDL) port number. STAT MON x Output format: ***DCH MSGI x LEVEL y ACTV (where, y = format level) MSG - msg1 msg2. . . FEAT - feat CH - loop channel (or l s c u for ISL) ***DCH MSGO x LEVEL y ACTV MSG - msg1 msg2. . . FEAT - feat CH - loop channel (or l s c u for ISL) If the monitor had been deactivated by the maintenance telephone, INACTV is output instead of ACTV.

Example: Status of D-channel monitor

STAT MON x DCH MON DCH 003: (UIPE) MSGI (LEVEL 1) : DSBL DBGI (LEVEL 1) : DSBL MSGO (LEVEL 2) MSG = PRIM ALER DISC FAC FRNC FJNC INFO MIFO NOTE PROC PROG REJ RLS STP STPR STEN STAT RST RSTR SVC SVCR RSTJ NSM1 NSM2 REGI CH = 003 10 SET = ON DBGO (LEVEL 2) MSG = PRIM ALER DISC FAC FRNC FJNC INFO MIFO NOTF PROC PROG REJ RLS STP STPR STEN STAT RST RSTR SVC SVCR RSTJ NSM1 NSM2 REGI CH = 003 10 SET = ON

Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL)

The MSDL provides 4 ports for ISDN Primary Rate D-channel (DCH) and Application Module Link (AML).

328

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

D-channel Expansion

The MSDL commands are listed below, x is the MSDL device number (defined by prompt DNUM in LD 17). DIS MSDL x (ALL)Disable MSDL device ENL MSDL x (FDL, ALL)Enable MSDL device RST MSDL xReset MSDL device STAT MSDL (x) (FULL)Get MSDL status SLFT MSDL xExecute a self-test on MSDL device x These commands are also provided in Input/Output Diagnostic (LD 37) and Link Diagnostic (LD 48).

D-channel Expansion
With the introduction of D-channel Expansion, new software allows the increase of D-channels past sixty-four. Instead of the large system having a maximum of 16 I/O addresses, the new software allows 16 physical I/O addresses (0 - 15) per network group for D-channels defined on MSDL. With this enhancement a response to the system response GROUP is required to inform the system of the desired network group. Note: See D-channel Expansion commands on page 332 for a complete description of these commands.

CS 1000S Survivable IP
D-ch commands for the DCHI, DDCH, TMDI, and MSDL are all supported for cards in the MG 1000S.

D-channel commands
The following commands are used to enable, disable, test and get the status of a D-channel. Refer to the LD 96 introduction for details on the use of these commands. The maintenance commands for the TMDI card have been enhanced. You no longer need to use both Overlay 60 and Overlay 96 for TMDI card and loop maintenance. Only Overlay 96 is required to handle enabling and disabling of TMDI cards and their associated loop.
DIS AUTO x DIS DCH x Disable automatic recovery for DCH x Disable DCH x

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

329

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

DIS MON ALL DIS MON LOG DIS MON TTY DIS MSGI x (options)

Stop printing and logging messages. Stop logging DCH messages into a log file. Stop printing DCH messages on the TTY. Disable the monitoring of incoming messages on D-channel x

DIS MSGI x FEAT CPNW Disable incoming monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN messages on D Channel x. DIS MSGO x (options) DIS MSGO x FEAT CPNW DIS SERV x DIS TMDI x (ALL) DIS TMD I s c (ALL) DLIF DCH x ENL AUTO x ENL DCH x (FDL) Disable the monitoring of outgoing messages on D-channel x Disable outgoing monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN messages on D Channel x. Disable service messages on D-channel x Disable TMDI card x Disable TMDI card Force download of D channel x (For PRI UIPE application) Enable automatic recovery for DCH x Enable DCH x and attempt to establish the link, and force download to MSDL Print messages on the TTY and log them into a file. Prepare to log DCH messages into a log file. Prepare to print DCH messages on the TTY. Enable the monitoring of incoming messages on D-channel x

ENL MON ALL ENL MON LOG ENL MON TTY ENL MSGI x (options)

ENL MSGI x FEAT CPNW Enable incoming monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN messages on D Channel x. ENL MSGO x (options) ENL MSGO x FEAT CPNW ENL SERV x ENL TMDI x ENL TMDI x (ALL) ENL TMDI x (FDL) ENL TMDI l s c Enable the monitoring of outgoing messages on D-channel x Enable outgoing monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN messages on D Channel x. Enable service messages on D-channel x Enable TMDI card number x. Enable TMDI Card number x and all units. Enable TMDI Card number x and force a download. Enable TMDI card

ENL TMDI l s c (FDL,ALL) Enable TMDI card and force a download EST DCH x Establish multiple frame operation on D-channel x

330

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

D-channel commands

EST ISPC l ch (N)

Start the data interface establishment process at the ISPC slave side an ISPC link (where "N" = the "number of tries" counter)

FDIS NCAL <DCH#> <conn_ID> Force disconnect the specified call-independent connection PLOG DCH x RLS DCH x RLS ISPC l ch RST DCH x RST MON RST TMDI x RST TMDI l s c SDCH DCH x SET MSGI x MON (0)-2 Print protocol error log on DCH x Release D-channel x Stop the data interface establishment process Reset D-channel x, inhibit signaling Reset or reactivate monitoring on D-channels with enabled monitors Reset TMDI card x Reset TMDI card Switch to the standby D-channel x Set monitor output format level for incoming messages on Dchannel x Set monitor output format level for outgoing messages on Dchannel x Invoke self test x Invoke self test Get status of one or all D-channels Get status of data interface establishment process at ISPC slave side ISPC link which has been configured to convey Dchannel signaling List all current call-independent connections on a given PRI Dchannel.

SET MSGO x MON (0)-2

SLFT TMDI x SLFT TMDI l s c u STAT DCH (x) STAT ISPC l ch

STAT NCAL <DCH#>

STAT NCAL <DCH#> <conn_ID> List information pertaining to a specific call-independent connection STAT MON (x) Display the incoming and outgoing monitoring status of one or all D-channels. Get the enable/disable status of services messages for one or all D-channels

STAT SERV (x)

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

331

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

STAT TMDI (x FULL) STAT TMDI l s c (FULL) TEST 100 x TEST 101 x TEST 200 x

Get TMDI status x Get TMDI status Perform interrupt generation test on DCH x Perform loop back mode test on DCH x Perform interrupt handler test on DCH x (not supported on small system) Test interrupt handler-to-link interface path (not supported on small system)

TEST 201 x

D-channel Expansion commands

Command STAT MSDL System Response GROUP Description Display status of all MSDL cards in the system, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is <CR>, then the status of all MSDL cards is printed. If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the status of all MSDL cards occupying the g network group is printed. Display status of the given MSDL card as known to the SL1, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is <CR>, then the status of the MSDL cards occupying the physical I/O address n in all the network groups is printed. If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the status of the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is printed.

STAT MSDL n

GROUP

STAT MSDL n full GROUP Display status of the given MSDL card as known to the SL1 and available in the shared RAM of the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is <CR>, then the status of the MSDL cards occupying the physical I/O address n in all the network groups is printed. If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the status of the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is printed. Enable the given MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is enabled.

ENL MSDL n

GROUP

332

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

D-channel Expansion commands

Command ENL MSDL n all

System Response GROUP

Description Enable MSDL card n and all configured ports, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is enabled.

ENL MSDL n FDL GROUP Force download all the required Loadware to the MSDL card and enable the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is enabled. Disable the given MSDL card. All the configured ports should be in the disable state, otherwise the MSDL card can not be disabled, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is disabled. Disable all ports of the MSDL card, and then disable the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is disabled. This command causes a power-on reset on the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is reset. Power-on reset on the MSDL card, followed by a complete set of self tests, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is tested.

DIS MSDL n all

GROUP

DIS MSDL n ALL

GROUP

RST MSDL n

GROUP

SLFT MSDL n

GROUP

ENL MSDL n DBG GROUP Enable the debugger option for the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the debugger option for the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is enabled.

ENL MSDL n MSGO

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

333

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command

System Response GROUP

Description Enable the outgoing message monitor option for the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the outgoing message monitor option for the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is enabled.

ENL MSDL n MSGI GROUP Enable the incoming message monitor option for the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the incoming message monitor option for the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is enabled.

ENL MSDL n AUDM GROUP Enable the msdl auditing for the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the msdl auditing for the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is enabled.

ENL MSDL n FCTL GROUP Enable flow control for the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the flow control option for the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is enabled.

DIS MSDL n DBG GROUP Disable the debugger option for the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the debugger option for the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is disabled.

DIS MSDL n MSGO GROUP Disable the outgoing message monitor option for the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the outgoing message monitor option for the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is disabled.

DIS MSDL n MSGI GROUP Disable the incoming message monitor option for the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the incoming message monitor option for the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is disabled.

334

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands

Command

System Response

Description

DIS MSDL n AUDM GROUP Disable the msdl auditing for the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the msdl auditing of the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is disabled.

DIS MSDL n FCTL GROUP Disable the flow control for the MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the flow control option for the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is disabled.

STAT MSDL n MON GROUP Display the current message monitoring and debug option for the given MSDL card, where: If the answer to the GRP prompt is g, then the current message monitoring and debug option for the MSDL card occupying the physical I/O address n in network group g is displayed.

Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands

The MSDL commands are listed below, x is the MSDL device number (defined by prompt DNUM in LD 17). These commands are also provided in Input/Output Diagnostic (LD 37) and Link Diagnostic (LD 48).
DIS MSDL x (ALL) ENL MSDL x (ALL, FDL) RST MSDL x SLFT MSDL x STAT MSDL (x [FULL]) Disable MSDL device x Enable MSDL device x Reset MSDL device x Invoke self-test for MSDL device x Get MSDL status

Note: See "Alphabetical List of commands" in LD 48 for a complete description of these commands.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

335

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Multipurpose Serial Data Link D-channel commands

The following commands are only available for D-channels on an MSDL port.
DIS LLB x DIS RLB x DIS TEST x DLIF DCH xx FDL ENL LLB x ENL RLB x ENL TEST x MAP DCH x PCON DCH x PMES DCH x PTRF DCH x PTRF DCH x TEST LLB x TEST RLB x Disable local loop back mode on MSDL DCH x Disable remote loop back mode on MSDL DCH x Disable TEST mode on MSDL DCH x Force download a PRI interface table. Enable local loop back mode on MSDL DCH x Enable remote loop back mode on MSDL DCH x Enable TEST mode on MSDL DCH x Get physical address and switch settings for D-channels Print configuration parameters on MSDL DCH x Print incoming layer 3 messages on MSDL DCH x Print traffic report on MSDL DCH x Print traffic report on MSDL DCH x Start local loop back test on MSDL DCH x Start remote loop back test on MSDL DCH x

D-channel call trace commands

All LD 96 DCT commands and variants are listed below.
DCT xxxxxxxx DCT on/off DCT I xxxxxxxx DCT > n DCT clr Set the monitor digits (part or all of a DN) for trace operation . Turn the DCT monitor on and off. Set several occurrences of monitor digits (part or all of multiple DNs) for trace operation. Change the DCT monitor message threshold. Clear all DCT monitor settings.

336

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Outgoing messages

DCT I xxxxxxxx <NPI> <TON> <MsgRecv> <MsgSend> DCT dch n DCT dch clr DCT DCT help/?

Specify specific types of calls for monitoring.

Specify the DCHs to monitor. Remove monitoring for all DCHs. Display DCT settings. Display DCT commands syntax.

Important: When monitoring digits with three or fewer digits, only the DCH message with a match is recorded (not any associated messages). This prevents excessive messaging.

Outgoing messages
Table 16: Outgoing messages on page 337 indicates the message mnemonics for outgoing messages for UIPE proprietary and Q.931 messages. Table 16: Outgoing messages
Message Mnemonic ALER DISC FAC FRNC FJNC INFO MIFO NOTF PROC PROG REJ UIPE Proprietary CC_ALERT_REQUEST CC_DISCONNECT_REQUEST CCC_FAC_REQUEST CC_FAC_REG_NULL_CRF CC_FACREJ_REQ_NULL_CRF CC_INFORMATION_REQUEST CC_MORE_INFO_REQUEST CC_NOTIFY_REQUEST CC_PROCEEDING_REQUEST CC_PROGRESS_REQUEST CC_REJECT_REQUEST Q.931 Messages ALERTING DISCONNECT FACILITY FACILITY FACILITY REJECT INFORMATION SETUP ACK NOTIFY CALL PROCEEDING PROGRESS RELEASE COMPLETE RLS CC_RELEASE_RESPONSE RELEASE P Support on Q.931 P P P P P P P P P P X

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

337

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Message Mnemonic RLSR STP STPR STEN STAT RST RSTR SVC SVCR

UIPE Proprietary CC_RELEASE_RESPONSE CC_SETUP_REQUEST CC_SETUP_RESPONSE CC_STATUS_ENQ_REQUEST CC_STATUS_REQUEST CC_RESTART_REQUEST CC_RESTART_RESPONSE SERVICE MESSAGES SERVICE RESPONSE

Q.931 Messages

Support on Q.931

SETUP CONNECT STATUS ENQUIRY STATUS RESTART RESTART ACK SERVICE SERVICE RESPONSE

P P P P X X P

P X

RSTJ

CC_RESTART_REJECT

RESTART REJECT

Incoming messages
Table 17: Incoming messages on page 338 indicates the message mnemonics for incoming messages for UIPE proprietary and Q.931 messages. Table 17: Incoming messages
Message Mnemonic ALER DISC FAC FIDC FJDC INFO MIFO NOTF PROC UIPE Proprietary CC_ALERT_INDICATION CC_DISCONNECT_INDICATIO N CCC_FAC_INDICATION CC_FAC_IND_NULL_CRF CC_FACREJ_IND_NULL_CRF CC_INFORMATION_INDICATIO N CC_MORE_INFO_INDICATION CC_NOTIFY_INDICATION CC_PROCEEDING_INDICATIO N Q.931 Messages ALERTING DISCONNECT FACILITY FACILITY FACILITY REJECT INFORMATION SETUP ACK NOTIFY CALL PROCEEDING Support on Q.931 P P P P P P P P P

338

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Message Mnemonic PROG RLSC

UIPE Proprietary CC_PROGRESS_INDICATION CC_RELEASE_CONFIRMATIO N

Q.931 Messages PROGRESS RELEASE COMPLETE

Support on Q.931 P X

RLS REJ

CC_RELEASE_INDICATION CC_REJECT_INDICATION

RELEASE RELEASE COMPLETE

P P P P P X X P

STP STPC STEN STAT RST RSTC SVC SVCR

CC_SETUP_INDICATION CC_SETUP_CONFIRMATION CC_STATUS_ENQ_INDICATIO N CC_STATUS_INDICATION CC_RESTART_INDICATION CC_RESTART_CONFIRMATIO N SERVICE MESSAGES SERVICE RESPONSE

SETUP CONNECT STATUS ENQUIRY STATUS RESTART RESTART ACK SERVICE SERVICE RESPONSE

Alphabetical list of commands

Command DCT DCT clr Description Display DCT settings. Pack/Rel basic-6.00

Clears all DCT settings or resets them to their default basic-6.00 value. For example, enter "DCT clr" to clear all previously entered DCT command settings and reset the DCH message per minute threshold value to 30 (default). Display command syntax. basic-6.00 You can type the word "help" or enter a "?"; both result in the same output. Configure the D-channels to monitor, where n = Dchannel number. basic-6.00

DCT help | ?

DCT dch n

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

339

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command

Description Up to 10 D-channels can be monitored. For example, to monitor D-channels 4, 8, 22, and 28, enter DCT dch 4 8 22 28. Precede a D-channel number with "X" to remove monitoring on that D-channel. For example, enter DCT dch X4 to remove monitoring on D-channel 4. Note: All D-channels are monitored by default.

Pack/Rel

DCT x...x

Configure a directory number (DN) or portion thereof, basic-6.00 for DCT monitoring. Where x...x =: part or all of an 8-digit DN A minimum of 2, or a maximum of 8, digits can be entered. For example, to monitor for a DN 3331101, enter DCT 3331101. 0 Clears the previous DCT x...x entry. For example, to clear the entry to monitor 3331101, enter DCT 0. Note: There is no need to turn on the DCT monitor before entering this DCT command. The DCT monitor turns on automatically when this command is entered.

DCT I x...x

Configure multiple directory numbers (DN) or portions basic-6.00 thereof, for DCT monitoring. To configure multiple directory numbers (DNs) or portions thereof, an index is required. Where: I = index number from 1 to 5 x...x = part or all of an 8 digit DN A minimum of 2, or a maximum of 8, digits can be entered. For example, to monitor DNs 345654 and 67893, enter DCT 1 345654 followed by DCT 2 67893. Messages for DN 345654 are logged in index 1 and messages for DN 67893 are logged in index 2. If a DN is not entered after the index number, the DN number associated with the specified index is cleared. For example, enter DCT 2 to clear the 67893 DN from index 2.

340

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command DCT I x...x <NPI> <TON> <MsgRecv> <MsgSend>

Description Configure specific types of calls to be monitored for the identified DN or portion thereof. Where: I = index number from 1 to 5 x...x = part or all of an 8 digit DN A minimum of 2, or a maximum of 8, digits can be entered. <NPI> = Numbering Plan Indicator Values: - (0) = any number - 1 = Unknown number - 2 = ISDN(E.164) - 3 = Private - 4 = E.163 - 5 = Telex - 6 = Data - 7 = National standard <TON> = Type of Number Values: - (0) = any type - 1 = Unknown type - 2 = International - 3 = National - 4 = Network Specific - 5 = Subscriber - 6 = Level 1 Regional - 7 = Level 0 Regional <MsgRecv> = turn on monitoring for incoming messages Values: - (Yes) = monitor incoming DCH messages - No = don't monitor incoming DCH messages <MsgSend> = turn on monitoring for outgoing messages Values: - (Yes) = monitor outgoing DCH messages

Pack/Rel basic-6.00

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

341

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command

Description - No = don't monitor outgoing DCH messages For example, to monitor for international numbers containing 5678 on received incoming DCH messages using a private numbering plan, enter "DCT 1 5678 3 2 on off". To monitor for any type of number containing 56798 on outgoing DCH messages using a Telex numbering plan, enter "DCT 2 56798 5 0 off on". To monitor for unknown numbers in any DCH messages using a private data plan, enter "DCT 3 all 6 1 on on". Command settings override any previously issued command settings. For example, if command "DCT 1 5678 3 2 on off" is issued, followed by command "DCT 1 5908 3 2 off on", settings configured during the first command (5678 3 2 on off) are cleared and replaced by the settings configured for the second command (5908 3 2 off on). Duplicate settings with different indexes are allowed. For example, the following 2 commands can be issued: "DCT 1 5678 3 2 on off" and "DCT 2 5678 3 2 on off" to capture DCH messages for DN 5678 in indexes 1 and 2. This does not cause duplicate DCH messages to be recorded, only one set of messages is recorded. Note: Only those D-channels configured in the "DCT dch" command are monitored.

Pack/Rel

DCT > n

Set the maximum number of DCH messages that can basic-6.00 be recorded per minute for a DCT trace, where n = a number from 1 to 60. Default setting is 30 messages per minute. For example, to turn off DCT tracing when the number of recorded DCH messages exceeds 45 per minute, enter DCT > 45 basic-6.00

DCT <on> <off> Activates or deactivates the recording of D-channel messages. Note: No DCT trace data is cleared. DIS AUTO x DIS DCH x Disable automatic recovery for DCH x

pra-13

pra-18 Disable DCH x. This changes the status of the DCH to DSBL and the status of the D-channel to DCH RST (reset).

342

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command DIS LLB x

Description Disable local loop back mode on MSDL DCH x. See "ENL TEST" command for details. Stop printing and logging messages. Stop logging DCH messages into a log file. Stop printing DCH messages on the TTY.

Pack/Rel msdl-18

DIS MON ALL DIS MON LOG DIS MON TTY

pra-5.00 pra-5.00 pra-5.00 pra-17

DIS MSGI x (options) Disable the monitoring of all incoming messages from D-channel x. The available options are: CH loop channel: disable incoming messages on B-channel loop channel (Large Systems) CH card channel : disable incoming messages on B-channel card channel (Small Systems, CS 1000S, and MG 1000T systems) CH l s c u: disable incoming messages on ISL-channel loop shelf card unit (Large Systems) CH c u : disable incoming messages on ISLchannel card unit (Small Systems, CS 1000S, and MG 1000T systems) FEAT feature: disable incoming messages for a PRI feature MSG msg1 msg2 msg3: disable incoming message types Refer to the LD 96 introduction for details. DIS MSGI <dch> DEBG CH <loop><channel> Disable the debugging of all monitored incoming messages from D-channel card. A maximum of 5 channels are monitored at a time. Only one channel number can be entered in one command. DIS MSGI <dch> DEBG MSG msg1 msg2 msg3 Disable the debugging of all monitored incoming messages from D-channel. This command can be entered more than once. Only 3 message mnemonics can be given in one command.

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

343

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command DIS MSGI <dch> DEBG SET

Description Disable debug SET on all incoming messages from Dchannel. This set-based filtering is enhanced for UIPE proprietary messages.

Pack/Rel basic-3.0

DIS MSGI x FEAT CPNW Disable incoming monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN messages on D Channel x. DIS MSGO x (options)

basic-21

Disable the monitoring of outgoing messages from D- pra-17 channel x. Refer to DIS MSGI x (options) for the list of options. DIS MSGO <dch> DEBG CH <loop><channel> Disable the debugging of all monitored outgoing messages from D-channel card. A maximum of 5 channels are monitored at a time. Only one channel number can be entered in one command. DIS MSGO <dch> DEBG MSG msg1 msg2 msg3 Disable the debugging of all monitored outgoing messages from D-channel. This command can be entered more than once. Only 3 message mnemonics can be given in one command. DIS MSGO <dch> DEBG SET Disable debug SET on all outgoing messages from Dchannel. This set-based filtering is enhanced for UIPE proprietary messages. DIS MSGO x FEAT CPNW Disable outgoing monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN messages on D Channel x. DIS RLB x Disable remote loop back mode on MSDL DCH x. See msdl-18 "ENL TEST" command for details. Disable service messages on D-channel x. See "ENL SERV" for details. The D-channel must be disabled before disabling service messages. pra-15 basic-21 basic-3.0 basic-3.0 basic-3.0

DIS SERV x

344

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command DIS TEST x

Description

Pack/Rel

msdl-18 Disable TEST mode on MSDL DCH x. See "ENL TEST" command for details. When the test mode state is disabled, the DCH link will go back to release state and the DCH background audit will then try to establish the link.

DIS TMDI x (ALL) Disable TMDI card x basic-24

basic-2.0 For CS 1000S Disable the TMDI card and the various applications on the TMDI. When a DCH is configured on the TMDI, the DCH is released and the DCH application is disabled. The TMDI associated loop is also disabled. Active calls are force disconnected. All channels are disabled. DIS TMD I s c u (ALL) Disable TMDI card DLIF DCH x Force download of D channel x (For PRI UIPE application). Note that : 1. D channel specified must use the UIPE application 2. D channel must be disabled 3. D channels configured on the same MSDL card using the same interface must be disabled DLIF DCH xx FDL Force download a PRI interface table. T o download the ISDN interface cable: 1. the D channel must be disabled 2. the UIPE application must be active 3. other D channels on the same MSDL card must be disabled ENL AUTO x Enable automatic recovery for DCH x. Automatic recovery is initially enabled. pra-13 qsig-22 uipe-20 basic-5,0

ENL DCH x (FDL) Enable DCH x and attempt to establish the link, and msdl-18 force download to MSDL. A self-test on the DCH runs automatically. If successful, then:

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

345

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command

Description DCHI status: OPER DCH status: EST If this is not successful, then: DCHI status: OPER DCH status: RLS FDL forces D-channel loadware to the MSDL card. This is optional.

Pack/Rel

ENL LLB x

Enable local loop back mode on MSDL DCH x. See "ENL TEST" command for details. Print messages on the TTY and log them into a file. Prepare to log DCH messages into a log file. Prepare to print DCH messages on the TTY.

msdl-18

ENL MON ALL ENL MON LOG ENL MON TTY ENL MSGI x

pra-5.00 pra-5.00 pra-5.00

Enable the monitoring of all incoming messages from pra-13 D-channel x. pra-17

ENL MSGI x (options) Enable the monitoring of all incoming messages from D-channel x. Refer to DIS MSGI x (options) for the list of options. ENL MSGI <dch> DEBG CH <loop><channel> Enable the debugging of all monitored incoming messages from D-channel card. A maximum of 5 channels are monitored at a time. Only one channel number can be entered in one command. ENL MSGI <dch> DEBG MSG msg1 msg2 msg3 Enable the debugging of all monitored incoming messages from D-channel. This command can be entered more than once. In one command, only 3 message mnemonics can be given. ENL MSGI <dch> DEBG SET Enable debug SET on all incoming messages from Dchannel This set-based filtering is enhanced for UIPE proprietary messages.

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

346

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command ENL MSGI x FEAT CPNW

Description Enable incoming monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN messages on D Channel x.

Pack/Rel basic-21

ENL MSGO x (options) Enable the monitoring of all outgoing messages for Dchannel x. Refer to DIS MSGI x (options) for the list of options. ENL MSGO <dch> DEBG CH <loop><channel> Enable the debugging of all monitored outgoing messages from D-channel card. A maximum of 5 channels are monitored at a time. Only one channel number can be entered in one command. ENL MSGO <dch> DEBG MSG msg1 msg2 msg3 Enable the debugging of all monitored outgoing messages from D-channel. This command can be entered more than once. Only 3 message mnemonics can be given in one command. ENL MSGO <dch> DEBG SET Enable debug SET on all outgoing messages from Dchannel This set-based filtering is enhanced for UIPE proprietary messages. ENL MSGO x FEAT CPNW Enable outgoing monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN messages on D Channel x. ENL RLB x

pra-17

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

basic-21

Enable remote loop back mode on MSDL DCH x. See msdl-18 "ENL TEST" command for details. Enable service messages on D-channel x. pra-15 "Service" and "Service Acknowledge" messages are supported on individual PRA B channels, ISL channels and D-channels. They are used to coordinate channel status between the near and far end. A channel status can be in service, maintenance or out-of-service. The primary and backup D-channel must be disabled before enabling service messages. Make sure both ends support service messages before using this command. By default, SERV is disabled when the interface type is Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 (LD 17 IFC = SL1).

ENL SERV x

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

347

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command

Description When enabled, service messages are supported on individual PRA B-channels, ISL channels and Dchannels. When disabled, service messages are provided automatically on D-channels with Backup Dchannel configured. For Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 to DMS, or Meridian 1/ Meridian SL-1 to AT&T only service messages on individual PRA B- channels and ISL channels are supported. By default, SERV is disabled when the interface type is DMS (LD 17), and enabled when the interface type is AT&T (LD 17 IFC = ESS4/ESS5).

Pack/Rel

ENL SSM x y

Enable Supplementary Service Monitor for feature y on D-channel x, where: y = 3 for Network Attendant Service. All other entries are reserved for future use Output format is as follows: Standard ISDN message monitor output format appended with four fields, where: Field 1 = Customer number Field 2 = Indicator of whether the message is one that was decoded at a "tandem" node Field 3 = Descriptive string about a specified item Field 4 = Numeric information about specified item Examples of the four fields follow:
--> --> --> --> 002 002 002 002 T-ACCESS TRKINFO T-PRIVATE TRUNK T-TIE TRUNK T-TANDEM COUNT (000001)

nas-18

ENL TEST x

Enable TEST mode on MSDL DCH x. msdl-18 The DCH is put into TEST mode to perform the local loop back (LLB) or remote loop back (RLB) test. The DCH link can only be put in test mode if it is in the release or established state. If the link is in establish state, the DCH link is first released, and then put in test mode. The local loop back test first tests the expedited interface, then the ring interface. The test consists of sending a data packet through each interface, which in turn is sent back by Layer 2. This data packet is then validated to ensure that the contents of the data packet are the same that were originally sent. Example:

348

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description ENL TEST x enter TEST mode ENL LLB x enter local loop back mode TEST LLB x perform test (results are PASS or FAIL) DIS LLB x exit local loop back mode The remote loopback test is used to verify the integrity of the physical link. To run the test the far-end must be in the remote loopback mode (ENL RLB x). The DCH running the test (near-end) must be in TEST mode. Example: Far-end: ENL TEST x enter TEST mode ENL RLB x enter remote loopback mode DIS RLB x exit remote loopback mode (after test) DIS TEST x exit TEST mode and restore link Near-end: ENL TEST x enter TEST mode TEST RLB x perform test (results are PASS or FAIL) DIS TEST x exit TEST mode and restore link If the far end is not an MSDL D-channel, use the RLBK command in LD60 to set up the remote loopback test.

Pack/Rel

ENL TMDI x ENL TMDI x ALL

Enable TMDI card number x

basic-24 basic-24

Enable all units on TMDI card number x For CS 1000S basic-2 Enable all applications and units on TMDI card x with the associated loop. When a DCH is configured on the TMDI, a background audit will enable and establish the DCH, once the loop is up. DCH layer 3 should be established within about 30 seconds. ENL TMDI x FDL Enable TMDI Card number x and force a download. This command only works when the TMDI and loop are disabled. It attempts to force download all required applications to TMDI card and then re-enable the card. When download is completed without error, re-enable the TMDI with ENL TMDI x ALL. Overlay 60, ENLL x can also be used to re-enable the TMDI L1 application and the loop. basic-24

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

349

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command

Description Force download f/w to TMDI is only required if a new PSDL file is created for TMDI f/w.

Pack/Rel

ENL TMD I s c u Enable TMDI card ENL TMD I s c u (FDL,ALL) Enable TMDI card and force a download EST DCH x

basic-5.00

basic-5.00

pra-13 Establish multiple frame operation on D-channel x. With the absence of the back-up D channel, issuing the EST DCH x command clears all the B-channels on loop x. If backup D-channel is available, the system switches to the backup D-channel and the B-channels of loop x are not cleared. ispc-22 Establish data interface process at the ISPC SLAVE side of an ISPC link at loop (l) and channel (ch), where "N" = the "number of tries" counter. The range for N = 0-(1)-255. When N = 0, the mode is set to AUTOMATIC. This mode requires one TDS slot and one DTR unit. This mode is not recommended for use on Small Systems, CS 1000S systems, or systems loaded with heavy traffic. When N > 0, the process is activated for a period of up to N * 30 minutes. The available range goes from 30 minutes (N = 1) to 128.5 hours or 5 days (N = 255). If no value is entered for N, it defaults to a value of 1. When N = 1, one attempt will be made to establish the data interface process before the ISPC slave Dchannel is released.

EST ISPC l ch (N)

FDIS NCAL <DCH#> <conn_id> Force disconnect the specified call-independent connection as defined by its connection ID number. The connection ID number is a number in the range of 1-9999 that identifies the call independent connection on a given DCH. MAP DCH x Get physical address and switch settings for Dchannels. This command outputs the card name and switch settings for D-channels. For example:
MAP DCH

qsig gf-22

msdl-18

350

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description
DCH 15 DCHI 07 DCH 23 MSDL 09 PORT 2

Pack/Rel

PCON DCH x

Print configuration parameters on MSDL DCH x. This msdl-18 command outputs the parameters originally downloaded when the D-channel was enabled. The output format is:
DCH : x LINK PARAM CONFIRM TIME: hh:mm:ss

MSDL x = 0-15 PORT x = 0-3 INTERFACE aaa = SL1, D100, D250, ESS4, S100, etc. OPER MODE aaa bbb ccc ddd eee , where:
aaa bbb ccc ddd eee = = = = = RS422, RS232 DTE, DCE USR, NET baud rate clock (EXT or INT CLK)

T200 xx (LAPD parameter) T203 xx (LAPD parameter) T200 xx (LAPD parameter) N201 xx (LAPD parameter) K xx (LAPD parameter) N2X4 xx (LAPD parameter if INTERFACE is ITR6)
PLOG DCH x Print protocol error log-on DCH x. Protocol errors can be the result of PRI transmission problems and re-start procedures, or a protocol mismatch with the far end. The PLOG counters are cleared after the PLOG is printed or the DCH card is enabled. When a protocol counter overflows, the PLOG is printed automatically and the counters are cleared. The counter is also cleared when the D-channel is disabled. Response is:
DCH : xx MAINT CONFIRM 01 cc 11 cc 23 cc TIME: hh:mm:ss

pra-18

Where: x = DCH number xxxx = system real time (in hexadecimal) yy = maintenance indication primitive

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

351

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command

Description zz = maintenance indication task ID 01 02 03....16 = protocol error counters as listed below cc = protocol error counts Only the non-zero counters are output. Protocol error counters: 01 = Count of missing PRI handshakes 02 = Count of peer initiated re-establishment link 03 = Count of unsuccessful retransmit N200 of SABME 04 = Count of unsuccessful retransmit N200 of DISC 05 = Count of N(R) errors 06 = Count of I fields with length greater than N201 07 = Count of undefined frames 08 = Count of I fields but not allowed 09 = Count of FRMR frames 10 = Count of CRC error frames 11 = Count of REJ frames 12 = Count of messages with less than 4 octets 13 = Count of undefined protocol discriminators 14 = Count of undefined message types 15 = Count of messages missing mandatory information elements 16 = Count of messages with undefined information elements 17 = Count of layer 1 reports of no external clock being received 18 = Count of aborted frames 19 = Count of SABME frames received with incorrect C/R bit 20 = Count of supervisory frames received with F = 1 21 = Count of unsolicited DM responses with F = 1 22 = Count of unsolicited UA responses with F = 1 23 = Count of unsolicited UA responses with F = 0 24 = Count of DM responses with F = 0

Pack/Rel

352

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description 25 = Number of times that no response was received from the far end after N200 retransmissions of RR or RNR 26 = Count of frames received with incorrect header length 27 = Number of times owner receiver busy condition was entered 28 = Number of times peer receiver busy condition was entered 29 = Count of messages with call reference length greater than 2 30 = Count of optional IEs received with invalid contents 31 = Count of mandatory IEs received with invalid contents 32 = Count of messages received with IE's not ordered correctly 33 = Count of IEs which were repeated in received messages, but are only allowed to appear once per message 34 = Count of IEs received with length exceeding the specified maximum length for the IE 35 = Count of layer 3 messages from far-end with invalid call reference flag value of 0. 36 = Count of layer 3 messages from far-end with invalid call reference flag value of 1. 37 = Count of layer 3 messages from far-end with invalid global call reference. 38 = Count of layer 3 messages that are too short. 39 = Count of layer 3 messages containing an undefined message type. 40 = Count of layer 3 messages missing mandatory IE(s). 41 = Count of layer 3 messages containing unsupported IE(s). 42 = Count of layer 3 messages containing invalid operational IE(s). 43 = Count of layer 3 messages containing invalid mandatory IE(s).

Pack/Rel

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

353

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command

Description 44 = Count of layer 3 messages with IE(s) out of order. 45 = Count of layer 3 messages containing repeated IE(s). 46 = Count of layer 3 messages from far-end with an invalid call reference length. 47 = Count of layer 3 messages with an invalid call reference flag value of 0. 48 = Count of layer 3 messages with an invalid call reference flag value of 1. 49 = Count of layer 3 messages with an invalid global call reference. 50 = Count of unexpected layer 3 messages received from the far-end. 51 = Count of unexpected layer 3 messages received from the SL-1. - 52 = Count of unexpected layer 3 timer expirations. - 53 = Count of protocol messages received when D-channel is not in service or waiting for a Service Acknowledge message.

Pack/Rel

PMES DCH x

msdl-18 Print incoming layer 3 messages on MSDL DCH x. The following data is kept by the MSDL DCH loadware and output when requested by this command or when one of the counters overflows:
DCH : xx MSG LOG CONFIRM TIME: hh:mm:ss SETUP: yy CONNECT: yy ALERT: yy

(Only non-zero counters are reported) (Where yy is the number of times a message was received) When a counter overflows, the log is printed automatically and the counters are cleared. The counter is also cleared when the D-channel is disabled. PTRF DCH x Print traffic report on MSDL DCH x. The following traffic information is output: msdl-18

354

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description PEAK_I_US xx % = peak incoming usage on the DCH link AVRG_I_US xx % = average incoming usage on the DCH link PEAK_O_US xx % = peak outgoing usage on the DCH link AVRG_O_US xx % = average outgoing usage on the DCH link TIME xx = time in seconds CONNECTED CALLS xx: = total number of established call-independent connections

Pack/Rel

RLS DCH x

Release D-channel x. The link is in a waiting state, pra-13 ready to come back up at any time. If you release the D-channel with active B-channels, then calls in progress are not affected. However, these calls are disconnected when you re-establish the Dchannel. When the automatic recovery feature is active, the Bchannels are automatically re-established Stop the data interface establishment process. ispc-22 When this command is entered, the mode becomes MANUAL and the number of attempts to be performed = 0. Reset D-channel x, inhibit signaling. Forces the link to pra-13 reset (RST) state, but does not disable PRI or DCH Reset or reactivate monitoring on D-channels with enabled monitors. Reset TMDI card x pra-17

RLS ISPC l ch

RST DCH x

RST MON

RST TMDI x RST TMD I s c u

basic-24 basic-5.00

Reset TMDI card SDCH DCH x Switch to the standby D-channel x. This is only valid pra-13 in a backup D-channel configuration. Releases a D-channel and switches over to the other D-channel as long as the other D-channel is in EST STBY, established standby mode. Where x is the standby D-channel number. This command changes the status of the active D-channel

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

355

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command

Description to standby, and changes the status of standby Dchannel to active. This command is not applicable if the recovery to primary D-channel option (prompt RCVP = YES in LD 17) is used. This command is only applicable to CS 1000to CS 1000Backup D-channel interface (IFC = SL-1 in LD 17).

Pack/Rel

SET MSGI x MON (0)-2 Set monitor output format level for all incoming messages on D-channel x. Refer to Setting output format levels earlier in the section. SET MSGO x MON (0) -2 Set monitor output format level for all outgoing messages on D-channel x. Refer to Setting output format levels earlier in the section. SLFT TMDI x SLFT TMD I s c u Invoke self test STAT DCH x Get the present status of D-channel x, where x is the I/O port number (entering x to specify just one link is optional). DCH status may be: EST = DCH link is established EST STBY = DCH link is established and is the standby FAIL = DCH link has failed RLS = DCH link is released RST = DCH link is in reset state AEST, ARLS, REST = these codes indicate intermediate background functions are being performed. Enter the STAT command again to determine final status. STAT DCH (x) Get status of one or all D-channels. Invoke self test on TMDI card x

pra-17

pra-17

basic-24 basic-5.00

pra-13

pra-18

356

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description If a DCH number is not entered, the status of all Dchannels is output. The output format is:
DCH x : aaaa bbbb cccc dddd x

Pack/Rel

Where: x = DCH number aaaa = application status bbbb = link status cccc = AUTO if autorecovery is enable dddd = BKUP x or PRIM x (associated primary or backup DCH) Application status ( aaaa ): APRI = Awaiting PRI response CPRI = Checking PRI DIAG = application has failed DSBL = application is disabled OPER = link is operational RST = application is in reset state SDCH = Setting D-channel Link status ( bbbb ): AEST = Awaiting establishment ARLS = Awaiting release EST ACTV = DCH link is established and active EST STBY = DCH link is established and is the standby FAIL = DCH link has failed REST = request establishment RLS = DCH link is released RST = DCH link is in reset state TST = Test mode STAT DCHI (x) Get the present status of DCHI x (entering x to specify pra-13 just one card, is optional). DCHI status may be:

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

357

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command

Description DSBL = DCHI hardware is disabled DIAG = DCHI hardware has failed OPER = DCHI hardware is operational RST = DCHI is in reset state PRI, CPRI, SDCH = these codes indicate intermediate background functions are being performed. Enter the STAT DCHI command again to determine final status.

Pack/Rel

STAT ISPC l ch Get status of data interface establishment process at ispc-22 an ISPC SLAVE side of an ISPC link (where l = loop and ch = channel) which is configured to convey Dchannel signaling. The status may be: DISABLED = ISPC link is disabled AWAITING ESTABLISHMENT = the data interface establishment process is waiting to receive DTMF digits. While waiting, dial tone is provided to the ISPC link at the SLAVE side. RELEASED = the data interface establishment process is stopped because either an "RLS ISPC" command has been entered or because the maximum number of tries has been reached. ESTABLISHED = data interfaces at both ends of the ISPC link are established. AWAITING RELEASE = the ISPC link is being disconnected. Once disconnected, the link will transition to the "RELEASED" state. The mode may be: MODE MANUAL N = the data interface establishment process is running with up to "N" number of tries MODE AUTOMATIC = the switch provides dial tone to the ISPC slave D-channel. STAT MON (x) Display the incoming and outgoing monitoring status of one or all D-channels. pra-13

358

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command STAT NCAL <DCH#>

Description List all current call-independent connections on a given PRI D-channel. The response format is as follows: NCAL CONN_ID : The connection ID number is a number in the range of 1-9999 that identifies the call independent connection on a given DCH. CREF : call reference number in HEX identifying independent connection STATE : current state of all call-independent connections (IDLE, CONN_REQ, CONN_EST) TIME : year month day hour:minute:second (the time when call independent connection request is made) APPL : applications using the call-independent connection (eg. NACD, NMS, ...) ORIG : originator DEST : destination

Pack/Rel qsig gf-22

STAT NCAL <DCH#> <conn_ID> List information pertaining to a specific callindependent connection as defined by its connection ID number. The response format is as follows: NCAL CONN_ID : The connection ID number is a number in the range of 1-9999 that identifies the call independent connection on a given DCH. CREF : call reference number in HEX identifying independent connection STATE : current state of all call-independent connections (IDLE, CONN_REQ, CONN_EST) TIME : year month day hour:minute:second (the time when call independent connection request is made) APPL : applications using the call-independent connection (eg. NACD, NMS, ...) ORIG : originator DEST : destination

qsig gf-22

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

359

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

Command STAT SERV (x)

Description Get the enable/disable status of services messages for one or all D-channels. See "ENL SERV" for details.

Pack/Rel pra-15

STAT TMDI x

Get TMDI status on card x

basic-24 basic-24

STAT TMDI x FULL Get TMDI status and all corresponding units. STAT TMD I s c u (FULL) Get TMDI status TEST 100 x

basic-5.00

Perform interrupt generation test on DCHI x. This is an pra-13 isolated hardware test. If this test fails, either a faulty DCHI card or a contention problem is indicated. Tests 100, 101, 200, and 201 must be run in sequential order. Established calls will stay up, but new calls cannot be placed. The DCH link must be in the reset (RST) state when these tests are run. Reset (RST) can be established when the status of the D-channel is established (EST) or released (RLS). Perform loop back mode test on DCHI x. This is an isolated hardware test. If this test fails, either a faulty DCHI card or a contention problem is indicated. Perform interrupt handler test on DCHI x. This is a software test which, when failed, indicates software problems. (Not supported on small system) Test interrupt handler-to-link interface path. This is a software test which, when failed, indicates software problems. (Not supported on small system) pra-13

TEST 101 x

TEST 200 x

pra-13

TEST 201 x

pra-13

TEST LLB x

Start local loop back test on MSDL DCH x. See "ENL msdl-18 TEST" command for details. Start remote loop back test on MSDL DCH x. See "ENL TEST" command for details. msdl-18

TEST RLB x

360

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 31: LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

This overlay has a command format that allows the administrator to: configure the Alarm Management feature identify all system alarms configure IP network interface addresses perform all IP network related maintenance and diagnostic functions Both Administration and Maintenance commands appear in this overlay, therefore this overlay is present in both Avaya Communication Server 1000 software reference documents: Avaya Software Input Output Reference - Administration, NN43001-611 and Avaya Software Input Output Reference - Maintenance, NN43001-711.

Command format
LD 117 uses a command line input interface (input parser) that has the following general structure (where "=>" is the command prompt): => COMMAND OBJECT [(FIELD1 value) (FIELD2 value)... (FIELDx value)] LD 117 offers the administrator the following configuration features: Context Sensitive Help - Help is offered when "?" is entered. The Help context is determined by the position of the "?" entry in the command line. If you enter "?" in the COMMAND position, Help text appears that presents all applicable command options. If you enter "?" in the OBJECT position, HELP text appears that presents all applicable OBJECT options. Abbreviated Inputs - The new input parser recognizes abbreviated inputs for commands, objects and object fields. For example, "N" can be entered for the command "NEW" or "R" can be entered for the object "Route". Optional Fields - Object fields with default values can be bypassed by the user on the command line. For example, to configure an object which consists of fields with default values, enter the command, enter the object name, press <return>, and the object is configured with default values. All object fields do not have to be specified. For CS 1000S systems both the optional fields <cab> and <port> refer to the MG 1000S number.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

361

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Selective Change - Instead of searching for a prompt within a lengthy prompt-response sequence, "Selective Change" empowers the administrator to directly access the object field to be changed. Service Change Error Message Consistency - The parser simplifies usage of service change error messages. LD 117 displays only SCH0099 and SCH0105.

Alarm Management capability

With the Alarm Management feature, all processor-based system events are processed and logged into a new disk-based System Event List (SEL). Events which are generated as a result of administration activities, such as SCH or ESN error messages, are not logged into the SEL. Events which are generated as a result of maintenance or system activities, like BUG and ERR error messages, are logged into the SEL. Unlike the previous System History File, this new System Event List survives Sysload, Initialization and power failures.

Feature packaging
With the exception of the Alarm Notification subfeature, the Alarm Management feature is optional. It is a major enhancement to the existing Alarm Filtering (ALRM_FILTER) package 243.

The Event Collector

The Event Collector captures and maintains a list of all processor-based system events. The Event Collector also routes critical events to FIL TTY ports and lights the attendant console minor alarm lamp as appropriate. The System Event List (SEL) can be printed or browsed.

The Event Server

The Event Server consists of two components: 1. Event Default Table (EDT): This table associates events with a default severity. By using the CHG EDT command in LD 117, the EDT is overridden so that all events default to a severity of either INFO or MINOR. The EDT is viewed in LD 117. The Default Table is stored in a disk file but is scanned into memory on start-up for rapid run-time access.

362

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alarm Management capability

Table 18: Sample Event Default Table (EDT)

Error Code ERR220 IOD6 BUG4001 Severity Critical Critical Minor

Note: Error codes which do not appear in the EDT is assigned a default severity of MINOR. 2. Event Preference Table (EPT): This table contains site-specific preferences for event severities as well as criteria for severity escalation and alarm suppression. The administrator configures the EPT to: a. override the default event severity assigned by the default table or b. escalate event severity of frequently occurring minor or major alarms. Table 19: Sample Event Preference Table (EPT)
Error Code ERR??? (see Note 1) INI??? BUG1?? HWI363 Severity Critical Default Minor Major Escalate Threshold (events/60 sec.) (see Note 2) 5 7 0 3

Note: The "?" is a wildcard. See the section below for explanation of wildcard entries. Note: The window timer length defaults to 60 seconds. However, this value can be changed by the Administrator. ReadGlobal window timer length on page 364 for more information.

Wildcards
The special wildcard character "?" can be entered for the numeric segment of an error code entry in the EPT to represent a range of events. All events in the range indicated by the wildcard entry can then be assigned a particular severity or escalation threshold. For example, if "ERR????" is entered and assigned a MAJOR severity in the EPT, all events from ERR0000 to ERR9999 are assigned MAJOR severity. If "BUG3?" is entered and assigned

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

363

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

an escalation threshold of 5, the severity of all events from BUG0030 to BUG0039 is escalated to the next higher severity if their occurrence rate exceeds 5 per time window. The wildcard character format is as follows: ERR? = ERR0000 - ERR0009 ERR?? = ERR0010 - ERR099 ERR??? = ERR0100 - ERR0999 ERR???? = ERR1000 - ERR9999

Escalation and suppression thresholds

The escalation threshold specifies a number of events per window timer length that, when exceeded, causes the event severity to be escalated up one level. The window timer length is set to 1 minute by default. Escalation occurs only for minor or major alarms. Escalation threshold values must be less than the universal suppression threshold value. A suppression threshold suppresses events that flood the system and applies to all events. It is set to 15 events per minute by default.

Global window timer length

Both the escalation and suppression thresholds are measured within a global window timer length. The window timer length is set to 1 minute by default. However, the window timer length can be changed by using the CHG TIMER command in LD 117.

TTY output format of events

TTY event output can be formatted or unformatted. Formatted output is also called fancy format. Output format is configurable in LD 117 using the CHG FMT _OUTPUT command.

Fancy format output

Formatted output appears in the following template:<severity> <report id> <date> <time> <prim_seq_no> <cp_id> <cp_ad> DESCTXT: <descriptive text> OPRDATA: <operator data> EXPDATA: <expert data>

364

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

TTY output format of events

Field <severity> <report id>

Description "***" (critical); "**" (major); "*" (minor); " " (blank for info) The report ID consists of an event category (e.g. BUG, ERR, etc.) and an event number (1200, 230, etc.). It is padded with blanks at the end to ensure it is 9 characters long (4 characters maximum for category and 5 digits maximum for number). Examples of report IDs are: ACDxxxx, ERRxxx and BUGxx, where x = 0-9. DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Primary sequence number of the event (length of 5 digits) The Component ID is a 15 character string which indicates the ID of the subsystem generating the alarm The Component address is a 15 character string which indicates the address of the subsystem generating the event This is an optional string which describes an event

<date> <time> <prim_seq_no> <cp_id> <cp_ad> <descriptive text>

<operator data> This is an optional field which holds a 160 character string containing extra text or data to assist the operator in clearing a fault. This field contains any data output with a filtered SL-1 alarm (e.g. loop number, TN, etc.) <expert data> This is an optional variable length character string which contains extra text or data for a system expert or designer.

The following are samples of fancy format output:

*** BUG015 15/12/95 12:05:45 00345 EXPDATA: 04BEF0FC 05500FBA 05500EE2 05500EC6 05500EAA BUG015 + 05500E72 + 05500E56 + 0550D96 + 055053A + 04D84E02 + 04D83CFC BUG015 + 04D835CA 04D81BAE 04D7EABE 04F7EABE 04F7EDF2 04F7EFC 04F7E1B0 * ERR00220 15/12/92 12:05:27 00346 OPRDATA: 51 VAS0010 15/12/92 12:06:11 00347 VMBA VAS 5

Unformatted Output
Unformatted data consists of only the report ID and perhaps additional text. The following is a sample of unformatted output:
BUG015 BUG015 + BUG015 + BUG015 + BUG015 + ERR00220 VAS0010 04BEF0FC 05500FBA 05500EE2 05500EAA 0550E8E 05500E72 05500E56 05500D96 0550053A 04D84E02 04D835CA 04D81BAE 04D7EABE 04F7EDF2 04F7E2FC 04&E1B0 04F7E148 51

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

365

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol

LD 117 is used to configure and manage an IP network interface. The large systems are hardware-equipped with an Ethernet controller on the I/O processor (IOP) card. Each IOP card is equipped with a Local Area Network Controller for Ethernet (LANCE) which is preconfigured with an unique Ethernet address. The Small Systems and CS 1000S systems can be hardware-equipped with Ethernet daughterboards on the System Controller card. They support both Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol. For large systems, the unique 48-bit long physical address (Ethernet address) is a assigned to the Ethernet controller on the IOP. On a single CPU M1 system, there is only one IOP which contains one Ethernet interface and an IP address which must be configured. Single CPU systems use only a Primary IP address. On a redundant or dual CPU M1 system, two IP addresses must be specified: Primary and Secondary. A dual CPU M1 system operating normally uses the Primary IP address. A dual CPU M1 system operating in split mode (the mode used only when upgrading software or hardware) uses the Secondary IP address. Remote access to the switches is made possible with Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). LD 117 is used to configure IP addresses for Point-to-Point Protocol. The large system Ethernet interface is provided by the IOP card with AUI cable on the back panel on Options 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C. The Small System provides an Ethernet interface through an ethernet connection on the main cabinet. The CS 1000S system provides an Ethernet interface through an ethernet connection on the Call Server. The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) is established via asynchronous connection to any system SDI port. The IP addresses for Ethernet and PPP interface are configured in Overlay 117, and defaults are available for all new installations and upgrades.

How to Configure Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol

The following tables explain how to configure IP addresses for Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol. These two tables are followed by examples.
Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT) Step 1 2 3 4 Load Overlay 117 Create host entries Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es) Set up Ethernet subnet mask Action

366

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol

Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT) Step 5 Set up routing entry Action

Configure ELAN IP address for the Point-to-Point Protocol Interface (10BaseT) Step 1 2 3 Load Overlay 117 Create host entries Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es) Action

Example 1 Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT) Given: Primary IP address: 47.1.1.10 ; Secondary IP address: 47.1.1.11; Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway IP: 47.1.1.1 Step 1 2 Action Load Overlay 117 Create host entries. Enter one of the following commands: NEW HOST PRIMARY_IP 47.1.1.10 NEW HOST GATEWAY_IP 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN) NEW HOST GATEWAY_IP 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN) Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es). Enter one of the following commands: CHG ELNK ACTIVE PRIMARY_IP CHG ELNK INACTIVE SECONDARY_IP (for Dual CPU only) Verify your IP address for Ethernet by entering the PRT ENLK command. Note: To reuse the active host entry and/or associated IP address, the existing entry must be removed. Prior to removing the existing enty, you must first create a temporary host entry and make it active. Out the original host entry, then proceed to Step 2. 4 Set up Ethernet subnet mask. Enter the command: CHG MASK 255.255.255.0 Verify subnet mask setting by entering the command: PRT MASK Set up routing entry. Enter the command: NEW ROUTE 0.0.0.0 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN) Where: 0.0.0.0 = destination network IP and 47.1.1.1 = default gateway IP Note: When more than one gateway exists, replace 0.0.0.0 with the destination network address for each entry of the routing table. Verify default routing by entering the command: PRT ROUTE

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

367

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Example 1 Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT) Note: For a single CPU machine, the secondary IP is not used. Note: The secondary IP is accessible only when a system is in split mode. Note: The subnet mask must be the same value used for the system Ethernet network. Note: The system private Ethernet (ELAN subnet) is used for system access and control. Use an internet gateway to isolate the system private Ethernet from the Customer Enterprise Network. Note: Routing information is required if an internet gateway or router connects a system private network (ELAN subnet) to the Customer Enterprise Network. New routes use network IPV4 classification to determine the whether the route is network or host based. Note: INI is required for the activation of subnet Mask. Example 2 Configure ELAN IP address for the Point-to-Point Protocol Interface (10BaseT) Given: Local IP address: 172.1.1.1; Remote IP address 100.1.1.1 Step 1 2 Action Load Overlay 117 Create host entries. Enter one of the following commands: NEW HOST LOCAL_PPP 172.1.1.1 NEW HOST REMOTE_PPP 100.1.1.1 (this entry is optional) Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es). Enter one of the following commands: CHG PPP LOCAL LOCAL_PPP 0 (always use interface #0) CHG PPP REMOTE REMOTE_PPP 0 (this entry is optional) Verify your IP address(es) for PPP by entering the PRT PPP command.

368

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Command descriptions

Command descriptions
Command **** BROWSE CHG DIS ENL INV GENERATE Definition Abort Browse Change Disable Enable Enable Description Abort overlay or Printing if it is printing an Inventory file Browse an existing System Event List Change/modify object configuration Disable Point-to-Point Protocol Enable Point-to-Point Protocol Enable inventory Set Midnight routine for inventory Print out the status of the Inventory feature Add and configure new object Delete existing object Print configuration of existing object Reset Object Set ELNK subnet mask to configured value Display object statistics Display resource locator module information Test Object Update INET database

INV MIDNIGHT Enable INV PRT NEW OUT PRT RST SET STAT STIP TEST UPDATE Print New Out Print Reset Set Status Status Test Update

Object descriptions
Object DBS DNIP EDT Database IP address of IP Phone Event Default Table: Table of default event entries and associated severities Description

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

369

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Object ELNK ELNK ACTIVE ELNK INACTIVE EPT FMT_OUTPUT HOST IPDN IPR IPM LDAPSYNC MASK NDAPP OPEN_ALARM PPP PPP LOCAL PPP REMOTE PTM ROUTE SELSIZE SEL SUPPRESS Ethernet interface

Description

Active Ethernet Link: Change the Primary IP address and host name Inactive Ethernet Link: Change the Secondary IP address and host name Event Preference Table: Table of customer's event entries with associated severities Formatted Output: Determine if system events uses formatted (also called fancy) or unformatted output. Host name IP address of configured DN IP connectivity configuration associated with specified port IP connectivity configuration associated with main cabinet LDAP server synchronization Subnet mask Name Directory application Open Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps setting Point-to-Point Protocol interface Local Point-to-Point Protocol interface address Remote Point-to-Point Protocol interface address Point-to-Point Protocol idle Timer Configure new routing entry System Event List Size: Number of events in System Event Log System Event List Number of times the same event is processed before it is suppressed.

SUPPRESS_ALARM Severity level that triggers sending of alarms. TIMER Global window timer length

How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S

The following tables explain IP Connectivity set-up using Bootp and Manual Configuration. The tables are followed by examples.

370

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S

Important: CS 1000S does not support IP addresses of all zeros (0) or all ones (1).

Point-to-Point configuration - Call Server, Bootp is used

To configure Mac addresses for the MG 1000S 100BaseT daughterboard in a Point-to-Point configuration, use the following steps. Full IP connectivity configuration for the system is done on the Call Server side in OVL117. Bootp protocol is used to automatically configure IP parameter on the MG 1000S.
Configure MAC address for the 100BaseT daughterboard. Step 1 2 3 Load Overlay 117. Configure MAC address. Reboot Call Server. Action

Example 1 Configure MAC address for the 100BaseT daughterboard. Given: MAC address of the 100BaseT daughterboard on the MG 1000S: 00:90:cf:03:71:15 The MG 1000S is connected to the port number 1 of the Call Server. Action Load Overlay 117. Configure the MAC address. Enter the following commands: CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15 Verify the MAC address by entering the PRT IPR command. Reboot the Call Server.

Step 1 2

Recommended BootP configuration for Layer 2 LAN configuration - Call Server only
The following tables explain how to configure MAC and IP addresses for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer 2 LAN configuration. Full IP connectivity configuration for the system occurs on the Call Server side in OVL117. The MG 1000S does not need to be configured. Bootp protocol is used to automatically configure IP parameter on the MG 1000S. BootP is the recommended Layer 2 configuration procedure.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

371

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server and MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT ports. Step 1 2 3 4 Load Overlay 117. Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT. Reboot the Call Server. Action

Example 2 Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server and MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT ports. Given: MAC address of the 100BaseT daughter board on the MG 1000S: 00:90:cf:03:71:15; IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 47.147.75.101; Subnet Mask of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0; IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.75.100; Subnet Mask of the Call Server 100Base: 255.255.255.0; The MG 1000S is connected to the slot number 1 of the Call Server. Action Load Overlay 117 Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Enter the following command: CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15 47.147.75.101 255.255.255.0 YES Verify by entering the command: PRT IPR 1 Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT. Enter the following command: CHG IPM 1 47.147.75.100 255.255.255.0 Verify by entering command: PRT IPM 1 Reboot the Call Server.

Step 1 2

Manual Layer 2 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S

When using manual configuration the following steps are required for both the Call Server and MG 1000S. IP connectivity Layer 2 configuration for the Call Server side occurs in OVL117. These steps are followed to configure MAC and IP addresses for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer 2 configuration on the Call Server side:

372

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S

Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server TLAN 100BaseT ports and subnet mask. Step 1 2 3 4 Load Overlay 117. Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Configure the IP address on the Call Server 100BaseT. Reboot the Call Server. Action

Example 3 Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server TLAN 100BaseT ports and subnet mask. Given: IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.75.100; Subnet Mask of the Call Server 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0; The MG 1000S 1 is connected to the port number 1 of the 100BaseT daughterboard on the Call Server. Action Load Overlay 117. Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Enter the following command: CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15 47.147.75.101 255.255.255.0 YES Verify by entering the command: PRT IPR 1 Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT. Enter the following command: CHG IPM 1 47.147.75.100 255.255.255.0 Verify by entering the command: PRT IPM 1 Reboot the Call Server.

Step 1 2

The Layer 2 IP connectivity configuration for the MG 1000S side occurs during system installation when Manual configuration has been chosen. These steps are followed to configure IP address for the 100BaseT daughter board in a Layer 2 configuration on the MG 1000S side: TTY needs to be connected to the MG 1000S.
Configure MAC and IP address for MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT port. Step 1 2 3 4 Action Choose Manual configuration option from the installation menu. Configure the IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Configure the MG 1000S NetMask. Configure the IP address of the Call Server.

Example 4 Configure MAC and IP address for MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT port. Given: IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 47.147.75.101;

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

373

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Example 4 Configure MAC and IP address for MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT port. Subnet Mask of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0; IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.75.100; The MG 1000S is connected to slot number 1 of the Call Server. Step 1 Action IP parameters for this module are obtained by: 1. Automatically using BootP 2. Using Manual configuration Enter the MG 1000S IP address: 47.147.75.101 Enter the MG 1000S NetMask: 255.255.255.0 Enter the Call Server IP address: 47.147.75.100 Note: If the MG 1000S IP address is on a subnet different than the Call Server IP address then the default MG 1000S Address (0.0.0.0) is required.

Manual Layer 3 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S

The IP connectivity Layer 3 for the Call Server is configured in OVL117. Note: For Layer 3, manual configuration is mandatory. These steps are followed to configure MAC and IP addresses for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer 3 configuration on the Call Server side:
Configure MAC and IP address and routing entry for the Call Server TLAN 100BaseT ports. Step 1 2 3 4 5 Load Overlay 117. Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT. Configure routing entry between the Call Server and MG 1000S. Reboot the Call Server. Action

Example 5 Configure MAC and IP address and routing entry for the Call Server TLAN 100BaseT ports. Given: IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT port 1: 47.147.10.100; Subnet Mask of the Call Server 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0; Gateway address on

374

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S

Example 5 Configure MAC and IP address and routing entry for the Call Server TLAN 100BaseT ports. Call Server: 47.147.10.1; IP address of the MG 1000S 1: 47.147.20.101 The MG 1000S 1 is connected to the port number 1 of the 100BaseT daughterboard on the Call Server. Step 1 2 Action Load Overlay 117. Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Enter the following command: CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15 47.147.20.101 255.255.255.0 YES Verify by entering the command: PRT IPR 1 Configure IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT. Enter the following command: CHG IPM 1 47.147.10.100 255.255.255.0 Verify by entering command: PRT IPM 1 Configure new route to reach IPR: NEW ROUTE 47.147.20.0 47.147.10.1 0 1 Configure new route to reach IPM Local subnet: NEW ROUTE 47.147.10.0 47.147.20.100 0 1 Reboot Call Server.

4 5 6

The Layer 3 IP connectivity configuration for the MG 1000S side is configured during system installation when Manual configuration has been chosen. These steps are followed to configure IP address for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer 3 configuration on the MG 1000S side:
Configure MAC and IP address and router entry for MG 1000S TLAN (100BaseT) port. Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Choose the Manual configuration option from the installation menu. Configure the IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Configure the IP MG 1000S NetMask. Configure the IP address on the Call Server. Configure the MG 1000S Routing address.

Example 6 Configure MAC and IP address and router entry for MG 1000S TLAN (100BaseT) port. Given: IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 47.147.20.101; Subnet Mask of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0; Gateway address for MG 1000S: 47.147.20.1; IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.10.100; The MG 1000S is connected to slot number 1 of the Call Server.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

375

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Example 6 Configure MAC and IP address and router entry for MG 1000S TLAN (100BaseT) port. Step 1 Action IP parameters for this module are obtained by: 1. Automatically using BootP 2. Using Manual configuration Enter your selection: 2 2 Enter the MG 1000S IP address: 47.147.20.101 Enter the MG 1000S NetMask: 255.255.255.0 Enter the Call Server IP address: 47.147.10.100 Enter the MG 1000S Router/Gateway address: 47.147.20.1

Auto-Negotiate on 100BaseT ports

The Auto-Negotiation feature must be enabled on each Main Cabinet/Call Server and Expansion Cabinet/MG 1000S ethernet port to allow bandwidth negotiation of 100 Mbps full duplex. Note: These commands are executed on the Main Cabinet/Call Server side. The commands for enabling auto-negotiation are: Main Cabinet/Call Server ports CHG AUTONEG IPM <port> <a...a> Expansion Cabinet/MG 1000S port CHG AUTONEG IPR <port> <a...a> To enable Auto-Negotiation with a Expansion Cabinet/MG 1000S configured on port one, enter the following commands: CHG AUTONEG IPM 1 ON CHG AUTONEG IPR 1 ON Important: When auto-negotiation is enabled, if a link is already up, a LINK DOWN message is reported on the TTY. This is normal because the data ports must perform the bandwidth negotiation protocol to obtain its required 100Mbps full duplex. This process takes 5 to 7 seconds. Once the process is complete, a LINK UP message is reported and the system is ready for normal operations. To get the status of the auto-negotiation process, after process completion, enter the following commands: STAT AUTONEG IPM

376

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

IP command descriptions

STAT AUTONEG IPR The following is a sample print out for the Main Cabinet/Call Server:
AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS - MAIN/CALL SERVER PORTS --------------------------------------------------PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate =================================================== IPM 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON IPM 2 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN IPM 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON IPM 4 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN

If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100 Mbps full duplex". Otherwise UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating the 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth. The following is a sample print out for the MG 1000S:
AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS - EXPANSION/MEDIA GATEWAY PORTS --------------------------------------------------PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate =================================================== IPR 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON IPR 2 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN IPR 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON IPR 4 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN

If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100 Mbps full duplex". Otherwise UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating the 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth.

IP command descriptions
Command Description Change Auto-Negotiation for Main Cabinet ports. Change Auto-Negotiation for Expansion Cabinet port. Change the automatic switch back option of a given Expansion Cabinet. Configure the zone-to-zone record validity time interval. Where:

CHG AUTONEG IPM CHG AUTONEG IPR CHG AUTOSB <cab> <a...a> CHG CACVT <Zone> <1-(48)-255>

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

377

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 1-(48)-255 = interval in hours

CHG CD <Zone> <1-(50)-100>

Change the Cd coefficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone. Where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 1-(50)-100 = Cd coefficient

CHG CPL <Zone> <1-(50)-100>

Change the Cpl coefficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone. Where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 1-(50)-100 = Cpl coefficient

CHG ES1 <Echo Server IP Address> <Echo Server Port>

Change Echo Server 1's IP address and port number. Where: Echo Server 1 IP Address = (0.0.0.0) Echo Server 1 Port number = (10000) Note: Echo Server 1 IP address uses the TLAN IP address of the LTPS card.

CHG ES2 <Echo Server IP Address> <Echo Server Port>

Change the Echo Server 2 IP address and port number. Where: Echo Server 2 IP Address = (0.0.0.0) Echo Server 2 Port number = (10000) Note: Echo Server 2 IP address uses the node IP address on the node's master card.

378

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command

Description Changes the IP connectivity configuration associated with the Main Cabinet end of the specified port. Change the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the Expansion Cabinet end of the specified port. Where: a...a = zeroBandwidth = (NO) YES Default value for zeroBandwidth means that in a 'no traffic condition' bandwidth is not brought down to zero. Use NO in a PTP configuration, when data units are configured on the Expansion Cabinet to avoid potential packet loss. Use YES in a Layer 2 or Layer 3 configuration to bring the bandwidth down to zero in a no traffic condition.

CHG IPM <port> <ip> [mask]

CHG IPR <port> <mac> [ip] [mask] [a...a]

CHG NKT

Change NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router. Where time out setting = 0-(30)-60 seconds. Change the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Change the description of a ZBD numbering zone. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Set Packet Delay Variation (PDV) buffer size and delay. interface IP address.

CHG NUMZONE <numbering zone> <site_prefix> <country_code> <npa> <ac1> <ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac> <ttbl> CHG NZDES <numbering zone> <description>

CHG PDV <port> <delay>

CHG PPP LOCAL <hostname> [cab] Set CS 1000S local Point-to-point Protocol CHG PPP REMOTE <hostname> [cab] CHG PTM <xx> [cab] CHG SWOTO <cab> <x...x> CHG SURV <cab> <a...a>
Set CS 1000S remote Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address. Change Point-to-Point Protocol Timer. Change the switch over time out timer of a given MG 1000S. Change Survivable Capability of a given MG 1000S.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

379

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Define the access codes used to modify local calls in the branch office zone. Define a zone as a branch office zone. Assign the Zone a descriptive name (ZoneDescription). Change a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation table entry. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Define the dialing plan for the branch office zone. Specify whether the branch office zone observes daylight savings time.

CHG ZACB <Zone> <AC1-AC2> <AC1-AC2> CHG ZBRN <Zone> <a...a> CHG ZDES <Zone> <ZoneDescription> CHG ZDID <numbering zone> <matching string> <replacement string> [<description>] CHG ZDP <Zone> <DialingCode1> <DialingCode2> <DialingCode3> CHG ZDST <Zone> a...a <StartMonth> <StartWeek> <StartDay> <StartHour> <EndMonth> <EndWeek> <EndDay> <EndHour> CHG ZESA <Zone> <ESARLI> <ESAPrefix> <ESALocator>

Defines the emergency services access (ESA) parameters for the branch office zone. These parameters are used only if the ESA package is enabled. Change a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan table entry. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

CHG ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string> <type> [<replacement string>] [LEN <max length>] ["<description>"] CHG ZONE <ZoneNumber> <intraZoneBandwidth> <intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth> <interZoneStrategy> <a...a>

Change the parameters of an existing Zone. Where: <ZoneNumber> = 0255 <ZoneNumber> = 08000 <intraZoneBandwidth> = Intrazone available bandwidth (0 to 0.1MBps) <intraZoneStrategy> = BQ or BB, Intrazone preferred strategy (BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth) <interZoneBandwidth> = Interzone available bandwidth (0 to 0.1MBps)

380

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command

Description <interZoneStrategy> = BQ or BB, Interzone perferred strategy ((BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth) <a...a> = type of zone (Shared or Private) - Shared: The ethersets configured in Shared zones use DSP resources configured in Shared zones. If all of the Shared zones' gateway channels are used, the caller receives an overflow tone and the call is blocked. The order of channel selection for the gateway channels is: i. channel from same zone as etherset is configured ii. any available channel from the shared zones' channels - Private: DSP channels configured in a Private zone are used only by ethersets which have also been configured for that Private zone. If more DSP resources are required by these ethersets than what are available in the zone, DSPs from other zones are used. However, ethersets configured in shared zones cannot use the private zones' channels. The order of selection for the gateway channels is: i. channel from same private zone as etherset is configured ii. any available channel from the pool of shared zones' channels Note: Current default zone type = Shared. Note: All parameters must be re-entered when changing a zone.

CHG ZPARM <numbering zone> <parameter name> <value> CHG ZTDF <Zone> <TimeDifferenceFromHeadOffice >

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Specify the time difference between the Main Office and the branch office when both are not in Daylight Saving Time.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

381

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Disable features of the branch office zone. Download 100BaseT database to the specified Expansion Cabinet. Enable features for the branch office zone. Generate a CSV file that contains information for all configured zones on the Call Server. Caution: In Release 7.0 and later, Adaptive Network Bandwidth Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 08000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0 255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

DIS ZBR <Zone> [ALL] [LOC] [ESA] [TIM] DWL DBS [cab] ENL ZBR <Zone> [ALL] [LOC] [ESA] [TIM] GEN ZONEFILE <fileName>

IMPORT ZONEFILE <fileName>

Read a CSV file and create new zones listed in the file, or apply updates contained in the CSV file for zones that already exist. Caution: Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 08000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0 255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

NEW HOST <hostname> <IPaddress> [cab]

Configure a new host entry (add host name and IP address to network host table). To reuse the active host entry and/or associated IP address, the existing host entry must be removed. Prior to removing the existing host entry, you must first create a temporary host entry and make it active. OUT the original host entry and re-create your intended host entry. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network

382

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command

Description configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

NEW NUMZONE <numbering zone> [<site_prefix> <country_code> <npa> <ac1> <ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac> <ttbl>] NEW RANGE_OF_ZONES <zoneStartNumber> <zoneAmount> <intraZoneBandwidth> <intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth> <interZoneStrategy> <zoneIntent> <zoneResourceType>

Configure a new ZBD numbering zone. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Create new bandwidth zones. This command creates a range of new bandwidth zones starting from <zoneStartNumber>. The number of existing bandwidth zones must be less than 8001. If the number of existing bandwidth zones is greater than or equal to 8001, no bandwidth zones are created. Caution: Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 08000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0 255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255. Configure a new routing entry (add new route to the network routing table). Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

NEW ROUTE <destination IP> <gateway> [cab] [port]

NEW ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string> [<replacement string>] [LEN <max length>] [<description>] NEW ZONE <x...x> p1 p2 p3 p4 <shared/private>

Configure a new ZBD numbering zonebased Flexible Dialing Plan. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Create a new zone with parameters. Caution: Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 08000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0 255; call processing issues occur if you

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

383

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

OUT NUMZONE <numbering zone)

Remove a ZBD numbering zone. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Remove a range of existing bandwidth zones. This command deletes a range of existing bandwidth zones, starting from <zoneStartNumber>. If there are no bandwidth zones with a zone number greater than <zoneStartNumber>, then no bandwidth zones are deleted. Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all zones with ALL). Print parameters and survivable capability of the specified Expansion Cabinet. Print a list of IP addresses for each IP Phone registered with the specified DN. Note: A partial DN can be entered.

OUT RANGE_OF_ZONES <zoneStartNumber> <zoneAmount>

OUT ZDID <numbering zone> <matching string>

OUT ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string>

PRT AQOS <attribute> <zone / ALL> PRT CAB [cab] PRT DNIP <DN> [<CustomerNo>]

PRT ES1 PRT ES2 PRT ESS PRT INTERZONE PRT INTRAZONE PRT IPDN <IPAddress>

Print Echo Server 1's IP address and port number. Print the Echo Server 2 IP address and port number. Print both Echo Servers IP address and port number. Print interzone statistics for the range between the near and far zones. Print intrazone statistics for all zones or for the specified zone. Print a list of DNs configured for the specified IP address(es).

384

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command

Description Note: Partial IP addresses can be entered with only the leading digits of the IP address (for example, 142.10), or as the IP address with zeroes at the end (for example, 142.10.0.0)

PRT IPM <port>

Print the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the Main Cabinet end of the specified port. Print the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the Expansion Cabinet end of the specified port. Print NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router. Print a table of information for a ZBD numbering zone. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Print the description for a specified ZBD numbering zone. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Print the current size of the PDV buffer and the number of PDV underflows Print Point-to-point Protocol interface address(es) Print Point-to-Point Protocol idle timer settings Print level of service based on system configured thresholds for selected Expansion Cabinet. Prints the Expansion Cabinet Survivable capability for all, or specified Expansion Cabinets. Print a table of branch office zone dialing plan entries. Print a table of zone bandwidth utilization. Print a table of the zone description entries.

PRT IPR <port>

PRT NKT

PRT NUMZONE <numbering zone)

PRT NZDES [<numbering zone>]

PRT PDV <port> PRT PPP [cab] PRT PTM [cab] PRT QOS <cab>

PRT SURV [cab]

PRT ZACB [<Zone>] PRT ZBW [<Zone>] PRT ZDES [<DESMatchString>]

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

385

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based call translations. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Print a table of branch office zone dialing plan entries. Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries. Print a table of branch office zone emergency services access (ESA) entries. Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Print zone information for all zones. Print zone information for a specific zone. Print zone information for <zonesPerPage> zones starting at <zoneNumber> zone. Print the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all attributes with ALL). Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries. Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries. Ping far end IP address. When IP (voice) link is UP: PING to/from 100BaseT is ONLY enabled among the Call Server and the Expansion Cabinets. They do not respond to PING from/to any other device in the data network. When IP (voice) link is DOWN: PING command is enabled to/from entire data network. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and

PRT ZDID [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>]

PRT ZDP [<Zone>] PRT ZDST [<Zone>] PRT ZESA [<Zone>] PRT ZFDP [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>]

PRT ZONE ALL PRT ZONE x...x PRT ZPAGE [<zone number> <zonesPerPage>] PRT ZPARM [<numbering zone>]

PRT ZQOS <zone> <attribute / ALL> PRT ZTDF [<Zone>] PRT ZTP [<Zone>] PING ipAddress

386

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command

Description Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

STAT LINK APP <applicationType>

Display the link information status of the server for the specified application. Where <applicationType> is: LTPS (Line TPS) VGW (Voice Gateway) H323 (H.323 Virtual Trunk) GK (GateKeeper)

STAT LINK IP <IP address>

Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses of the specified sub-net. Where <IP address> = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card. Note: The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format (e.g., "10.11.12.13" or "10.11").

STAT LINK NAME <hostName>

Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host name. Where <hostName> = MAINSERVER Display the link information status of the specified node. Where <nodeID> = a number from 0 9999. Note: The nodeID identifies the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Server equipment.

STAT LINK NODE <nodeID>

STAT LINK SRV <serverType>

Display the link information status of the servers for the specified server type. Where <serverType> is: ITGP (ITG Pentium) SMC (Media Card) SS (Signaling Server)

STAT SERV APP <applicationType>

Display the link information status of the server for the specified application.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

387

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Where <applicationType> is: LTPS (Line TPS) VGW (Voice Gateway) H323 (H.323 Virtual Trunk) GK (GateKeeper) SIP (Session Initiated Protocol) MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC SLG (SIP Line Gateway)

STAT SERV IP <IP address>

Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses contained in the specified subnet. Where <IP address> = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card. Note: The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format (e.g., "10.11.12.13" or "10.11").

STAT SERV NAME <hostName>

Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host name. Where <hostname> = MAINSERVER. Display the link information status of the specified node. Where <nodeID> = a number from 0 - 9999 identifying the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Server equipment. Display the server information of the specified server type. Where <serverType> is: ITGP (ITG Pentium) SMC (Media Card) SS (Signaling Server)

STAT SERV NODE <nodeID>

STAT SERV TYPE <serverType>

STAT SS STAT ZBR [<Zone>]

Display the server information of the specified Signaling Server. Display status of branch office zones (displays which local dialing).

388

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command

Description Display zone status table. Displays status for all ACF calls. Displays Active Call Failover (ACF) information. Display IP Phones based on signaling encryption related values, namely the type of connection currently in use by each IP Phone and their capability to make DTLS connections. Where: <Node> = the node ID of the node the subject IP phones belong to, or ALL to omit node-based filtering <Connection_Type> = type of signaling encryption used - INSECURE = no signaling encryption - SECURE = USec or DTLS - DTLS = DTLS - USEC = UNIStim Security - ALL = all encryption types <DTLS_Capability> = capability to make DTLS connections - YES = able to make DTLS connections - NO = not able to make DTLS connections - ALL = both capabilities

STAT ZONE [<Zone>] STIP ACF STIP ACF <status>` STIP DTLS <Node> <Connection_Type> <DTLS_Capability>

STIP HOSTIP <IP address>

Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified HOSTIP address, or HOSTIP addresses contained in the specified subnet. Where <IP address> = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card. Note: IP address can be in full or partial IP address format. For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

389

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified node ID. Where <nodeID> = a number from 0 - 9999 identifying the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Server equipment. Display SIP Line Services TNs with the specified User Agent string. Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified TERMIP address, or TERMIP addresses contained in the specified sub-net. Where <IP address> = the TLAN IP address of the IP Phone or Voice Gateway Media Card. Note: IP address can be in full or partial IP address format. For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".

STIP NODE <nodeID>

STIP SIPLUA STIP TERMIP <IP address>

STIP TN l s c u

Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN, or group of TNs, as denoted by the l s c u and cu parameters. Note: All codecs configured for the specified TN are listed in the format - <codec standard> and <bandwidth used for it>: CODEC(BW): G711a noVAD(1904), G711u noVAD(1904). The exact value of G.711 20ms codec BW usage is 190400 bps (or 190.4 kbps). However, the configured zone BW limit in the zone table is measured and configured in kbps. The zone BW usage for a single call is counted in kbps and only in integer values. Zone BW usage should be readable. The STIP commands in LD 117 take BW value for IP codecs from the RLM table. RLM table stores the exact BW value and in the following format - 190400 bps divided to 100.

STIP TYPE <aaa>

Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN type. Where <aaa> is:

390

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command

Description IP Phone type: - 1110 - 1120 - 1130 - 1140 - 1145 - 1150 - 1160 - 1210 - 1220 - 1230 - 2001 - 2002 - 2004 - 2007 - 2033 - 2050 - 2210 - 2211 - 2212 - MVC2050 ISET = all IP Phones VGW = Voice Gateway resources IPTI = Virtual Trunk and IP Trunks Note: Up to 3 types can be specified.

STIP ZONE <zone>

Display the resource locator module information for the specified zone number, or range of zones. Where <zone> = any valid zone number (0 8000) in the system.

UPDATE DBS UPDATE DBS

Rebuild INET database and download to all Expansion Cabinets (update network database).

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

391

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer. Note: To apply Network Time Protocol configuration to all system elements, ensure the configuration is done using Element Manager. CLI commands only configure the Call Server, and may lead to inconsistent NTP operation at the system level.

NTP Command descriptions

Note: NTP commands are blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer. Note: To apply Network Time Protocol configuration to all system elements, ensure the configuration is done using Element Manager. CLI commands only configure the Call Server, and may lead to inconsistent NTP operation at the system level.
Command CHG NTP IPADDR CHG NTP THRESH CHG NTP SECURE CHG NTP AUTHMODE CHG NTP TIMEINT Comment Configure the IP addresses for the Primary and/or Secondary NTP Servers. Configure the 3 NTP threshold levels (Minimum, Warning, Maximum). Configure the parameters used by the Primary and/or Secondary NTP servers in secure mode of operation. Configure the security mode for the Primary, Secondary, or both, NTP servers. Configure both the time interval for background NTP synchronization and the time offset from other background routines.

392

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command CHG UTCOFFSET ENL NTP DIS NTP STAT NTP SYNC NTP STOP NTP BACKGROUND PRT NTP

Comment Configure the time offset (from UTC) for the local time zone. Enable NTP. Disable NTP. Check Status of NTP. Synchronize NTP servers manually or in background mode. Stop background synchronization from running. Display the current configuration parameters of NTP.

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

The commands listed below use the following general structure (where "=>" is the command prompt): => COMMAND OBJECT [(FIELD1 value) (FIELD 2 value)... (FIELDx value)] In the following table, COMMANDS and OBJECTS are in bold typeface and fields are in regular typeface. Fields enclosed in brackets ( ) are default values.
Command Description Pack/Rel basic-5.0 0

PRT BKPR ALL

Administer Accounts. Note: This prompt is available only when adding/modifying Level 2 (PWD2) user. Allow TM system restore functionality for one usage.

BANNERLOAD aa...a
Login Banner. Input terminated with \n OR \r\n. Restricted to: 20 lines Up to 80 characters per line characters a-z, A-Z, 0-9, ,<.>/?;:[{]}~!@#$%^&*()_-+=| \

basic-5.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

393

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Note: Available to users with the SEC_ADMIN privilege loads the contents from the /u/pub/ banner.txt for use as the system login banner An EDD is required to force all peripheral devices (SS/IPMG/ VGMC/Inactive Core) to update their login banners.

Pack/Rel

BANNER LOAD
Load customized banner from banner.txt into memory.

BANNER RESET
Reset banner contents with default value. Note: Available to users with the SEC_ADMIN privilege An EDD is required to force all peripheral devices (SS/IPMG/ VGMC/Inactive Core) to update their login banners.

basic-5.0 0

BANNER SHOW
Retrieves and displays the customized banner text from memory.

basic-5.0 0

BROWSE SEL
Browse system event log by lines or string

BROWSE SEL UP n
Browse up n # of lines in System Event List (SEL).

BROWSE SEL DOWN n

Browse down n # of lines in SEL.

BROWSE SEL TOP

Browse to top of SEL.

BROWSE SEL BOT

Browse to bottom of SEL.

BROWSE SEL FIND xxx

Browse forward to find string xxx in SEL.

394

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel

BROWSE SEL BFIND xxx

Browse backward to find string xxx in SEL.

BYRANGE
Return range of entries from embedded command

CHG ADMIN_COMM n aa...a

Change SNMP community string for a given admin. group, where: n = a number from 1 to 3 aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 32 characters, where: - Default(1) = admingroup1 * - Default(2) = admingroup2 * - Default(3) = admingroup3 * * = case-sensitive These communities are used for accessing different SNMP objects on the Call Server, Signaling Servers, Voice Gateway Media Cards and Media Gateway Controllers. In CS 1000 Release 6.0, if administration group community strings are added or modified in LD117, they are stored in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area pending activation. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

basic-4.0 0

basic-6.0 0

CHG APPSRV
Change the IP address of the application server for PD.

CHG BKPR xxx a...a b...b yy

Change a Backup Rule, where: xxx = Backup Rule number ID = (1)-100. Currently, only one rule is required for replication to the secondary system a...a = SCS, rule type that allows direct replication to another system

grprim-4 .00

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

395

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description b...b = ELAN IP address of the destination system yy = (2)-10, the number of database versions to save on the destination system

Pack/Rel

CHG BKPR <rule number1-100> FMD [<N of versions>] [<name>]

Change backup rule to Fixed Media Device (FMD), where: rule number = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. FMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from LD 43). FMD = mnemonic for this rule type N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed Note: The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS 1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).

basic-4.5 0

CHG BKPR <rule number1-100> FTP <IP addr> <login><pwd> <path> [<N of versions1-10>] [<name>]
Change backup rule to an external FTP server, where: <rule number> = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. These rules can be used by the Geographic Redundancy Database Replication Control (GRDRC block as defined in LD-117), by the Backup Schedules for manual backup/restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from Ovl.43). FTP = mnemonic for this rule type IP addr = IP address of the FTP server to be accessed for storing (Backup) or retrieving (Restore) backup data login = login name to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters pwd = login password to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters

basic-4.5 0

396

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description path = path on the FTP server where the backup data file (or files for incremental versions) is located, up to 64 characters N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the FTP server name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed Note: The only backup rule type which can be referenced from GRDRC is SCS. Note: The <name> parameter is added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type introduced in CS 1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy.

Pack/Rel

CHG BKPR <rule number1-100> RMD [<N of versions>] [<name>]

Change backup rule to an Removable Media Device (RMD), where: rule number = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. RMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from LD 43). RMD = mnemonic for this rule type N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed Note: The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS 1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).

basic-4.5 0

CHG BKPS <schedule number 1-10> <Rule for BKUP> <FREQ> <DAY> <HOUR>
Change a backup schedule, where:

basic-4.5 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

397

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Rule for BKUP = number of the backup rule for scheduled backup operation FREQ = M/W/(D)/A - defines how often the scheduled backup takes place, where: - M = monthly - W = weekly - D = daily - A = automatically immediately after every EDD operation activated. There cannot be more than 1 schedule defined where FREQ = A Note: When FREQ = D, the next parameter is HOUR DAY = day of the week, applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ = M, where: - (SU) = Sunday - MO = Monday - TU = Tuesday - WE = Wednesday - TH = Thursaday - FR = Friday - SA = Saturday - (1)- 31 Note: When FREQ = M and the day specified is greater than the number of days in the current month, the backup takes place on the last day of the current month. HOUR = 0-(3)-23 Note: This rule type is not allowed if the GRPRIM/GRSEC package is equipped and the rule is used in GRDRC.

Pack/Rel

CHG CACVT <Zone> <1-(48)-255>

Change the CAC record validity time interval in hours for CAC, where:

zcac-4.5 0

398

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000

Description

Pack/Rel basic-7.0 0

1-(48)-255 = interval in hours, default value is 48.

CHG CD <Zone> <1-(50)-100>

Change the CD coefficient for CAC on the particular zone, in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 1-(50)-100 = CD coefficient, default value is 50.

zcac-4.5 0

zcac-7.0 0

CHG CJ <Zone> <1-(50)-100>

Change the CJ coefficient for CAC on the particular zone, in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 1-(50)-100 = jitter coefficient, default value is 50.

zcac-4.5 0

zcac-7.0 0

CHG CPL <Zone> <1-(50)-100>

Change the CPL coefficient for CAC on the particular zone, in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 1-(50)-100 = CPL coefficient, default value is 50.

zcac-4.5 0

zcac-7.0 0

CHG CQOS <Zone> <1-(50)-100>

Change the CQoS coefficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where:

zcac-4.5 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

399

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000

Description

Pack/Rel zcac-7.0 0

1-(50)-100 = QoS coefficient

CHG CQTH
Change the QoS warning and unacceptable thresholds on a per call basis

CHG CQUTH <UnacpJitter> <UnacpLatency> <UnacpPacketLoss> <UnacpRFactor>

Change VQ Unacceptable thresholds on a per call basis, where: UnacpJitter = 5-(40)-500 msec UnacpLatency = 5-(100)-500 msec UnacpPacketLoss = 5-(70)-250 in units [1/10 of a percent] For example, 10 means 1% UnacpRFactor = 20-(60)-94 Note: Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.

pvqm-4.0

CHG CQWTH <WarnJitter> <WarnLatency> <WarnPacketLoss> <WarnRFactor> pvqm-4.0

Change VQ Warning thresholds on a per call basis, where: WarnJitter = 5-(20)-200 msec WarnLatency = 5-(40)-100 msec WarnPacketLoss = 5-(20)-100 in units [1/10 of a percent] For example, 10 means 1% WarnRFactor = 20-(65)-94 Note: Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.

CHG CR <Zone> <1-(50)-100>

zcac-4.5 0

400

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Change the Cr co-efficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 1-(50)-100 = Cr coefficient

Pack/Rel

zcac-7.0 0

CHG EDT
Enable/disable the use of Event Default Table (EDT).

CHG EDT NORMAL

Use Event Default Table (EDT) default severities.

alrm_filte r-21

CHG EDT INFO

Override EDT; use INFO as the default severity for all events except those specified in Event Preference Table (EPT).

alrm_filte r-21

CHG EDT MINOR

Override EDT; use MINOR as the default severity for all events except those specified in Event Preference Table (EPT)

alrm_filte r-21

CHG ELNK ACTIVE hostname

Set system active Ethernet interface IP address (set active ELAN IP address). Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG ELNK INACTIVE hostname

Set system inactive Ethernet interface IP address (set inactive ELAN IP address) Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

401

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel alrm_filte r-21

CHG EPT aa... a INFO x

Change an Event Preference Table (EPT) entry to Information severity, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG SUPPRESS entry

CHG EPT aa... a EDT x

Change EPT to NT-defined severity from EDT, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG SUPPRESS entry

alrm_filte r-21

CHG EPT aa... a MAJOR x

Change an EPT entry to Major severity, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG SUPPRESS entry

alrm_filte r-21

CHG EPT aa... a MINOR x

Change an EPT entry to Minor severity, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG SUPPRESS entry

alrm_filte r-21

CHG EPT aa... a CRITICAL x

Change an EPT entry to Critical severity, where:

alrm_filte r-21

402

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG SUPPRESS entry

Pack/Rel

CHG ERL <erl> [<RT_RLI> <route_rli> <ac> <prepend> <staticELIN> <osdn>]

Change an Emergency Response Location (ERL) table entry, where: <erl> = Emergency Response Location (ERL) identifier Number in the range 1-65535. <RT_RLI> = token identifying the emergency call routing mechanism for the ERL - RT = by route number - RLI = by Route Line Index <route_rli> = number of route or route line index (as indicated by <RT_RLI> token) - route number = as specified in LD 16 - route line index number = as specified in LD 86 <ac> = access code, as specified in LD 90 <prepend> = prepended routing digits for emergency calls <staticELIN> = static Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) <osdn> = On-Site Notification DN To skip a field and set it to blank, use either a NULL or NONE token in its place. Any fields not specified at the end of the command are set to blank, as if you entered NULL or NONE for each one.

basic-5.0 0

CHG ERLLOC <ERL#> <Location Description>

Assign a Location Description to an ERL.

basic-5.0 0

CHG ERLSITE <ERL#> <Site Name>

Assign a Site Name to an ERL.

basic-5.0 0

CHG ES1 <Echo Server IP Address> <Echo Server Port>

basic-4.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

403

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Change the Echo Server 1 IP address and port number, where: Echo Server 1 IP Address = (0.0.0.0) Echo Server 1 Port number = (10000) Note: Echo Server 1 IP address uses the TLAN IP address of the LTPS card.

Pack/Rel

CHG ES2 <Echo Server IP Address> <Echo Server Port>

Change the Echo Server 2 IP address and port number, where: Echo Server IP Address = (0.0.0.0) Echo Server Port = (10000) Note: Echo Server 2 default IP address uses the node IP address on the node's master card.

basic-4.0 0

CHG FMT_OUTPUT OFF

Turn off formatted output

alrm_filte r-21

CHG FMT_OUTPUT ON
Turn on formatted output

alrm_filte r-21

CHG GRDRC xxx aaa yyy bbb ccc

Change current Geographic Redundancy Data Replication Control (GRDRC) block, where: xxx = Backup Rule number. aaa = how the automatic database replication to the destination system occurs. Geographic Redundancy requires that this parameter be configured as SCHD: - SCHD - according to defined backup schedule - (IMM) - immediately after any data dump operation - MIDN - after midnight data dump only - NO - not allowed

grprim-4 .00

404

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description yyy = Backup Rule number used for the restore operation on the secondary system. If no rule number is entered, then this points to the <BKUP rule>. bbb = (YES) NO, Allow or deny automatic restore operation on the secondary system ccc = (YES) NO, Allow or deny automatic sysload after successful automatic restore on the secondary system Note: ccc = YES is allowed only if bbb = YES

Pack/Rel

CHG GRNS <FREQ><DAY><HOUR><MINUTE>[<DELAY>]

Change GR N-way backup schedules, where: FREQ = defines how often the backup takes place, where: - M = monthly - W = weekly - D = daily DAY = day of the week, applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ = M, where: - (SU) = Sunday - MO = Monday - TU = Tuesday - WE = Wednesday - TH = Thursday - FR = Friday - SA = Saturday - (1)-31 When FREQ = D, the next parameter is HOUR. HOUR = 0-(3)-23 MINUTE = (0)-59 DELAY = (3)-60 The interval in minutes between two consecutively scheduled backups. The system scans for backup rules of SCS type and modifies a BKPS for each of them and adjusts the start times according to the specified delayed value.

basic-5.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

405

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel grprim-4 .00

CHG GRSC xxx yyy zzz a..a

Change current Geographic Redundancy State Control (GRSC) block, where: xxx = (1)-10% x (Basic IP User License + IP User License), the number of IP phones that must register on the secondary system for the system to escalate to the ACTIVATING state yyy = (5)-600, Short Term Failure Timer in minutes zzz = (5)-180, Failure Clearance Timer in minutes a..a = (AUTO) MAN, Secondary system Deactivation Mode, where: - (AUTO) = Automatic - MAN = Manual

CHG HSP_MASK <subnet mask>

Modify the manually-configured HSP subnet mask, if it exists; otherwise, the subnet mask to the Call Server is added. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-4.5 0

CHG IPR
Change current 100BaseT IP configuration data for IPMG.

CHG IPR x mac ip mask

Change the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the IP (Intelligent Peripheral) Expansion cabinet end of the specified port, where: x = 1-4, port number of the main cabinet to which the expansion cabinet is connected mac = xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx, MAC address obtained from the sticker on the IP daughterboard mounted on the IP Expansion SSC, where: x is a hexidecimal digit in the range 0-F

406

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description ip = x.x.x.x, Internet Protocol address, where: x is an integer in the range 0255 mask = x.x.x.x , subnet mask, where: x is an interger in the range 0255

Pack/Rel

CHG IPM
Change current 100BaseT IP configuration data for Call Server.

CHG IPM x ip mask

Change the IP connectivity configuration associated with the main cabinet end of the specified port, where: x = 1-4, port number of the main cabinet to which the expansion cabinet is connected ip = x.x.x.x, Internet Protocol address, where: x is an integer in the range 0255 mask = x.x.x.x, subnet mask, where: x is an interger in the range 0255

CHG L3ELAN x ACTIVE <address>

Define physical active ELAN address: Where: x = 0 OR 1 Core Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

basic-5.0 0

CHG L3GW x <address>

Define physical ELAN default gateway address: Where: x = 0 OR 1 Core Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

basic-5.0 0

CHG L3HSP <side> <address>

Change Layer 3 Hot Standby Protocol of VPN Router Where: Side = 0 OR 1 Core Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

basic-5.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

407

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel basic-5.0 0

CHG L3HSPGW <side> <address>

Change Layer 3 Hot Standby Gateway of VPN Router Where: Side = 0 OR 1 Core Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

CHG L3HSPMASK <side> <mask>

Change Layer 3 Hot Standby Mask of VPN Router Where: Side = 0 OR 1 Core Mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

basic-5.0 0

CHG L3MASK <side> <mask>

Change the mask of the side specific ELAN port. Where: Side = 0 OR 1 Core Mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

basic-5.0 0

CHG L3PRIV active | inactive <address>

Define the IP address of the virtual ACTIVE / INACTIVE ELAN: Where: Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

basic-5.0 0

CHG LCL
Change the Local Core Location Loop and Shelf values (Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS).

CHG LDAPSYNC <ldapsync> [<timeOfDay> [<ldapserver> <userid> < password> [<security> [<secure port> [insecure port>] ]]]]
Enable/disable the scheduled synchronization of the Unicode Name Directory data with the CND LDAP server data, or change the parameters for the scheduled synchronization task. Where: <ldapsync> = disable/enable scheduled synchronization of the Unicode Name Directory data with the CND LDAP server data - 0 = disable

basic-6.0 0

408

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command - 1 = enable

Description

Pack/Rel

<timeOfDay> = the time of day for scheduled LDAP synchronization Format = hh:mm <ldapserver> = IP address or FQDN of the CND LDAP server <userid> = username required for access to the CND LDAP server <password> = password required for access to the CND LDAP server <security> = enable/disable secure SSL connection to the CND LDAP server <secure port> = port used for secure SSL connection to CND LDAP server. Default port = 636. <insecure port> = port used for insecure connection to CND LDAP server. Default port = 389. Note: <userid> and <password> must always be specified as a pair.

CHG MASK nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Change subnet mask. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG NAV_SITE aa... a

Change the navigation site name (MyCity, for example), where: aa...a = a string with maximum length of 32 characters default = Navigation Site Name Note: Use a single X to clear the field.

basic-4.0 0

In CS 1000 Release 6.0, if the navigation site name is modified basic-6.0 in LD117, it is stored in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

409

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description pending activation. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

Pack/Rel

CHG NBWMM IP
Set the IP address of the Primary NBWM Master.

CHG NBWMM STATE

Change the IP Peer System state.

CHG NBWMMA IP
Set the IP address of Alternate NBWM Master.

CHG NDAPP <ndAppValue> [<ndLkupTimer>]

Enable/disable the Name Directory Application. Where: <ndAppValue> = 0, 1, OFF, ON - 0 or OFF = disabled - 1 or ON = enabled <ndLkupTimer> = 500-10000 If not specified, a default value of 3000 msec is used.

basic-6.0 0

CHG NKT
Change NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router, where: time out setting = 0-(30)-60 seconds

basic-4.0 0

CHG NTP AUTHMODE <Secure | Insecure> <Primary | Secondary | All>

Configure the security mode for the Primary, Secondary, or both, NTP servers. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-5.0 0

410

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel basic-5.0 0

CHG NTP IPADDR <primary_ip_addr> <secondary_ip_addr>

Configure the IP addresses for the Primary and Secondary NTP Servers. Note: When you are configuring the IP address for the secondary NTP server, enter the IP address of the primary NTP server, followed by the IP address of the secondary NTP server. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG NTP MODE CS

Configure Router as the mode of communication between the NTP server and the CS. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-5.0 0

CHG NTP MODE SS

Configure Signaling Server as the mode of communication between the NTP server and the CS. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-5.0 0

CHG NTP SECURE <primary_ip_add> <secondary_ip_addr> <key_id>

Configure the parameters used by the Primary and/or Secondary NTP servers in secure mode of operation. Where: <primary_ip_add> = IP address of primary NTP server <secondary_ip_addr> = IP address of secondary NTP server <key_id> = private key with values = 1 - 4294967295.

basic-5.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

411

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description The system prompts for the private key if not entered. Note: For security reasons, the private key does not show in the command line as you enter it. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Pack/Rel

CHG NTP THRESH <Minimum> <Warning> <Maximum>

Configure the 3 NTP threshold levels. Where: <Minimum> = (0)-5 seconds <Warning> = (6)-15 seconds <Maximum> = (16)>15 seconds Note: Enter values for all three threshold levels when you use this command. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-5.0 0

CHG NTP TIMEINT <time interval in hours> <offset in minutes>

Configure both the time interval for background synchronization and the offset from other background routines. Where: <time interval in hours> = 1, 2, 6, 12, (24), 30 <offset in minutes> = 15, (30), 45 Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-5.0 0

412

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel zbd-6.00

CHG NUMZONE <numbering zone> <site_prefix> <country_code> <npa> <ac1> <ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac> <ttbl>
Change the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone. Where: <numbering zone> = new numbering zone number A number from 1-1023. ZBD zone parameters: - <site_prefix> = site prefix A number from 0-9999. - <country_code> = country code A number from 0-9999. - <npa> = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP) A number from 0-9999. - <ac1> = trunk access code 1 A number from 0-99. - <ac2> = trunk access code 2 A number from 0-99. - <natc> = national dial code A number from 0-9999. - <intc> = international dial code A number from 0-9999. - <dac> = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call A number from (0)-1. - <ttbl> = tone table A number from (0)-32.

CHG NZDES <numbering zone> <description>

Change the description of a ZBD numbering zone. Where: <numbering zone> = 1-1023 <description> = 1-128 characters Description of numbering zone.

zbd-6.00

CHG PDBAK
Change parameters for remote backup of PD

CHG PDV
Change PDV value in milliseconds

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

413

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel

CHG PPP LOCAL hostname

Set Meridian 1 local Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address

CHG PPP REMOTE hostname

Set Meridian 1 remote Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address

CHG PTM 0-60

Change Point-to-point Protocol idle timer to specified value, where: 0-60 = value in minutes

CHG RCL
Change the Remote Core Location Loop and Shelf values (Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS).

CHG SELSIZE 5-(500)-2000

Change System Event List Size, where: 5-(500)-2000 = number of events in SEL

CHG SNMP_SYSCONTACT aa... a

Change the contact person name for this system element (machine). Where aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 100 characters. Default = "System Contact". Note: Use a single X to clear the field.

basic-4.0 0

basic-4.0 0

CHG SNMP_SYSLOC aa...a

Change the defined physical location for this system element (machine). Where aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 100 characters. Default = "System Location".

basic-4.0 0

basic-4.0 0

414

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Note: Use a single X to clear the field.

Pack/Rel

CHG SNMP_SYSNAME aa...a

Change the system name assigned to this system element (machine).

basic-4.0 0

Where aa...a = a system name string with a maximum length of basic-4.0 100 characters. 0 can include a %hostname% variable that allows the system to basic-5.5 0 configure the physical hostname as a component of the system element name Default = "System Name". Note: Use a single X to clear the field.

CHG SQOS <SamplePeriod> <SampleRateWindow> <MinSampleCnt>

Change VQ sampling parameters, where: SamplePeriod = 5-(30)-60 seconds SampleRateWindow = 60-(300)-3600 seconds MinSampleCnt = 50-(100)-1000

pvqm-4.0

CHG SUBNET <IP Address> <Mask> <ERL> <ECL> "<Location basic-5.0 0 Description>"
Change a subnet entry where: IP address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn ERL and ECL = 0-65535 Location Description = 20 alphanumeric characters withn quotation marks. Note: Only the location fields (ERL, ECL, and Location Description) can be changed.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

415

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel alrm_filte r-21

CHG SUPPRESS 5-(15)-127

Change global suppress for events, where: 5-(15)-127 = number of occurrences before event is suppressed

CHG SUPPRESS_ALARM [n]

Changes the minimum alarm severity threshold of the alarms that are sent. Where [n] is: 0 = All 1 = Minor 2 = Major 3 = Critical

basic-4.0 0

SYNC SNMPCONF
Update the "ACTIVE Configuration" (current) SNMP parameters on the CS with "OVLY 117 Configuration" SNMP parameters, and propagate the updated SNMP parameters to all system elements that have an established pbxlink with the CS.

basic-6.0 0

SYNC SYS

Propagates Dbconfig and QOS parameters on the CS to all system elements that have an established pbxlink with the CS.

basic-5.0 0

CHG SYSMGMT_TRAP_COMM <aaa...a>

Configure the SNMP community string

basic-5.0 0

CHG SYSMGMT_RD_COMM n aa...a

Change the system management read-only community name string, where: aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 32 characters

basic-4.0 0

CHG SYSMGMT_WR_COMM n aa...a

basic-4.0 0

416

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Change the system management read / write community name string, where: aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 32 characters

Pack/Rel

CHG TIMER (1)-60

Change global timer window length, where: (1)-60 = time in minutes Note: SeeGlobal window timer length on page 364 for more information.

alrm_filte r-21

CHG UTCOFFSET <Time Offset>>

Configure the time offset (from UTC) for the local time zone. Where <Time Offset> = +/-hh:mm (+00:00). Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-5.0 0

CHG VPNKEY <key>

Define the VPN pre-shared key. Where: key = 8 to 64 Alphanumeric characters

basic-5.0 0

CHG VPNMASK <mask>

Change the VPN mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

basic-5.0 0

CHG VPNNET <ip address>

Change the VPN network IP address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

basic-5.0 0

CHG VPNROUTER <side> <address type> <address>

Configure interface of VPN Router Where:

basic-5.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

417

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core) Address type = PUBLIC / PRIVATE VPN Router interface Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Pack/Rel

CHG ZACB <Zone>[ALL] [<AC1...AC2> <AC1...AC2>]

Define the access codes used to modify local calls in the branch office zone, where: ALL = both AC1 and AC2 receive digit manipulation and no re-translation occurs AC1 = the first Access Code parameter defines which NARS Access Code to consider as the source of local calls AC2 = the second Access Code parameter defines which NARS Access Code to send the modified number to for retranslation. Note: If NARS is configured as recommended in the NTPs, this would be AC2 for local call and AC1 for retranslation.

CHG ZALT <zone> <ALTPrefix> [<All_calls>]

Change Alternate Prefix number for zone, where: zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 ALTPrefix = digit string of up to 7 digits that is added to the start of dialed number if the call do not be routed through the WAN due to lack of bandwidth, poor QoS or feature is configured for all calls. All_calls = Allow or Deny Alternative Routing for all calls, where: - (NO) = deny - YES = allow

basic-4.5 0

basic-7.0 0

CHG ZAST <zone> [<AlarmSuppressTime>]

Changes ACR settings for particular zone, where:

basic-4.5 0

418

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command zone = 0255 Zone = 08000

Description

Pack/Rel basic-7.0 0

AlarmSuppressTime = 0-3600, time in seconds

CHG ZBRN <Zone> <a...a>

Define a zone as a branch office zone, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 a...a = Yes or No basic-7.0 0

CHG ZDID <numbering zone> <matching string> <replacement string> [<description>]

Change a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation table entry. Where: <numbering zone> = 1-1023 <matching string> = 1-16 digit best match numeric string Unique inside a numbering zone. [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type> = INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters. If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced. <description> = 1-32 character textual description for the numbering zone-based call translation (ZDID) table entry If not specified, the ZDID table entry remains unchanged.

zbd-6.00

CHG ZDES <Zone> <ZoneDescription>

Assign a descriptive name to make the zone numbers more meaningful, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 ZoneDescription = descriptive name that is used only in the data display and status commands basic-7.0 0

CHG ZDP <Zone> <DialingCode1> <DialingCode2> <DialingCode3>

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

419

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Define the dialing plan for the branch office zone, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 DialingCode1 = Prefix, represents the access code for long distance or international access. In North America, it is "1" for long distance access and "011" for international access. Outside North America, it is "0" for national access and "00" for international access. DialingCode2 = The country code or trunk code. Normally NPA when calling from within North America, and "1" when calling from outside North America. DialingCode3 = Destination network code. Normally not used in North America. Outside North America, it is a combination of region, city, or district codes.

Pack/Rel basic-7.0 0

CHG ZDST <Zone> a...a <StartMonth> <StartWeek> <StartDay> <StartHour> <EndMonth> <EndWeek> <EndDay> <EndHour>
Specifies whether the branch office zone observes daylight savings time, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 a...a = Yes or No, During daylight saving time, the clock automatically advances one hour forward. StartMonth = start month of year (1-12) StartWeek = start week in month (1-5) StartDay = start day in week (1-7) StartHour = start hour of day (1-23) of the start of DST EndMonth = end month of year (1-12) EndWeek = end week in month (1-5) EndDay = end day in week (1-7) EndHour = end hour of day (1-23) of the end of DST. Note: In North America, DST normally starts on the 1st Sunday in April at 2am and ends on the last Sunday in October at 2am. The digit 5 is the last week of the month irrespective of number of weeks this month. For example: StartWeek = start week in month (1-5) [1st-5th, 5 is the last week of the month] basic-7.0 0

420

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel

CHG ZESA <Zone> <ESARLI> <ESAPrefix> <ESALocator>

Defines the Emergency Services Access (ESA) parameters for the branch office zone. These parameters are used only if the ESA package is enabled, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 ESARLI = the route to use to send emergency calls to the branch office Gateway by way of the VTRK ESAPrefix = a digit string of up to 15 digits that is added to the start of the ESDN before it is sent to the route indicated by the ESARLI. This allows the Gatekeeper to differentiate the different destinations for otherwise identical ESDN's ESALocator = the DID phone number to be sent for use by the PSAP to locate the source of the emergency call basic-7.0 0

CHG ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string> <type> [<replacement string>] [LEN <max length>] ["<description>"]
Change a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan table entry. Where: <numbering zone> = 1-1023 <matching string> = 1-16 digit best match numeric string Unique inside a numbering zone. <type> = values specified in the LD 15 AC1 and AC2 prompts After stripping the matching string, save the CLID type and take the following actions depending on <type> specified: - If <type> = INTL (International E.164 number), insert AC1/ AC2+replacement string. - If <type> = LOC (UDP Location Code), insert AC1/AC2+ replacement string. - If <type> = REG1 (Regional Level 1), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC +replacement string. - If <type> = NPA (North American NPA), insert AC1/AC2+1, then replacement string. - If <type> = REG2 (Regional Level 2), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC +ZNPA+replacement string - If <type> = NXX (North American NXX), insert AC1/ AC2+ZCC+ZNPA+replacement string

zbd-6.00

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

421

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description - If <type> = SPN (Special Number), insert AC1/ AC2+replacement string - If <type> = CDP (Coordinated Dial Plan), insert replacement string - If <type> = ESDN (Emergency Service DN), insert replacement string [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type> = INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters. If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced. [LEN <max length>] = maximum number of dialed digits expected to match If not specified, default is to match digits for all multiple matches. [<description>] = textual description of the numbering zonebased flexible dialing plan (ZFDP) table entry If not specified, the ZFDP table entry has no textual description.

Pack/Rel

CHG ZONE <ZoneNumber> <intraZoneBandwidth> <intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth> <interZoneStrategy> <a...a>

Change the parameters of an existing Zone, where: ZoneNumber = 0255 Zone = 08000 intraZoneBandwidth = Intrazone available bandwidth (0 to 0.1MBps) intraZoneStrategy = BQ or BB, Intrazone preferred strategy (BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth) interZoneBandwidth = Interzone available bandwidth (0 to 0.1MBps) interZoneStrategy = BQ or BB, Interzone perferred strategy ((BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth) a...a = type of zone, where: - (Shared) = current default zone type. The ethersets configured in shared zones use DSP resources configured in shared zones. If all of the shared zones' gateway basic-7.0 0

422

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description channels are used, the caller receives an overflow tone and the call is blocked. The order of channel selection for the gateway channels is: channel from same zone as etherset is configured any available channel from the shared zones' channels - Private = This zone type is introduced by IPL 3.0. DSP channels configured in a private zone are used only by ethersets which have also been configured for that private zone. If more DSP resources are required by these ethersets than what are available in the zone, DSPs from other zones is used. However, ethersets configured in shared zones cannot use the private zones' channels. The order of selection for the gateway channels is: channel from same private zone as etherset is configured any available channel from the pool of shared zones' channels

Pack/Rel

CHG ZONE <zoneNumber> <intraZoneBandwidth> <intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth> <interZoneStrategy> [<zoneIntent> <zoneResourceType>]

Change the parameters of an existing Zone. All parameters must be re-entered, where: zoneNumber = 0255 Zone = 08000 intraZoneBandwidth = 0-.1Mbps intraZoneStrategy = intrazone preferred strategy, where: - BQ = Best Quality - BB = Best Bandwidth interZoneBandwidth = 0-.1Mbps interZoneStrategy = interzone preferred strategy, where: - BQ = Best Quality - BB = Best Bandwidth zoneIntent = type of zone, where: - MO = Main Office zone - BMG = Branch Media Gateway zone

basic-4.5 0

basic-7.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

423

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description - VTRK = Virtual Trunk zone zoneResourceType = resource Intrazone preferred strategy, where: - (shared) = shared DSP channels - private = private DSP channels Note: With release 4.50 the zones that were described with BMG designator stay with BMG one, all the other zones are provided with the MO designator. It is possible to update ZoneIntent using CHG ZONE command.

Pack/Rel

CHG ZPARM <numbering zone> <parameter name> <value>

Change the value of a ZBD numbering zone parameter. Where: <numbering zone> = 1-1023 <parameter name> = name of numbering zone parameter Where: - PREF = site prefix - CC = country code - NPA = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP) - AC1 = trunk access code 1 - AC2 = trunk access code 2 - NATC = national dial code - INTC = international dial code - DAC = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call - TTBL = tone table <value> = new value for specified parameter - If <parameter name> = PREF, <value> = 0-9999. - If <parameter name> = CC, <value> = 0-9999. - If <parameter name> = NPA, <value> = 0-9999. - If <parameter name> = AC1, <value> = 0-99. - If <parameter name> = AC2, <value> = 0-99. - If <parameter name> = NATC, <value> = 0-9999. - If <parameter name> = INTC, <value> = 0-9999. - If <parameter name> = INTC, <value> = 0-9999.

zbd-6.00

424

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description - If <parameter name> = DAC, <value> = (0)-1. - If <parameter name> = TTBL, <value> = (0)-32.

Pack/Rel

CHG ZQNL <level>

Change the Notification Level for all zones, where: level = 0-(2)-4, where: - Level 0 = All voice quality alarms are suppressed. - Level 1 = Allow zone-based Unacceptable alarms. - Level 2 = Allow all level 1 alarms PLUS zone-based Warning alarms. - Level 3 = Allow all level 1 and 2 alarms PLUS per-call Unacceptable alarms. - Level 4 = Allow all level 1, 2, and 3 alarms PLUS per-call Warning alarms.

pvqm-40

CHG ZQNL <ZoneNumber> <level>

Change the Notification Level for the specified zone, where: ZoneNumber = 0255 Zone = 08000 level = 0-(2)-4

pvqm-40

pvqm-7.0 0

CHG ZQRT <Zone> <1-100>

Change ZQRT which is Response time increase by percentage. It is the amount by which the Sliding Maximum is increased for the identified zone, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 1-(10)-100 = increase value in percentage

zcac-4.5 0

zcac-7.0 0

CHG ZQRTI <Zone> <1-120>

Change the QoS Response Time Interval while alarms are not coming to increase the Sliding Maximum for the identified zone, where:

zcac-4.5 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

425

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000

Description

Pack/Rel zcac-7.0 0

1-(5)-120 = Interval in minutes

CHG ZQUAT <Zone> <1-99>

Change the QoS Unacceptable Alarm Threshold value for the identified zone, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 1-(75)-99 = threshold value Note: When the zone-to-zone QoS value transitions below this value, this alarm is presented. When the zone-to-zone QoS value transitions above this value, this alarm is presented as being deactivated. This value must be below the value of ZQWAT.

zcac-4.5 0

zcac-7.0 0

CHG ZQWAT <Zone> <1-99>

Change the QoS Warning Alarm Threshold value for the identified zone, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 1-(85)-99 = threshold value Note: When the zone-to-zone QoS value drops below this value, this alarm is presented. When the zone-to-zone QoS value transitions above this value, this alarm is reported as deactivated. The value for ZQWAT must be higher than the value of ZQUAT.

zcac-4.5 0

zcac-7.0 0

CHG ZQWTH <WarnJitter> <WarnLatency> <WarnPacketLoss> pvqm-4.0 <WarnRFactor>

Change VQ Warning thresholds, where: WarnJitter = 0-(20)-100% WarnLatency = 0-(20)-100%

426

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description WarnPacketLoss = 0-(20)-100% WarnRFactor = 0-(20)-100% Note: Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.

Pack/Rel

CHG ZQUTH <UnacpJitter> <UnacpLatency> <UnacpPacketLoss> <UnacpRFactor>

Change VQ Unacceptable thresholds on a zone basis, where: UnacpJitter = 0-(2)-100% UnacpLatency = 0-(2)-100% UnacpPacketLoss = 0-(2)-100% UnacpRFactor = 0-(2)-100% Note: Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.

pvqm-4.0

CHG ZTDF <Zone> <TimeDifferenceFromHeadOffice>

Specify the time difference between the Main Office and the branch office when both are not in Daylight Saving Time, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 TimeDifferenceFromHeadOffice = -1380 to 1380 minutes (Minus 23 hours to plus 23 hours), time difference in minutes basic-7.0 0

CLR CACR <Near Zone> {<Near VPNI>} {<Far Zone>} {<Far zcac-4.5 0 VPNI>}
Clear zone-to-zone record for near (VPNI-Zone) per far (VPNIZone), where: Near Zone = 0255 Near Zone = 08000 Near VPNI = 1-16282, Virtual Private Network Identifier Far Zone = 0255 zcac-7.0 0 zcac-7.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

427

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Far Zone = 08000

Description

Pack/Rel

Far VPNI = 1-16282, Virtual Private Network Identifier

DIS SHELLS SECURE

Disables all secure shells in the system, includes SSH, SFTP, and SCP sessions. Warning: Disabling the shells causes telephony applications on external devices to stop communicating with the PBX. SFTP is required in regular operation of the CS 1000. Do not disable SFTP on VxWorks unless you have to troubleshoot a problem, if any.

basic-4.5 0

DIS SHELLS INSECURE

Disables all insecured shells in the system, includes TELNET, RLOGIN, and FTP sessions. Warning: Disabling the shells causes telephony applications on external devices to stop communicating with the PBX.

basic-4.5 0

DIS TRANSFERS INSECURE

Disable FTP (insecure File Transfer Protocol) on the system. Call server sends a related message through pbxLink to all connected devices and IPMG devices. Note: SFTP must be enabled. FTP and SFTP cannot both be disabled at the same time. Note: Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.

basic-6.0 0

DIS TRANSFERS SECURE

Disable SFTP (secure File Transfer Protocol). Call server sends a related message through pbxLink to all connected devices and IPMG devices.

basic-6.0 0

428

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Important: SFTP is required in regular operation of the CS 1000. Do not disable SFTP on VxWorks unless you have to troubleshoot a problem, if any. Note: FTP must be enabled. FTP and SFTP cannot both be disabled at the same time. Note: Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.

Pack/Rel

ECNT CARD Print all registered IP Phones with associated card. ECNT CARD l s c [<customer>]
Print the number of IP Phones registered, where: l s c = loop, shelf, card customer = customer number associated with this command Note: Partial TN are allowed

basic-4.5 0 basic 4.50

ECNT FW

Print all registered IP Phones for each available firmware ID

basic-4.5 0 basic-4.5 0

ECNT FW <XX> [<A>] [<BB>] [<FF>]

Print the number of IP Phones, where: XX = firmware ID A = major version designator BB = minor version designator FF = filter to apply on firmware version, where: - (==) = equal to - != = not equal to - < = less then - > = greater then

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

429

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel basic-4.5 0 basic-4.5 0

ECNT MODL Print the number of registered IP Phones with model name ECNT MODL <MMMM>
Print the number of registered IP Phones, where: MMMM = IP Phone model name, where: - 2001P2 = IP Phone 2001 Phase 2 - 2002 = IP Phone 2002 - 2002P2 = IP Phone 2002 Phase 2 - 2004 = IP Phone 2004 - 2004P2 = IP Phone 2004 Phase 2 - 2033 = 2033 IP Conference Phone - 2210 = IP Phone 2210 Wireless Handset

ECNT NODE Print registered IP Phones for all nodes ECNT NODE <nodeNum>
Print the number of registered IP Phones, where: nodeNum =the specified node

basic-4.5 0 basic-4.5 0

ECNT PEC

Print the number of registered IP Phones by PEC

basic-4.5 0 basic-4.5 0

ECNT PEC <PEC>

Print the number of IP Phones, where: PEC = Product Engineering Code

ECNT SS

Print the number of registered IP Phones for all signaling servers basic-4.5 0 basic-4.5 0

ECNT SS <hostName>
Print the number of registered IP Phones, where:

430

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description hostName = host name assigned to signaling server Note: If the hostName variable contains an underscore (_), then an NPR001 error message is returned. An underscore is considered to be an invalid character.

Pack/Rel

ECNT ZONE Print the number of registered IP Phones for all zones ECNT ZONE <zoneNum> <customer>
Print the number of registered IP Phones, where: zoneNum = specified zone customer = customer number associated with this command

basic-4.5 0 basic-4.5 0

ENL / DIS ERL <ERL>

Enable / Disable specified ERL.

basis-5.0

ENL / DIS L3VPN

Enable / Disable the VPN tunneling (on both sides).

basic-5.0 0

ENL / DIS NTP

Enable / Disable NTP. Note: These commands are blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer. Note: To apply Network Time Protocol configuration to all system elements, ensure the configuration is done using Element Manager. CLI commands only configure the Call Server, and may lead to inconsistent NTP operation at the system level.

basic-5.0 0

ENL / DIS RFC2833PRT

Enable / Disable the info message printing.

basic-5.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

431

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel basic-4.5 0

ENL SHELLS SECURE

Enables all secure shells.

ENL SHELLS INSECURE

Enables all unsecured shells.

basic-4.5 0

ENL SYSTEM RESTORE

Allow TM system restore functionality for one usage.

basic-6.0 0

ENL TRANSFERS INSECURE

Enable FTP (insecure File Transfer Protocol) on the system. Call server sends message through pbxLink to all connected devices and IPMG devices. Note: Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.

basic-6.0 0

ENL TRANSFERS SECURE

Enable SFTP (secure File Transfer Protocol) on the system. Call server sends message through pbxLink to all connected devices and IPMG devices. Important: SFTP is required in regular operation of the CS 1000. Do not disable SFTP on VxWorks unless you have to troubleshoot a problem, if any. Note: Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.

basic-6.0 0

EXPORT a EXPORT EDT

The EPT file stored on the hard disk (/u/db/ smpserv.db) is copied to the floppy/PC Card drive (a:/smpserv.db).

basic-4.0 0 basic-4.0 0

The EPT file stored on the hard disk (/u/db/ smpserv.db) is copied to the floppy/PC Card drive (a:/smpserv.db).

432

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel basic-6.0 0

EXPORT EPT
Store Event Preference Table file to disk/PCMCIA

FLTH 0 9 IMPORT EPT

Failed log in threshold (in minutes)

basic-5.0 0 basic-4.0 0 basic-7.0 0

The EPT file stored on the floppy / PC Card (a:/smpserv.db) drive is copied to the hard drive (/u/db/smpserv.db).

GEN ZONEFILE <fileName>

Generate a CSV file that contains information for all configured zones on the Call Server. You can use the <fileName> parameter to specify a file name and file path for the CSV file. If you do not specify a file name and file path, a file named zone.csv is created and stored in the /u/db directory. After you execute this command the location of the file is displayed. Note: The maximum length of the path/file name is 255 characters Caution: Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 08000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

IMPORT ZONEFILE <fileName>

Read a CSV file and create new zones listed in the file, or apply updates contained in the CSV file for zones that already exist. If you do not specify a file name and file path, an attempt is made to use the zone.csv file stored in the /u/db directory; otherwise the command will use the file name and file path that you specify. The output for this command is the number of zones successfully added or changed. Note: The maximum length of the path/file name is 255 characters Caution: Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 08000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you

basic-7.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

433

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

Pack/Rel

INV ENTITY SETS <ON> (OFF)

STATUS

basic-4.0 0

Turn ON the inclusion of digital telephones and IP Phones in the Entity MIB Turn OFF the inclusion of digital telephones and IP Phones in the Entity MIB Display whether or not the digial telephones and IP Phones are included in the Entity MIB. The output displays either ON or OFF.

INV GENERATE
Generate inventory CARDS, SETS, LOCRPT, ALL or ABORT

INV GENERATE ABORT

Abort any currently running Inventory generations.

INV GENERATE ALL

Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating both the card and telsets Inventory file.

INV GENERATE CARDS

Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating the Inventory file for all of the cards in the system. The generation produces an inventory file with all of the cards configured on the system. Those cards that are present in the system and have card ID are noted in the inventory file with their card type, TN, and card ID. Those cards that do not have card ID or are not present in the system, is noted to be "Unavailable" in place of their card ID.

INV GENERATE SETS

Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating the Inventory file for the digital telsets with their telsets' IDs that have been configured in the system. Those telsets that are present in the system and have sets ID are noted in the inventory file with their sets type, TN, sets ID, DES, Primary DN. Those telsets that do not have sets ID or ar not present in the sytem is noted to be "Unavailable" in place of their sets ID.

INV GENERATE ABORT

basic-5.0 0

434

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Abort the inventory generation for Cards, Sets and LOCRPT. System message MAT055 is printed on the TTY when Inventory Location Report is aborted.

Pack/Rel

INV GENERATE ALL

Inventory files for Cards, Sets and LOCRPT.

basic-5.0 0

INV GENERATE LOCRPT

Inventory Location Report for all the IP Phones in the TN table. The inventory file locrpt.inv is generated in the path [c:]/u/db/ inv/. System message MAT052 is printed on the TTY when the generation is complete.

basic-5.0 0

INV MIDNIGHT
Generate inventory CARDS, SETS, LOCRPT, ALL, OFF or STATUS (admin)

INV MIDNIGHT ALL

Scheduling for the Midnight to run both Card and Sets Inventory generations.

INV MIDNIGHT CARDS

Scheduling for the Midnight to run Card Inventory generation.

INV MIDNIGHT OFF

Turns off Midnight run off Card and Sets Inventory generations.

INV MIDNIGHT SETS

Scheduling for the Midnight to run Sets Inventory generation.

INV MIDNIGHT STATUS

Print out the state of the Midnight schedule of Inventory.

INV PRT INV PRT ALL

Refer to INV PRT STATUS command. Requests for both the Card Inventory file and the Sets Inventory file to be printed out to the output destination (example TTY).

INV PRT CARDS

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

435

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Requests for the Card Inventory file to be printed out to the output destination (example TTY).

Pack/Rel

INV PRT LOCRPT

Print the generated Inventory Location Report file.

basic-5.0 0

INV PRT SETS

Requests for the Sets Inventory file to be printed out to the output destination (example TTY)

INV PRT STATUS

Requests for the status of the Inventory feature. Result may look somewhat: Inventory status: Card file status is Ok 43 records; 18/03/1999 17:10:21 Sets file status is Ok 19 records; 18/03/1999 16:44:09

**** LOCRPT ALL

Abort overlay. This command can also be used to abort any Inventory file printing. Print location report for all IP phones. basic-5.0 0 basic-5.0 0

LOCRPT DN x
Print location report for the IP phone(s) with the specified DN (or partially-specified DN).

LOCRPT ECL x
Print location report for the IP phone(s) in the specified ECL.

basic-5.0 0

LOCRPT ERL
Print location report for IP phones in RLM table with the specified Emergency Response Location (ERL).

basic-5.0 0

LOCRPT HWID x

basic-5.0 0

436

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Print location report for the IP phone with the specified (or partially-specified) Hardware Identifier (HWID)

Pack/Rel

LOCRPT IP
Print location report for IP phones in RLM table with the specified IP Address.

basic-5.0 0

LOCRPT MANUALUPDATE/MU
Print location report for IP phones in RLM table that are ManualUpdate (ManualUpdate=True).

basic-5.0 0

LOCRPT NEEDUPDATE/NU
Print location report for IP phones in RLM table that need a location update (NeedsUpdate=True).

basic-5.0 0

LOCRPT ROAMING
Print location report for the IP phone(s) that are not at home (example their Current ECL is different from their Home ECL). Note: This applies only when the Home ECL is not unknown (zero). This does not apply to Manual Update phones, because by definition, they are always at home.

basic-5.0 0

LOCRPT TN x
Print location report for the IP phone(s) with the specified TN (or partially-specified TN).

basic-5.0 0

LOCRPT UNALLOCATED/UNKNOWN
Print location report for IP phones in RLM table that are AutoUpdate and ERL=Unknown. Note: This is not the same as LOCRPT ERL 0 ERL 0 are Auto Update phones.

basic-5.0 0

LOCRPT UNREG

basic-5.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

437

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Print location report for the IP phone(s) that are unregistered but have a TN table entry.

Pack/Rel

LOUT 0 - (20) - 1440

Inactivity timeout (in minutes)

basic-5.0 0

NEW BKPR xxx a...a b...b yy

Add a new Backup Rule, where: xxx = Backup Rule number ID = (1)-100. Currently, only one rule is required for replication to the secondary system. a...a = SCS. Currently, this is the only rule type that exists: it allows direct replication to another system. b...b = ELAN IP address of the destination system. yy = the number of database versions to save on the destination system = (2)-10.

grprim-4 .00

NEW BKPR <rule number1-100> FMD [<N of versions>] [<name>]

Change backup rule to an Fixed Media Device (FMD), where: rule number = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. FMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from LD 43). FMD = mnemonic for this rule type N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed Note: The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS 1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).

basic-4.5 0

NEW BKPR <rule number> FTP <IP addr> <login><pwd> <path> [<N of versions>] [<name>]
Change backup rule to an external FTP server, where:

basic-4.5 0

438

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description <rule number> = 1-100 Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. These rules can be used by the Geographic Redundancy Database Replication Control (GRDRC block as defined in LD-117), by the Backup Schedules for manual backup/restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from Ovl.43). FTP = mnemonic for this rule type <IP addr> = IP address of the FTP server to be accessed for storing (Backup) or retrieving (Restore) backup data <login> = login name to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters <pwd> = login password to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters <path> = path on the FTP server where the backup data file (or files for incremental versions) is located, up to 64 characters <N of versions> = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the FTP server <name> = rule name Text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed Note: The only backup rule type that can be referenced from GRDRC is SCS. Note: The <name> parameter is added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type introduced in CS 1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy.

Pack/Rel

NEW BKPR <rule number> RMD [<N of versions>] [<name>] basic-4.5

0 Change backup rule to a Removable Media Device (RMD), where: <rule number> = 1-100 Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. RMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and restore operation (BKR/ RSR commands activated from LD 43). RMD = mnemonic for this rule type <N of versions> = (1)-10

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

439

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device. <name> = rule name Text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed Note: The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS 1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).

Pack/Rel

NEW BKPS <schedule number 1-10> <Rule for BKUP> <FREQ> <DAY> <HOUR>
Add a backup schedule, where: <schedule number> = (1)-10 Up to 10 backup schedules can be defined. <Rule for BKUP> = number of the backup rule for scheduled backup operation <FREQ> = M/W/(D)/A - defines how often the scheduled backup takes place, where: - M = monthly - W = weekly - D = daily - A = automatically immediately after every EDD operation activated. There cannot be more than 1 schedule defined where FREQ = A. When <FREQ> = D, the next parameter is <HOUR> where: <DAY> = day of the week Where: - (SU) = Sunday - MO = Monday - TU = Tuesday - WE = Wednesday - TH = Thursaday - FR = Friday - SA = Saturday - (1)- 31

basic-4.5 0

440

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Note: Only applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ = M. Note: When FREQ = M and the day specified is greater than the number of days in the current month, the backup takes place on the last day of the current month. <HOUR> = 0-(3)-23 Note: This rule type is not allowed if the GRPRIM/GRSEC package is equipped and the rule is used in GRDRC.

Pack/Rel

NEW / OUT ELIN <erl> <tn>

Associate / Disassociate specified TN to specified ERL. Note: The TN must already be configured to compose an ANI that is registered in the ALI database against this emergency location. For Small System, the TN format is c u For Large System, the TN format is l s c u.

basic-5.0 0

NEW EPT aa... a INFO x

Assign Information severity to new EPT entry, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG SUPPRESS entry.

alrm_filte r-21

NEW EPT aa... a EDT x

Assign NT-defined severity from EDT to new EPT entry, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG SUPPRESS entry.

alrm_filte r-21

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

441

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel alrm_filte r-21

NEW EPT aa... a MAJOR x

Assign Major severity to new EPT entry, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG SUPPRESS entry.

NEW EPT aa... a MINOR x

Assign Minor severity to new EPT entry, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG SUPPRESS entry.

alrm_filte r-21

NEW EPT aa... a CRITICAL x

Assign Critical severity to new EPT entry, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG SUPPRESS entry.

alrm_filte r-21

NEW ERL <erl> [<RT_RLI> <route_rli> <ac> <prepend> <staticELIN> <osdn>]

Add an ERL table entry, where: <erl> = Emergency Response Location (ERL) identifier Number in the range 1-65535. <RT_RLI> = token identifying the emergency call routing mechanism for the ERL - RT = by route number - RLI = by Route Line Index <route_rli> = number of route or route line index (as indicated by <RT_RLI> token) - route number = as specified in LD 16

basic-5.0 0

442

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description - route line index number = as specified in LD 86 <ac> = access code, as specified in LD 90 <prepend> = prepended routing digits for emergency calls <staticELIN> = static Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) <osdn> = On-Site Notification DN To skip a field and set it to blank, use either a NULL or NONE token in its place. Any fields not specified at the end of the command are set to blank, as if you entered NULL or NONE for each one.

Pack/Rel

NEW GRDRC xxx aaa yyy bbb ccc

Add a GRDRC block, where: xxx = Backup Rule number. aaa = how the automatic database replication to the secondary system occurs (Geographic Redundancy requires that this parameter be configured as SCHD): - SCHD - according to defined backup schedule - (IMM) - immediately after any data dump operation - MIDN - after midnight data dump only - NO - not allowed yyy = Backup Rule number used for the restore operation on the secondary system. If no rule number is entered, then this points to the <BKUP rule>. bbb = (YES)/NO. Defines whether or not the automatic restore operation on the secondary system is allowed. ccc = (YES)/NO. Defines whether or not the automatic sysload after successful automatic restore on the secondary system is allowed. ccc = YES is allowed only if bbb = YES.

grprim-4 .00

NEW GRSC xxx yyy zzz a..a

Add a new GRSC block, where: xxx = the number (N) of IP phones that must register on the secondary system for the system to escalate to the ACTIVATING state. If no value is entered, xxx = 1. The maximum value of xxx is: 10% x (Basic IP User License + IP User License). yyy = Short Term Failure Timer, in minutes = (5) - 600

grprim-4 .00

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

443

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description zzz = Failure Clearance Timer, in minutes = (5) - 180 a..a = Secondary system Deactivation Mode = (AUTO)/MAN

Pack/Rel

NEW GRNS <FREQ><DAY><HOUR><MINUTE>[<DELAY>]

Add a Survivable Remote Gateway Backup, where: FREQ = defines how often the backup takes place, where: - M = monthly - W = weekly - D = daily DAY = day of the week, applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ = M, where: - (SU) = Sunday - MO = Monday - TU = Tuesday - WE = Wednesday - TH = Thursday - FR = Friday - SA = Saturday - (1)-31 When FREQ = D, the next parameter is HOUR. HOUR = 0-(3)-23 MINUTE = (0)-59 DELAY = (3)-60 The interval in minutes between two consecutively scheduled backups. The system scans for backup rules of SCS type and creates a BKPS for each of them and adjusts the start times according to the specified delayed value.

basic-5.0 0

NEW HOST DEV_SIDE0_HSP <ip address>

Configure the HSP ip address Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-4.5 0

444

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Configure the HSP ip address Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Pack/Rel

NEW HOST <hostname> <IPaddress>

Configure a new host entry, where; host name must exist in the host table default setting for the Primary IP address is: 137.135.128.253 default setting for Primary Host Name is: PRIMARY_ENET default setting for the Secondary IP address is: 137.135.128.254 default setting for the Secondary Host Name is: SECONDARY_ENET. Note: Host Name Syntax: A host name can be up to 16 characters in length. The first character of a host name must be a letter of the alphabet. A character can be a letter, number, or underscore(_). A period is used as a delimiter between domain names. Spaces and tabs are not permitted. No distinction is made between upper and lower case. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

NEW NUMZONE <numbering zone> [<site_prefix> <country_code> <npa> <ac1> <ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac> <ttbl>]
Configure a new numbering zone with specified (optional) ZBD zone parameters. Where: <numbering zone> = new numbering zone number A number from 1-1023. ZBD zone parameters: - <site_prefix> = site prefix

zbd-6.00

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

445

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description A number from 0-9999. - <country_code> = country code A number from 0-9999. - <npa> = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP) A number from 0-9999. - <ac1> = trunk access code 1 A number from 0-99. - <ac2> = trunk access code 2 A number from 0-99. - <natc> = national dial code A number from 0-9999. - <intc> = international dial code A number from 0-9999. - <dac> = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call A number from (0)-1. - <ttbl> = tone table A number from (0)-32. Note: Default values (hard-coded) are used for the ZBD numbering zone parameters, if they are not specified.

Pack/Rel

NEW RANGE_OF_ZONES <zoneStartNumber> <zoneAmount> <intraZoneBandwidth> <intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth> <interZoneStrategy> <zoneIntent> <zoneResourceType>
Create new bandwidth zones. basic-7.0 This command creates a range of new bandwidth zones starting 0 from <zoneStartNumber>. The number of existing bandwidth zones must be less than 8001. If the number of existing bandwidth zones is greater than or equal to 8001, no bandwidth zones are created. Where: zoneStartNumber = Zone number [08000] zoneAmount = Number of zones that must be created [1-8001] intraZoneBandwidth = Intrazone available bandwidth (0 to 0.1MBps) intraZoneStrategy = Intrazone preferred strategy (Best Quality (BQ) or Best Bandwidth (BB)) interZoneBandwidth = Interzone available bandwidth (0 to 0.1MBps)

446

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description interZoneStrategy = Interzone preferred strategy (BQ or BB) zoneIntent = MO (default), BMG, or VTRK zoneResourceType = shared or private Caution: Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 08000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

Pack/Rel

NEW ROUTE <network IP address> <gateway IP address>

Configure a new routing entry <IP address>= valid IP address Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

NEW SUBNET <IP Address> <Mask Bits> <ERL> <ECL> "<Description>"

Add a subnet entry where: ip address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn ERL and ECL = 0-65535 Description = 20 alphanumeric characters within quotation marks.

basic-5.0 0

NEW ZDID <numbering zone> <matching string> <replacement string> [<description>]

Configure a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation table entry. Where: <numbering zone> = 1-1023 <matching string> = 1-16 digit best match numeric string Unique inside a numbering zone. [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string

zbd-6.00

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

447

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type> = INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters. If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced. <description> = 1-32 character textual description for the numbering zone-based call translation (ZDID) table entry If not specified, the ZDID table entry has no textual description.

Pack/Rel

NEW ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string> <type> [<replacement string>] [LEN <max length>] ["<description>"]
Create a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan table entry. Where: <numbering zone> = 1-1023 <matching string> = best match string of 1-16 digits Unique inside a numbering zone. <type> = values specified in the LD 15 AC1 and AC2 prompts After stripping the matching string, save the CLID type and take the following actions depending on <type> specified: - If <type> = INTL (International E.164 number), insert AC1/ AC2+replacement string. - If <type> = LOC (UDP Location Code), insert AC1/AC2+ replacement string. - If <type> = REG1 (Regional Level 1), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC +replacement string. - If <type> = NPA (North American NPA), insert AC1/AC2+1, then replacement string. - If <type> = REG2 (Regional Level 2), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC +ZNPA+replacement string - If <type> = NXX (North American NXX), insert AC1/ AC2+ZCC+ZNPA+replacement string - If <type> = SPN (Special Number), insert AC1/ AC2+replacement string - If <type> = CDP (Coordinated Dial Plan), insert replacement string - If <type> = ESDN (Emergency Service DN), insert replacement string

zbd-6.00

448

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type> = INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters. If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced. [LEN <max length>] = maximum number of dialed digits expected to match If not specified, default is to match digits for all multiple matches. [<description>] = textual description of the numbering zonebased flexible dialing plan (ZFDP) table entry If not specified, the ZFDP table entry has no textual description.

Pack/Rel

NEW ZONE xxxx p1 p2 p3 p4 <shared/private>

Create a new zone with the following parameters: xxx = 0255 zone number xxxxx = 08000 zone number xxx = 0255 zone number xxxxx = 08000 zone number p1 = intrazone available bandwidth 0-100000 kbits/s p2 = intrazone preferred strategy, where: - (BQ for Best Quality - BB for Best Bandwidth) p3 = interzone available bandwidth 0-100000 kbits/s p4 = intrazone preferred strategy - (BQ for Best Quality - BB for Best Bandwidth) (Shared) = ethersets configured in shared zones use DSP resources configured in shared zones. If all of the shared zones' gateway channels are used, the caller receives an overflow tone and the call is blocked. The order of channel selection for the gateway channels is: - channel from same zone as etherset is configured - any available channel from the shared zones' channels Private = new zone type introduced by IPL 3.0. DSP channels configured in a private zone are used only by ethersets which basic-4.5 0 basic-7.0 0 basic-7.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

449

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description have also been configured for that private zone. If more DSP resources are required by these ethersets than are available in the zone, DSPs from other zones is used. However, ethersets configured in shared zones cannot use the private zones' channels. The order of selection for the gateway channels is: - channel from same private zone as etherset is configured - any available channel from the pool of shared zones' channels Caution: Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 08000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

Pack/Rel

NEW ZONE <x...x>

Create a new Zone with the following default bandwidth values: 10KBps for Intrazone available bandwidth BQ for iIntrazone preferred strategy 10KBps for Interzone available BQ for Interzone preferred strategy

NEW ZONE <x...x> aa

Create a new Zone, where: aa = one of the following bandwidths: - p1 = Intrazone available bandwidth (0 to 0.1MBps) - p2 = Intrazone preferred strategy (BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth) - p3 = Interzone available bandwidth (0 to 0.1MBps) - p4 = Interzone perferred strategy (BQ or BB)

NEW ZONE <zoneNumber> [<intraZoneBandwidth> <intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth> <interZoneStrategy> <zoneIntent> <zoneResourceType>]

Configure a new zone, where:

zcac-4.5 0

450

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command zoneNumber = 0255 Zone = 08000

Description

Pack/Rel zcac-7.0 0

intraZoneBandwidth = 0-.1Mbps intraZoneStrategy = intrazone preferred strategy, where: - BQ = Best Quality - BB = Best Bandwidth interZoneBandwidth = 0-.1Mbps interZoneStrategy = interzone preferred strategy, where: - BQ = Best Quality - BB = Best Bandwidth zoneIntent = type of zone, where: - MO = Main Office zone - BMG = Branch Media Gateway zone - VTRK = Virtual Trunk zone zoneResourceType = resource Intrazone preferred strategy, where: - (shared) = shared DSP channels - private = private DSP channels Caution: Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 08000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

OUT BKPR <rule number>

Remove backup rule, where <rule number> = a rule number from 1-100. If no rule number is entered, then all backup rules are removed.

grprim-4 .00

OUT BKPS <schedule number 1-10>

Remove backup schedule

basic-4.5 0

OUT EPT <a...a> | ALL

alrm_filte r-21

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

451

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Delete an entry in the Event Preference Table (EPT) Where: a...a = identifier of EPT table entry ALL = delete all EPT table entries

Pack/Rel

OUT ERL <ERL#>

Delete an ERL entry.

OUT GRDRC Remove current GRDRC Block OUT GRNS OUT GRSC
Remove all backup schedules that reference backup rules of type SCS. Remove GRSC Block

grprim-4 .00 basic-5.0 0 grprim-4 .00

OUT HOST nnn

Delete configured host entry (delete host from network host table). Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

OUT HSP_MASK
Removes the configured HSP subnet mask from the Call Server and replaces it with the default HSP subnet mask Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-4.5 0

OUT RANGE_OF_ZONES
Remove a range of existing bandwidth zones. This command deletes a range of existing bandwidth zones, starting from <zoneStartNumber>. If there are no bandwidth zones with a zone number greater than <zoneStartNumber>, then no bandwidth zones are deleted.

basic-7.0 0

452

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Where:

Description zoneStartNumber = Zone number [08000] zoneAmount = Number of zones that must be deleted [1-8001]

Pack/Rel

OUT NUMZONE <numbering zone)

Remove a ZBD numbering zone, where <numbering zone) = a number from 1-1023.

zbd-6.00

OUT ROUTE nn
Delete configured routing entry

OUT SUBNET <IP Address> <Mask Bits> OUT ZDID <numbering zone> <matching string>
Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation. Where: <numbering zone> = 1-1023 <matching string> = best match string of 1-16 digits Unique inside a numbering zone.

basic-5.0 0 zbd-6.00

OUT ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string>

Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan. Where: <numbering zone> = 1-1023 <matching string> = best match string of 1-16 digits Unique inside a numbering zone.

zbd-6.00

OUT ZONE <x...x>

Remove an existing zone.

PDT (NO)/ PDT1 / PDT2

PDT Access. Note: Aavailable only when adding/modifying LAPW, Level 1 (PWD1) and Level 2 (PWD2) users.

basic-5.0 0

PORT ACCESS CUSTOM

basic-6.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

453

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Configures a custom Access Restrictions ruleset defining port access rules for the system. Issuing this command results in the following actions by the system: 1. Check to ensure a custom Access Restrictions rules file exists in the appropriate directory structure. If not, an error is displayed and the command aborted. 2. Displays a warning that enabling a custom Access Restrictions rules file could possibly have detrimental effects on the system, and prompts the user to confirm the action (Y or N). 3. Check to ensure that the custom Access Restrictions rules file will load. If not, an error is displayed and the command aborted. 4. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access Restrictions feature is already enabled, disable the existing Access Restrictions rules, including mandatory Access Restrictions rules. 5. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access Restrictions feature is not already enabled, enable it and set the default Access Restrictions rule to ACCEPT ALL. Any old Access Restrictions statistics are cleared. 6. Load the mandatory Access Restrictions rules file. 7. Load the custom Access Restrictions rules file. If a problem is encountered when loading the custom Access Restrictions rules file, the system displays an error, aborts the command, and returns the Access Restrictions feature to its previous state. 8. Change the VxWorks firewall state on the Call Server to Custom. An information message is logged on the Call Server indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a custom Access Restrictions rules file. 9. Send a VxWorks firewall state change message to all endpoints with the mandatory and custom Access Restrictions rules files version numbers. An information message is logged on each endpoint indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a custom Access Restrictions rules file. Note: When a PORT ACCESS command (CUSTOM, DEFAULT, OFF) is entered, all other PORT ACCESS commands are suspended for a pre-determined or incremental amount of time depending on the number of endpoints, to allow

Pack/Rel

454

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description sufficient time to propagate the state change to all endpoints.

Pack/Rel

PORT ACCESS DEFAULT

Configures the default Access Restrictions ruleset defining port access rules for the system. Issuing this command results in the following actions by the system: 1. Check to ensure a default Access Restrictions rules file exists in the appropriate directory structure. It is not expected that any errors will occur when processing the default Access Restrictions rules file. 2. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access Restrictions feature is already enabled, delete the existing Access Restrictions rules, including mandatory Access Restrictions rules. 3. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access Restrictions feature is not already enabled, enables it and sets the default Access Restrictions rule to ACCEPT ALL. Any old Access Restrictions statistics are cleared. 4. Load the mandatory Access Restrictions rules file. 5. Load the default Access Restrictions rules file. 6. Change the VxWorks firewall state on the Call Server to Default. An information message is logged on the Call Server indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a default Access Restrictions rules file. 7. Send a VxWorks firewall state change message to all endpoints with the default and custom Access Restrictions rules files versions as zeros. An information message is logged on each endpoint indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a default Access Restrictions rules file. Note: When a PORT ACCESS command (CUSTOM, DEFAULT, OFF) is entered, all other PORT ACCESS commands are suspended for a pre-determined or incremental amount of time depending on the number of endpoints, to allow sufficient time to propagate the state change to all endpoints.

basic-6.0 0

PORT ACCESS OFF

basic-6.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

455

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Disables all Access Restrictions rules in the system. Issuing this command results in the following actions by the system: 1. Disable all enabled Access Restrictions rules. 2. Deactivate the VxWorks firewall facility. 3. Change the VxWorks firewall state on the Call Server to OFF. An information message is logged on the Call Server indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is not operational. 4. Send a VxWorks firewall state change message to all endpoints with the default and custom Access Restrictions rules files versions as zeros. An information message is logged on each endpoint indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is not operational. Note: When a PORT ACCESS command (CUSTOM, DEFAULT, OFF) is entered, all other PORT ACCESS commands are suspended for a pre-determined or incremental amount of time depending on the number of endpoints, to allow sufficient time to propagate the state change to all endpoints.

Pack/Rel

PORT ACCESS SHOW CUSTOM

Display the Access Restrictions rules in the CUSTOM Access Restrictions rules file in tabular format.

basic-6.0 0

PORT ACCESS SHOW DEFAULT

Display the Access Restrictions rules in the DEFAULT Access Restrictions rules file in tabular format.

basic-6.0 0

PORT ACCESS STATUS [ALL]

Display the global state of the Access Restrictions feature. If the [ALL] parameter is specified, the system polls all endpoints to determine their local Access Restrictions state: If there are any cards that dont have matching file signatures, or that cant be contacted, they are displayed. A list of the possible failures is as follows: - CS local state incorrect: <CS state>

basic-6.0 0

456

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description - <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> state not received - <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect state of <bad state> - <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect default and custom file - <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect default file - <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect custom file If all cards have matching file signatures, a message is displayed indicating that all endpoints match.

Pack/Rel

PORT ACCESS VALIDATE

Validates the rules in a CUSTOM file and Prints out what is wrong with the file.

basic-6.0 0

PRT ADMIN_COMM
Print the administration group read-only community name strings. If administration group community strings have been added or modified in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command, the PRT ADMIN_COMM command prints the added and modified strings in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area and the existing community strings in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

basic-4.0 0

basic-6.0 0

PRT APPSRV
Print the IP address of the application server for PD.

PRT AQOS <attribute> <zone / ALL>

Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all zones with ALL). Where: Attribute = 1 - 32 Defined in the Traffic Report 16 (see Avaya Traffic Measurement Formats and Outputs Reference, NN43001-750), for example "Interzone warning jitter count".

basic-4.5

PRT BKPR xxx

grprim-4 .00

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

457

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Print backup rule, where:

Description xxx = a rule number ID 1-100 If no rule number is entered, then all backup rules are printed.

Pack/Rel

PRT BKPR <rule number 1-100>

Print backup rule, where: rule number = 1-100

basic-4.5 0

PRT BKPS ALL

Print all backup schedules

basic-4.5 0

PRT BKPS <schedule number 1-10>

Print backup schedule

basic-4.5 0

PRT CAB
Prints all data related to survivability.

PRT DNIP <DN> [<CustomerNo>]

Pint a list of IP addresses for each IP Phone registered with the specified DN. Note: A partial DN can be entered. Sample output: => PRT DNIP 4000 0 (only search customer 0 for DN) CUST 00 DN 4000 TN Type Key IP Address Zone Status ------------------------------------------------------- 061-01 i2002 03 SCR 47.11.215.41 000 REG 061-00 i2004 00 SCR 47.11.215.39 000 REG => prt dnip 4000 (same DN in different customers) CUST 00 DN 4000 TN Type Key IP Address Zone Status ------------------------------------------------------- 061-01 i2002 03 SCR 47.11.215.41 000 REG 061-00 i2004 00 SCR 47.11.215.39 000 REG CUST 01 DN 4000 TN Type Key IP Address Zone Status ------------------------------------------------------061-10 i2004 05 MCR 47.11.215.38 001 REG

PRT EDT aa... a

Print a single Event Default Table (EDT) event, where:

alrm_filte r-21

458

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)

Pack/Rel

PRT EDT aa... a bb...b

Print a range of Event Default Table (EDT) events, where: aa... a = first entry in EDT event range (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) bb...b = last entry in EDT event range (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)

alrm_filte r-21

PRT EDT <severity <eventID> <eventID>

The entries in the EDT can be listed based on the severity field for all entries or the specified range of entries.

basic-4.0 0

PRT ELIN [ALL] / <erl>

Print ELINs for ALL / specified ERL.

basic-5.0 0

PRT ENABLE_TRAPS
Display the enabled/disabled parameter for all SNMP traps.

basic-6.0 0

PRT ELNK

Display active and inactive Ethernet interface IP addresses (display active and inactive ELAN IP addresses). Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

PRT EPT aa... a

Print a single Event Preference Table (EPT) entry, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025

alrm_filte r-21

PRT EPT aa... a bb...b

Print specific Event Preference Table (EPT) entry, where:

alrm_filte r-21

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

459

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description aa... a = first entry in EPT event range (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025) bb...b = last entry in EPT event range (e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)

Pack/Rel

PRT EPT ALL

Print all entries in Event Preference Table (EPT)

alrm_filte r-21 basic-4.0 0

PRTS PRTS EDT

Print entries in Event Default Table by Severity

PRTS EPT severity <eventID> <eventID>

The entries in the EPT can be listed based on the severity field for all entries or the specified range of entries.

basic-4.0 0

PRT ERL [ALL]

Print all ERL entries.

basic-5.0 0

PRT ERL [<ERL #> [<+/-Count>]

Print the specified ERL entry, or a page of ERLs starting from the specified ERL..

PRT ES1 PRT ES2 PRT ESS

Print Echo Server 1's IP address and port number.

basic-4.0 0 basic-4.0 0 basic-4.0 0 alrm_filte r-21

Print the Echo Server 2's IP address and port number.

Print both Echo Server's IP address and port number.

PRT FMT_OUTPUT
Print formatted output string

PRT GRDRC Print GRDRC Block PRT GRSC

Print GRSC Block

grprim-4 .00 grprim-4 .00

460

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Display network host table entries (enabled and disabled hosts). Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Pack/Rel

PRT HOST

PRT HSP_MASK
Retrieves the manually configured HSP mask from the Call Server if it exists and outputs it to the screen, otherwise it prints the default HSP subnet mask (255.255.255.0) Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

PRT INTERZONE {<nearZone>} {<farZone>} {<nearVPNI>} {<farVPNI>}

Print interzone statistics between near (VPNI - Zone) and far (VPNI - Zone), where: NEAR END = ZONE and VPNI FAR END = ZONE and VPNI State = ENL/DIS Type= PRIVATE/SHARED Strategy = BB/BQ ZoneIntent = MO/BMG/VTRK QoS factor = % Bandwidth = number of Kbps Sliding Max = number of Kbps Usage = number of Kbps Peak = % Average = number of Kbps Alarms = Aph Note: The report rows are grouped as:

zcac-4.5 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

461

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description First row = summary bandwidth usage per near zone Next rows = bandwidth usage per near (VPNI- Zone) and far (VPNI - Zone) With release 4.50 the PRT ZONE command is not used. Note: The interzone command printout shows the Bandwidth usage for inter zone calls only.

Pack/Rel

PRT INTRAZONE {<zone>}

Print intrazone statistics for all or for the identified zone, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 State = ENL/DIS Type = PRIVATE/SHARED Strategy = BB/BQ ZoneIntent = MO/BMG/VTRK Bandwidth = number of Kbps Usage = number of Kbps Peak = % Note: The intrazone command printout shows bandwidth usage for both intra and inter zone calls.

zcac-4.5 0

zcac-7.0 0

PRT IPDN <IPAddress>

Print a list of DNs configured for the specified IP address. Sample output for PRT IPDN 47.11.215.38:
IP 47.11.215.38 CUST 01 TN 061-10 TYPE i2004 ZONE 001 REG Key DN CPND Name --------------------------------------------00 SCR 4010 I2004_1 VLN61-10 05 MCR 4000 i2004_cust1 vln61_10

Note: An IP address can be specified with only the leading digits (for example, 47.11). An IP address with zeroes at the end can be specified (for example, 47.11.0.0)

462

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description IP Expansion cabinet end of the specified port, where x = 1-4. supl shelf IPMG supl shelf or <CR> to print information for all IPMGs. If an IPMG supl shelf is not entered, all IPMGs are output, without their designator information. If an IPMG supl shelf is entered, a single IPMG is output, with the designator information (if MGC based IPMG)

Pack/Rel

PRT IPR x Prints the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the

PRT IPM x Prints the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the
Main cabinet end of the specified port, where: x = 1-4

PRT IPMG

supl shelf IPMG supl shelf or <CR> to print information for all IPMGs. If an IPMG supl shelf is not entered, all IPMGs are output, without their designator information. If an IPMG supl shelf is entered, a single IPMG is output, with the designator information (if MGC based IPMG)

PRT LCL
Prints the Local Core Location Loop, Shelf & Card values (Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS) basic-6.0 0 basic-5.0 0

PRT L3ELAN [side / CR] [role / CR]

Display the physical addresses of the CS cores. Where: Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core) Role = ACTIVE / INACTIVE.

PRT L3GW [side]

Display the default gateway for physical ELAN. Where: Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

basic-5.0 0

PRT L3HSP <side / CR>

Display Layer 3 Hot Standby Protocol of VPN Router Where: Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

basic-5.0 0

PRT L3HSPGW [side / CR]

basic-5.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

463

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Display Layer 3 Hot Standby Gateway of VPN Router Where: Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

Pack/Rel

PRT L3HSPMASK [side / CR]

Display Layer 3 Hot Standby Mask of VPN Router Where: Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

basic-5.0 0

PRT L3MASK [side / CR]

Display the ELAN mask. Where: Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

basic-5.0 0

PRT L3PRIV [role]

Display the ELAN virtual ACTIVE and INACTIVE addresses. Where: Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core) Role = ACTIVE / INACTIVE.

basic-5.0 0

PRT LDAPSYNC
Display the parameters of the Unicode Name Directory <-> CND LDAP scheduled data synchronization task.

basic-6.0 0

PRT MASK
Display subnet mask stored in database. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-5.0 0

PRT MEDS
Print Mediation Server Selection feature

PRT MGMT_ALARM
Print MGMT SNMP traps setting

464

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel basic-5.0 0

PRT MSEC ALL

Print System-wide media security configuration, and the media security CLS for all TNs.

PRT MSEC IP <ip_addr>

Print Media SECcurity class of service (CLS) for a specified IP address where: <ip_addr> = full or partial IP address

basic-5.0 0

PRT MSEC SYS

Print system wide Media SECurity configuration.

basic-5.0 0

PRT MSEC TN
Print Media SECurity CLS for a specified full or partial TN.

basic-5.0 0

PRT NAV_SITE
Print the navigation site name

basic-4.0 0

basic-6.0 If the navigation site name has been modified in LD117 since 0 the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command (not activated), the PRT NAV_SITE command prints the modified navigation site name in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area and the existing navigation site name in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

PRT NAV_SYSTEM
Print the navigation system name

basic-4.0 0

If the navigation system name has been modified in LD117 since basic-6.0 the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command (not 0 activated), the PRT NAV_SYSTEM command prints the modified navigation system name in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area and the existing navigation system name in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" change is activated and becomes part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

465

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel

PRT NBWMM CFG

Print CS Configuration table

PRT NBWMM REG

Print CS Registration Information table

PRT NBWMM STAT

Print CS Network status table

PRT NDAPP
Print the Name Directory application parameters.

basic-6.0 0

=> PRT NDAPP

NDApplState=Enabled NDlookupTimer=4000

PRT NKT PRT NTP

Print NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping basic-4.0 for devices behind a NAT router. 0 basic-5.0 0 Display the current configuration parameters of NTP. Displayed parameters include: IP addresses of primary and secondary NTP servers values for the three threshold levels: Minimum, Warning, and Maximum security mode: secure or insecure Key ID (if NTP is running in secure mode) time interval local time zone offset from UTC synchronization mode: manual or background Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

PRT NUMZONE <numbering zone)

zbd-6.00

466

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Print a table of information for a ZBD numbering zone, where <numbering zone> = 1-1023. Output: <PREF> = site prefix A number from 0-9999. <CC> = country code A number from 0-9999. <NPA> = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP) A number from 0-9999. <AC1> = trunk access code 1 A number from 0-99. <AC2> = trunk access code 2 A number from 0-99. <NATC> = national dial code A number from 0-9999. <INTC> = international dial code A number from 0-9999. <DAC> = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call A number from (0)-1. <TTBL> = tone table A number from (0)-32. Note: If <numbering zone> is not specified, all numbering zones are printed.

Pack/Rel

PRT NZDES [<numbering zone>]

Print the description for a specified ZBD numbering zone. Note: Descriptions for all numbering zones are printed if <numbering zone> is not specified.

zbd-6.00

PRT OPEN_ALARM
Display SNMP open alarm trap settings. If SNMP open alarm trap settings have been added or modifed basic-6.0 in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF 0 command, the PRT OPEN_ALARM command displays the new (not yet activated) SNMP open alarm trap settings in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area, and the existing (currently active) SNMP open alarm trap settings in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

467

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description "OVLY 117 Configuration" open alarm changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

Pack/Rel

PRT PDBAK Print parameters for remote backup of PD PRT PDV PRT PPP PRT PTM PRT QOS
Print the current PDV value Print Point-to-point Protocol interface address(es) Print current Point-to-point Protocol idle timer settings Print the current and average QOS values pvqm-4.0

PRT QSTHS Print all VQ thresholds PRT RCL

Prints the Remote Core Location Loop, Shelf & Card values (Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS).

PRT ROUTE Display routing table entries stored in the database.

Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

PRT SEL [nn] [aaaa]

Print most recent record(s) in system event list, where: [nn] = 0-(20)-SELSIZE [aaaa] = category name (for example, BUG) All categories are printed if not specified.

basic-4.5

PRT SELSIZE
Print System Event List size

PRT SNMP_SYSGRP
Print all parameters of the MIB-II system group.

basic-4.0 0

If MIB-II system group parameters have been modified in LD117 basic-6.0 since the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command 0 (not activated), the PRT SNMP_SYSGRP command prints the modified MIB-II system group parameters in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area and the existing MIB-II system group

468

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description parameters in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

Pack/Rel

PRT SUBNET [ALL]

Print all subnet entries.

basic-5.0 0

PRT SUBNET ECL <ecl>

Print all subnets that match the specified ECL.

basic-5.0 0

PRT SUBNET ERL<erl>

Print all subnets that match the specified ERL.

basic-5.0 0

PRT SUBNET <IP Address>

Print the specified subnet entry (or all entries that match a partially-specified IP address).

basic-5.0 0

PRT SUBNET NTH <n-th> <count>

Print count subnets starting from n-th entry.

basic-5.0 0

PRT SUPPRESS
Print global suppress value

alrm_filte r-21

PRT SUPPRESS_ALARM
Prints the alarm suppression threshold value.

basic-4.0 0

PRT SYSMGMT_COMM
Print the system management Read/Write/Trap community name strings

basic-4.0 0

If system management read/write/trap community strings have basic-6.0 been added or modified in LD117 since the last execution of the 0 SYNC SNMPCONF command (not activated), the PRT SYSMGMT_COMM command prints the added and modified system management read/write/trap community strings in an

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

469

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description "OVLY 117 Configuration" area and the existing system management read/write/trap community strings in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

Pack/Rel

PRT TIMER Print global timer window length (in minutes). See Global
window timer length on page 364for more information.

alrm_filte r-21 basic-5.0 0

PRT VPNKEY
Display the pre-shared key:

PRT VPNNET
Display both VPN Network IP and Mask

basic-5.0 0

PRT VPNROUTER <side / CR> <address type / CR>

Display interface of VPN Router Where: Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core) Address type = PUBLIC / PRIVATE VPN Router interface

basic-5.0 0

PRT ZACB [<Zone>]

Print branch office zone dialing plans, where <zone> = branch office zone. If <zone> is not specified, print branch office zone dialing plans for all branch office zones.

PRT ZALT [<zone number>]

basic-4.5 0

Print Alternative Prefix numbers, where <zone number> = 0 basic-7.0 255. 0 Print Alternative Prefix numbers, where <zone number> = 0 8000. If <zone number> is not specified, print Alternate Prefix numbers for all configured zones.

PRT ZAST

Print Alarms Suppress time interval for the zone.

PRT ZBW [<Zone>]

Print zone bandwidth utilization, where <zone> = zone.

470

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description If <zone> is not specified, print zone bandwidth utilization for all configured zones.

Pack/Rel

PRT ZBWM <Source Zone> [<Dest Zone>]

Print a zone-to-zone QoS status for all zones, where: Source Zone = 0255 Source Zone = 08000 Dest Zone = 0255 Dest Zone = 08000

basic-4.5 0

basic-7.0 0 basic-7.0 0

PRT ZBWM <Source Zone> ALL

Print a zone-to-zone QoS status table for all zones, where, Source Zone = 1-255 Source Zone = 1-8000 Table Output Fields are: Source Zone and VPNI Destination Zone and VPNI QoS factor Configured Interzone B/W (Kbps) Sliding Maximum B/W (Kbps) Actual instantaneous B/W used (Kbps) Calls/hour or average bandwidth (Kbps)

basic-4.5 0

basic-7.0 0

PRT ZBWM <Source Zone> [<Destination Zone>]

Print a zone-to-zone QoS status table, where: Source Zone = 0255 Source Zone = 08000 Destination Zone = 0255, and Destination Zone = 08000 Output Fields are: Source Zone and VPNI Destination Zone and VPNI QoS factor basic-7.0 0 basic-7.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

471

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Configured Interzone B/W (Kbps) Sliding Maximum B/W (Kbps) Actual instantaneous B/W used (Kbps) Calls/hour or average bandwidth (Kbps)

Pack/Rel

PRT ZCAC {<zone>}

Print CAC parameters for all or for the identified zone, where: Local Zone = 0255 Local Zone = 08000 State = ENL/DIS CR =1-100 CPL =1-100 CD =1-100 CJ = 1-100 CQOS = 1-100 ZQRT = 1-100 ZQRTI = 10-120 ZQUAT = 1-99 ZQWAT =1-99 CACVT = 1-255

zcac-4.5 0

zcac-7.0 0

PRT ZDES [<DESMatchString>]

Print a table of the zone description entries.

PRT ZDID [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>]

Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based call translations. Where: <numbering zone> = 1-1023 <matching string> = best match string of 1-16 digits Unique inside a numbering zone. Only numbering zone-based call translations with the specified 1-16 digit numeric matching string are printed If not specified, all numbering zone-based call translations are printed.

zbd-6.00

PRT ZDP [<Zone>]

472

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Print a table of branch office zone dialing plan entries.

Pack/Rel

PRT ZESA [<Zone>]

Print a table of branch office zone EmergencyServices Access (ESA) entries.

PRT ZDST
Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries.

PRT ZFDP [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>]

Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans. Feature 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped. Where: <numbering zone> = 1-1023 If not specified, all numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans are printed. <matching string> = 1-16 digit numeric string Unique inside a numbering zone. Only numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans with the specified 1-16 digit matching string are printed. If not specified, all numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans are printed.

basic-6.0 0

PRT ZONE ALL

Print zone information for all configured zones

PRT ZONE <x...x>

Print zone information for a specific zone, where: ZoneNumber = 0255 ZoneNumber = 08000 pvqm-7.0 0

PRT ZPAGE
This commands prints zone information for <zonesPerPage> zones starting from zone number <zoneNumber>. Data is printed for the following categories: zone number intrazone bandwidth intrazone strategy

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

473

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command interzone bandwidth interzone strategy resource type zone intent description

Description

Pack/Rel

PRT ZPARM [<numbering zone>]

Print the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone, where <numbering zone> = 1-1023. Note: When no numbering zone is specified, parameters for all ZBD numbering zones are printed.

zbd-6.00

PRT ZQNL <ZoneNumber>

Print the Notification Level for the specified zone, where: ZoneNumber = 0255 ZoneNumber = 08000

pvqm-4.0

pvqm-7.0 0

PRT ZQNL ALL

Print the Notification Level for all zones.

pvqm-40

PRT ZQOS <zone> <attribute / ALL>

Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all attributes with ALL). Where attribute is defined in the Traffic Report 16 (see Avaya Traffic Measurement: Formats and Outputs Reference, NN43001-750), for example "Interzone warning jitter count".

basic-4.5

PRT ZTDF [<Zone>]

Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries

PRT ZTP [<Zone>]

Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries. REGISTER UCMSECURITY CS

474

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server for the Call Server. If the Call Server is already registered, it reregisters.

Pack/Rel

REGISTER UCMSECURITY DEVICE

Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server for the element.

REGISTER UCMSECURITY SYSTEM

Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server for only the Call Server and any unregistered elements. It will not reregister elements that are already registered.

REGISTER UCMSECURITY SYSTEM FORCE

Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server for all system elements regardless if they are already registered.

RELOAD EPT
The new/modified EPT file is loaded into memory from disk (/u/ db/smpserv.db).

basic-4.0 0

RST DN

Reset IP sets with specified DN

RST ELNK ACTIVE

Reset Meridian 1 active Ethernet interface IP address to default value (reset active ELAN IP address to default). Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

RST ELNK INACTIVE

Reset Meridian 1 inactive Ethernet interface IP address to default value (reset inactive ELAN IP address to default). Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

475

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Print all scheduled reset times

Pack/Rel basic-4.5 0 basic-4.5 0

RST FW

RST FW <FWID>
Print all scheduled reset times by firmware ID

RST FW <FWID> START

Immedicate hard-reset all IP Phones, where: FWID = firmware ID of IP Phones

basic-4.5 0

RST FW <FWID> <START/STOP> <HH:MM>

Schedule or cancel hard-reset all IP Phones, where: FWID = firmware ID of IP Phones START/STOP = IP Phones reset, where: - START = set reset time schedule - STOP = cancel scheduled reset HH:MM = hour and minute when IP Phones are reset

basic-4.5 0

RST IPR x Restores the default IP connectivity configuration for the IP

Expansion cabinet end of the specified port, where: x = 1-4

RST IPM x Restores the default IP connectivity configuration for the Main
cabinet end of the specified port, where: x = 1-4

RST MASK

Reset subnet mask to default

RST PPP LOCAL

Reset local Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address to default value

RST PPP REMOTE

Reset remote Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address to default value

476

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Reset Point-to-point Protocol idle timer to default Reset IP set with specified TN Print all scheduled reset times

Pack/Rel

RST PTM RST TN RST ZONE

basic-4.5 0 basic-4.5 0

RST ZONE <ZoneNumber>

Print all scheduled reset times by zone

RST ZONE <ZoneNumber> START

Hard-reset all IP Phones, where: ZoneNumer = zone number

basic-4.5 0

RST ZONE <ZoneNumber> <START/STOP> <HH:MM>

Schedule or cancel hard-reset all IP Phones, where: ZoneNumer = zone number START/STOP = IP Phones reset, where: - START = set reset time schedule - STOP = cancel scheduled reset HH:MM = hour and minute when IP Phones are reset

basic-4.5 0

SECRET DEFAULT
Set the Secret to default value.

SECRET SET
Define the Secret

SECRET STAT
Print the Secret

SECURITY DOMAIN JOIN

Establish mutual trust with the UCM Primary Security Server.

basic-6.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

477

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel basic-6.0 0

SECURITY DOMAIN LEAVE

Remove the UCM Primary Security Server mutual trust information from the device.

SECURITY DOMAIN MODE [MANUAL | USER | AUTO]

Configure the UCM security domain management mode on the Call Server. Where: MANUAL = all devices must join the UCM security domain using local CLI commands USER = the user is prompted with a list of all currently active devices and is asked to confirm their addition to the UCM security domain AUTO = The credentials for the user accounts assigned the necessary role are cached on the Call Server so that they can be sent at a later time to any device that the Call Server requires to join the UCM security domain

basic-6.0 0

SECURITY DOMAIN STAT

Display the IP address and fingerprint of the UCM Primary Security Server.

basic-6.0 0

STAT ESALO

Display ESALO information

basic-5.0 0 basic-5.0 0

STAT IPMG [<supl shelf>]

Display the detailed status of all/one IPMG(s) configured on the system

STAT IPMG SUMMARY

Display the summary status of all IPMGs configured on the system. .

basic-5.0 0

STAT L3VPN [side]

Display the VPN tunneling state. Where: Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

basic-5.0 0

478

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel basic-5.0 0

STAT NTP
Check status of NTP. Status information displays in four categoriescurrent NTP configuration, last NTP configuration, last synchronization error, and countersand includes the following fields: NTP enabled or disabled (if disabled, the report includes no further information) IP addresses of the primary and secondary NTP servers local time zone offset from UTC time difference (delta) between system time and NTP server current threshold level: Minimal, Warning, Maximum secure mode of operation set to secure or insecure packets sent packets received Note: NTP status information also appears on the Date and Time page in Element Manager, under the Network Time Protocol field. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

STAT RFC2833 <TN>

Display RFC2833 capability for TN for selected <TN>.

basis-5.0

STAT SHELLS SECURE

Indicates whether secured shell access is enabled or disabled.

basic-4.5 0

STAT SHELLS INSECURE

Indicates whether unsecured shell access is enabled or disabled.

basic-4.5 0

STAT SNMPCONF

basic-6.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

479

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Display the status of the SYNC SNMPCONF command. The result indicates whether the SNMP parameters configured through LD 117 ("OVLY 117 Configuration") are synchronized with the CS. There are two possible results: SNMP Configuration is in progress When SNMP parameters are added or modified in overlay 117 and the SYNC SNMPCONF command is not executed, the new SNMP parameters are pending activation. SNMP Configuration is completed When SNMP parameters are added or modified in overlay 117 and the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed (new SNMP parameters are activated).

Pack/Rel

STAT TRANSFERS INSECURE

Display the status of the insecure File Transfer Protocol (FTP).

basic-6.0 0

STAT TRANSFERS SECURE

Display the status of the secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP).

basic-6.0 0

STAT UCM SYS

Show UCM registration status for all system elements.

basic-6.0 0

STAT UCM SYS REFRESH

Request UCM registration status update from all devices.

basic-6.0 0

STAT UCMSECURITY
Show the Primary Security Server IP address and fingerprint

STAT VOLO Display the active VOLO TN information STAT ZALT <zone>
Display Alternative Routing Status, where: zone = bandwidth zone basic-4.5 0

STAT ZBR [<zone>]

480

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description Display status of branch office zones, where: zone = bandwidth zone Note: With release 4.50 this command supports Alternative Routing for NBWM.

Pack/Rel basic-4.0 0

basic-4.5 0

SSH KEY ACTIVATE ACTIVE/INACTIVE

Activates / Inactivates the pending SSH key by restarting the SSH server

basic-5.0 0

SSH KEY ACTIVATE CABINET n/ALL

Activates the pending SSH key on Cabinet n or ALL Cabinet by restarting the SSH server

basic-5.0 0

SSH KEY CLEAR

Clears all stored public keys from memory, allowing connections to known devices with new public keys.

basic-5.0 0

SSH KEY CLEAR ACTIVE/ INACTIVE

Clears all stored public keys from memory, allowing connections to known devices with new public keys.

basic-5.0 0

SSH KEY CLEAR CABINET n/ ALL

Clears all stored public keys from memory, allowing connections to known devices with new public keys.

basic-5.0 0

SSH KEY GENERATE

Regenerate the keys on the specified device, if no device is specified then the system generates the key locally.

basic-5.0 0

SSH KEY GENERATE ACTIVE/INACTIVE

Regenerate the keys on the specified device, if no device is specified then the system generates the key locally.

basic-5.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

481

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel basic-5.0 0

SSH KEY GENERATE CABINET n/ALL

Regenerate the keys on the specified device, if no device is specified then the system generates the key locally.

SSH KEY SHOW

Displays the key fingerprint for the specified device, and the date the key was generated. If no device is specified then the system shows the key finger print for the local device.

basic-5.0 0

SSH KEY SHOW ACTIVE/ INACTIVE

Displays the key fingerprint for the specified device, and the date the key was generated. If no device is specified then the system shows the key finger print for the local device.

basic-5.0 0

SSH KEY SHOW CABINET n/ ALL

Displays the key fingerprint for the specified device, and the date the key was generated. If no device is specified then the system shows the key finger print for the local device.

basic-5.0 0

STIP DTLS <Node> <Connection_Type> <DTLS_Capability>

Display IP Phones based on signaling encryption related values, namely the type of connection currently in use by each IP Phone and their capability to make DTLS connections. Where: <Node> = the node ID of the node the subject IP phones belong to, or ALL to omit node-based filtering <Connection_Type> = type of signaling encryption used - INSECURE = no signaling encryption - SECURE = USec or DTLS - DTLS = DTLS - USEC = UNIStim Security - ALL = all encryption types <DTLS_Capability> = capability to make DTLS connections - YES = able to make DTLS connections - NO = not able to make DTLS connections

basic-6.0 0

482

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

Description - ALL = both capabilities

Pack/Rel

STIP FW

Print the number of registered IP Phones with associated RLM basic-4.5 data 0 basic-4.5 0

STIP FW <XX> [<A>] [<BB>] [<FF>]

Print the RLM data for registered IP Phones, where: XX = firmware ID A = major version designator BB = minor version designator FF = filter to apply on firmware version, where: - (==) = equal to - != = not equal to - < = less then - > = greater then

STIP MODL <MMMM>

Print the RLM for all IP Phones, where: MMMM = IP Phone model

basic-4.5 0

STOP NTP BACKGROUND

Stop background synchronization from running. Note: You cannot stop a background synchronization if no background routine is running. Attempts to do so result in an error message. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-5.0 0

SYNC NTP <Manual | BACKGROUND>

Synchronize with NTP server in manual or background mode.

basic-5.0 0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

483

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Note: Manual synchronization places LD 117 on hold for 15 seconds. During that time, you cannot abort from the overlay. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Pack/Rel

TEST ALARM [aaaa nnnn]

Generate an alarm. Where: aaaa = any character sequence. However, to test how an existing system message category (for example, BUG, ERR, INI) appears in an alarm browser, use an existing system message. (nnnn )= any numeric sequence Defaults to 0000. The output shown on the TTY is the system message used as the parameter. The actual trap sent to the trap destination list has the same severity as an existing message defined in the EDT and EPT. Nonexistent system messages have a severity of Info . The following items are found in the details section of the trap output: commonMIBDateAndTime = the time when the test is generated commonMIBSeverity = defined by the EDT and EPT or Info(5) commonMIBComponentID = the configured value of the Navigation system name: Navigation site name: CS (component type) commonMIBNotificationID = 0 commonMIBSourceIPAddress = IP Address of Call Server commonMIBErrCode = AAAA NNNN commonMIBAlarmType = 8 (indicating unknown)

basic-4.0 0

484

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command

Description commonMIBProbableCause = 202 (indicating unknown) commonMIBAlarmData = Contains textual description The rest of the variable bindings are NULL.

Pack/Rel

UNREGISTER UCMSECURITY DEVICE

Remove the Primary Security Server mutual trust information from system for the element.

UNREGISTER UCMSECURITY SYSTEM

Remove the Primary Security Server mutual trust information from system for all system elements.

UPDATE DBS
Rebuild INET database and renumber host and route entry ID (update network database). Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Maintenance commands share the same entry format as Administration commands.
Command Description Disable buffering for all data types Pack/Rel

DIS BUF ALL DIS BUF CDR DIS BUF STN DIS BUF TRF DIS DBK

Disable buffering for CDR data

Disable DBA buffering for Station Fast Sync

Disable buffering for TRF data

Display database disaster recovery's backup & restore

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

485

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel

DIS DVLA IDLELOGOUT

Automatic Idle DVLA IP Phones Logout is disabled

DIS HOST n

Remove a host from the run time host table, where n = host entry number. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

DIS MEDS DIS PPP

Disable Mediation Server Selection feature Disable Point-to-point Protocol access (this enables PPPD)

DIS ROUTE Remove a route from the run time routing table, where n = route entry number. n
Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

DIS ZALT <zone>

Disable ACR for zone, where: zone = 0255 zone = 08000 Note: Branch Office is configured at the Main Office

basic-4.50

basic-7.00

DIS ZBR <Zone> [ALL] [LOC] [ESA] [TIM] [ALT]

Disable a Zone's Branch Office behaviour, if no specific features are specified, then ALL is assumed, where: zone = 0255 zone = 08000 ALL = all features LOC = Local Dialing Access

basic-4.00

basic-7.00 basic-4.50

486

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command

Description ESA = Emergency Service Access TIM = Time Adjustment ALT = Alternate Routing for Branch

Pack/Rel

DIS ZCAC <Zone>

Disable Call Admission Control (CAC) for the identified zone, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 Note: Disables the feature on a zone by zone basis.

zcac-4.50

zcac-7.00

DIS ZONE <x...x>

Disable a Zone, No new calls is established inside the disabled zone, from or towards this Zone.

DVLA LOGOUTLIST <fileName>

Parses the specified file from /e/temp/ directory on Call Server and logs out all DVLA IP Phones whose TNs are presented in the file. The file must contain only the TN in string format (for example, 096 0 00 30) on each line.

basic-7.00

DVLA LOGOUTALL [<idleTime>]

Logs out all DVLA logged-on idle IP Phones which are idle for more than idleTime minutes (if specified).

basic-7.00

DVLA LOGOUTTN <loop><shelf><card><unit>

Logs out a specific DVLA IP Phone if it is logged in and idle.

basic-7.00

ENL BUF ALL

Enable buffering for all data types

ENL BUF CDR

Enable buffering for CDR data

ENL BUF STN

Enable DBA buffering for Station Fast Sync

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

487

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel

ENL BUF TRF

Enable buffering for TRF data

ENL DBK

Enable database disaster recovery's backup and restore

ENL DVLA Enable Automatic DVLA IP Phones Logout during Midnight basic-7.00 MIDNLOGOU Routine. DVLA IP Phone will be logged-out if it is inactive more then nnnn minutes, where: T nnnn
nnnn = 1- (30) - 1440 minutes

ENL HOST n

Add a host to run time host table, where n = host entry number. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

ENL MEDS ENL PPP

Enable Mediation Server Selection feature Enable Point-to-point Protocol access (Enables PPPD command)

ENL ROUTE n
Add a route to run time routing table, where n = route entry number . Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

ENL ZALT <zone>

Enable ACR for zone, where: zone = 0255 zone = 08000 Note: Branch Office zone is configured at the Main Office

basic-4.50

basic-7.00

488

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel basic-4.00

ENL ZBR <zone> [ALL] [LOC] [ESA] [TIM] [ALT]

Enable a Zone's Branch Office behaviour, if no specific features are specified, then ALL is assumed, where: zone = 0255 zone = 08000 ALL = all features LOC = Local Dialing Access ESA = Emergency Service Access TIM = Time Adjustment ALT = Alternate Routing for Branch

basic-7.00 basic-4.50 zcac-4.50

ENL ZCAC <Zone>

Enables Call Admission Control (CAC) for the identified zone, where: Zone = 0255 zone = 08000 Note: Enables the feature on a zone by zone basis.

zcac-7.0

ENL ZONE <x...x>

Enable a Zone

PING

Ping an IP address to test the network settings. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

PRT DVLA IDLELOGOUT

Print the status of Automatic Idle DVLA IP Phones logout

basic-6.00

SET ENABLE_TRAPS (ON) | OFF

C Enable/disable the sending of SNMP traps. Where:

basic-6.00

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

489

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command ON = enabled OFF = disabled

Description

Pack/Rel

SET HSP_IP

Activates the HSP IP addresses and subnet mask Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer. Set ELNK subnet mask to configured value (set runtime subnet mask to the configured value). Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

basic-4.50

SET MASK

SET MGMT_ALARM
Generate MGMT SNMP Traps

SET OPEN_ALARM <slot> <IP address> [<port>]

Add an SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) trap destination. Where: <slot> = 0-7 <IP Address> = any valid value in an x.x.x.x format (TCP/ IP) <port> = destination port for the SNMP trap Note: When <port> is not specified, SNMP traps are routed to port 162 by default. Note: To clear an SNMP trap destination, specify appropriate <slot> value and set <IP Address> = 0.0.0.0. When SNMP open alarm trap destinations are added or modified in LD117, they are stored in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area pending activation. When the basic-6.00

SYNC SNMPCONF

490

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command

Description command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" SNMP open alarm changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" (current) on the system.

Pack/Rel

SET USN

Set the unique system name for IP Peer System

STAT AUTONEG IPM

Display auto-negotiate status of Main Cabinet ports. The following report is displayed: AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS - MAIN/ CALL SERVER PORTS ---------------------------------------------------------PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate ================================= IPR 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON IPR 2 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN IPR 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON IPR 4 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100 Mbps full duplex". Otherwise UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth.

STAT AUTONEG IPR

Display auto-negotiate status of Expansion Cabinet ports. The following report is displayed: AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS EXPANSION/MEDIA GATEWAY PORTS -----------------------------------------------------------------PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate ================================= IPR 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON IPR 2 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN IPR 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON IPR 4 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100 Mbps full duplex". Otherwise UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth.

STAT BUF STAT DBK

Display buffer info (data type,% full, not ready) Display status of disaster recovery (enabled, disabled) basic-5.00

STAT ELIN [ALL] / <erl>

Print current status of all ELINs in all / specified ERLs.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

491

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel basic-5.00

STAT ELIN ACTIVE [<erl>]

Print active mappings for specified ERL, or all ERLs if none is specified.

STAT HOST Display current runtime host table status (enabled hosts).
Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

STAT IP DTLS STAT IP FW

Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified UNIStim encr. and DTLS cap Display the Resource Locator Module information for Ethersets with specified F/W ID(s)

STAT IP HOSTIP
Display the Resource Locator Module information corresponding to the specified HOST IP

STAT IP MODL STAT IP NODE

Display the Resource Locator Module information for Ethersets of the specified Model Name Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified node

STAT IP SIPLUA
Display the Resource Locator Module information for SIPL TNs with matching User Agent ID

STAT IP TERMIP
Display the Resource Locator Module information corresponding to the specified Etherset IP

STAT IP TN

Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified TN or group of TNs

STAT IP TYPE
Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified TN type

492

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel

STAT IP ZONE
Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified zone

STAT ISET ALL

Display the Resource Locator Module information for all nodes

STAT ISET NODE

Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified node

STAT LINK APP <applicationType>

Display the link information status of the server for the specified application, where: applicationType, where: - LTPS = Line TPS - VGW = Voice Gateway - H323 = H.323 Virtual Trunk - GK = GateKeeper - MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC

STAT LINK IP <IP address>

Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses of the specified subnet, where: IP address = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card Note: The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format. For example, "10.11.12.13" or "10.11".

STAT LINK NAME <hostName>

Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host nam, where: hostName = MAINSERVER

STAT LINK NODE <nodeID>

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

493

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Display the link information status of the specified node, where: nodeID = 0-9999 Note: The nodeID identifies the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Server equipment.

Pack/Rel

STAT LINK SRV <serverType>

Display the link information status of the servers for the specified server type, where: serverType, is: - ITGP = ITG Pentium - SMC = Media Card - SS = Signaling Server - MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC

STAT PPP STAT ROUTE

Display Point-to-point Protocol connection status.

Display host and network routing tables. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

STAT SERV APP <applicationType>

Display the link information status of the server for the specified application, where: applicationType is: - LTPS = (Line TPS) - VGW = Voice Gateway - H323 = H.323 Virtual Trunk - GK = GateKeeper - SIP (Session Initiated Protocol)

494

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command

Description - MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC - SLG = SIP Lines Gateway

Pack/Rel

STAT SERV IP <IP address>

Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses contained in the specified sub-net, where: IP address = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card. Note: The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format. For example, "10.11.12.13" or "10.11".

STAT SERV NAME <hostName>

Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host name, where: hostName = MAINSERVER

STAT SERV NODE <nodeID>

Display the link information status of the specified node, where: nodeID = 0-9999 Note: The nodeID identifies the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Server equipment.

STAT SERV TYPE <serverType>

Display the server information of the specified server type, where: serverType is: - ITGP = ITG Pentium - SMC = Media Card - SS = Signaling Server - MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

495

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description Display the server information of the specified Signaling Server.

Pack/Rel

STAT SS

STAT UCM SYS

Show UCM registration status for all system elements.

basic-6.00

STAT UCM SYSREFRESH

Request UCM registration status update from all devices.

basic-6.00

STAT ZBR [<Zone>]

Display status of branch office zones, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 basic-7.00

STAT ZONE [<Zone>]

Display zone status table, where: Zone = 0255 Zone = 08000 basic-7.00

STIP ACF

Displays status for all ACF calls

basic-4.50 basic-4.50

STIP ACF <status>

Displays Active Call Failover (ACF) status information, where: UNREG = unregistered calls HREG = half-registered calls REB = rebuilt calls HREB = half-rebuilt calls PREB = partial-rebuilt calls

STIP DVLA [<idleTime>]

Outputs information (TN, Prime DN, idle time) about loggedin DVLA IP Phones which are idle for more than idleTime minutes (if specified). Not more than 1000 records can be output at once. If more than 1000 records are collected, then Info message SCH2376 is printed.

basic-7.00

STIP HOSTIP <IP address>

496

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command

Description Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified HOSTIP address, or HOSTIP addresses contained in the specified sub-net, where: IP address = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card. Note: IP address can be in full or partial IP address format. For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".

Pack/Rel

STIP NODE <nodeID>

Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified node ID, where: nodeID = 0-9999 Note: The nodeID identifies the node number you have assigned to a group of VGMC and Signaling Server equipment.

STIP SIPLUA <UA string>

Display SIP Line Services TNs with the specified User Agent string.

basic-6.00

STIP TERMIP <IP address>

Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified TERMIP address, or TERMIP addresses contained in the specified sub-net, where: IP address = the TLAN IP address of the IP Phone or Voice Gateway Media Card. Note: IP address can be in full or partial IP address format. For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".

STIP TN <l s c u>

Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN, or group of TNs, as denoted by the l s c u and c u parameters.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

497

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

Description

Pack/Rel

STIP TYPE <aaa>

Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN type. Where valid values for <aaa> are: I2002 = IP Phone 2002 I2004 = IP Phone 2004 I2050 = Avaya 2050 IP Softphone ISET = all IP sets VGW = Voice Gateway resources IPTI = Virtual Trunk and IP Trunks MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC Where valid values for <aaa> are: 1210 = Avaya 1210 IP Deskphone 1220 = Avaya 1220 IP Deskphone 1230 = Avaya 1230 IP Deskphone Note: Up to 3 TN types can be specified. basic 5-5

STIP ZONE <zone>

Display the resource locator module information for the specified zone number, or range of zones, where: zone = 0255 zone = 08000 basic-7.00

TEST ALARM [aaaa nnnn]

Generate an alarm. Where: aaaa = any character sequence. However, to test how an existing system message category (for example, BUG, ERR, INI) appears in an alarm browser, use an existing system message. (nnnn )= any numeric sequence Defaults to 0000. The output shown on the TTY is the system message used as the parameter. The actual trap sent to the trap destination list has the same severity as an existing message defined in the EDT and

basic-4.00

498

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command

Description EPT. Nonexistent system messages have a severity of Info . The following items are found in the details section of the trap output: commonMIBDateAndTime = the time when the test is generated commonMIBSeverity = defined by the EDT and EPT or Info(5) commonMIBComponentID = the configured value of the Navigation system name: Navigation site name: CS (component type) commonMIBNotificationID = 0 commonMIBSourceIPAddress = IP Address of Call Server commonMIBErrCode = AAAA NNNN commonMIBAlarmType = 8 (indicating unknown) commonMIBProbableCause = 202 (indicating unknown) commonMIBAlarmData = Contains textual description The rest of the variable bindings are NULL.

Pack/Rel

TEST SUBNETLIS <IP address>

Return the location data for the subnet entry that matches the specified IP address.

basic-5.00

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

499

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

500

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 32: LD 135: Core Common Equipment Diagnostic

LD 135 provides diagnostic and maintenance information. It provides a means of performing the following functions: clearing minor and major alarms clearing and printing maintenance display contents for the primary Core testing the idle Core displaying CP/CP PII card status and ID enabling and disabling CNI/cCNI cards displaying CNI/cCNI card ID and status testing SIMMs, inactive CNIs/cCNIs, and standby Core during daily routines switch Cores when in redundant mode during midnight routines checks primary CNIs/cCNIs, checks for Core redundancy, and attempts to switch Cores When a status appears disabled, one or more Out-of-Service (OOS) messages may appear. Listed below are the possible OOS messages. (What actually appears are the numbers associated with the OOS text).

Possible OOS messages

0 = CP/CP PII local bus parity threshold exceeded 1 = CP/CP PII card HPM timeout threshold exceeded 8 = Unconfigured CNI/cCNI card 9 = Port has been disabled by craftsperson 10 = Device is not accessible 16 = CNI to 3PE cable 1 on specified card and port lost 17 = CNI to 3PE cable 2 on specified card and port lost 18 = 3PE power lost 19 = 3PE has been manually disabled 20 = CNI/cCNI card has been manually disabled 21 = Card test failed 22 = Port test failed 23 = Extender disabled by Meridian 1 initialization 24 = Port interrupt line 0 disabled 25 = Port interrupt line 1 disabled 26 = Port interrupt line 2 disabled 27 = Port interrupt line 3 disabled 28 = CNI to 3PE cable lost on CPP system

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

501

LD 135: Core Common Equipment Diagnostic

Adding a group to an Option 81C/81C CPII

Note: Refer to Avaya CS 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrades Overview, NN43021-458 to add a group, or groups, to an Option 81C/81C CP PII equipped with Fibre Network Fabric.

Basic commands
CDSP CLR GR Clear maintenance displays Clear secondary system ACTIVE state. Triggers repetitive attempts to redirect all the IP Phones to the primary system for a maximum period defined by FCT. If the primary system is operational, N then falls below GRTHR. (FCT and GRTHR are set in LD 117.) Clear major alarm, and reset power fail transfer Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Transfer call processing from active core to standby core Disable all CNIs Disable the CNI card Disable the CNI port Disable the specified extender pair X (0G0 to 0G7, 1G0 to 1G7) Disable System Utility card card at the specified side and slot # Get contents of maintenance display for the active Core Get contents of maintenance display for the active Core as well as previous 63 displays Enable CNI card Enable CNI port Enable the specified extender pair X (0G0 to 0G7 and 1G0 to 1G7) Enable System Utility card at the specified side and slot #

CMAJ CMIN CMIN ALL CUTOVR DIS CNI DIS CNI c s DIS CNI c s p DIS EXT x DIS SUTL DSPL DSPL ALL

ENL CNI c s ENL CNI c s p ENL EXT x ENL SUTL

502

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Basic commands

IDC CNI s IDC CPU JOIN

Print the card ID for the CNI on the active side Print card ID for the active Core Performs the following actions: Restores redundancy to a system put in single mode by the SPLIT command. Synchronizes the processor's memory and drives. Note: This command CANNOT be used unless the system is already in single mode (SPLIT). Note: This command MUST be entered by the I/O port on the active processor.

MIDN SCPU SPLIT STAT CNI STAT CNI c STAT CNI c s STAT CNI c s p STAT CPU STAT EXT STAT HEALTH

Run midnight routines after LD 135 is aborted and TTY is logged out Switch Cores Put a redundant (shadowed) system into single (non-shadowed) mode Get the status of all configured CNIs Get the status of all configured CNIs from side c Get the status of all configured CNIs from side c and slot s Get the status of port p of the configured CNI from side c and slot s Get the status and core numbers for both CPs Output all extender pair designations (0G0 to 0G7 and 1G0 to 1G7) Display Tier 1 and 2 health counts and the status of the hardware components that do not have a health weight.

STAT HEALTH AML Display the health count of the configured ELAN connections to AML applications. STAT HEALTH ELAN Display Tier 2 health count. STAT HEALTH HELP Display the meaning of the mnemonics used for the hardware components. STAT HEALTH HW Display Tier 1 health count and the status of the hardware components that do not have a health weight.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

503

LD 135: Core Common Equipment Diagnostic

STAT HEALTH IPL Display the health count of the IPL connections. STAT HEALTH VPNTNL Display the VPN tunnel health. STAT GR STAT MEM STAT MEM c m STAT SUTL TEST CNI c s TEST CNI c s p TEST CPU Print current status of 1+1 Geographic Redundancy on the specified system. Get status of SIMMs on both CPs Get status of SIMMs on both CPs Get status of System Utility (both main and transition) cards Test cCNI cards (core, slot) Test the CNI port Test the inactive (standby) Core. This command performs NO tests upon the active (primary) Core. On CPP, no tests are performed, and both active and (if available) redundant CP status and memory are displayed.

TEST GR l s c u Activate selective test for the IP Phone specified by TN, l s c u. Registration for an idle IP Phone is dropped immediately. Registration for an IP Phone on an established calls is dropped when the call is disconnected and the IP Phone becomes idle. Only one IP Phone can be tested at one time. If a Selective Test is already running on another IP Phone, this command switches the test to the new specified IP Phone. TEST GR CLR TEST IPB TEST LCD TEST LEDs TEST SUTL Clear total or selective test. IP sets re-register to the primary system. No active calls are dropped. Test the backplane protocol on the secondary (inactive) Interprocessor Bus. This command does NOT test the primary (active) IPB. Test the LCD display on the active CP card. Test LEDs Test System Utility (both main and transition) cards

504

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command CDSP Description Clear maintenance displays. This command sets the maintenance display for the primary CP to blank. Pack/Rel basic-18

CLR GR

Clear secondary system ACTIVE state. Triggers repetitive grprim-4.0 attempts to redirect all the IP Phones to the primary system for a maximum period defined by FCT. If the primary system is operational, N then falls below GRTHR. (FCT and GRTHR are set in LD 117.) Clear major alarm, and reset power fail transfer Clears minor alarm for all customers. Clears minor alarm for all customers. Transfer call processing from active core to standby core Disable all cCNIs Disable the cCNI card. Where: c = Core number (0 or 1) This must be the standby side. Disable the active side if the CNI is not in service. s = Slot number (8-12) basic-18 alrm_filter-22 basic-18 cpp_cni-25 cpp_cni-25 cpp_cni-25

CMAJ CMIN CMIN ALL CUTOVR DIS CNI DIS CNI c s

DIS CNI c s p

Disable the cCNI port. Where: c = Core number (0 or 1) This must be the standby side. Disable the active side if the cCNI is not in service. s = Slot number (8-12) p = Port number (0, 1) If the P is not entered, both ports, and the card itself are disabled. Where: p = (0, 1, 2) System with Fibre Network Fabric

basic-18

fnf-25

DIS EXT x

Disable the specified extender pair X (0G0 to 0G7, 1G0 to 1G7). Only extenders on the non-active CPU may be disabled. The extender is marked as unusable by the

fnf-25

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

505

LD 135: Core Common Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description system and it will not attempt to use it i.e. a CPU changeover will not be permitted.

Pack/Rel

DIS SUTL c s

Disable System Utility card. Where: c = Core number (0 or 1) s = Slot number (15)

cpp_cni-25

DSPL

Get contents of maintenance display for the active Core. If basic-18 the maintenance display is blank, BLANK is output. Get contents of maintenance display for the active Core, and previous 63 displays. Enable cCNI card basic-18

DSPL ALL

ENL CNI c s

cpp_cni-25

basic-18 ENL CNI c s p Enable cCNI port Where: c = Core number (0 or 1) ; s = Slot number (8-12) ; p = Port number (0 or 1) If the P is not entered, both ports, and the card itself are enabled. A port cannot be enabled if the card is disabled. Enabling the CNI card will also enable the 3 Port Extender. Where: p = (0, 1, 2) System with Fibre Network Fabric ENL EXT x Enable the specified extender pair X (0G0 to 0G7 and 1G0 fnf-25 to 1G7). Only extenders on the non-active CPU may be enabled. cpp_cni-25 fnf-25

ENL SUTL c s Enable System Utility card. Where: c = Core number (0 or 1) s = Slot number (15) IDC CNI s

Print the card ID for the CNI on the active side. Where: s = basic-18 Slot number (8-12). The printout appears in the following format:
x y ppppppppaa rrssss ccccccc

Where: x = Core number (0 or 1) y = Slot number (8-12) pppppppp = PEC code

506

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command aa = Attribute code

Description

Pack/Rel

rr = Release number ssss = Serial number cccccccc = Comments (optional) IDC CPU Print card ID for the active Core. The printout appears in the basic-18 following format:
x y pppppppppp rrssss ccccccc

Where: x = Core number (0 or 1) y = Slot number (8-12) pppppppppp = PEC code rr = Release number ssss = Serial number cccccccc = Comments (optional) IDC SUTL c s Print cCNI's card ID Where: c = Core number (0 or 1) s = Slot number (15) INI ACTIVE Warmstart active core. Note: Call from active core Also warmstarts inactive core after trigger time expiry INI INACTIVE Warmstart inactive core. Note: Call from active core of Redundant system Call from inactive core of Split system INI BOTH Warmstart both active and inactive core. basic-5.00 basic-5.00 basic-5.00 cpp_cni-25

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

507

LD 135: Core Common Equipment Diagnostic

Command Note:

Description

Pack/Rel

Call from active core of Redundant system Invalid command in Split mode JOIN Performs the following actions: Restores redundancy to a system put in single mode by the SPLIT command. Synchronizes the processor's memory and drives. Note: This command CANNOT be used unless the system is already in single mode (SPLIT). Note: This command MUST be entered by the I/O port on the active processor. MIDN Run midnight routines after LD 135 is aborted and TTY is logged out. basic-18 cpp_cni-25

SCPU

Switch Cores. basic-18 This command causes the inactive CP to become active. If the switchover is successful, OK in printed. If it is not successful, an error message is printed. If, when attempting to switch CPs, the system determines the currently active side is better than the standby side, a message appears on the TTY:
FORCE Enter <YES> to force SCPU to standby Core x. Press <Return> to abort SCPU.

Entering Yes continues the switch. Entering a Carriage Return <CR> defaults to No and retains the currently active side. SMGR xx yy Forces Media Gateway to register on a specified Call Server, where: xx = specified Call Server. Options for this parameter are PRIM (Primary), ALT1 (Alternate Call Server 1), or ALT2 (Alternate Call Server 2). yy = cabinet number of the Media Gateway to be switched.

508

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description Note: The GRDRC ABKUP prompt must be configured as SCHD on the primary and alternate system for this command to work.

Pack/Rel

SPLIT

Put a redundant (shadowed) system into single (nonbasic-18 shadowed) mode. The active Core remains active. Use this command for parallel reload, and for diagnostics requiring split mode operation. Additionally, the standby (inactive) Core "wakes up" and does a system level INIT. When the command is successful, OK is printed. If it is not successful, an error message is printed. This command has the same effect as putting both Cores into MAINT. If a terminal is connected to the secondary Core's I/O port, OS level startup messages appear as well as INI messages. This is not an error, and is operating according to design. If the disks are not synchronized, the command aborts, and an error message appears.

STAT CNI STAT CNI c STAT CNI c s STAT CNI c s p

Get the status of all configured cCNIs. Get the status of all configured cCNIs from side c

cpp_cni-25 cpp_cni-25

Get the status of all configured cCNIs from side c and slot s cpp_cni-25

Get the status of port p of the configured cCNI from side c basic-18 and slot s. (This command also prints the Network Group number of both ports on each cCNI.) To get the status of a specific cCNI port, enter the following information. Entering only STAT CNI gets the status for all CNI ports. Where: c = Core number (0 or 1) ; s = Slot number (8-12) ; p = Port number (0 or 1). If the P is not entered, the status of all ports is printed, where: p = (0, 1, 2) System with Fibre Network Fabric If the status is DSBL (Disabled), one or more of the OOS reasons may appear. What actually appears are the numbers associated with the OOS text. 0 = CP local bus parity threshold exceeded 1 = CP card HPM timeout threshold exceeded fnf-25

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

509

LD 135: Core Common Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description 8 = Unconfigured cCNI card 9 = Port has been disabled by craftsperson 10 = Device is not accessible 16 = CNI to 3PE cable 1 on specified card and port lost 17 = CNI to 3PE cable 2 on specified card and port lost Note: 16 and 17 are not applicable for CP PII 18 = 3PE power lost 19 = 3PE has been manually disabled 20 = cCNI card has been manually disabled 21 = Card test failed 22 = Port test failed 23 = Extender disabled by Meridian 1 initialization 24 = Port interrupt line 0 disabled 25 = Port interrupt line 1 disabled 26 = Port interrupt line 2 disabled 27 = Port interrupt line 3 disabled. 26 = Port interrupt line 1 disabled 28 = cCNI to 3PE cable on specified card and port lost

Pack/Rel

cpp_cni-25

STAT CPU

Get the status and core numbers for both CPs. Possible responses are: ENBL = CP is running IDLE = CP is in standby DSBL = CP is disabled If the status is DSBL, one of the following OOS reasons is printed: 0 = CP card local bus parity threshold exceeded 1 = CP card sanity timeout threshold exceeded 10 = Secondary CP is not accessible 16 = Secondary CP has a major fault This command also prints out the results of the latest selftest, and the position of the MAINT/NORM switch.

basic-18

510

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command STAT EXT

Description

Pack/Rel

Output all extender pair designations (0G0 to 0G7 and 1G0 fnf-25 to 1G7). fnf-25 Output status of the specified ext pair X x = 0G0 from CPU0 to Network Group 0. x = 0G1 from CPU0 to Network Group 1. x = 0G2 from CPU0 to Network Group 2. x = OG3 from CPU0 to Network Group 3. x = OG4 from CPU0 to Network Group 4. x = OG5 from CPU0 to Network Group 5. x = OG6 from CPU0 to Network Group 6. x = OG7 from CPU0 to Network Group 7. x = 1G0 from CPU1 to Network Group 0. x = 1G1 from CPU1 to Network Group 1. x = 1G2 from CPU1 to Network Group 2. x = 1G3 from CPU1 to Network Group 3. x = 1G4 from CPU1 to Network Group 4. x = 1G5 from CPU1 to Network Group 5. x = 1G6 from CPU1 to Network Group 6. x = 1G7 from CPU1 to Network Group 7. Print current status of 1+1 Geographic Redundancy on the grprim-4.0 specified system. basic-3.0 Display Tier 1 and 2 health counts and the status of the hardware components that do not have a health weight.

STAT EXT x

STAT GR

STAT HEALTH

STAT HEALTH AML Display the health count of the configured ELAN connections to AML applications. STAT HEALTH ELAN Display Tier 2 health count. STAT HEALTH HELP Display the meaning of the mnemonics used for the hardware components. STAT HEALTH HW Display Tier 1 health count and the status of the hardware components that do not have a health weight. STAT HEALTH IPL Display the health count of the IPL connections. STAT HEALTH VPNTNL Display the VPN tunnel health.

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

basic-5.00

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

511

LD 135: Core Common Equipment Diagnostic

Command STAT MEM

Description Get the status of SIMMs on both Call Processors. Note: On a CoRes Call server, the command does not show the actual physical memory size of the CP PM hardware. It shows the memory size that the Call Server application is using.

Pack/Rel cpp_cni-25

STAT MEM c m Get status of SIMMs on both CPs. To get the status of a single SIMM, or a specific side, enter the following information, where: c = Core (0 or 1) m = SIMM number (0-5) If m is not entered, status for all SIMMs is printed. If the status is Disabled (DSBL), the device is not accessible. STAT SUTL

basic-18

Get status of System Utility, both main and transition cards cpp_cni-25 basic-5.00

SYSLOAD ACTIVE Coldstart active and inactive core of Redundant system. Coldstart active core of Split system. Note: Call from active core Resume on previously active core SYSLOAD INACTIVE Coldstart inactive core. Note: Call from active core of Redundant system Call from inactive core of Split system SYSLOAD BOTH Coldstart active and inactive core of Redundant system. Invalid option in Split mode. Note: Call from active core

basic-5.00

basic-5.00

512

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description

Pack/Rel cpp_cni-25 basic-18

TEST CNI c s Test cCNI cards (core, slot) TEST CNI c s p Test the cCNI port. Where: c = Core number (0 or 1) s = Slot number (8-12) p = Port number (0 or 1) If the P is not entered, both ports are tested. This command can test Standby cCNIs as well as active cCNIs that are out of service. This may take a few minutes because of the time required to reestablish memory shadowing and contents. When the command is successful, OK is printed. If it is not successful, an error message is printed, where: p = (0, 1, 2) System with Fibre Network Fabric TEST CPU

fnf-25

Test the inactive (standby) Core. This command performs basic-18 NO tests upon the active (primary) Core. The CMB (on the CP card), CP to CP cable, and memory are sure that Split mode can be entered safely. Then the CP is tested. The system enters split mode, runs the test, and returns to redundancy (memory shadowing). This may take a few minutes because of the time required to reestablish memory shadowing and contents. It is possible, during the test, that service may be interrupted if an error occurs on the single active Core. Output from this test is " OK ," or a CCED message. Refer to the specific message for more information. Testing the secondary (inactive) Core is done by performing a "reset" on the secondary Core. If a terminal is connected to the secondary Core's CPIO, cold start diagnostics are displayed on the terminal. This is not an error, and is operating according to design. Note: On CPP, no tests are performed, and both active and (if available) redundant CP status and memory are displayed.

TEST GR l s c u Activate selective test for the IP Phone specified by TN, l s c u.

grprim-4.0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

513

LD 135: Core Common Equipment Diagnostic

Command

Description Registration for an idle IP Phone is dropped immediately. Registration for an IP Phone on an established calls is dropped when the call is disconnected and the IP Phone becomes idle. Only one IP Phone can be tested at one time. If a Selective Test is already running on another IP Phone, this command switches the test to the new specified IP Phone.

Pack/Rel

TEST GR CLR Clear total or selective test. IP sets re-register to the primary system. No active calls are dropped. TEST IPB

grprim-4.0

basic-18 Test the backplane protocol on the secondary (inactive) Interprocessor Bus. This command does NOT test the primary (active) IPB. The system enters split mode, runs the test, and returns to redundancy (memory shadowing). When the command is successful, OK is printed. If it is not successful, an error message is printed. This may take a few minutes because of the time required to reestablish memory shadowing and contents. It is possible, during the test, that service may be interrupted if an error occurs on the single active Core.

TEST LCD

Test the LCD display on the active CP card. The following test pattern is displayed on the active CP card's display: 8888888888888888 8888888888888888 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ123456 abcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz09876 The first two tests go by very quickly, so you may actually see only the third one.

basic-18

TEST LEDs TEST SUTL

Test LEDs Test System Utility (both main and transition) cards

cpp_cni-25 cpp_cni-25

514

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 33: LD 137: Core Input/Output Diagnostic

LD 137 provides IOP, CMDU, and cMMDU related diagnostic and maintenance information. Some commands in LD 37 can also be used. Refer to that program. LD 137 provides a means of performing the following functions: enabling and disabling the IOP, CMDU, and cMMDU cards displaying status and card ID for IOP, CMDU, and cMMDU cards testing the IOP, CMDU, and cMMDU (the hard and floppy disk drives are tested) testing individual disk drives enabling and disabling disk redundancy testing SCSI cable connections between IOP, CMDU, and cMMDUs testing disk synchronization on file or sector levels during midnight routines performs DATA CMDU, DATA RDUN commands displaying the Security Device Identification of the Security Dongle enabling and disabling the ELNK The DATA CMDU AND DATA RDUN midnight routines are run every 5 days. When a status appears disabled, one or more Out of Service (OOS) messages may appear. Listed below are the possible OOS messages: IOP out-of-service Unexpected interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded Fault interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded Processor exception fault monitor threshold exceeded ASIC interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded Unrecognized error fault monitor threshold exceeded General event interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded IOP not responding IOP disabled by craftsperson IOP responding but cannot be enabled CMDU/cMMDU out-of-service Hard disk read error

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

515

LD 137: Core Input/Output Diagnostic

Hard disk write error Hard disk drive error CMDU/cMMDU does not respond, the disk drive may be missing CMDU/cMMDU has been disabled by the craftsperson CMDU/cMMDU is disabled because the IOP is out-of-service Hard disk is inaccessible CMDUs/cMMDUs are not synchronized CMDU/cMMDU status is mismatched because of a software error CMDU/cMMDU is in split mode CMDU/cMMDU is out of split mode No access to hard disk (HDK)

Basic commands
DATA CMDU n Perform read tests on the specified CMDU DATA CMDU n HDK, FDK Perform read test on either the Hard Disk or Floppy Disk DATA RDUN DIS CMDU n DIS ELNK Perform sector level checking on both hard disk Disable CMDU Disable the ethernet link on the active IOP card Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer. DIS IOP ENL CMDU n ENL ELNK Disable the active IOP and Ethernet Enable the CMDU Enable the ethernet link on the active IOP card Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer. ENL IOP Enable IOP on the active Core and Ethernet

516

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Basic commands

ENL HOST n IDC

Add a host to run time host table Print the IDs of both CMDUs and the active IOP Note: This command is not applicable to CPP systems.

IDC CMDU n IDC CMDU c s d

Print the ID for the CMDU

Print the ID for the CMDU IDC IOP SDID STAT STAT CMDU n STAT CMDU c s d Get status of the MMDU STAT ELNK Display status of the ethernet link on the active IOP card whether enabled or disabled (display the current active ELAN information). Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer. STAT HOST STAT IOP STAT RDUN SWAP SYNC TEST CMDU n TEST CMDU c s d Perform test for the MMDU TEST CMDU n HDK, FDK Perform test on the Hard or Floppy Disk TEST IOP Perform the self test on the active IOP Display current run time host table status Display status of the active IOP and Ethernet Get status of both hard disks Swap the CMDUs Synchronize the hard disks on both CMDUs Perform test for the CMDU Print out the ID of the active IOP Display Security Device Identification Get status of IOPs, CMDUs, MMDUs and Ethernet Get status of the CMDU/MMDU

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

517

LD 137: Core Input/Output Diagnostic

TEST RDUN TEST SCSI TTY x

Perform file level checking on both hard disks Test the SCSI cables Test TTY x

Alphabetical list of commands

Command DATA CMDU n basic-18 Perform read tests on the specified CMDU. This data validity check is performed on both hard and floppy disks. While the test is in progress, the CMDU is inaccessible. Progress messages are output. n = core number (0 or 1) If n is not entered, this command checks both CMDUs. This is more extensive than the TEST command, and may take longer. DATA CMDU n HDK, FDK Perform read test on either the Hard Disk or Floppy Disk. This basic-18 is a data validity check. While the test is in progress, the Disk is inaccessible. Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). You must enter the Core number. This is more extensive than the TEST command, and may take longer. DATA RDUN Perform sector level checking on both hard disks. basic-18 This test ensures that disk synchronization (disk redundancy) exists. It can only be performed when disk redundancy is enabled. All data is checked, on both disks, sector by sector. If the test fails, a CIOD message appears, and disk redundancy is disabled. This is more extensive than the TEST command, and may take longer. While this test is in progress, the disks are inaccessible. basic-18 Disable CMDU. Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). You must enter the Core number. If disk redundancy is currently enabled (both CMDUs are enabled and enabled), disabling the CMDU also disables disk redundancy. Description Pack/Rel

DIS CMDU n

518

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description The confirmation is displayed:

"CURRENTLY CMDU N IS ACTIVE. DISK RDUN WILL BE DISABLED. ENTER Y(ES) TO CONFIRM, N(O) TO ABORT."

Pack/Rel

If the specified CMDU is in standby, its state is changed to disabled. If it is the active CMDU, it is disabled, and the standby CMDU becomes active. DIS ELNK Disable the ethernet link on the active IOP card. basic-22 An attempt is made to disable the Ethernet link. When the link is disabled, all activities will be terminated. The system displays OK to indicate that the link is disabled or FAIL to indicate that the link could not be disabled. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer. DIS IOP ENL CMDU n Enable the CMDU. Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). You must enter the Core number. When the first CMDU is enabled, that CMDU state is ACTIVE. If a second ENL CMDU is attempted, a file level synchronization on both hard disks is performed first. If the synchronization (disk redundancy) does not exist, a CIOD error message is printed, and the second CMDU remains disabled. If the synchronization exists, the confirmation is displayed:
"DISK RDUN WILL BE ENABLED, ENTER Y(ES) to CONFIRM, N(O) TO ABORT."

Disable the active IOP and Ethernet. The LED is lit on the IOP basic-18 faceplate and both CMDUs are inaccessible. basic-18

When disk redundancy is successful, both CMDU states are Enabled. The CMDU enabled first is active, and the second is standby. ENL ELNK Enable the ethernet link on the active IOP card. basic-22 If the Ethernet link is down, entering this command will cause an attempt to restore the Ethernet link to normal operation state. However, if the system cannot successfully restore the link, the Ethernet link will remain disabled. If the link was already up, this command does not affect the current operation of it. The system displays OK to indicate that

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

519

LD 137: Core Input/Output Diagnostic

Command

Description the link is now enabled or FAIL to indicate that the link could not be enabled. Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Pack/Rel

ENL HOST n Add a host to run time host table. ENL IOP

basic-22

Enable IOP and Ethernet on the active Core. basic-18 The LED is turned off on the IOP faceplate. The CMDUs are restored to the state they were in prior to the IOP being changed. However, if the cable between the IOPs is not connected, the CMDUs remain inaccessible until the cable is reattached. If both CMDUs were enabled, a file level synchronization check is performed prior to restoring states. If the synchronization (disk redundancy) does not exist, only the previously active CMDU is enabled. Print the IDs of both CMDUs and the active IOP. The printout appears in the following format:
pppppppppp rrssss cccccccc

IDC

basic-18

Where: pppppppppp = PEC code rr = Release number ssss = Serial number cccccccc = Comments (not always be present) Note: The IDC command is not available for CPP systems. IDC CMDU n Print the ID for the CMDU. Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). If n is not entered, card ID information is printed for both CMDUs. IDC IOP Print out the ID of the active IOP. basic-18 basic-18

520

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command SDID STAT

Description Display Security Device Identification of Security Dongle(s)

Pack/Rel basic-23

basic-18 Get status of IOPs, CMDUs, MMDUs and Ethernet. For the IOP, the Enabled or Disabled, and Active or Standby state is printed. Status is given for active and standby IOPs. For the CMDU/MMDU, Disk redundancy, enabled/disabled, and active/standby status are printed. If Ethernet is disabled, the status (enabled or disabled) is displayed along with an OOS message. The status given for the standby IOP is a software status as it was last seen when that IOP was active. No hardware status is given because the standby IOP cannot be accessed. If the status of the IOP or CMDU is disabled, one of the following OOS messages may appear: IOP out-of-service Unexpected interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded Fault interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded Processor exception fault monitor threshold exceeded ASIC interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded Unrecognized error fault monitor threshold exceeded General event interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded IOP not responding IOP disabled by craftsperson IOP responding but cannot be enabled CMDU/MMDU out-of-service Hard disk read error Hard disk write error Hard disk drive error CMDU/MMDU does not respond, the disk drive may be missing CMDU has been disabled by the craftsperson CMDU/MMDU is disabled because the IOP is out-of-service Hard disk is inaccessible: CMDUs are not synchronized CMDU/MMDU status is mismatched because of a software error CMDU/MMDU is in split mode

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

521

LD 137: Core Input/Output Diagnostic

Command

Description CMDU/MMDU is out of split mode No access to hard disk (HDK) Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Pack/Rel

STAT CMDU n Get status of the CMDU. Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). If n basic-18 is not entered, the status for both CMDUs is printed. If the CMDU is disabled, one of the following CMDU OOS reason may appear: Hard disk read error Hard disk write error Hard disk drive error CMDU does not respond, the disk drive may be missing CMDU has been disabled by the craftsperson CMDU is disabled because the IOP is out-of-service Hard disk is inaccessible CMDUs are not synchronized CMDU status is mismatched because of a software error CMDU is in split mode CMDU is out of split mode No access to hard disk (HDK) Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer. STAT CMDU c s d Get status of the MMDU, where: c = 0 or 1, Core number s = 16, Slot number d = 1, Drive number cpp_cni-25

522

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Pack/Rel

STAT ELNK Display status of the ethernet link on the active IOP card basic-22 whether enabled or disabled. The Ethernet address of this active Input Output Processor (IOP) is also displayed (display the current active ELAN information). Since the Local Area Network Controller for Ethernet (LANCE) is equipped on the IOP, LANCE will be disabled when the IOP is disabled. If the ethernet link is disabled, an OOS reason will be displayed containing the following information:
ELNK ENABLED Ethernet (In unit number 0): Host: aaaxxx Internet address: xx.xxx.xx.xxx Netmask: xxxxxxxxxx ; Subnetmask: xxxxxxxxxx xxx packets received ; xxx packets sent x input errors ; x output errors x collisions

Note: This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer. STAT HOST STAT IOP Display current run time host table status. basic-22

basic-18 Display status of the active IOP and Ethernet. This command prints out the status whether the IOP is enabled or disabled. If it is disabled, the OOS reasons are printed. The following IOP OOS messages may appear: IOP out-of-service Unexpected interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded Fault interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded Processor exception fault monitor threshold exceeded ASIC interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded Unrecognized error fault monitor threshold exceeded General event interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded IOP not responding

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

523

LD 137: Core Input/Output Diagnostic

Command

Description IOP disabled by craftsperson IOP responding but cannot be enabled

Pack/Rel

SWAP

Swap the CMDUs. After this command is issued, the active CMDU becomes standby, and the standby CMDU becomes active. This command is performed only when disk redundancy is enabled.

basic-18

SYNC

basic-18 Synchronize the hard disks on both CMDUs. This is a sector level synchronization. It is performed by copying the data from the active CMDU to the disabled CMDU, sector by sector. This can only be done when one CMDU is active and one is disabled. The confirmation prompt appears when the system is ready to do the copying:
"CMDU n ACTIVE HDK WILL BE COPIED AND DISK RDUN WILL BE ENABLED. ENTER Y TO CONFIRM."

Synchronization may take as long as 40 minutes. Progress reports appear on the TTY periodically. TEST CMDU n Perform test for the CMDU. basic-18 This test includes a self-test, read/write capability test, and disk access test on both hard and floppy disks for this CMDU. While the test is in progress, the CMDU is inaccessible. Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). You must enter the Core number. A disk must be in the floppy drive when this test is run. If the floppy disk is not present, the floppy disk test will fail. The hard disk test will not be affected. TEST CMDU c s d Perform test for the MMDU, where: c = 0 or 1, Core number s = 16, Slot number d = 1, Drive number TEST CMDU n HDK, FDK Perform test on the Hard or Floppy Disk. This test includes a self-test, read/write capability test, and disk access test on either the hard or floppy disk drive for this CMDU. While the test is in progress, the CMDU is inaccessible. basic-18 cpp_cni-25

524

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). You must enter the Core number. A disk must be in the floppy drive to test it. If a floppy disk is not present, the floppy disk test will fail. The hard disk test will not be affected.

Pack/Rel

TEST IOP

Perform the self test on the active IOP and internal loop-back test on Ethernet. The IOP must be disabled to perform this test.

basic-18

TEST RDUN Perform file level checking on both hard disks. This test ensures that disk synchronization exists. It can only be performed when disk redundancy is enabled. If the test fails, a CIOD message appears, and disk redundancy is disabled. While this test is in progress, the disk is inaccessible.

basic-18

basic-18 TEST SCSI Test the SCSI cables. This test ensures the cable connections between the IOPs are present. Access to the CMDUs is tested as well. If the test is successful, OK is printed. If the test is unsuccessful, CIOD messages are printed to indicate the problem. TTY x Test TTY x. Response is:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789"#$%*!&()<>.:,.? READY FOR INPUT

basic-18

Anything entered on the keyboard will be echoed until END is input.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

525

LD 137: Core Input/Output Diagnostic

526

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 34: LD 143: Customer Configuration Backup and Restore

Overlay 143 introduces the Keycode Management feature for customers with the Input/Output Disk Unit with CD-Rom (IODU/C). Previously, a Keycode was stored on two devices: a Security Cartridge and a Direct.rec file. A Keycode is a "soft" entity that resides on a customer's hard disk. A Keycode can be delivered, replaced, upgraded, and downgraded. Note: As of Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0, new ISM limits can be activated without sysload if they are greater than or equal to the actual ISM usage in the system. Otherwise, installation of the new keycode is blocked. All Keycode Management commands are executed in Overlay 143.

Basic commands
ABORT UPGMG Aborts all the current and pending centralized software upgrades and disables the automatic software upgrade option. Attended Backup. The new file created to store the MIB-II variables, System Navigation variables, and community name strings is backed up to floppy disks. Attended Restore. The new file created to store the MIB-II variables, System Navigation variables, and community name strings is restored from floppy disks. Disables the automatic software upgrade option.

ABKO

ARES

DIS AUTOUPGMG

ENL AUTOUPGMG <a...a> Enables the automatic centralized software upgrade option, where: a...a = (SEQ) SIM

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

527

LD 143: Customer Configuration Backup and Restore

HELP KDIF k1 k2 KMAN

View overlay commands on terminal Print the differences between two specified keycodes Manually introduce the keycode the same way as form the Installation Tools Check and accept new keycode file Delete "keycode.new" file Revert the current keycode.rec and keycode.old files Show content of the currently used keycode file and the differences with the rest of keycode files Print the status of a new (trial) keycode (if any). Upload keycode command. Prints all inservice patches and patch handle numbers (includes all DepList patches).

KNEW dr KOUT KRVR d r KSHO k

KSTT KUPL MDP ISSP

PRT AUTOUPGMG Displays the settings for the automatic upgrade option. PSDL LIST UPGMG x UPGMGBOOT UPGRADE List peripheral software download files. Upgrades MG 1000S. Upgrade MG 1000S with bootROM from Call Server Perform Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T upgrade Perform UDT card firmware upgrade Abort UDT card firmware upgrade Query current UDT card firmware upgrade status Remote backup database CDR file retrieval for Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T Remote restore database

UPGUDT l s c UPGUDTABORT UPGUDT STAT XBK XCDR x

XRT

528

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

XSL XVR

Remote sysload the system Remote verify database

Alphabetical list of commands

Command ABORT UPGMG Aborts all the current and pending centralized software upgrades and disables the automatic software upgrade option. For CS 1000S system ABKO basic-2 Description Pack/Rel

Attended Backup. The new file created to store the MIB-II basic-23 variables, System Navigation variables, and community name strings is backed up to floppy disks. Attended Restore. The new file created to store the MIB-II basic-23 variables, System Navigation variables, and community name strings is restored from floppy disks.

ARES

DIS AUTOUPGMG Disables the automatic software upgrade option. For CS 1000S system ENL AUTOUPGMG <a...a> Enables the automatic centralized software upgrade option, where: a...a = (SEQ) SIM SEQ: Upgrade to the gateways is performed across the LAN in a sequential manner. One gateway will be upgraded at a time, no other gateway upgrades will be initiated until the current MG 1000S has completed its installation. SIM: Upgrade to the gateways is performed in a simultaneous manner across the LAN. All gateways will be upgraded to at the same time. The following warning will be presented to the installer: "WARNING: Call Processing is not guaranteed to operate on the call server during simultaneous upgrades. Do you wish to proceed? (y/n) " The automatic upgrade option for basic-2.0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

529

LD 143: Customer Configuration Backup and Restore

Command

Description simultaneous operation will be enabled upon the installer entering (y). For CS 1000S system

Pack/Rel

basic-2 basic-23 basic-23

HELP KDIF k1 k2

View overlay commands on terminal Compare 2 keycodes: Where p1 and p2 have one of the following values: NEW - pending keycode accepted by means of KNEW command REC - keycode currently in use disk OLD - previously used keycode PIV and CP PM CPU only RMD - candidate keycode on Removable Media Device FMD - candidate keycode created by means of KMAN/KUPL PII CPU only F0 - Candidate Keycode on floppy disk /f0 F1 - Candidate Keycode on floppy disk /f1 HD - Candidate Keycode on hard disk

KMAN

Line-by-line candidate keycode file creation Manually enter the keycode to the target system. Enter 21 lines, 16 characters each. Type end and press Enter at line 22 to end the process and save keycode. basic-23 Select new candidate keycode from: parm. Depending on eligibility, the keycode may be instantly activated or activated on next reset. Instant activation is supported if the new ISM limit is greater than or equal to the actual ISM usage in the system. Otherwise, the keycode activation is blocked. Where parm has one of the following values: PIV and CP PM CPU only RMD - candidate keycode on Removable Media Device FMD - candidate keycode created by means of KMAN/KUPL PII CPU only F0 or F1 - keycode on the floppy drive on Core 1 or Core 0 HD - candidate keycode hard drive If the system instantly activates the New Keycode, the following message prints:
CCBR020 New Keycode accepted and activated

KNEW dr

530

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description
successfully. Sysload is NOT needed!

Pack/Rel

If the system activation for the New Keycode is blocked due to the new ISM limit being lower than the actual ISM usage in the system, the following message prints:
CCBR032 New keycode is not activated because the newly configured ISM limit is less than the actual usage. CCBR005 Failed to submit the new keycode.

If the New Keycode cannot be activated instantly, the following message prints:
CCBR009 New Keycode accepted. It will be activated during the next restart.

KOUT KRVR d r

Delete "keycode.new" file.

basic-23

Select the OLD keycode as the new candidate. Depending on basic-23 eligibility, the keycode may be instantly activated or activated on next reset. The old keycode is eligible for instant activation with the KRVR command if the only difference between the old keycode and the new keycode is that some or all of the License parameters in the old keycode are higher. After the KRVR command has been entered, the following message is printed if the system has instantly activated the Old Keycode:

CCBR020 New Keycode accepted and activated successfully. Sysload is NOT needed!
Select the OLD keycode as the new candidate. Depending on Basic-7.00 eligibility, the keycode may be instantly activated or activated on next reset. The old keycode is eligible for instant activation with the KRVR command if the only difference between the old keycode and the new keycode is that some or all of the License parameters in the old keycode are higher. Instant activation is supported if the new ISM limit is greater than or equal to the actual ISM usage in the system. Otherwise, the keycode activation is blocked. The old keycode is eligible for instant activation with the KRVR command if the only difference between the old keycode and the new keycode is that some or all of the License parameters in the old keycode are higher or lower than the existing parameters but greater than or equal to the actual License usage in the system.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

531

LD 143: Customer Configuration Backup and Restore

Command

Description After the KRVR command has been entered, the following message prints if the system instantly activates the Old Keycode:
CCBR020 New Keycode accepted and activated successfully. Sysload is NOT needed!

Pack/Rel

If the system activation for the Old Keycode is blocked, the following message prints:
CCBR032 New keycode is not activated because the newly configured ISM limit is less than the actual usage. CCBR007 Failed to revert to the old keycode

KSHO k

Display contents of the pending keycode contents, where parm basic-23 may have one of the following values: NEW - pending keycode accepted by means of KNEW command REC - keycode currently in use OLD - previously used keycode PIV and CP PM CPU only RMD - verify keycodes on the Removable Media Device FMD - verify keycodes on the Fixed Media Device PII CPU only F0 or F1 - verify keycodes on Core 0 or 1 HD - Core 1 (CPT )

KSTT KUPL

List all keycodes: NEW, REC, OLD, RMD, FMD Candidate and PWs keycode file upload. Upload keycodes to the hard disk or FMD on the target system Prints all inservice patches and patch handle numbers (includes all DepList patches). Installs the contents of an MDP patch file on a target system. Deactivates all in-service patches and unloads them from the system. Where <path> is a system folder or RMD device name such as CF2, and <file> is a deplist zip file using the 8.3 file naming convention. For example: MDP INSTALL cf2/ deplist.zip.

MDP ISSP

MDP INSTALL <path/file>

532

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description Note: If you already have patches in service on the target system for the current software release installed, it is recommended to use the REFRESH command in order to update the PATCH deltas only.

Pack/Rel

MDP REACTIVATE Reactivates MDP patches which have been deactivated as a result of sysload. MDP REFRESH <path/file> Refreshes the MDP patches on a target system. Where <path> is a system folder or RMD device name such as CF2, and <file> is a deplist zip file using the 8.3 file naming convention. For example: MDP REFRESH cf2/deplist.zip First determines deltas between existing patches in service and patches identified in MDP Distribution, and divides them into two categories (add and drop). Before applying patches from add category, conflict checking is done with the existing patches and in case of any conflict, the details of conflicts are displayed, and the refresh process is terminated. If no conflict, the patches identified can be applied at once, or can be deferred until midnight routine of that day or alternate day. First those patches identified for removal are removed, after which the patches to be added are loaded and placed into service. Note: This command will generate deltas based on the files that are already present in the patch directory of the system. They are not based on the state of the patch (loaded, in-service, unloaded or out of service). If a patch file of the MDP distribution is already present in the patch directory of the system, this patch file is not copied from the distribution to the system. So the condition of the patch, whether it is in service, loaded, or out of service state, remains the same and is untouched by the MDP REFRESH command. MDP REVERT MDP UNINSTAL L Reverts to a previously installed MDP patch distribution, taking advantage of the deltas created during the previous refresh. Removes contents of a previously installed MDP patch distribution from the system. First it deactivates, then removes, all Patches from the system. Caution: Use this command with caution. PRT AUTOUPGMG Displays the settings for the automatic upgrade option.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

533

LD 143: Customer Configuration Backup and Restore

Command For CS 1000S system PSDL LIST

Description

Pack/Rel basic-2 basic-25

List peripheral software download files. The PSDL LIST command displays the M3900 language set currently installed on the switch, and the language sets available on the switch. See example below:
<option> : LIST - List M3900 language sets CHANGE - Change M3900 language set RESTORE - Restore M3900 language set <language> : Use with PSDL CHANGE option 1 - Global 10 Languages 2 - Western Europe 10 Languages 3 - Eastern Europe 10 Languages 4 - North America 6 Languages 5 - Spare Group A 6 - Spare Group B .psdl list 3900 language set currently installed on the switch : Release and Issue x112551a VERSION 77 1. Global version : psdl.rec/psdl_1.rec 3900 language sets available on the switch : Release and Issue x112551a VERSION 77 1. Global version : psdl.rec/psdl_1.rec Release and Issue x112551a VERSION 77 2. Western Europe : Release and Issue x112551a VERSION 77 3. Eastern Europe version : Release and Issue x112551a VERSION 77 4. North American version : Release and Issue x112551a VERSION 77 5. Phase I F/W for up-issue : Release and Issue x112551a VERSION 77 6. Copy of North America version

UPGMG x

UPGMG <supl shelf> UPGMG <supl shelf> FORCE UPGMG <supl shelf> [CSP|MSP|APP|FPGA|BOOT|DBL1|DBL2] UPGMG <supl shelf> [CSP|MSP|APP|FPGA|BOOT|DBL1| DBL2] FORCE UPGMG ALL [SEQ|SIM] UPGMG ALL [SEQ|SIM] FORCE UPGMG ALL [SEQ|SIM] [CSP|MSP|APP|FPGA|BOOT|DBL1| DBL2] UPGMG ALL [SEQ|SIM] [CSP|MSP|APP|FPGA|BOOT| DBL1|DBL2] FORCE UPGMG STAT UPGMG STAT <supl shelf> UPGMGBOOT <supl shelf> For CS 1000E system basic-5.0

534

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description Immediately initiates a manual upgrade of the version of loadware installed on the Call Server to the specified Media Gateway, through the LAN connection to the Media Gateway. When using the FORCE option, this upgrade occurs even if the version of software on the Media Gateway matches the Call Servers version. WARNING: Call Processing is not guaranteed to continue while the media gateways are being upgraded.

Pack/Rel

UPGMG x

Upgrade MG 1000S, where: x = MG 1000S For CS 1000S system Immediately initiates a manual upgrade of the version of software and bootROM installed on the Call Server to the specified MG 1000S via the LAN connection to the MG 1000S. This upgrade occurs even if the version of software on the MG 1000S matches the Call Servers version. The MG 1000S must already have at a minimum CS 1000S release 2 installed, for the command to work. WARNING: Call Processing is not guaranteed to operate on the Call Server if this option is initiated to other MG 1000S systems, while the Call Server is currently upgrading to another MG 1000S. basic-2.0

UPGMG x UPGMG STAT UPGMGBOOT x Upgrade MG 1000S with bootROM from Call Server, where: x = MG 1000S For CS 1000S system Immediately initiates a manual upgrade of the current version of the bootROM operating on the Call Server to the selected MG 1000S via the LAN connection to the specified MG 1000S. WARNING: Call Processing is not guaranteed to operate on the Call Server if this option is initiated to other MG 1000S systems, while the Call Server is currently upgrading another MG 1000S. UPGRADE Perform Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T basic-22 upgrade. This command invokes the Install Setup Program. To perform an installation, the installer inserts a Software Delivery Card in the PCMCIA slot on the System Core Card. Then, on TTY 0, the installer may invoke the Setup Program by using the UPGRADE command in LD 143. basic-2.0

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

535

LD 143: Customer Configuration Backup and Restore

Command

Description The UPGRADE command allows changes to License parameters to be instantly activated without Sysload upon keycode acceptance. The following message is output:
CCBR020 New Keycode accepted and activated successfully. Sysload is NOT needed! When feature packages are added to the system, a Sysload must be performed.

Pack/Rel

UPGUDT l s Perform UDT card firmware upgrade on [supl shelf card]. c If the UDT can not be reached then the following response is printed: Cab [LLL S]: Not available. UDT Upgrade command ignored. If an UDT upgrade is already in progress then the following response is printed: UDT[LLL S CC]: Doing Upgrade already. Upgrade command ignored. UPGUDTA BORT

basic-6.00

basic-6.00 Abort UDT card firmware upgrade. If the abort request was made after the UDT has erased its old firmware then terminating the upgrade will cause the UDT to be left without any upgraded code, and it will load its fixed factory firmware load. When this is the case, to confirm the abort request the Call Server prints the following message: UDT [LLL S CC] is undergoing an upgrade. Do you want to abort the upgrade? ENTER Y(ES) TO CONFIRM ABORT UPGRADE, N(O) TO IGNORE COMMAND. If confirmed, an abort message will be sent to the UDT. Query current UDT card firmware upgrade status. basic-6.00 UPGUDT STAT command reports the current UDT card firmware upgrade state and the TN of the UDT card that is currently upgraded. If no upgrade is currently taking place, the reply is: UDT Upgrade is idle. If a UDT card firmware upgrade is in process, the response format is: UDT Upgrade is [idle / checking / starting / active / aborting]. Loop [LLL S CC] Remote backup database. Backup the configuration files from basic-22 the primary drive onto a computer. Remote backup database. Backup the configuration files from basic-7.00 the primary drive onto a computer. If the CCBR file exists in the system, the time stamp of the CCBR file prints out prior to printing out the ready transmit prompt. For example, CCBR file is last archived

UPGUDT STAT

XBK

on WED JAN 20 13:08:10 2010. To update the file, please use the EDD CCBR command in Overlay 43. R>Ready to transmit... If CCBR

536

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Alphabetical list of commands

Command

Description file does not exist in the system, the following message is printed: CCBR033 CCBR file is missing. Please

Pack/Rel

generate the CCBR file by means of EDD CCBR in Overlay 43.

XCDR x ALL Small System, CS 1000S, and MG 1000T CDR file retrieval from one or all IP expansions after the expansion restores to slave mode, where: x = 1, 2, 3, or 4, IP expansion When the command is successful, the retrieved file is deleted on the expansion. XRT Remote restore database Restore the files from a computer onto the primary drive. Remote sysload the system Sysload the Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, or MG 1000T system from the primary flash drive. basic-22 sipe-25

XSL

basic-22

XVR

Remote verify database basic-22 Verify the files on a computer with the files in the primary flash drive of the Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, or MG 1000T system.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

537

LD 143: Customer Configuration Backup and Restore

538

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 35: Media Card command line interface commands

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 540 Overview on page 540 ITG-SA command line interface commands on page 541 - OAM security shell commands on page 541 Table 20: OAM CLI command groups on page 542 OAM General purpose commands on page 543 OAM File transfer commands on page 546 OAM IP configuration commands on page 549 OAM Reset commands on page 550 OAM DSP commands on page 550 OAM IP Phone firmware upgrade commands on page 550 OAM Shell command on page 552 OAM Voice Gateway commands on page 553 OAM Data Path Capture Tool commands on page 553 OAM Graceful TPS commands on page 554 OAM IP Phone Loss Plan (UK) commands on page 555 OAM Patch and Patching Tool commands on page 556 OAM General Trace Tool commands on page 558 OAM Protocol Trace Tool commands for the Network Connection Service on page 559 OAM Maintenance Audit commands on page 560

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

539

Media Card command line interface commands

- PDT security shell commands on page 561 MC32S Command Line Interface commands on page 561 - OAM security shell commands on page 561 Table 37: OAM CLI command groups on page 562 Table 38: OAM General commands on page 563 Table 39: OAM VGW commands on page 563 Table 40: OAM iset commands on page 564 Table 41: OAM disk commands on page 566 Table 42: OAM special commands on page 568 Table 43: OAM Security commands on page 569 - PDT security shell commands on page 569 Table 44: PDT CLI command groups on page 570 - PDT Command groups on page 570 Table 45: PDT General commands on page 571 Table 46: PDT system commands on page 572 Table 47: PDT Debug commands on page 575 Table 48: PDT disk commands on page 576 Table 49: PDT special commands on page 577 Table 50: PDT Security commands on page 579

Introduction
This chapter describes the Command Line Interface (CLI) and associated commands for each Media Card supported in an Avaya Communication Server 1000 system.

Overview
There are two types of Media Cards supported in an Avaya CS 1000 system the ITG-SA and MC32S. Access to a Media Card CLI is controlled by userid/password combination. Each user has a designated userid/password combination. Userid/password combinations are associated with security shells. Security shells control what commands are available in the CLI of each card. There are two types of security shells an Operations, Administration, and Maintenance

540

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ITG-SA command line interface commands

(OAM) security shell that provides access to commands used in the operation, administration and maintenance of the Media Cards, and a Problem Determination Tool (PDT) security shell that provides access to commands used for analyzing and/or debugging any operational problems that occur on the Media Cards. If a userid/password combination is associated with the PDT security shell, the corresponding user has both OAM and PDT security shell access and capabilities. The information in this chapter is structured in accordance with the CLI infrastructure for each Media Card. The CLI infrastructure consists of Command Groups that group together commands of similar functionality or purpose. All Command Groups and associated commands available in the OAM security shell are available in the PDT security shell by default. Some Command Groups and associated commands are only available in the PDT security shell. Each Command Group is documented in a table that contains the associated commands, a description of each command, and an indication as to whether the command is available through the General Command interface in Element Manager. A list of Command Groups available in a security shell for a Media Card is available at the CLI command prompt for each card. A list of the commands available in a specific Command Group in a security shell is also available at the CLI command prompt for each card. In addition, help for individual commands is available at the CLI command prompt for each card. This chapter presents information in two major sections one section describing the CLI for the ITG-SA Media Card and the other section describing the CLI for the MC32S Media Card. Each major section contains two minor sections, one describing the Command Groups and commands available in the OAM security shell for the card(s), and the other describing the Command Groups and commands available in the PDT security shell for the card(s). The PDT security shell sections contain tables for two categories of Command Groups those that are only available in the PDT security shell, and those that are available in both the OAM and PDT security shells. The tables representing the second category of Command Group contain the commands that are available only in the PDT security shell. Commands that are available in the Command Groups in the OAM security shell are not repeated in the equivalent Command Groups in the PDT security shell section.

ITG-SA command line interface commands

OAM security shell commands
This section lists the Command Groups and commands available in the Operations, Administration, and Maintenance [OAM]) security shell for the ITG-SA and MC32S media cards. To access the OAM security shell of the ITG-SA media card, you must logon to the card with your userid/password combination. The OAM security shell can only be accessed if your

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

541

Media Card command line interface commands

password is configured for OAM access. The CLI command prompt in the OAM security shell is 'ipl>'. The following section identifies the Command Groups in the OAM security shell. All subsequent sections are specific to a given OAM Command Group and describe the commands in the Command Group.

OAM Command groups

The following table lists the Command Groups in the OAM security shell. To display a list of the Command Groups available in the OAM security shell, type help at the OAM security shell prompt (ipl>). Table 20: OAM CLI command groups
Command group General Purpose Description General purpose commands. Commands Table 21: OAM General purpose commands on page 544 Table 22: OAM File transfer commands on page 546 Table 23: OAM IP configuration commands on page 549 Table 24: OAM Reset commands on page 550 Table 25: OAM DSP commands on page 550 Table 26: OAM IP Phone firmware upgrade commands on page 550 Table 27: OAM Shell command on page 553 Table 28: OAM Voice Gateway commands on page 553 Table 29: OAM Data Path Capture Tool

File Transfer

File transfer commands.

IP configuration

IP configuration commands.

Reset

Reset commands.

DSP

DSP commands.

Upgrade

Upgrade commands.

IPL> shell

IPL> shell command.

Voice Gateway

Voice Gateway commands.

Data Path Capture Data path capture tool commands. Tool

542

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ITG-SA command line interface commands

Command group

Description

Commands commands on page 553

Graceful Disable

Graceful disable commands.

Table 30: OAM Graceful TPS commands on page 554 Table 31: OAM IP Phone Loss Plan (UK) commands on page 555 Table 32: OAM Patch and Patching Tool commands on page 556 Table 33: OAM General Trace Tool commands on page 558 Table 34: OAM Protocol Trace Tool commands for the Network Connection Service on page 559 Table 35: OAM Maintenance Audit commands on page 560

IP Phone Loss Plan

IP Phone loss plan commands.

Patching Tool

Patching tool commands.

General trace tool

General trace tool commands.

Protocol trace tool

Protocol trace tool commands for the Network Connection Service.

Maintenance audit

Maintenance audit commands.

Security

Intrasystem and cryptographic key support OAM Security commands. commands on page 561

OAM Commands
The following sections contain the commands available within each Command Group in the OAM security shell. To display a list of commands in a specific OAM Command Group, type help <command group name> at the OAM security shell prompt (ipl>).

OAM General purpose commands

The following table lists the OAM general purpose commands in the OAM General purpose command group.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

543

Media Card command line interface commands

Table 21: OAM General purpose commands

Command Description Displays a summary of task control block information. Displays the complete command list. ? also shows the command list. Exits the CLI. Adds a route to the network routing table. The route is added to the host portion of the routing table. Displays the current host and network routing table. Turns OFF logging for the current logged-in TTY session. Turn ON logging for the current logged-in TTY session. Checks file system consistency. Checks the internal file system for errors. Where: ["disk"] specifies the target disk ("/C:") [instruction] specifies the action to be performed - 1 = repair file system errors and save the damaged clusters in files. - 2 = repair file system errors and return damaged cluster to the free pool. Element Manager Y N/A N/A Y

i itghelp logout routeadd ["Host/ Network IP address"] ["IP Gateway"] routeshow logprintoff logprinton chkdsk ["disk"] [instruction]

Y N/A N/A Y

ping ["host"] [numPackets]

Tests that a remote host is reachable. This command sends an ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packet to a network host. The host matching the destination address in the packet responds to the request. If a response is not returned, the sender times out. This command is useful to determine if other hosts or Voice Gateway Media Cards are communicating with the sender card. Where:

544

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ITG-SA command line interface commands

Command

Description ["host"] = the IP address of the network host to ping [numPackets] = the number of ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packets to send If not specified, ping runs until it is stopped by Ctrl-C.

Element Manager

itgcardshow itgmemshow ifshow IpInfoShow

Displays Voice Gateway Media Card information. Displays memory usage on the Voice Gateway Media Card. Displays the attached network interfaces. Displays information about an IP telephony node. IP addresses for the ELAN and TLAN subnets default router for the ELAN and TLAN subnets subnet mask for the ELAN and TLAN subnets IP routing table IP configuration of the node

Y Y Y Y

serialnumshow

Displays the serial number and PEC of the Voice Gateway Media Card card. This is the same serial number displayed in the LD 32 IDC command.

firmwareversionsh Displays the firmware version number. ow numChannelsShow swversionshow logFileOn logFileOff logshow
Displays number of available channels. Displays the software version. Turns on error logging to the syslog file. Turns off error logging to the syslog file. Displays information about the current logging configuration. Indicates whether logging is on or off. Turns ON error logging to the console. Turns OFF error logging to the console. Displays the PBX link status. Displays information about the link to the CPU, including the configuration and link status.

Y Y Y N/A N/A Y

logconsoleon logconsoleoff pbxlinkshow

Y N/A Y

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

545

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description Generates ITGxxxx test alarms. Generates ITSxxxx test alarms. Sets the packet loss logging and alarm threshold. Where: [xxx] = a number between 1 and 1000, represents the threshold in 0.1% increments. The default value is 10 (1%). Packet loss which exceeds the threshold generates an SNMP trap and writes a message to the log file if logging is enabled.

Element Manager Y N/A N/A

itgalarmtest itsalarmtest itgPLThreshold [xxx]

elmshow itgchanstateshow

Displays a list of supported languages. Displays the state for channels. e.g. busy or idle.

N/A Y

OAM File transfer commands

The following table lists the OAM file transfer commands in the OAM File transfer command group. Table 22: OAM File transfer commands
Command Description Loads a new version of software from the FTP host to the Voice Gateway Media Card. Updates the software on the Voice Gateway Media Card with the binary file received from an FTP server corresponding to the ["hostname"] IP address. The Voice Gateway Media Card FTP client performs a Get which downloads the file to the flash bank. A checksum is calculated to verify correct delivery. Once the new software version is successfully downloaded, the Voice Gateway Media Card must be rebooted with cardReset to run the new software. ["Hostname"] refers to either the IP address of the FTP host, the Voice Gateway Media Card itself, or another Voice Gateway Media Card, when a PC card in the /A: drive of the Voice Gateway Media Card contains the software binary file. Sends an updated CONFIG.INI file from TM to the Voice Gateway Media Card. Element Manager N/A

swDownload ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"]

configFileGet ["hostname"] ["username"]

546

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ITG-SA command line interface commands

Command

Description Updates the CONFIG.INI file on the Voice Gateway Media Card with the CONFIG.INI file on the specified host, account, and path. The configFileGet task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the file to flash file system. The CONFIG.INI file also contains the NRS IP address, gateway password, and gateway DNport mapping table. Updates the BOOTPtab file on the Voice Gateway Media Card with the BOOTPtab file on the specified host, account and path. The bootpFileGet task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the file to flash file system.

Element Manager

["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"]

bootPFileGet ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] hostFileGet ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] ["ITGFileName"] [listener] currOMFilePut ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] prevOMFilePut ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] LogFilePut ["hostname"] ["username"]

Transfers any file from an FTP Server to the Voice Gateway Media Card. This command gets any file from the host and does a Get using FTP to the Voice Gateway Media Card. ["ITGFileName"] = full path AND filename of where the file is to be placed. [listener] = indicates which module to inform of the successful file transfer. It can be set to 1 to be disabled. Sends the current Operational Measurements (OM) file to the specified host. The OMFilePut task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the Voice Gateway Media Card Operational Measurements file to the specified location on the host. Sends the previous Operational Measurements (OM) file to the specified host. The OMFilePut task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the Voice Gateway Media Card Operational Measurements file to the specified location on the host. Sends the syslog file from the Voice Gateway Media Card to TM.

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

547

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description

Element Manager

["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] bootPFilePut ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] hostFilePut ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] ["ITGFileName"] omFilePut ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] firmwareFileGet ["ServerIP"] ["UserID"] ["Password"] ["Directory path"] ["Filename"]
Sends the BOOTPtab file from the Voice Gateway Media Card to TM. Y

Transfers any file from the Voice Gateway Media Card to an FTP Server.

Sends the current Operational Measurements (OM) file to the specified host.

N/A

Initiates a firmware download from a specified FTP server. After the download is completed, the downloaded file is checked for Enhanced Header (or proper naming). If the file is considered a valid firmware file, the UMS database is updated accordingly. Where: ["ServerIP"] FTP server IP address from where the firmware will be retrieved ["UserID"], ["Password"] credentials for logging into the FTP server ["directory path"] absolute or relative path to the firmware file (does not include the file name itself) ["Filename"] name of the firmware file on the FTP server

548

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ITG-SA command line interface commands

Command

Description Use the firmwareFileGet command instead of the firmwareFileGetI2004, firmwareFileGetI2002, and firmwareFileGetIPP2 commands.

Element Manager

firmwareFilePut ["ServerIP"] ["UserID"] ["Password"] ["Directory path"] ["Filename"]

Uploads F/W file to the specified FTP server. The file is added for consistency with existing firmwareFilePutI2004 and firmwareFilePutI2002 commands.

OAM IP configuration commands

The following table lists the OAM IP configuration commands in the OAM IP configuration command group. Table 23: OAM IP configuration commands
Command Description Sets the IP address in NVRAM. Sets the default gateway address in NVRAM. Sets the subnet mask in NVRAM. Displays the values of the IP parameters that reside in NVRAM. Clears the IP parameters in NVRAM. Sets the leader bit in NVRAM. Clears the leader bit in NVRAM, but does not erase the IP parameters in NVRAM. Sets the IP address, gateway, subnet mask. Also sets the boot method to static, and the Leader bit in NVRAM. This command performs all of the necessary actions to make a Leader. Clears the Leader information in NVRAM, sets the boot method to use BOOTP, and removes the old configuration files. Makes a Leader card into a Follower card. Sets the duplex mode of the TLAN network interface. Element Manager N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Y

NVRIPSet NVRGWSet NVRSMSet NVRIPShow NVRClear nvramLeaderSet nvramLeaderClr setLeader [IP Address] [IP gateway] [subnet mask] clearLeader

tLanDuplexSet

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

549

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description Sets the speed of the TLAN network interface.

Element Manager N/A

tLanSpeedSet

OAM Reset commands

The following table lists the OAM reset commands in the OAM Reset command group. Table 24: OAM Reset commands
Command Description Resets the Voice Gateway Media Card card. Performs a warm reboot of card. Resets the timer for the operational measurement file. Displays the reason for the last card reset. Element Manager N/A Y N/A

cardreset resetOM lastResetReason

OAM DSP commands

The following table lists the OAM DSP commands in the OAM DSP Command Group. Table 25: OAM DSP commands
Command Description Resets the specified DSP. Displays the number of DSP channels for each DSP DB. Element Manager N/A Y N/A

DSPReset DSPNumShow dspSWVersionShow

OAM IP Phone firmware upgrade commands

The following table lists the OAM IP Phone firmware upgrade commands in the OAM SIP Phone firmware upgrade Command Group. Table 26: OAM IP Phone firmware upgrade commands
Command Description Changes the current user name and password of the OAM security shell. Upgrades all registered sets according to policy and firmware file. Where: Element Manager N/A Y

shellPasswordSet umsUpgradeAll ["hh:mmx"]

550

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ITG-SA command line interface commands

Command

Description hh:mm = specifies the time when the upgrade will occur x = specifies whether the time is AM or PM - a = AM - p = PM Caution: If the umsUpgradeAll command is used without the time parameter, all IP Phones registered on cards that are logged into are immediately taken out of service. Use the time parameter with the command to prevent this from happening.

Element Manager

umsUpgradeTimerSh Displays the upgrade schedule. ow umsUpgradeTimerCa Cancels the scheduled upgrade. ncel firmwareFileGet ["ServerIP"] ["UserID"] ["Password"] ["Directory path"] ["Filename"]
Initiates a firmware download from a specified FTP server. After the download is completed, the downloaded file is checked for Enhanced Header (or proper naming). If the file is considered a valid firmware file, the UMS database is updated accordingly. Where: ["ServerIP"] FTP server IP address from where the firmware will be retrieved ["UserID"], ["Password"] credentials for logging into the FTP server ["directory path"] absolute or relative path to the firmware file (does not include the file name itself) ["Filename"] name of the firmware file on the FTP server Use the firmwareFileGet command instead of the firmwareFileGetI2004, firmwareFileGetI2002, and firmwareFileGetIPP2 commands.

Y Y Y

firmwareFilePut ["ServerIP"] ["UserID"] ["Password"]

Uploads F/W file to the specified FTP server. The file is added for consistency with existing firmwareFilePutI2004 and firmwareFilePutI2002 commands.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

551

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description

Element Manager

["Directory path"] ["Filename"] uftpTurboMode ["HH:MM/start/ stop/on/off"] [MM] ["show"]

Configures maintenance mode. Where: "HH:MM" time to enter Maintenance Mode in 24-hour format "start" enter Maintenance Mode immediately "stop" stop Maintenance Mode "on" allow Signaling Server to enter Maintenance Mode "off" do not allow Signaling Server to enter Maintenance Mode MM optional parameter that defines the length of time in minutes that Maintenance Mode is to be maintained "show" displays the same output as uftpTurboModeShow If no parameter is entered, Upgrade Manager defaults to uftpturboMode "start". Y

uftpTurboModeShow Displays the current status of maintenance

mode.

Y Y

uftpTurboModeTime Configures the idle timeout timer for maintenance mode. outSet [MM]
Where: MM optional parameter that defines the number of minutes the Upgrade Manager waits after the last firmware download job is started before returning the Signaling Server to normal mode If this parameter is configured as 0 (zero), the Upgrade Manager never exits Maintenance Mode unless the umsUpgradeModeSet command is issued with the "stop" parameter. If no parameter is entered, then the current timeout setting is displayed.

OAM Shell command

The following table lists the OAM shell command in the OAM Shell Command Group.

552

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ITG-SA command line interface commands

Table 27: OAM Shell command

Command Description Changes the current user name and password of the OAM security shell. Element Manager N/A

shellPasswordSet

OAM Voice Gateway commands

The following table lists the OAM shell command in the OAM Shell Command Group. Table 28: OAM Voice Gateway commands
Command Description Gracefully disables Voice Gateway services. Enables the Voice Gateway service. Toggle gateway packet loss logging ON/OFF. Displays information about the active (non-idle and equipped) gateway channels. Entering this command with the IP Address of an IP Phone displays the identification of the Voice Gateway Media Card that has the gateway channel being used by the IP Phone. This is useful when there is a requirement to collect gateway statistics (for example, packet loss). Displays information about all gateway channels. Element Manager N/A N/A N/A Y

disiVGW enaVGW vgwPLLog vgwshow

vgwShowALL PrintVGWChannels ipstatShow cardRoleShow

OAM Data Path Capture Tool commands

The following table lists the OAM data path capture tool commands in the OAM Data Path Capture Tool Command Group. Table 29: OAM Data Path Capture Tool commands
Command Description Begins the audio data capture operation for a specified gateway channel. Where [tcid] = gateway channel id. Element Manager N/A

captureStart [tcid]

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

553

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description 0 to 23 for ITG-P card 0 to 31 for MC32 card Audio data on the gateway channel begins to be captured to the circular queue.

Element Manager

captureStop captureSaveLocal ["filename"]

Stops the audio data capture. Dumps the contents of the circular queue (captured gateway channel audio data) to the specified file on the memory PC Card inserted in the /A: drive on the Voice Gateway Media Card faceplate. Where ["filename"] = the name to assign to the captured gateway channel audio data file on the memory PC card.

N/A N/A

captureSaveRemote FTPs the contents of the circular queue (captured gateway channel audio data) to the specified file ["filename"]
on the remove server. Where ["filename"] = the name to assign to the captured gateway channel audio data file on the FTP server.

N/A

captureFree

Frees the circular queue from gateway channel audio data capture operations.

N/A

OAM Graceful TPS commands

The following table lists the OAM graceful TPS commands in the OAM Graceful TPS Command Group. Table 30: OAM Graceful TPS commands
Command Description Gracefully switches all registered resources (IP Phones, Virtual Trunks, and Voice Gateways) to the other Voice Gateway Media Cards or Signaling Servers located in the same node. This command does not interrupt established calls. Gracefully voice gateway service on the Voice Gateway Media Card. Gracefully disables the LTPS service on the Voice Gateway Media Card. Element Manager Y

disServices

disiAll disiTPS

Y Y

554

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ITG-SA command line interface commands

Command

Description Prevents new IP Phones from registering on the card, and all registered IP Phones are redirected to another card, when idle.

Element Manager

disiVGW enaALL enlServices

Gracefully disables Voice Gateway services. Enables voice gateway service on the Voice Gateway Media Card. Enables all Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Servers in the node to accept registration of resources. Enables TPS service (opposite of

N/A Y Y

enaTPS

disitps
) Enables the Voice Gateway service. N/A

enaVGW

OAM IP Phone Loss Plan (UK) commands

The following table lists the OAM IP Phone loss plan (UK) command in the OAM IP Phone Loss Plan (UK) Command Group. Table 31: OAM IP Phone Loss Plan (UK) commands
Command Description Sets the loss plan values on the IP Phone to UKspecific values. Sets the loss plan values on the IP Phone to default values. Displays the current IP Phone loss plan settings. Displays the offsets and current values for the handset, headset, and handsfree RLR and SLR. Allows a variable offset from the default loss plan to be entered for the specified transducer (handset, headset, or handsfree). Where: [transducer] = identity of the transducer [rlrOffset] = value to offset the audio level heard on the IP Phone Positive numbers reduce the audio level (add loss), and negative numbers increase the audio level (add gain). [slrOffset] = value to offset the audio level transmitted from the IP Phone Element Manager Y Y Y

UKLossPlanSet UKLossPlanClr lossPlanPrt

lossPlanSet [transducer] [rlrOffset] [slrOffset]

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

555

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description Positive numbers reduce the audio level (add loss), and negative numbers increase the audio level (add gain).

Element Manager

lossPlanClr

Sets the loss plan values on the IP Phone to default values. Removes the loss plan adjustments and returs the IP Phone to the default loss plan levels.

N/A

OAM Patch and Patching Tool commands

The following table lists the OAM patch and patching tool commands in the OAM Patch and Patching Tool Command Group. Table 32: OAM Patch and Patching Tool commands
Command Description Loads a patch file from the file system in Flash memory into DRAM memory, where [patchfilename] is the filename or path of the patch file. If a filename alone is provided, the patch must be in the /C:/u/patch directory. Otherwise, the full or relative path can be provided. When a patch is successfully loaded, the command returns a patch handle number. The patch handle number is used as input to other patch commands (pins, poos, pout, and plis). The loaded patch is inactive until it is put into service using the pins command. If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted for the patch filename and other information. Puts a patch that has been loaded into memory (using the pload command) into service, where [handle] is the number returned by the pload command. If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle]. If issued successfully, the command indicates the global procedures, functions, or areas of memory affected by the patch. You are then prompted and have the choice to proceed or not to proceed. Deactivates a patch (takes it out-of-service) by restoring the patched procedure to its original state. Element Manager N/A

pload ["patchfilename"]

pins [handle]

N/A

poos [handle]

N/A

556

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ITG-SA command line interface commands

Command

Description If the poos command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle].

Element Manager

pout [handle]

Removes a patch from DRAM memory. The patch must be taken out-of-service (using the poos command) before it can be removed from the system. If the pout command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a handle. Displays summary status information for one or all loaded patches. For each patch, the following information is displayed: patch handle, filename, reference number, whether the patch is in-service or out-ofservice, the reason why the patch is out-ofservice (if applicable), and whether the patch is marked for retention or not. Patch retention means that if a reset occurs, then the patch is automatically reloaded into memory and its state (active or inactive) is restored to what it was prior to the system going down. If the [handle] is provided, only the information for the specified patch is displayed. If the command is issued without a parameter, information for all the patches is displayed. Lists detailed patch status information for a loaded patch. If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle]. Creates memory patches for the Media Gateway Card. The command has no parameter(s). The release of the patch is assumed to be the same as that of the current load. The address to be patched is checked to ensure that it is in range. For each address that is changed, the "old" contents are assumed to be the current contents of that memory address. If a path is not provided for the new path filename then it is assumed that the patch is in the /C:/u/ patch directory. Once a memory patch is created using the pnew command, it can be loaded and activated like any other patch.

N/A

pstat [handle]

N/A

plis [handle]

N/A

pnew

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

557

Media Card command line interface commands

OAM General Trace Tool commands

The following table lists the OAM general trace tool commands in the OAM General Trace Tool Command Group. Table 33: OAM General Trace Tool commands
Command Description Displays the names of active traces in the system. Disables the trace facilities from writing to the TTY, SYSLOG, and specified files. Causes all traces that use the monitorLib server to stop their output. This is a temporary disabling function. Disables the trace facilities from writing to the TTY. Blocks all logging of information received by the monitorLib service to the TTY output. This does not include traces directed through the monitorLib service to the RPT.LOG or SYSLOG.n services. Disables the trace facilities from writing to the SYSLOG and specified files. Causes the monitorLib server to stop logging to the log files any and all trace information received by the service. The log files include syslog.n for the Voice Gateway Media Card and rpt.log for the Signaling Server. Enables the trace facilities to resume writing to the TTY, SYSLOG, and/or specified files. Clears the blocking of all trace information imposed on the monitorLib service by the traceAllOff, tracePrintOff, and traceFileOff commands. By default, all tracing is on. Enables the trace facilities to resume writing to the TTY. Clears only the TTY output blocking that was imposed by the traceAllOff and tracePrintOff commands. Enables the trace facilities to resume writing to the SYSLOG and/or specified files. Clears only the blocking of logging to files that was imposed by the traceAllOff and traceFileOff commands. Element Manager Y Y

traceShow traceAllOff

tracePrintOff

traceFileOff

traceAllOn

tracePrintOn

traceFileOn

558

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

ITG-SA command line interface commands

OAM Protocol Trace Tool commands for the Network Connection Service
The following table lists the OAM protocol trace tool commands for the Network Connection Service (NCS) in the OAM Protocol Trace Tool commands for the Network Connection Service Command Group. Table 34: OAM Protocol Trace Tool commands for the Network Connection Service
Command Description Element Manager Y

tpsARTrace IP [IP Enables tracing for the Network Connection address] ID [User Server (NCS). Allows tracing of the tpsAR protocol, which is ID] ALL

used to determine where an IP Phone should register. Where: IP address = a string containing the IP Phones IP address User ID = the ID of the IP Phone to be traced (the DN used to log in) or the H323_Alias of where the IP Phone is trying to register ALL = all IP Phones are to be monitored

tpsARTraceOff IP [IP address] ID [User ID] ALL

Disables tracing for the Network Connection Server (NCS). Removes the specified endpoint from the list of endpoints to be traced. Where: IP address = a string containing the IP Phones IP address User ID = the ID of the IP Phone being traced (the DN used to log in) or the H323_Alias of where the IP Phone is =registered ALL = removes monitoring of all IP Phones

N/A

tpsAROutput Modifies the destination for the traced output of [Output_Destinati the NCS. Sets the output for all tpsAR protocol traces. on] ["File Pathname"] [Output_Destination] = where all the trace
messages for the tpsARTraceSet are to be directed The values are: - 1 = TTY - 2 = RPTLOG - 3 = File - 4 =TTY + File

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

559

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description If the command is run from the OAM prompt or PDT prompt on the Signaling Server, then the values are the actual word, not a number: - TTY - RPTLOG - FILE - TTY + FILE ["File Pathname"] = specifies the output file name if option 3 or 4 is selected.

Element Manager

tpsARTraceSetting Displays the trace settings and items being traced for the NCS trace. s
Displays the trace tool settings, which endpoints are being traced, and where the trace output is being directed.

N/A

tpsARTraceHelp

Displays help on the tpsARTrace commands. Displays a list of all CLI commands used for tracing tpsAR protocol messages, including usage and parameters.

N/A

OAM Maintenance Audit commands

The following table lists the OAM maintenance audit command in the OAM Maintenance Audit Command Group. Table 35: OAM Maintenance Audit commands
Command Description Displays the following information about a Voice Gateway Media Card: whether a card reboot is enabled the time a card reboot will occur if a non- critical task is found suspended a list of all tasks being monitored, and their designation (critical or non-critical) Element Manager N/A

auditShow

auditHistoryShow auditRebootSet [switch]

Displays the recent history of the audit task activity in the audit.his file. Globally disables the card reboot from this audit task. Where [switch] specifies whether a card reboot should occur when a suspended task is detected.

N/A N/A

560

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

MC32S Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description This switch is set to "1" by default (reboot occurs). If set to "0", no card reboot occurs when a suspended task is found for critical or non-critical tasks.

Element Manager

auditRebootTimeSe Sets the reset time for non-critical suspended tasks. t ["HH:MM"]
Where: ["HH:MM"] = the reset time. Format is 24-hour clock. Default is 02:00 (2 AM)

N/A

OAM Security commands

The following table lists the OAM security commands in the OAM Security Command Group. Table 36: OAM Security commands
Command Description Show the Primary Security Server IP address and fingerprint. Element Manager N/A

statSecDomain

PDT security shell commands

New PDT security command group containing new commands in support of the Secure Transport enhancement. joinSecDomain leaveSecDomain

MC32S Command Line Interface commands

OAM security shell commands
This section lists the Command Groups and commands available in the Operations, Administration, and Maintenance [OAM]) security shell for the MC32S Voice Gateway Media Card. To access the OAM security shell, you must force the MC32S logon prompt to appear by holding down the CTRL key and typing oam, and logon to the card with your userid/password

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

561

Media Card command line interface commands

combination. The OAM security shell can only be accessed if your password is configured for OAM access. The CLI command prompt in the OAM security shell is <oam>. The following section identifies the Command Groups in the OAM security shell. All subsequent sections are specific to a given OAM Command Group and describe the commands in the Command Group.

OAM Command groups

The following table lists the Command Groups in the OAM security shell. To display a list of the Command Groups available in the OAM security shell, type help at the OAM security shell prompt (oam>). Table 37: OAM CLI command groups
Command group General Description General purpose commands. Commands Table 38: OAM General commands on page 563 Table 39: OAM VGW commands on page 563 Table 40: OAM iset commands on page 564 Table 41: OAM disk commands on page 566 Table 42: OAM special commands on page 568 Table 43: OAM Security commands on page 569

VGW

Voice Gateway application administration and maintenance commands. IP Phone and LTPS administration and maintenance commands. Disk and file commands.

ISET

Disk

Special

Special purpose PDT commands.

Security

Intrasystem and cryptographic key support commands.

OAM Commands
The following sections contain the commands available within each Command Group in the OAM security shell. To display a list of commands in a specific OAM Command Group, type help <command group name> at the OAM security shell prompt (oam>).

562

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

MC32S Command Line Interface commands

OAM General commands: general purpose

The following table lists the OAM general purpose commands in the OAM General command group. Table 38: OAM General commands
Command Description Terminate current shell. Show a list of available commands. Displays vxWorksTM version, date of build, and other information. Displays the attached network interfaces. Tests that a remote host is reachable. This command sends an ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packet to a network host. The host matching the destination address in the packet responds to the request. If a response is not returned, the sender times out. This command is useful to determine if other hosts or Voice Gateway Media Cards are communicating with the sender card. Where: ["host"] = the IP address of the network host to ping [numPackets] = the number of ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packets to send If not specified, ping runs until it is stopped by Ctrl-C. Element Manager N/A N/A Y Y Y

exit help version ifshow ping ["host"] [numPackets]

OAM VGW commands: MC32S gateway application administration and maintenance

The following table lists the OAM voice gateway application administration and maintenance commands in the OAM VGW command group. Table 39: OAM VGW commands
Command Description Displays the number of DSP channels for each DSP DB. Displays the state of all channels on the DSP DBs. Element Manager Y Y

dspnumshow dspchanstateshow

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

563

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description Perform a basic DSP hardware diagnostic check. Perform a DSP loopback test for all currently inactive channels or given channels.

Element Manager Y Y

dsphwcheck dsplooptest [card1] [channel1] [card2] [channel2] vgwshow

Displays information about the active (non-idle and equipped) gateway channels. Entering this command with the IP Address of an IP Phone displays the identification of the Voice Gateway Media Card that has the gateway channel being used by the IP Phone. This is useful when there is a requirement to collect gateway statistics (for example, packet loss). Displays information about all gateway channels. Displays all channel information for a specified card. Reset DSPs. Toggle gateway packet loss logging ON/OFF. Displays number of available channels. Displays the current OM data on the console. Resets the timer for the operational measurement file. Displays the state for channels. e.g. busy or idle.

vgwshowall vgwshowcard dspreset vgwpllog numchannelsshow ommshow resetom itgchanstateshow

Y Y N/A N/A Y Y Y Y

OAM iset commands: iset module

The following table lists the OAM iset module commands in the OAM iset command group. Table 40: OAM iset commands
Command Description Displays a list of supported languages. Gracefully disables the LTPS service on the Voice Gateway Media Card. Element Manager N/A N/A

elmshow disitps

564

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

MC32S Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description Prevents new IP Phones from registering on the card, and all registered IP Phones are redirected to another card, when idle.

Element Manager

enatps

Enables TPS service (opposite of

N/A

disitps
) Sets the loss plan values on the IP Phone to UKspecific values. Allows a variable offset from the default loss plan to be entered for the specified transducer (handset, headset, or handsfree). Where: [transducer] = identity of the transducer [rlrOffset] = value to offset the audio level heard on the IP Phone Positive numbers reduce the audio level (add loss), and negative numbers increase the audio level (add gain). [slrOffset] = value to offset the audio level transmitted from the IP Phone Positive numbers reduce the audio level (add loss), and negative numbers increase the audio level (add gain). N/A N/A

uklossplanset lossplanset [transducer] [rlrOffset] [slrOffset]

uklossplanclr lossplanclr

Sets the loss plan values on the IP Phone to default values. Sets the loss plan values on the IP Phone to default values. Removes the loss plan adjustments and returs the IP Phone to the default loss plan levels. Displays the current IP Phone loss plan settings. Displays the offsets and current values for the handset, headset, and handsfree RLR and SLR. Displays IP Phone firmware download information. Sets the packet loss logging and alarm threshold. Where: [xxx] = a number between 1 and 1000, represents the threshold in 0.1% increments.

N/A N/A

lossplanprt

N/A

uftpshow itgplthreshold [xxx]

N/A N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

565

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description The default value is 10 (1%). Packet loss which exceeds the threshold generates an SNMP trap and writes a message to the log file if logging is enabled.

Element Manager

disservices

Gracefully switches all registered resources (IP Phones, Virtual Trunks, and Voice Gateways) to the other Voice Gateway Media Cards or Signaling Servers located in the same node. This command does not interrupt established calls. Causes all the Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Servers in the node to accept registration of resources. Displays the status of services (tps/iset/vtrk/gk).

enlservices

servicestatussho w

OAM disk commands: disk and file commands

The following table lists the OAM disk and file commands in the OAM disk command group. Table 41: OAM disk commands
Command Description Updates the BOOTPtab file on the Voice Gateway Media Card with the BOOTPtab file on the specified host, account and path. The bootpFileGet task on the host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the file to the flash file system. Element Manager N/A

bootpfileget ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] bootpfileput ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] configfileget ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory

Sends the BOOTPtab file from the Voice Gateway Media Card to TM.

N/A

Sends an updated CONFIG.INI file from TM to the Voice Gateway Media Card. Updates the CONFIG.INI file on the Voice Gateway Media Card with the CONFIG.INI file on the specified host, account, and path. The

N/A

566

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

MC32S Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description configFileGet task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the file to flash file system. The CONFIG.INI file also contains the NRS IP address, gateway password, and gateway DNport mapping table. Sends the current Operational Measurements (OM) file to the specified host. The OMFilePut task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the Voice Gateway Media Card Operational Measurements file to the specified location on the host. Transfers any file from an FTP Server to the Voice Gateway Media Card. This command gets any file from the host and does a Get using FTP to the Voice Gateway Media Card. ["ITGFileName"] = full path AND filename of where the file is to be placed. [listener] = indicates which module to inform of the successful file transfer. It can be set to 1 to disable feature. Transfers any file from the Voice Gateway Media Card to an FTP Server.

Element Manager

path"] ["filename"]

curromfileput ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] hostfileget ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] ["ITGFileName"] [listener] hostfileput ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] ["ITGFileName"] omfileput ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] prevomfileput ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory

N/A

N/A

N/A

Sends the current Operational Measurements (OM) file to the specified host.

N/A

Sends the previous Operational Measurements (OM) file to the specified host. The OMFilePut task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the Voice Gateway Media Card

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

567

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description Operational Measurements file to the specified location on the host.

Element Manager

path"] ["filename"]

OAM special commands: special purpose PDT commands

The following table lists the OAM special commands in the OAM special command group. Table 42: OAM special commands
Command Description Manipulate the DEPLIST. Tests SNMP traps. Lists all report display commands. Where [filename] is the name of the report file to be opened. Y Y Element Manager N/A Y N/A Y

mdp testalarm rdhelp

rdopen [filename] Opens a report log file.

rdgo [N] rd [S] [R]

Goes to a specific record. Where [N] is the absolute record number. Displays a specified number of records starting at a specified point. Where: [S] is the number of steps to traverse to the starting point. [R] is the number of records to display. Both [S] and [R] can be negative.

rds [S] [R]

Displays a specified number of records, with a symbolic dump, starting at a specified point. Where: [S] is the number of steps to traverse to the starting point. [R] is the number of records to display. Both [S] and [R] can be negative.

rdshow rdall rdtail [N]

Displays general information about the current log file and the current rd settings. Displays all records. Displays the specified number of newest records. Where [N] is the number of records to display.

Y N/A Y

568

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

MC32S Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description Displays the specified number of oldest records. Where [N] is the number of records to display. Opens the next log file. Opens the previous log file. Converts a log file to text. Where [filename] is the name of the log file to be converted.

Element Manager Y Y Y Y

rdhead [N] rdnext rdprev rdsconvert [filename]

OAM Security commands: Intrasystem and cryptographic key support

The following table lists the OAM Security commands in the OAM Security command group. Table 43: OAM Security commands
Command Description Disable all secure shells in the system. Element Manager Y Y Y Y N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Y N/A Y

disSecureShells

disInsecureShells Disables all insecure shells in the system. enlInsecureShells Enable all insecure shells in the system. enlSecureShells isssDecom isssReset isssShow joinSecDomain leaveSecDomain
Enables all secure shells in the system. Clean up ISSS settings and delete ISSS configuration files. Reset ISSS configuration. Print out ISSS settings. Establish mutual trust with the primary security server. Remove the primary security server mutual trust information from the device.

statInsecureShell Displays whether insecure shell access is enabled or disabled. s statSecDomain statSecureShells
Show the Primary Security Server IP address and fingerprint. Displays whether secure shell access is enabled or disabled.

PDT security shell commands

This section lists the Command Groups and commands available in the Problem Determination Tool (PDT) security shell for the MC32S Media Card. To access the PDT security shell, you

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

569

Media Card command line interface commands

must force the MC32S Media Card logon prompt to appear by holding down the CTRL key and typing pdt, and logon to the card with your userid/password combination. The PDT security shell can only be accessed if your password is configured for PDT security shell access. The CLI command prompt in the PDT security shell is 'pdt>'. This section contains tables corresponding to Command Groups that are available in the PDT security shell. PDT security shell capabilities are inclusive of all OAM security shell capabilities. All Command Groups and commands available in the OAM security shell for the MC32S Media Card are available in the PDT security shell by default. This section contains tables for two categories of Command Groups those that are only available in the PDT security shell, and those that are available in both the OAM and PDT security shells, but contain commands that are only available in the PDT security shell. The tables representing the second category of Command Group contain only the commands available in the PDT security shell. Commands that are available in both security shells are not repeated in this section. See OAM security shell commands on page 561 for descriptions of these commands.

PDT Command groups

The following table lists the Command Groups that are available only in the PDT security shell (in italics), and OAM Command Groups that contain commands available only in the PDT security shell. To display a list of commands in a specific Command Group, type help <command group name> at the PDT security shell prompt (pdt>). Table 44: PDT CLI command groups
Command group General Description General purpose commands. PDT Commands Table 45: PDT General commands on page 571 Table 46: PDT system commands on page 572 Table 47: PDT Debug commands on page 575 Table 48: PDT disk commands on page 576 Table 49: PDT special commands on page 577

System

MC32S platform administration and maintenance commands.

Debug

PDT debug commands.

disk

Disk and file commands.

special

Special purpose PDT commands.

570

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

MC32S Command Line Interface commands

Command group security

Description Intrasystem and cryptographic key support commands.

PDT Commands Table 50: PDT Security commands on page 579

PDT Commands
The following tables list the PDT commands in each Command Group in the PDT security shell. To display a list of commands in a specific PDT security shell Command Group, type help <command group name> at the PDT security shell prompt(pdt>) .

PDT General commands: general purpose

The following table lists the PDT general purpose commands in the PDT General command group. These commands are in addition to the OAM commands listed in OAM General commands: general purpose on page 563. Table 45: PDT General commands
Command Description Displays the list of devices. Echo the inputs. Displays the 20 most recent commands entered in the shell. Displays a list of hosts. Displays a summary of task control block information. Displays memory usage and a list of free blocks. Displays shell access attempts. Receive a file over a serial connection using XMODEM. Displays detailed task control block information. Where: [name] is the name of the task. [taskID] is the ID of the task. [name] and [taskID] are mutually exclusive. Element Manager N/A N/A N/A Y N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

devs echo h hosts i mem rdaccess rx ti [name | taskid]

PDT system commands: MC32S platform administration and maintenance

The following table lists the PDT MC32S platform administration and maintenance commands in the PDT system command group.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

571

Media Card command line interface commands

Table 46: PDT system commands

Command Description Displays basic setup information. Displays basic information about the MC32S. Displays all of the MAC addresses associated with the Ethernet ports (both internal and external) on the embedded Ethernet switch. Displays the total, used and available disk space available on the internal compact flash card. Displays the total, used and available RAM memory. Formats the internal compact flash. Displays the Ethernet port settings for the external and internal interfaces, including autonegotiation settings, duplex, port speed and port mirroring status. Allows mirroring of one of the embedded Ethernet switch ports. To disable mirroring of a port, use none for port2. Disables a port so it can be used for mirroring. Clears all port mirroring and reenables standard embedded Etherenet switch functionality. Displays the port speed and duplex setting for the ports of the embedded Ethernet switch. Displays the model and revision numbers for installed DBs. Resets the Voice Gateway Media Card card. Performs a warm reboot of card. Displays information about an IP telephony node. IP addresses for the ELAN and TLAN subnets default router for the ELAN and TLAN subnets subnet mask for the ELAN and TLAN subnets IP routing table IP configuration of the node Element Manager Y Y Y

mgcInfoShow mc32sinfoshow macshow

diskshow memshow diskformat ethportshow

Y Y N/A N/A

ethportmirror [port1] [port2]

N/A

ethportdisable [port] ethportreset ethspeedshow dbhwshow cardreset ipinfoshow

N/A N/A Y Y Y Y

572

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

MC32S Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description Turns ON logging to the console. Turns OFF logging to the console. Exits the shell. Turns OFF logging to the logged-in TTY session. Turn ON logging to the logged-in TTY session. Displays information about the current logging configuration. Display information about DSP DB Displays the PBX link status. Displays information about the link to the CPU, including the configuration and link status. Adds a route to the network routing table. The route is added to the host portion of the routing table. Displays the current host and network routing table. Displays the serial number and PEC of the card. Displays the software version. Sets the duplex mode of the TLAN network interface. Sets the speed of the TLAN network interface. Configures all IP parameters. Menu driven interface to change networking parameters. Displays the RMON statistics collected by the embedded Ethernet switch for a given port. Displays the RMON statistics collected by the embedded Ethernet switch for all ports. Resets all RMON statistics counters on the embedded Ethernet switch for a given port. Resets all RMON statistics counters for all ports on the embedded Ethernet switch.

Element Manager Y N/A N/A N/A N/A Y Y Y

logconsoleon logconsoleoff logout logprintoff logprinton logshow mgcDbShow pbxlinkshow

routeadd ["Host/ Network IP address"] ["IP Gateway"] routeshow serialnumshow swversionshow tlanduplexset tlanspeedset mc32ssetup

Y Y Y N/A N/A N/A

rmonstatshow [port] rmonstatshowall rmonstatreset [port] rmonstatresetall

Y Y Y Y

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

573

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description Sets the IP address, gateway, subnet mask. Also sets the boot method to static, and the Leader bit in NVRAM. Clears the Leader information in NVRAM, and sets the boot method to use BOOTP, thus, making the card a Follower. Loads a new version of software from the FTP host to the Voice Gateway Media Card. Updates the software on the Voice Gateway Media Card with the binary file received from an FTP server corresponding to the ["hostname"] IP address. The Voice Gateway Media Card FTP client performs a Get which downloads the file to the flash bank. A checksum is calculated to verify correct delivery. Once the new software version is successfully downloaded, the Voice Gateway Media Card must be rebooted with cardReset to run the new software. ["Hostname"] refers to either the IP address of the FTP host, the Voice Gateway Media Card itself, or another Voice Gateway Media Card, when a PC card in the /A: drive of the Voice Gateway Media Card contains the software binary file. Gracefully disables voice gateway service on the Voice Gateway Media Card. Enables voice gateway service on the Voice Gateway Media Card.

Element Manager Y

setleader [IP Address] [IP gateway] [subnet mask] clearleader

swDownload ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"]

disiall enaall

Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A N/A N/A N/A

firmwareversionsh Displays the firmware version number. ow itgalarmtest itgcardshow itgmemshow nvramleaderclr nvramleaderset nvrclear nvripset
Generates ITGxxxx test alarms. Displays Voice Gateway Media Card information. Displays memory usage on the Voice Gateway Media Card. Clears the leader bit in NVRAM, but does not erase the IP parameters in NVRAM. Sets the leader bit in NVRAM. Clears the IP parameters in NVRAM. Sets the IP address in NVRAM.

574

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

MC32S Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description Displays the values of the IP parameters that reside in NVRAM. Sets the default gateway address in NVRAM. Sets the subnet mask in NVRAM. Displays the faceplate message. Displays the MSP device type, ARM code, voice DSP revision, and T.38 version.

Element Manager N/A N/A N/A Y Y

nvripshow nvrgwset nvrsmset displayshow mspversionshow

PDT Debug commands: PDT debug

The following table lists the PDT debug commands in the PDT Debug command group. Table 47: PDT Debug commands
Command Description Changes the default directory. Where: [path] = the path and name of the new directory. The [path] of the new directory can be specified as a relative path. Element Manager N/A

cd [path]

chkdsk ["disk"] [instruction]

Checks file system consistency. Checks the internal file system for errors. Where: ["disk"] specifies the target disk ("/C:") [instruction] specifies the action to be performed - 1 = repair file system errors and save the damaged clusters in files. - 2 = repair file system errors and return damaged cluster to the free pool.

N/A

cp copy label ll ls

Copy many files to another directory. Copy from [input] file to [output] file. Creates, changes, and/or displays a device label. Displays a long list of the contents of a directory. Displays a short list of the contents of a directory.

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

575

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description Displays the current (working) directory. Displays the contents of a file.

Element Manager N/A N/A

pwd type

PDT disk commands: disk and file commands

The following table lists the PDT disk and file commands in the PDT disk command group. These commands are in addition to the OAM commands listed in OAM disk commands: disk and file commands on page 566 Table 48: PDT disk commands
Command Description Copies many files to another directory. Copies from one file to another file until an end-of-file (CTRL+d) is reached. Where: [input] = the name of the file to be copied from. If NULL, stdin is used. [output] is the name of the new or destination file to be copied to. If NULL, stdout is used. Element Manager N/A N/A

cp copy [input] [output]

label ll [path]

Creates, changes, and/or displays a device label. Displays a long list of the contents of a directory. Where: [path] = the path name of the directory. If path is not specified, the contents of the current directory are displayed.

N/A N/A

ls [path]

Displays the contents of a directory. Where: [path] = the path name of the directory. If [path] is not specified, the contents of the current directory are displayed.

N/A

pwd type

Displays the current (working) directory. Displays the contents of a file.

N/A N/A

576

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

MC32S Command Line Interface commands

PDT special commands: special purpose PDT commands

The following table lists the PDT special purpose PDT commands in the PDT special command group. These commands are in addition to the OAM commands listed in OAM special commands: special purpose PDT commands on page 568. Table 49: PDT special commands
Command Description Warm reboots the system. Cold reboots the system if the -1 parameter is specified. Puts a patch that has been loaded into memory (using the pload command) into service, where [handle] is the number returned by the pload command. If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle]. If issued successfully, the command indicates the global procedures, functions, or areas of memory affected by the patch. You are then prompted and have the choice to proceed or not to proceed. Lists detailed patch status information for a loaded patch. If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle]. Loads a patch file from the file system in Flash memory into DRAM memory, where [patch-filename] is the filename or path of the patch file. If a filename alone is provided, the patch must be in the /C:/u/patch directory. Otherwise, the full or relative path can be provided. When a patch is successfully loaded, the command returns a patch handle number. The patch handle number is used as input to other patch commands (pins, poos, pout, and plis). The loaded patch is inactive until it is put into service using the pins command. If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted for the patch filename and other information. Element Manager N/A

reboot [-1]

pins [handle]

N/A

plis [handle]

N/A

pload ["patchfilename"]

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

577

Media Card command line interface commands

Command

Description Creates memory patches for the Media Gateway Card. The command has no parameter(s). The release of the patch is assumed to be the same as that of the current load. The address to be patched is checked to ensure that it is in range. For each address that is changed, the "old" contents are assumed to be the current contents of that memory address. If a path is not provided for the new path filename then it is assumed that the patch is in the /C:/u/patch directory. Once a memory patch is created using the pnew command, it can be loaded and activated like any other patch. Deactivates a patch (takes it out-of-service) by restoring the patched procedure to its original state. If the poos command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle]. Removes a patch from DRAM memory. The patch must be taken out-of-service (using the poos command) before it can be removed from the system. If the pout command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a handle. Displays summary status information for one or all loaded patches. For each patch, the following information is displayed: patch handle, filename, reference number, whether the patch is in-service or out-of-service, the reason why the patch is out-of-service (if applicable), and whether the patch is marked for retention or not. Patch retention means that if a reset occurs, then the patch is automatically reloaded into memory and its state (active or inactive) is restored to what it was prior to the system going down. If the [handle] is provided, only the information for the specified patch is displayed. If the command is issued without

Element Manager N/A

pnew

poos [handle]

N/A

pout [handle]

N/A

pstat [handle]

N/A

578

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

MC32S Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description a parameter, information for all the patches is displayed.

Element Manager

PDT Security commands: Intrasystem and cryptographic key support

The following table lists the PDY intrasystem and cryptographic key support commands in the PDT Security command group. These commands are in addition to the OAM commands listed in OAM Security commands: Intrasystem and cryptographic key support on page 569 Table 50: PDT Security commands
Command Description Displays the SSH key. Clears the SSH key Generates the SSH key Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server. Remove the Primary Security Server mutual trust information from the device. Show the Primary Security Server IP address and fingerprint. Element Manager Y Y Y N/A N/A N/A

sshkeyshow sshKeyClear sshKeyGenerate joinSecDomain leaveSecDomain statSecDomain

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

579

Media Card command line interface commands

580

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 36: Media Gateway Controller command line interface commands

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 582 Level One (OAM) CLI commands on page 582 - OAM Command groups on page 582 - OAM General commands: General purpose on page 583 - OAM System commands: MGC platform administration and maintenance on page 584 - OAM VGW commands: Voice Gateway application administration and maintenance on page 585 - OAM Special commands: special purpose PDT on page 586 - OAM Security commands: intrasystem and cryptographic key support on page 587 Level Two (LDB) CLI commands on page 591 - LDB Command groups on page 591 - LDB General commands: general purpose on page 592 - LDB system commands: MGC platform administration and maintenance on page 593 - LDB Debug commands: PDT debug on page 593 - LDB disk commands: disk and file commands on page 594 - LDB special commands: special purpose PDT commands on page 595 - LDB Security commands: intrasystem and cryptographic key support commands on page 597

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

581

Media Gateway Controller command line interface commands

Introduction
This chapter identifies and describes the Command Line Interface (CLI) commands available on Gateway Controller cards in the Level One (Operations, Administration, and Maintenance [OAM]) and Level Two (Local Debug [LDB]) security shells. Gateway Controller cards can be Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card, Common Processor Media Gateway (CP MG) card, and Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC) card. The information in this chapter is presented in tables organized by Command Groups. Command Groups group together commands of similar functionality or purpose within a security shell. Each table relates to a particular Command Group and contains the associated commands, a description of each command, and an indication of whether the command is available through the Element Manager interface.

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

This section lists the Command Groups and commands available in the Level One (Operations, Administration, and Maintenance [OAM]) security shell. The OAM security shell can only be accessed if your password is configured for OAM access. To access the OAM security shell, you must force the MGC logon prompt to appear by holding down the CTRL key and typing oam. The prompt for each command in the OAM security shell is 'oam>'. The following section identifies the Command Groups in the OAM security shell. All subsequent sections are specific to a given OAM Command Group and describe the commands in the Command Group.

OAM Command groups

The following table lists the Command Groups available in the OAM security shell. To display a list of these Command Groups, type help at the OAM security shell prompt. Some of the Command Groups that are displayed in the OAM security shell contain commands that are only available in the LDB security shell. These Command Groups are italicized in the following table.

582

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Table 51: OAM CLI command groups

Command group General Description General purpose commands. Commands Table 52: OAM General commands on page 583 Table 53: OAM system commands on page 584 Table 54: OAM VGW commands on page 585 Not available in OAM security shell. Not available in OAM security shell. Table 55: OAM Special commands on page 586 Table 56: OAM Security commands on page 587

System

Gateway Controller platform administration and maintenance commands. Voice Gateway application administration and maintenance commands. PDT Debug commands Disk and file commands Special purpose PDT commands.

VGW

Debug Disk Special

Security

Intrasystem and cryptographic key support commands.

OAM Commands
The following tables list the commands available within each Command Group in the OAM security shell. To display a list of commands in a specific OAM Command Group, type help <command group name> at the OAM security shell prompt.

OAM General commands: General purpose

The following table lists the OAM general purpose commands in the OAM General Command Group. Table 52: OAM General commands
Command Description Terminate current shell. Show a list of available Command Groups. Element Manager N/A N/A

exit help

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

583

Media Gateway Controller command line interface commands

Command

Description Display VxWorksTM version, date of build, and other information.

Element Manager Y

version

OAM System commands: MGC platform administration and maintenance

The following table lists the OAM Gateway Controller platform administration and maintenance commands in the OAM System Command Group. Table 53: OAM system commands
Command Description Displays all of the MAC addresses associated with the Ethernet ports (both internal and external) on the embedded Ethernet switch. Displays the total, used and available disk space available on the internal compact flash card. Displays the total, used and available RAM memory. Displays the Ethernet port settings for the external and internal interfaces, including autonegotiation settings, duplex, port speed and port mirroring status. Displays the port speed and duplex setting for the ports of the embedded Ethernet switch. Displays the model and revision numbers for installed Daughterboards. Formats the internal compact flash on the Gateway Controller. Displays the RMON statistics collected by the embedded Ethernet switch for a given port. Displays the RMON statistics collected by the embedded Ethernet switch for all ports. Resets all RMON statistics counters on the embedded Ethernet switch for a given port. Resets all RMON statistics counters for all ports on the embedded Ethernet switch. Starts the MGC setup menu, allowing modifications to the local Gateway Controller Element Manager Y

macshow

diskshow memshow ethportshow

Y Y N/A

ethspeedshow dbhwshow diskformat rmonstatshow [port] rmonstatshowall rmonstatreset [port] rmonstatresetall mgcsetup

Y Y N/A Y Y Y Y N/A

584

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description configuration information, including local IP addresses, hostname and Call Server IP address.

Element Manager

swversionshow displayshow

Displays all of the versions of software/loadware currently in service on the Gateway Controller. Displays all messages currently being displayed on the 4 character LED of this Gateway Controller, except the superloop and shelf. Displays the MSP device type, ARM code, voice DSP revision, and T.38 version.

Y Y

mspversionshow

OAM VGW commands: Voice Gateway application administration and maintenance

The following table lists the OAM Voice Gateway application administration and maintenance commands in the OAM VGW Command Group. Table 54: OAM VGW commands
Command Description Displays the number of DSP channels for each DSP Daughterboard. Displays the state of all the channels on the DSP Daughterboards. This is analogous to the itgChanStateShow command for VGMC cards. Perform a basic DSP hardware diagnostic check. Perform DSP loopback test for all inactive channels, or for the channels entered. Displays information about busy gateway channels. Entering this command with the IP address of an etherset at the CLI of any nodes ITGL card displays the identification of the card that has a gateway channel in use by the etherset. This is useful when you need to identify which card to collect gateway statistics (like packet loss, etc.) from, for instance. Element Manager Y Y

dspnumshow dspchanstateshow

dsphwcheck dsplooptest [channel1 channel2] vgwshow

Y Y

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

585

Media Gateway Controller command line interface commands

Command

Description Displays status information about all gateway channels on a VGMC card / DSP Daughterboard.

Element Manager Y

vgwshowall

vgwcardshow [card Displays information about voice gateway channels on a VGMC card / DSP number]
Daughterboard.

ommshow

Displays the contents of the OMREPORT.nnn file, that contains the operational measurements for the VGW channels.

OAM Special commands: special purpose PDT

The following table lists the OAM special purpose PDT commands in the OAM Special Command Group. Table 55: OAM Special commands
Command Description Tests SNMP traps. Lists all report display commands. Where [filename] is the name of the report file to be opened. Y Y Element Manager Y N/A Y

testalarm rdhelp

rdopen [filename] Opens a report log file.

rdgo [N] rd [S] [R]

Goes to a specific record. Where [N] is the absolute record number. Displays a specified number of records starting at a specified point. Where: [S] is the number of steps to traverse to the starting point. [R] is the number of records to display. Both [S] and [R] can be negative.

rds [S] [R]

Displays a specified number of records, with a symbolic dump, starting at a specified point. Where: [S] is the number of steps to traverse to the starting point. [R] is the number of records to display.

586

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description Both [S] and [R] can be negative.

Element Manager Y N/A Y

rdshow rdall rdtail [N]

Displays general information about the current log file and the current rd settings. Displays all records. Displays the specified number of newest records. Where [N] is the number of records to display. Displays the specified number of oldest records. Where [N] is the number of records to display. Opens the next log file. Opens the previous log file. Converts a log file to text. Where [filename] is the name of the log file to be converted.

rdhead [N] rdnext rdprev rdsconvert [filename]

Y Y Y Y

OAM Security commands: intrasystem and cryptographic key support

The following table lists the OAM intrasystem and cryptographic key support commands in the OAM Security Command Group. Table 56: OAM Security commands
Command Description Element Manager Y Y Y Y Y

disInsecureShells Disables all insecure shells in the system disSecureShells

Disable all secure shells in the system

enlInsecureShells Enable all insecure shells in the system enlSecureShells isecChgPSK

Enables all secure shells in the system Changes ISEC PSK locally. Changing the local ISEC configuration can cause a temporary ELAN outage which would last until all connected elements share the same configuration. This would affect established calls and IP based terminal sessions.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

587

Media Gateway Controller command line interface commands

Command

Description

Element Manager

Note: If this command is running on one of the CPUs in a redundant CS, the change is not synchronized with the other core.

isecChgLevel [OPTI/FUNC/FULL]

Changes ISEC security level locally. Changing the local ISEC configuration can cause a temporary ELAN outage which would last until all connected elements share the same configuration. This would affect established calls and IP based terminal sessions. Note: If this command is running on one of the CPUs in a redundant CS, the change is not synchronized with the other core. Where: OPTI = Optimized Security Only the pbxLink and XMSG ports are encrypted using IPsec for a given IP address, and unencrypted traffic is permitted on all other ports. This applies to the Embedded Local Area Network (ELAN) ports only. FUNC = Functional Security All links between all known addresses are encrypted using IPsec (except SSH, SSL, AML, NTP). Unencrypted links from any other IP address are permitted. FULL = Full Security (Standard Mode) All links between all known addresses are encrypted using IPsec (except SSH, SSL, AML, NTP). Links from any other IP address are encrypted using ISSS. Note: Known addresses are those IP addresses that are part of the node configured in Element Manager, or that are present in the list of trusted hosts.

isecconfirm

Used to confirm PSK between Active Call Server and other elements. The salt value, hashed PSK, system security status and system level appear.

588

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description

Element Manager Y

isecNewTarget [IP Adds a new target to the ISEC target list. Address]
Changing the local ISEC configuration can cause a temporary ELAN outage which would last until all connected elements share the same configuration. This would affect established calls and IP based terminal sessions. Where: [IP Address] identifies a specific target's IP address. Note: If this command is running on one of the CPUs in a redundant CS the change is not synchronized with the other core.

isecOutTarget [IP Deletes a target from the ISEC target list. Address]
Changing the local ISEC configuration can cause a temporary ELAN outage which would last until all connected elements share the same configuration. This would affect established calls and IP based terminal sessions. Where: [IP Address] identifies a specific target's IP address. Note: If this command is running on one of the CPUs in a redundant CS the change is not synchronized with the other core.

isecEnlTarget [IP Enables the ISEC target. Address]

Where: [IP Address] identifies a specific target's IP address. Important: This command returns an error in either of the following cases: If no system secret exists, the system returns an error indicating that you must run the CHG ISEC PSK command to configure a system secret. If no security option exists, the system returns an error indicating that you must run

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

589

Media Gateway Controller command line interface commands

Command

Description the isecChgPSK command to configure a security option.

Element Manager

isecDisTarget [IP Disables the ISEC target. Address]

Changing the local ISEC configuration can cause a temporary ELAN outage which would last until all connected elements share the same configuration. This would affect established calls and IP based terminal sessions. Where: [IP Address] identifies a specific target's IP address. Note: If this command is running on one of the CPUs in a redundant CS the change is not synchronized with the other core.

isecProfileShow isecDecom isecIkeShowPAll isecIpsecShowIf

Displays all ISEC profiles. Removes all ISEC related files, memory allocations, and tasks. Displays all protection suites (inbound and outbound IPsec Security Association pairs). Displays all of the network interfaces on which IPsec is enabled. For each session, the following information appears: Interface name IP address DF bit status

Y Y Y Y

sshKeyActivate sshKeyShow sshKeyClear sshKeyGenerate

Activate the SSH key Displays the fingerprint of the public key of the MGC. Displays both active and pending keys. Clears the SSH key Generate the SSH key

Y Y Y Y Y Y

statInsecureShell Displays whether insecure shell access is enabled or disabled. s statSecureShells

Displays whether secure shell access is enabled or disabled.

590

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (LDB) CLI commands

Command

Description Show the Primary Security Server IP address and fingerprint.

Element Manager N/A

statSecDomain

Level Two (LDB) CLI commands

The Level Two (Local Debug [LDB]) security shell can only be accessed if your password is configured for LDB security shell access. To access the LDB security shell, you must force the MGC logon prompt to appear by holding down the CTRL key and typing ldb. The prompt for each command in the LDB security shell is 'ldb>'. This section contains tables corresponding to Command Groups that are available in the LDB security shell. LDB security shell capabilities are inclusive of all OAM security shell capabilities. All Level One (OAM) Gateway Controller CLI Command Groups and associated commands are available in the Level Two (LDB) security shell by definition. This section contains tables representing two categories of Command Groups: those containing commands that are available in both the OAM and LDB security shells Commands that are available in the OAM security shell are not repeated in these Command Group tables. See the equivalentLevel One (OAM) CLI commands on page 582 Command Group table for descriptions of these commands. those containing commands that are only available in the LDB security shell

LDB Command groups

The following table lists the LDB Command Groups. Command groups that contain commands that are only available in the LDB security shell are in italics. To display a list of commands in a specific Command Group, type help <command group name> at the prompt. Table 57: LDB CLI command groups
Command group General Description General purpose commands. LDB Commands Table 58: LDB General commands on page 592 Table 59: LDB system commands on page 593

System

Gateway Controller platform administration and maintenance commands.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

591

Media Gateway Controller command line interface commands

Command group Debug

Description PDT debug commands.

LDB Commands Table 60: LDB Debug commands on page 594 Table 61: LDB disk commands on page 594 Table 62: LDB special commands on page 595 LDB Security commands: intrasystem and cryptographic key support commands on page 597

Disk

Disk and file commands.

Special

Special purpose PDT commands.

Security

Intrasystem and cryptographic key support commands.

LDB Commands
The following tables list the commands in each Command Group in the LDB security shell. To display a list of commands in a specific LDB Command Group, type help <command group name> at the prompt.

LDB General commands: general purpose

The following table lists the PDT general purpose commands in the LDB General Command Group. These commands are in addition to the OAM commands listed in OAM General commands: General purpose on page 583. Table 58: LDB General commands
Command Description Displays the list of devices. Echo the inputs.. Displays the 20 most recent commands entered in the shell. Displays a list of hosts. Element Manager N/A N/A N/A Y

devs echo h hosts

592

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (LDB) CLI commands

Command

Description Displays a summary of task control block information. Displays memory usage and a list of free blocks. Displays shell access attempts. Receive a file over a serial connection using XMODEM. Displays task information for a specified task. Where: [name] is the name of the task. [taskID] is the ID of the task. [name] and [taskID] are mutually exclusive.

Element Manager N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

i mem rdaccess rx ti [name | taskid]

LDB system commands: MGC platform administration and maintenance

The following table lists the LDB MGC platform administration and maintenance commands in the LDB system Command Group. These commands are in addition to the OAM commands listed in OAM System commands: MGC platform administration and maintenance on page 584. Table 59: LDB system commands
Command Description Allows mirroring of one of the embedded Ethernet switch ports. To disable mirroring of a port, use none for port2. Disables a port so it can be used for mirroring. Clears all port mirroring and reenables standard embedded Etherenet switch functionality. Test the cable connected to the port Element Manager N/A

ethportmirror [port1] [port2]

ethportdisable [port] ethportreset

N/A N/A

ethportcabletest

N/A

LDB Debug commands: PDT debug

The following table lists the LDB PDT debug commands in the LDB Debug Command Group.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

593

Media Gateway Controller command line interface commands

Table 60: LDB Debug commands

Command Description Deletes a task. Element Manager N/A

td

LDB disk commands: disk and file commands

The following table lists the LDB disk and file commands in the LDB disk Command Group. Table 61: LDB disk commands
Command Description Changes the default directory. Where: [path] = the path and name of the new directory. The [path] of the new directory can be specified as a relative path. Element Manager N/A

cd [path]

chkdsk

Checks file system consistency. chkdsk "/C:" Checks the internal file system for errors. chkdsk "/C:", 1 Repairs the file system errors and saves the damaged cluster in files. chkdsk "/C:", 2 Repairs file system errors and returns damaged clusters to the free pool. Copies multiple files to another directory. Copies from one file to another file until an end-of-file (CTRL+d) is reached. Where: [input] = the name of the file to be copied from. If NULL, stdin is used. [output] is the name of the new or destination file to be copied to. If NULL, stdout is used.

cp copy [input] [output]

N/A N/A

label ll [path]

Creates, displays, or changes a device label. Displays a long list of the contents of a directory.

N/A N/A

594

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (LDB) CLI commands

Command Where:

Description

Element Manager

[path] = the path name of the directory. If path is not specified, the contents of the current directory are displayed.

ls [path]

Displays the contents of a directory. Where: [path] = the path name of the directory. If [path] is not specified, the contents of the current directory are displayed.

N/A

pwd type

Displays the current (working) directory. Displays the contents of a file.

N/A N/A

LDB special commands: special purpose PDT commands

The following table lists the LDB special purpose PDT commands in the LDB special Command Group. These commands are in addition to the OAM commands listed in OAM Special commands: special purpose PDT on page 586. Table 62: LDB special commands
Command Description Warm reboots the system. Cold reboots the system if the -1 parameter is specified. Puts a patch that has been loaded into memory (using the pload command) into service, where [handle] is the number returned by the pload command. If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle]. If issued successfully, the command indicates the global procedures, functions, or areas of memory affected by the patch. You are then prompted and have the choice to proceed or not to proceed. Lists detailed patch status information for a loaded patch. Element Manager N/A

reboot [-1]

pins [handle]

N/A

plis [handle]

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

595

Media Gateway Controller command line interface commands

Command

Description If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle].

Element Manager

pload "[patchfilename]"

Loads a patch file from the file system in Flash memory into DRAM memory, where [patch-filename] is the filename or path of the patch file. If a filename alone is provided, the patch must be in the /C:/u/patch directory. Otherwise, the full or relative path can be provided. When a patch is successfully loaded, the command returns a patch handle number. The patch handle number is used as input to other patch commands (pins, poos, pout, and plis). The loaded patch is inactive until it is put into service using the pins command. If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted for the patch filename and other information. Creates memory patches for the Gateway Controller card. The command has no parameter(s). The release of the patch is assumed to be the same as that of the current load. The address to be patched is checked to ensure that it is in range. For each address that is changed, the "old" contents are assumed to be the current contents of that memory address. If a path is not provided for the new path filename then it is assumed that the patch is in the /C:/u/patch directory. Once a memory patch is created using the pnew command, it can be loaded and activated like any other patch. Deactivates a patch (takes it out-of-service) by restoring the patched procedure to its original state. If the poos command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle]. Removes a patch from DRAM memory. The patch must be taken out-of-service (using the poos command) before it can be removed from the system.

N/A

pnew

N/A

poos [handle]

N/A

pout [handle]

N/A

596

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (LDB) CLI commands

Command

Description If the pout command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a handle.

Element Manager

pstat [handle]

Displays summary status information for one or all loaded patches. For each patch, the following information is displayed: patch handle, filename, reference number, whether the patch is in-service or out-of-service, the reason why the patch is out-of-service (if applicable), and whether the patch is marked for retention or not. Patch retention means that if a reset occurs, then the patch is automatically reloaded into memory and its state (active or inactive) is restored to what it was prior to the system going down. If the [handle] is provided, only the information for the specified patch is displayed. If the command is issued without a parameter, information for all the patches is displayed.

N/A

LDB Security commands: intrasystem and cryptographic key support commands

The following table lists the LDB Security commands in the LDB Security Command Group. These commands are in addition to the OAM commands listed in OAM Security commands: intrasystem and cryptographic key support on page 587. Table 63: LDB Security commands
Command Description Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server. Remove the Primary Security Server mutual trust information from the device. Element Manager N/A N/A

joinSecDomain leaveSecDomain

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

597

Media Gateway Controller command line interface commands

598

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 37: Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 600 Level One (OAM) CLI commands on page 601 - OAM Command groups on page 601 - OAM DLOG commands: Firmware download log file on page 604 - OAM GK commands: Gatekeeper on page 605 - OAM Network commands: remote access on page 611 - OAM Patcher commands: patching on page 611 - OAM SSH commands: SSH commands on page 612 - OAM UFTP commands: UFTP IP Phone firmware download on page 612 - OAM cds commands: Converged Desktop Service Module on page 614 - OAM elm commands: ELM module on page 615 - OAM emhelp commands: Element Manager help file related commands on page 615 - OAM iset commands: iset module on page 615 - OAM mam commands: MAM module on page 617 - OAM ncs commands: Network Connection Service module on page 621 - OAM npm commands: Network Protocol Module on page 623 - OAM nrsDB commands: Network Routing Service on page 626 - Table 79: OAM nrsomm commands on page 627 - OAM pbxlink commands: PBX link on page 627 - OAM securityShell commands: Security shell on page 628 - OAM sipcti commands: SIP CTI module commands on page 628

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

599

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

- OAM sipctiomm commands: SIP CTI OMM commands on page 630 - OAM sipnpm commands: SIP Network Protocol Module on page 631 - OAM system commands: system administration commands on page 635 - OAM tps commands: TPS module on page 637 - OAM trace commands: General trace tools on page 638 - OAM uipc commands: Universal ISDN Protocol module on page 639 - OAM ums commands: UMS module on page 640 - OAM usi commands: RUDP timeout and retry commands on page 641 - OAM vte commands: Virtual Terminal Emulator on page 642 - OAM vtrk commands: Virtual Trunk module on page 642 - OAM cds commands: Converged Desktop Service module commands on page 643 Level Two (PDT) CLI commands on page 645 - PDT Command groups on page 645 - Accounts commands: user account administration commands on page 647 - disk commands: file system maintenance and diagnostics on page 652 - rdtools commands: rd tools on page 655 - PDT nrsDB commands: Network Routing Service on page 652 - PDT sipnpm commands: SIP Network Protocol Module on page 656 - PDT system commands: System administration on page 658 - PDT ums commands : UMS module commands on page 660 - PDT iset commands: iset module commands on page 661 CLI commands in Linux on page 663

Introduction
This chapter lists and describes the Command Line Interface (CLI) commands available on the Signaling Server platform in the Level One (OAM) and Level Two (PDT) security shells. The OAM security shell can only be accessed if your password is configured for Level One (OAM) access. The CLI command prompt in the OAM security shell is oam>. Similarly, the PDT security shell can only be accessed if your password is configured for Level Two (PDT) access. The CLI command prompt in the PDT security shell is pdt>.

600

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

If you have Level Two (PDT) security shell access, you automatically have Level One (OAM) security shell access. To access the PDT security shell from the OAM security shell, hold down the CTRL button and type pdt at the command prompt in the OAM security shell. The information in this chapter is presented in the form of CLI Command Groups. CLI Command Groups are used to group together commands of similar functionality or purpose. Each CLI Command Group is represented by a table that lists all associated CLI commands with a detailed command description. Each table contains a column indicating whether or not a listed CLI command can be executed through the General Command interface of the Element Manager application on the Signaling Server.

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

This section describes the CLI Command Groups and commands available in the Level One (Operations, Administration, and Maintenance [OAM]) security shell. To display a list of the Command Groups available in the OAM security shell, type help at the OAM security shell command prompt (oam>). To display a list of commands in an OAM security shell Command Group, type help <command group name> at the OAM security shell command prompt.

OAM Command groups

The following table lists the Command Groups available in the OAM security shell. To display a list of the Command Groups available in the OAM security shell, type help at the OAM security shell command prompt. Table 64: OAM CLI command groups
Command group DLOG Description Firmware download log file commands Commands Table 65: OAM DLOG commands on page 604 Table 66: OAM GK commands on page 605 Table 67: OAM Network commands on page 611 Table 68: OAM Patcher commands on page 612

GK

Gatekeeper module commands

Network

Remote access commands

Patcher

Patch commands

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

601

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command group SSH

Description SSH commands

Commands Table 69: OAM SSH commands on page 612 Table 70: OAM UFTP commands on page 613 Table 71: OAM cds commands on page 614 Table 72: OAM elm commands on page 615 Table 73: OAM emhelp commands on page 615 Table 74: OAM iset commands on page 615 Table 75: OAM mam commands on page 618 Table 76: OAM ncs commands on page 621 Table 77: OAM npm commands on page 623 Table 78: OAM nrsDB commands on page 626 Table 79: OAM nrsomm commands on page 627 Table 80: OAM pbxlink commands on page 628 Table 81: OAM securityShell commands on page 628

UFTP

UFTP IP Phone firmware download commands. Converged Desktop Service module commands ELM module commands

cds

elm

emhelp

EM Help File related commands

iset

iset module commands

mam

MAM module commands

ncs

Network Connection Service module commands Network Protocol Module commands

npm

nrsDB

Network Routing Service commands

nrsomm

Network Routing Service operational measurement commands PBX link commands

pbxlink

securityShell

Security shell commands

602

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command group sipcti

Description SIP CTI module commands

Commands Table 82: OAM sipcti commands on page 629 Table 83: OAM sipctiomm commands on page 631 Table 84: OAM sipnpm commands on page 631 Table 85: OAM system commands on page 635 Table 86: OAM tps commands on page 637 Table 87: OAM trace commands on page 638 Table 88: OAM uipc commands on page 639 Table 89: OAM ums commands on page 640 Table 90: OAM usi commands on page 641 Table 91: OAM vte commands on page 642 Table 92: OAM vtrk commands on page 642 Table 93: OAM cds commands on page 643

sipctiomm

SIP CTI OMM display commands

sipnpm

SIP Network Protocol Module commands

system

System administration commands

tps

TPS module commands

trace

General trace tools

uipc

Universal ISDN module commands

ums

UMS module commands

usi

RUDP timeout and retry commands

vte

Virtual Terminal Emulator commands

vtrk

Virtual Trunk module commands

cds

Converged Desktop Services commands

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

603

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

OAM Commands
The following tables list the commands in each Command Group at the OAM access level. To display a list of commands in a specific OAM Command Group, type help <command group name> at the prompt.

OAM DLOG commands: Firmware download log file

The following table lists the OAM firmware download log file commands in the OAM DLOG command group. Table 65: OAM DLOG commands
Command Description Displays the active DLOG file information for UFTP IP Phone firmware downloads. Where: [numOfLine] = the number of lines of the active DLOG file to display. When [numOfLine] parameter is not used, the output displays the contents of the entire active DLOG file. Element Manager N/A

activeDlogShow [numOfLine]

inactiveDlogShow [numOfLine]

Displays the inactive DLOG file information for UFTP IP Phone firmware downloads. Where: [numOfLine] = the number of lines of the inactive DLOG file to display. When [numOfLine] parameter is not used, the output displays the contents of the entire inactive DLOG file.

N/A

dnldFailShow [numOfLine]

Displays the "download failed" entries logged in the active and inactive DLOG files. Where: [numOfLine] = the number of lines of "download failed" entries in the active and inactive DLOG files to display When [numOfLine] parameter is not used, the output displays all "download failed" entries in the active and inactive DLOG files.

N/A

604

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

OAM GK commands: Gatekeeper

The following table lists the OAM Gatekeeper commands in the OAM GK command group. Table 66: OAM GK commands
Command Description Initiates discovery tracing for a specified GK endpoint type. Outputs the GRQ, GCF, and GRJ messages for the specified GK endpoint type. Where [endpoint type] is: ID ["Alias Name"] Initiates discovery tracing for a specified GK endpoint, where "Alias Name" is the H.323 GK ID of the endpoint. IP ["IP address"] Initiates discovery tracing for a specified GK endpoint, where "IP address" is the IP address of the endpoint. ALL Initiates discovery tracing on all GK endpoints. Element Manager N/A

gkDiscoveryTrace [endpoint type]

gkRegTrace [endpoint type]

Initiates registration tracing for a specified GK endpoint type. Outputs the RRQ, RCF, RRJ, URQ, UCF, and URJ messages for the specified GK endpoint type. Where [endpoint type] is: ID ["Alias Name"] Initiates registration tracing for a specified GK endpoint, where "Alias Name" is the H.323 GK ID of the endpoint. IP ["IP address"] Initiates registration tracing for a specified GK endpoint, where "IP address" is the IP address of the endpoint. ALL Initiates registration tracing on all GK endpoints.

N/A

gkCallTrace [endpoint type]

Initiates call tracing for a specified GK endpoint type.

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

605

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description Outputs the ARQ, ACF, ARJ, LRQ, LCF, LRJ, BRQ, BCF, BRJ, DRQ, DCF, and DRJ messages for the specified GK endpoint type. Where [endpoint type] is: ID ["Alias Name"] Initiates call tracing for a specified GK endpoint, where "Alias Name" is the H.323 GK ID of the endpoint. IP ["IP address"] Initiates call tracing for a specified GK endpoint, where "IP address" is the IP address of the endpoint. NUM [calling/called number] Initiates call tracing for a number, regardless of NPI and TON. The [calling/called number] value can be a number from 1 to 32 digits. It can be a partial number. NUM [calling/called number] [NPI] [TON] Initiates call tracing for a number with a particular TON and NPI. [NPI] specifies the Numbering Plan Identifier to use as a filter for tracing. The values are: - 0 - ALL - 1 - Unknown - 2 - ISDN/telephony numbering plan (E.164) - 3 - Private numbering - 4 - E.163 - 5 - Telex numbering plan (F.69) - 6 - Data numbering plan - 7 - National standard numbering plan [TON] specifies the Type Of Number to use as a filter for tracing. The values are: - 0 - ALL - 1 - Unknown Number - 2 - International Number - 3 - National Number - 4 - Network Specific Number - 5 - Subscriber Number

Element Manager

606

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description - 6 - Level 1 Regional - 7 - Level 0 Regional (Abbreviated number) ALL Initiates tracing on all GK endpoints. Note: A maximum of ten number traces are allowed.

Element Manager

gkProtocolTrace [endpoint type] [protocol]

Initiates protocol tracing for a specified GK endpoint type. Where [endpoint type] is: ID ["Alias Name"] Initiates protocol tracing for a specified GK endpoint, where "Alias Name" is the H.323 GK ID of the endpoint. IP ["IP address"] Initiates protocol tracing for a specified GK endpoint, where "IP address" is the IP address of the endpoint. NUM [calling/called number] Initiates protocol tracing for a number, regardless of NPI and TON. The [calling/called number] value can be a number from 1 to 32 digits. It can be a partial number. NUM [calling/called number] [NPI] [TON] Initiates protocol tracing for a number with a particular TON and NPI. [NPI] specifies the Numbering Plan Identifier to use as a filter for tracing. The values are: - 0 - ALL - 1 - Unknown - 2 - ISDN/telephony numbering plan (E.164) - 3 - Private numbering - 4 - E.163 - 5 - Telex numbering plan (F.69) - 6 - Data numbering plan - 7 - National standard numbering plan

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

607

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description [TON] specifies the Type Of Number to use as a filter for tracing. The values are: - 0 - ALL - 1 - Unknown Number - 2 - International Number - 3 - National Number - 4 - Network Specific Number - 5 - Subscriber Number - 6 - Level 1 Regional - 7 - Level 0 Regional (Abbreviated number) ALL Initiates protocol tracing on all GK endpoints. Where [protocol] specifies the protocol to trace. Individual protocols for IP, ID and ALL protocol tracing: ALL, ARQ, ACF, ARJ, BRQ, BCF, BRJ, DRQ, DCF, DRJ, GRQ, GCF, GRJ, LRQ, LCF, LRJ, NSM, RRQ, RCF, RRJ, RIP, URQ, UCF, and URJ Protocol categories for IP, ID, and ALL protocol tracing - AXX ARQ, ACF, ARJ - BXX BRQ, BCF, BRJ - DXX DRQ, DCF, DRJ - GXX GRQ, GCF, GRJ - LXX LRQ, LCF, LRJ - RXX RRQ, RCF, RRJ - UXX URQ, UCF, URJ Individual protocols for NUM protocol tracing: ALL, ARQ, ACF, ARJ, BRQ, BCF, BRJ, DRQ, DCF, DRJ,LRQ, LCF, LRJ Protocol categories for NUM protocol tracing: - AXX ARQ, ACF, ARJ - BXX BRQ, BCF, BRJ - DXX DRQ, DCF, DRJ

Element Manager

608

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description - LXX LRQ, LCF, LRJ Protocols that can't be traced by any endpoint: IACK, INAC, IRQ, IRR, RAI, RAC, SCI, SCR, XRS Note: A maximum of ten number traces are allowed.

Element Manager

gkTraceOff [endpoint type]

Discontinues all tracing for a specified GK endpoint type. Where [endpoint type] is: ID ["Alias Name"] Discontinues tracing for a specified GK endpoint, where "Alias Name" is the H.323 GK ID of the endpoint. IP ["IP address"] Discontinues tracing for a specified GK endpoint, where "IP address" is the IP address of the endpoint. NUM [calling/called number] Discontinues tracing for a number, regardless of NPI and TON. The [calling/called number] value can be a number from 1 to 32 digits. It can be a partial number. NUM [calling/called number] [NPI] [TON] Discontinuesl tracing for a number with a particular TON and NPI. [NPI] specifies the Numbering Plan Identifier to use as a filter for tracing. The values are: - 0 - ALL - 1 - Unknown - 2 - ISDN/telephony numbering plan (E.164) - 3 - Private numbering - 4 - E.163 - 5 - Telex numbering plan (F.69) - 6 - Data numbering plan - 7 - National standard numbering plan

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

609

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description [TON] specifies the Type Of Number to use as a filter for tracing. The values are: - 0 - ALL - 1 - Unknown Number - 2 - International Number - 3 - National Number - 4 - Network Specific Number - 5 - Subscriber Number - 6 - Level 1 Regional - 7 - Level 0 Regional (Abbreviated number) ALL Discontinues tracing on all GK endpoints.

Element Manager

gkTraceOutput Specifies the output destination for all [Output_Destinati Gatekeeper traces. Where: on] ["File Pathname"] [Output_Destination] specifies where all the
trace messages for the GK traces are to be directed. Values are: - 1 = TTY - 2 = RPTLOG (syslog) - 3 = User-specified FILE in the /u/trace directory. File name must be in quotes and conform to the 8.3 format. - 4 = TTY and user-specified FILE. ["File Pathname"] specifies the output file name when option 3 or 4 is specified.

N/A

gkTraceSettings gkTraceTblClear

Displays the GK trace output destination and the GK endpoint types being traced. Clears the calling/called number table associated with the NUM trace filter(s). A maximum of 200 tables entries are allowed. If there are more than 200 table entries, the system displays the following error message:
gkTrace callIdentifier table is full

N/A N/A

610

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description Clearing the table is a temporary solution. Better options may include: refining the NUM trace filter to be more exact reducing the number of NUM trace filters running the trace during lower traffic periods

Element Manager

gkTraceTblShow

Displays the calling/called number table associated with the NUM trace filter(s). Some entries may be shown twice, since intrazone calls generate two ARQ messages to the primary Gatekeeper. Interzone calls generate only one ARQ message.

N/A

OAM Network commands: remote access

The following table lists the OAM remote access commands in the OAM Network command group. Table 67: OAM Network commands
Command Description Telnets to a server. The address can be either in IP address format or host name. Where: server = IP address username = host name Element Manager N/A

telnet [server] [username]

rlogin [server] [username]

Remotely logs in to a server. The address can be either an IP address or host name. Where: server = IP address username = host name

N/A

cslogin

Logs in to the Call Server overlays.

N/A

OAM Patcher commands: patching

The following table lists the OAM patching commands in the OAM Patcher command group.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

611

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Table 68: OAM Patcher commands

Command Description Element Manager (see Note) N/A

mdp

DEPLIST manipulation command

Note: The Patcher command is not available in Element Manager from the Node Maintenance web page. It is available from IP Telephony > Software > Patching

OAM SSH commands: SSH commands

The following table lists the OAM SSH commands in the OAM SSH command group. Table 69: OAM SSH commands
Command Description Clears all of the public keys (active and pending) stored on the Signaling Server. Important: You must disable secure shells before you can clear SSH keys. Element Manager Y

sshKeyClear

sshKeyGenerate

Generates the SSH key on the Signaling Server. Important: The generated key is stored in a pending state until it is activated.

sshKeyShow

Displays the fingerprint of the public key of the Signaling Server. Displays both active and pending keys.

OAM UFTP commands: UFTP IP Phone firmware download

The following table lists the OAM UFTP IP Phone firmware download commands in the OAM UFTP command group. These OAM UFTP commands are used with a Signaling Server in maintenance mode. When the Signaling Server is in maintenance mode, the maximum number of simultaneous firmware downloads is increased, thereby allowing the UNIStim Firmware Transfer Protocol (UFTP) server to use most of its processing resources.

612

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Table 70: OAM UFTP commands

Command Description Displays IP Phone firmware download information. configuration information about UFTP count of successful downloads since a Signaling Server reboot count of downloads that failed or prematurely ended since a Signaling Server reboot number of active downloads, and a list of each, including: - type of IP Phone - IP addresses of the IP Phones that downloaded firmware - number of bytes downloaded Element Manager N/A

uftpShow

uftpRunTimeDataRe Resets the run time data field in the UFTP data block. set uftpTurboMode ["HH:MM/start/ stop/on/off"] [MM] ["show"]
Configures maintenance mode. Where: "HH:MM" time to enter Maintenance Mode in 24-hour format "start" enter Maintenance Mode immediately "stop" stop Maintenance Mode "on" allow Signaling Server to enter Maintenance Mode "off" do not allow Signaling Server to enter Maintenance Mode MM optional parameter that defines the length of time in minutes that Maintenance Mode is to be maintained "show" displays the same output as uftpTurboModeShow If no parameter is entered, Upgrade Manager defaults to uftpturboMode "start".

N/A Y

uftpTurboModeShow Displays the current status of maintenance

mode.

Y N/A

uftpSpeedLimitSho Display UFTP bandwidth parameters. w

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

613

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description

Element Manager N/A Y

uftpSpeedLimitSet Configure UFTP bandwidth parameters. uftpTurboModeTime Configures the idle timeout timer for maintenance mode. outSet [MM]
Where: [MM] optional parameter that defines the number of minutes the Upgrade Manager waits after the last firmware download job is started before returning the Signaling Server to normal mode If this parameter is configured as 0 (zero), the Upgrade Manager never exits Maintenance Mode unless the umsUpgradeModeSet command is issued with the "stop" parameter. If no parameter is entered, then the current timeout setting is displayed.

uftpAutoUpgradeTi Configures the length of time the IP Phone waits for a user response after "Upgrade F/W now?" meoutSet [MM]
message is displayed before automatically beginning the firmware upgrade. Where:

[MM] user response timeout in minutes. A value of 0 (zero) means "Print current settings". If no parameter is entered, the current value is printed.

OAM cds commands: Converged Desktop Service Module

The following table lists the OAM Converged Desktop Service (CDS) commands in the OAM cds command group. Table 71: OAM cds commands
Command Description Displays the current Converged Desktop configuration. Displays the Personal Call Assistance (PCA) information and status for an agent. Element Manager N/A N/A

cdsShow cdsAgentShow

614

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

OAM elm commands: ELM module

The following table lists the OAM ELM module command in the OAM elm command group. Table 72: OAM elm commands
Command Description Displays a list of supported languages. Re-reads language list and locale files. Element Manager N/A N/A

elmShow elmRefresh

OAM emhelp commands: Element Manager help file related commands

The following table lists the OAM emhelp module command in the OAM emhelp command group. Table 73: OAM emhelp commands
Command Description Unpacks Element Manager help files. Element Manager N/A

unpackEmHelp

OAM iset commands: iset module

The following table lists the OAM iset module commands in the OAM iset command group. Table 74: OAM iset commands
Command Description Update location information for a specified IP Phone. Sets the gateway alarm packet threshold. Where: xxx = a number between 1 and 1000, and represents the threshold in 0.1% increments. The default value is 10 (1%). Packet loss which exceeds the threshold generates an SNMP trap and writes a message to the log file if logging is enabled. Element Manager N/A N/A

isetLocUpdate itgPLThreshold [xxx]

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

615

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description Clears the Virtual Office login or Branch User Config lockout for a particular IP Phone. Where: [TN | IP] = TN or IP address of an IP Phone

Element Manager N/A

clearLockout [TN | IP]

dsetDelayHookswit Sets the maximum time period in milliseconds that IP Phones wait for a hookswitch request. chSet cookieShowByTN cookieShowByName cookieRegShow isetSecGet ["[<IP>] [<Type>] [<TN>] [<Encryption>] [<Action>] [<DTLSCap>]"]
Displays the cookie list for an IP Phone specified by TN. Displays the list of IP Phones with a particular cookie set. Displays the cookie registry. Display signaling encryption related information about registered IP Phones, filtered by the specified query. Where: <IP> = IP address of an IP Phone <Type> = type of IP Phone (For example, 2004P2). <TN> = terminal number of an IP Phone <Encryption> = type of configured signaling encryption Where: - INSECURE = IP Phones that are not configured for signaling encryption - SECURE = IP Phones that are configured with USEC or DTLS signaling encryption - DTLS = IP Phones that are configured with DTLS signaling encryption - USEC = IP Phones that are configured with USEC (UNIStim Security) signaling encryption - ALL = IP Phones that are configured with any type of signaling encryption <Action> = type of signaling protocol used by the IP Phone to communicate with the signaling server Where: - 1 = UNIStim

N/A N/A N/A N/A Y

616

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description

Element Manager

Note: If the target LTPS node has a DTLS Best Effort policy and the IP Phone is configured as DTLS-capable, the IP phone is switched to DTLS by the LTPS when it registers. - 6 = USEC (Secure UNIStim) All signaling messages, including registration messages, are protected by USEC. The LTPS detects IP phones that are using USEC and does not attempt to switch them to DTLS. - 7 = DTLS When a DTLS session is established, the IP Phone registers using UNIStim over DTLS. <DTLSCap> = DTLS capability indicator Where: - YES = IP Phones that are DTLS-capable - NO = IP Phones that are DTLS-incapable - ALL = IP Phones that are DTLS-capable and IP Phones that are DTLS-incapable

isetSecShow

Lists the IP Address, type, TN, configured signaling encryption, action byte, and DTLS capability for all registered IP Phones. command.

isetSecUpdateShow Display the result of the isetSecUpdate

Note: Not available for CS 1000 Release 7.0 or later.

OAM mam commands: MAM module

The following table lists the OAM MAM module commands in the OAM mam command group.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

617

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Table 75: OAM mam commands

Command Description Element Manager Y Y

firmwareVersionSh Displays firmware version number. ow IPInfoShow

Displays information about an IP telephony node. IP addresses for the ELAN and TLAN subnets default router for the ELAN and TLAN subnets subnet mask for the ELAN and TLAN subnets IP routing table IP configuration of the node

itgCardShow itgMemShow resetOM

Displays Voice Gateway Media Card information. Displays memory usage on the Voice Gateway Media Card. Resets all operational measurement (OM) parameters collected after the last log dump, including:. outgoing calls tried outgoing calls completed incoming calls tried total voice time total fax time outgoing packets discarded incoming packets outofsequence average packet delay average packet loss number of Fallback-to-PSTN calls The parameters start from zero.

Y Y Y

bootPFileGet ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"]

Updates the BOOTPtab file on the Voice Gateway Media Card with the BOOTPtab file on the specified host, account and path. The bootpFileGet task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the file to flash file system.

N/A

618

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description Sends the BOOTPtab file from the Voice Gateway Media Card to TM.

Element Manager N/A

bootPFilePut ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] configFileGet ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"]

Sends an updated CONFIG.INI file from TM to the Voice Gateway Media Card. Updates the CONFIG.INI file on the Voice Gateway Media Card with the CONFIG.INI file on the specified host, account, and path. The configFileGet task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the file to flash file system. The CONFIG.INI file also contains the NRS IP address, gateway password, and gateway DNport mapping table. Sends the current Operational Measurements (OM) file to the specified host.

N/A

omFilePut ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] currOMFilePut ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] prevOMFilePut ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] hostFileGet ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"]

N/A

Sends the current Operational Measurements (OM) file to the specified host. The OMFilePut task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the Voice Gateway Media Card Operational Measurements file to the specified location on the host. Sends the previous Operational Measurements (OM) file to the specified host. The OMFilePut task on the ITG host initiates an FTP session with the given parameters and downloads the Voice Gateway Media Card Operational Measurements file to the specified location on the host. Transfers any file from an FTP Server to the Voice Gateway Media Card. This command gets any file from the host and does a Get using FTP to the Voice Gateway Media Card.

N/A

N/A

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

619

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description ["ITGFileName"] = full path AND filename of where the file is to be placed. [listener] = indicates which module to inform of the successful file transfer. It can be set to 1 to be disabled. Transfers any file from the Voice Gateway Media Card to an FTP Server.

Element Manager

["directory path"] ["filename"] ["ITGFileName"] [listener] hostFilePut ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"] ["ITGFileName"] swDownload ["hostname"] ["username"] ["password"] ["directory path"] ["filename"]

N/A

Loads a new version of software from the FTP host to the Voice Gateway Media Card. Updates the software on the Voice Gateway Media Card with the binary file received from an FTP server corresponding to the ["hostname"] IP address. The Voice Gateway Media Card FTP client performs a Get which downloads the file to the flash bank. A checksum is calculated to verify correct delivery. Once the new software version is successfully downloaded, the Voice Gateway Media Card must be rebooted with cardReset to run the new software. ["Hostname"] refers to either the IP address of the FTP host, the Voice Gateway Media Card itself, or another Voice Gateway Media Card, when a PC card in the /A: drive of the Voice Gateway Media Card contains the software binary file. Generates ITGxxxx test alarms. Sets the gateway alarm packet threshold. Where: xxx = a number between 1 and 1000, and represents the threshold in 0.1% increments. The default value is 10 (1%). Packet loss which exceeds the threshold generates an SNMP trap and writes a message to the log file if logging is enabled.

N/A

itgAlarmTest itgPLThreshold [xxx]

Y N/A

disiAll enaAll

Gracefully voice gateway service on the Signaling Server. Enables voice gateway service on the Signaling Server.

Y Y

620

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description Causes the Voice Gateway Media Card or Signaling Server to gracefully switch the registered resources to the other Voice Gateway Media Cards or Signaling Servers located in the same node. This command does not interrupt established calls. Enables all the Voice Gateway Media Cards or Signaling Servers to accept registrations of resources.

Element Manager Y

disServices

enlServices

servicesStatusSho Displays the status of services (tps/iset/vtrk/gk). w soCmdStatusShow soHelpMenu lossPlanPrt

Displays the status of Service Switch-Over commands. Displays all the commands that can be used for Services Switch-Over. Displays the offsets and current values for the handset, headset, and handsfree RLR and SLR.

Y N/A N/A Y

OAM ncs commands: Network Connection Service module

The following table lists the OAM Network Connection Service (NCS) module commands in the OAM ncs command group. Table 76: OAM ncs commands
Command Description Element Manager N/A

tpsARTrace IP [IP Enables tracing for the Network Connection address] ID [User Server (NCS). Allows tracing of the tpsAR protocol, which is ID] ALL

used to determine where an IP Phone should register. Where: IP address = a string containing the IP Phones IP address User ID = the ID of the IP Phone to be traced (the DN used to log in) or the H323_Alias of where the IP Phone is trying to register ALL = all IP Phones are to be monitored

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

621

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description Disables tracing for the Network Connection Server (NCS). Removes the specified endpoint from the list of endpoints to be traced. Where: IP address = a string containing the IP Phones IP address User ID = the ID of the IP Phone being traced (the DN used to log in) or the H323_Alias of where the IP Phone is =registered ALL = removes monitoring of all IP Phones

Element Manager N/A

tpsARTraceOff IP [IP address] ID [User ID] ALL

tpsARTraceAllOff

Turns off the trace for all tpsAR trace identifiers.

N/A N/A

tpsAROutput Modifies the destination for the traced output of [Output_Destinati the NCS. Sets the output for all tpsAR protocol traces. on] ["File Pathname"] [Output_Destination] = where all the trace
messages for the tpsARTraceSet are to be directed The values are: - 1 = TTY - 2 = RPTLOG - 3 = File - 4 =TTY + File If the command is run from the OAM prompt or PDT prompt on the Signaling Server, then the values are the actual word, not a number: - TTY - RPTLOG - FILE - TTY + FILE ["File Pathname"] = specifies the output file name if option 3 or 4 is selected.

tpsARTraceSetting Displays the trace settings and items being traced for the NCS trace. s
Displays the trace tool settings, which endpoints are being traced, and where the trace output is being directed.

N/A

tpsARTraceHelp

Displays help on the tpsARTrace commands.

N/A

622

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description Displays a list of all CLI commands used for tracing tpsAR protocol messages, including usage and parameters.

Element Manager

OAM npm commands: Network Protocol Module

The following table lists the OAM Network Protocol Module (NPM) commands in the OAM npm command group. Table 77: OAM npm commands
Command Description Turns the traces on and off for H.323 Registration at the gateway . Traces H.323 incoming and outgoing call setup messages for selected channels or numbers. Traces a specified channel (ch) or number (num). Either the "ch" or "num" parameter must be specified (mutually exclusive). [channel #] = a channel number Values range from 0 to the maximum channel number. [beginning channel #] = the first channel number in a range of channel numbers. [ending channel #] = the last channel number in a range of channel numbers. [calling/called number] = a telephone number. The value can be a number from 1 to 32 digits and can be a partial "calling/called number". [NPI] = a numbering plan identifier used to filter traces for a "calling/called number". The values are: - 0 - ALL - 1 - Unknown - 2 - ISDN/telephony numbering plan (E.164) - 4 - E.163 - 5 - Telex numbering plan (F.69) - 6 - Data numbering plan Element Manager N/A N/A

H323GwRegTrace H323CallTrace [ch] [channel #] [beginning channel #] [ending channel #] [num] [calling/called number] [NPI] [TON] [MsgRecv] [MsgSend]

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

623

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description - 7 - National standard numbering plan [TON] = the type of "calling/called number" number used to filter traces for a "calling/called number". The values are: - 0 - ALL - 1 - Unknown Number - 2 - International Number - 3 - National Number - 4 - Network Specific Number - 5 - Subscriber Number - 6 - Level 1 Regional - 7 - Level 0 Interface [MsgRecv] specifies if the messages sent to the specified channel or calling/called number should be traced. The values are ON or OFF. [MsgSend] specifies if the messages sent from the specified channel or calling/called number should be traced. The values are ON or OFF.

Element Manager

H323TraceShow

Displays input and output display settings for H323CallTrace and H323Output commands. Displays the trace settings, including the output destination and filename, as well as all active traces for the H323CallTrace trace tool. Directs H323Trace output to TTY or syslog file. Specifies where the output for the trace tool is to be directed. Where: [Output_Destination] specifies where all the trace messages for H323CallTrace are to be directed. The values are: - 1 = TTY - 2 = RPTLOG - 3 = File

N/A

H323Output [Output_Destinati on] ["File Pathname"]

N/A

624

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description - 4 = File and TTY ["File Pathname"] specifies the file if option 3 or 4 is selected.

Element Manager

H323GwShow [ch] [channel #] [num] [calling/called number] [NPI] [TON]

Displays information about the H.323 Network Protocol Module. Provides a general summary of the H.323 Virtual Trunk settings if no parameters are specified. Provides a general summary of the H.323 Virtual Trunk settings and a snapshot of the active call(s) for the specified channel(s), number(s), and trace filters, when the "ch" or "num" parameter is specified. When specified, the "ch" and "num" parameters are mutually exclusive. Where: [channel #] = the channel number being traced Values range from 0 to maximum channel number [calling/called number] indicates the telephone number to trace. The value can be a number from 1 to 32 digits and can be a partial "calling/called number". [NPI] = the numbering plan identifier used to filter traces for a "calling/called number". The values are: - 0 - ALL - 1 - Unknown - 2 - ISDN/telephony numbering plan (E.164) - 4 - E.163 - 5 - Telex numbering plan (F.69) - 6 - Data numbering plan - 7 - National standard numbering plan [TON] = the type of "calling/called number" number used to filter traces for a "calling/called number". The values are: - 0 - ALL - 1 - Unknown Number - 2 - International Number

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

625

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description - 3 - National Number - 4 - Network Specific Number - 5 - Subscriber Number - 6 - Level 1 Regional - 7 - Level 0 Interface

Element Manager

OAM nrsDB commands: Network Routing Service

The following table lists the OAM Network Routing Service (NRS) commands in the OAM nrsDB command group. Table 78: OAM nrsDB commands
Command Description Element Manager N/A

nrsGWEndpointShow Lists all the NRS endpoints with corresponding IP

addresses. Replaces the SIP proxy command gwshow.

nrsUserEPShow

Lists all the NRS users with corresponding IP addresses.

N/A N/A N/A

nrsCollaboratingS Lists all the Collaborating Servers in the database. erverShow nrsL0DomainShow
Lists all the Level 0 regional domains in the database. Replaces the SIP proxy command l0dshow. Lists all the Level 1 regional domains in the database. Replaces the SIP proxy command l1dshow.

nrsL1DomainShow

N/A

nrsRoutingEntrySh Lists all the Routing Entries in the database. Replaces the SIP proxy command ryshow. ow nrsServiceDomainS Lists all the Service Domains in the database. Replaces the SIP proxy command sdmshow. how nrsCollaboratingS Queries one Collaborating Server from the database. erverQuery nrsGWEndpointQuer Queries an NRS endpoint with IP and protocol information. y

N/A N/A N/A N/A

626

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description Queries an NRS endpoint with IP and protocol information. Queries a Level 0 regional domain with E164 information. Queries a Level 1 regional domain.

Element Manager N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

nrsUserEPQuery nrsL0DomainQuery nrsL1DomainQuery

nrsServiceDomainQ Queries one Service Domain from the database. uery nrsDefaultRouteQu Queries an NRS default route. Displays all the default routes which belong to an ery
endpoint in the database.

nrsDBShow nrsDBSyncForce

Displays the state of the Primary and Alternate NRS database, and the local NRS database. Forces synchronization of the active NRS database with the Alternate or Failsafe NRS database. Displays the internal state in NRS DB.

N/A N/A

nrsDBStateShow

N/A

OAM nrsomm commands: NRS operational measurements

The following table lists the OAM NRS operational measurements commands in the OAM nrsomm command group. Table 79: OAM nrsomm commands
Command Description Displays the SIP and H.323 NRS statistics for the current hour. Displays the SIP and H.323 NRS total statistics and average statistics for the last seven days. Element Manager N/A N/A

NrsOmmShow NrsOmmAvShow

OAM pbxlink commands: PBX link

The following table lists the OAM PBX link commands in the OAM pbxlink command group.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

627

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Table 80: OAM pbxlink commands

Command Description Displays PBX link status. Displays information about the link to the CPU, including the configuration and link status. Element Manager Y

pbxLinkShow

OAM securityShell commands: Security shell

The following table lists the OAM Security shell commands in the OAM securityShell command group. Table 81: OAM securityShell commands
Command Description Element Manager Y Y Y Y

disInsecureShells Disables all insecure shells in the system, enlInsecureShells Enables all insecure shells in the system,

including TELNET and RLOGIN sessions. including TELNET and RLOGIN sessions.

statInsecureShell Displays whether insecure shell access is enabled or disabled. s disSecureShells

Disables all secure shells in the system, including SSH, SFTP, and SCP sessions. Note: You cannot disable SFTP and FTP sessions at the same time.

enlSecureShells statSecureShells

Enables all secure shells, including SSH, SFTP, and SCP sessions. Shows whether secure shell access is enabled or disabled.

Y Y

OAM sipcti commands: SIP CTI module commands

The following table lists the OAM sipcti commands in the OAM sipcti command group.

628

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Table 82: OAM sipcti commands

Command Description Element Manager N/A N/A N/A N/A

SIPCTISessionShow Shows the total number of TR87 SIP CTI

sessions.

SIPCTIClientShow SIPCTIShow SIPCTIStop [dn] [all]

Shows information about all the associated soft clients. Shows SIP CTI application status and configuration. De-acquire one or all AST DN(s) and delete all associated TR87 SIP CTI sessions. Where: [dn] = a specific AST DN [all] = all AST DNs

SIPCTITraceLevel [level]

Sets the MessageTrace Level output to TR87 body only or Detailed format. [level] can be one of the following values: 0 TR87 SIP message body (ECMA 323) only 1 TR87 SIP message body (ECMA 323) and message headers

N/A

SIPCTITraceShow SIPCTIOutput [Dest] ["filename"]

Prints SIPCTI trace settings. Redirect the SIP CTI trace to a specific output destination. Where: [Dest] = a specific output destination. The destination can be one of the following: - 1 TTY - 2 RPTLOG - 3 File ["filename"] is specified only if option 3 (File) is specified.

N/A N/A

SIPCTITrace [sc] Trace incoming and outgoing TR87 SIP [soft client SIP/ messages. Where: Tel URL/DN] [MsgRcv] [sc] parameter is not specified [MsgSend] Turn on SIP CTI trace for all soft clients in
incoming and/or outgoing directions. Where: - [MsgRcv] = On

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

629

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description Trace all incoming SIP soft client messages. - [MsgRcv] = Off Do not trace all incoming SIP soft client messages. - [MsgSend] = On Trace all outgoing SIP soft client messages. - [MsgSend] = Off Do not trace all outgoing SIP soft client messages. [sc] parameter is specified Turn on SIP CTI trace for a specific soft client in incoming and/or outgoing direction(s). Where: - [soft client SIP/Tel URL/DN] identifies the soft client for which calls are to be traced. This may result in a number of sessions as a single URL could be used for multiple active sessions. - [MsgRcv] = On Trace all incoming SIP soft client messages. - [MsgRcv] = Off Do not trace all incoming SIP soft client messages. - [MsgSend] = On Trace all outgoing SIP soft client messages. - [MsgSend] = Off Do not trace all outgoing SIP soft client messages.

Element Manager

SIPCTILdapForceUp Update LDAP cache from LDAP server. date SIPCTILdapSetPage Set LDAP page size for LDAP caching. Size

N/A N/A

OAM sipctiomm commands: SIP CTI OMM commands

The following table lists the OAM sipctiomm commands in the OAM sipctiomm command group.

630

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Table 83: OAM sipctiomm commands

Command Description Show the current hour count statistics for SIP CTI. Element Manager N/A

SipCtiOmmShow

OAM sipnpm commands: SIP Network Protocol Module

The following table lists the OAM SIP Network Protocol Module commands in the OAM sipnpm command group. Table 84: OAM sipnpm commands
Command Description Displays H.323 Virtual Trunk settings on the specified SIP GW application. Displays a summary of H.323 VTRK information, channel-related information (CH token), and number-related information (NUM token. If an optional command token and associated parameters are specified, the command provides a filtered snapshot of the active call(s) that match the token parameters, on the specified SIP GW application. When specified, the "CH" and "NUM" tokens and their associated parameters are mutually exclusive. Where: <appName> = SIP gateway (GW) application - tSSG = Signaling Server SIP GW - tSLG = SIP Lines Server SIP GW CH token parameters (channel-related message tracing): <channel #> = the channel number being traced Values range from 0 to maximum channel number. NUM token parameters (number-related message tracing): - <calling/called number> = the telephone number to trace The value can be a number from 1 to 32 digits and can be a partial number. Element Manager Y

SIPGwShow <appName> [CH channel #] [NUM <calling/called number> [NPI] [TON]]

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

631

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description - <NPI> = the numbering plan identifier used to filter traces for a "calling/called number" Allowable values: 0 - ALL 1 - Unknown 2 - ISDN/telephony numbering plan (E.164) 4 - E.163 5 - Telex numbering plan (F.69) 6 - Data numbering plan 7 - National standard numbering plan - <TON> = the type of number used to filter traces for a "calling/called number" Allowable values: 0 - ALL 1 - Unknown Number 2 - International Number 3 - National Number 4 - Network Specific Number 5 - Subscriber Number 6 - Level 1 Regional 7 - Level 0 Interface

Element Manager

SIPCallTrace <appName> [(OFF)/ ON] [CH <starting channel #> [<ending channel #>]] [NUM <calling/ called number> [<NPI>] [<TON>]] <MsgRecv> <MsgSend>

Enable/disable SIP VTRK tracing, and initiate traces for SIP messages (active calls), on the specified SIP Gateway application. Supports tracing of all SIP messages, channelrelated SIP messages (CH token), or numberrelated SIP messages (NUM token), in the receiving and/or sending directions. If an optional command token (CH or NUM) and associated parameters are specified, the command provides a filtered snapshot of the active call(s) that match the specified parameters within the appropriate context (token). When specified, the optional CH and NUM tokens and their associated parameters are mutually exclusive. Where: <appName> = SIP gateway (GW) application - tSSG = Signaling Server SIP GW

N/A

632

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description - tSLG = SIP Lines Server SIP GW OFF = disable SIP VTRK tracing ON = enable SIP VTRK tracing CH token parameters (channel-related message tracing): - <starting channel #> = the number of a specific VTRK channel, or the starting number of a range of VTRK channels Values range from 0 to maximum channel number - 1. - <ending channel #> = the ending number of oa range of VTRK channels Values range from 1 to maximum channel number. NUM token parameters (number-related message tracing): - <calling/called number> = the telephone number to trace The value can be a number from 1 to 32 digits and can be a partial number. - <NPI> = the numbering plan identifier used to filter traces for a "calling/called number" Allowable values: 0 - ALL 1 - Unknown 2 - ISDN/telephony numbering plan (E.164) 4 - E.163 5 - Telex numbering plan (F.69) 6 - Data numbering plan 7 - National standard numbering plan - [TON] = the type of number used to filter traces for a "calling/called number" Allowable values: 0 - ALL 1 - Unknown Number 2 - International Number 3 - National Number

Element Manager

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

633

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description 4 - Network Specific Number 5 - Subscriber Number 6 - Level 1 Regional 7 - Level 0 Interface <MsgRecv> - specifies if incoming messages should be traced The values are ON or OFF. <MsgSend> - specifies if outgoing messages should be traced The values are ON or OFF.

Element Manager

SIPTraceShow

Displays the SIP trace settings and all active traces for the SIP call trace tool. Displays the output format, output destination and filename, as well as all active traces for the SIPCallTrace trace tool.

N/A

SIPOutput Specifies where the output for the SIPCallTrace [Output_Destinati command is to be directed. Where: on] ["File Pathname"] [Output_Destination] = the destination for all the
trace messages output from the SIPCallTrace command. The values are: - 1 = TTY - 2 = RPTLOG - 3 = File - 4 = File and TTY ["File Pathname"] specifies the file name if option 3 or 4 is selected.

N/A

SIPTraceLevel Sets the SIPCallTrace output to Summary or <appname> <Output Detailed format. Where: Option>
<appname> = SIP gateway (GW) application - tSSG = Signaling Server SIP GW - tSLG = SIP Lines Server SIP GW <Output Option> = the level of information to display - 0 = summary information - 1 = detailed information

N/A

634

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description

Element Manager N/A

SIPGwRegTrace <appName>

Turns the trace for SIP registration messages ON or OFF at the signaling gateway. Where: <appName> = SIP gateway (GW) application - tSSG = Signaling Server SIP GW - tSLG = SIP Lines Server SIP GW

slgShowUID <"userid"> slgSetShowAll

Display detailed information for a given SIP Lines Gateway user (must be executed on the SIP Lines server). Display all registered clients on the SIP Lines Gateway (must be executed on the SIP Lines server). Display the status of the SIP Lines Gateway application (must be executed on the SIP Lines server). Display the current trace filter on the SIP Lines Gateway (must be executed on the SIP Lines server).

N/A

N/A

slgShow

N/A

slgTraceShow

N/A

OAM system commands: system administration commands

The following table lists the OAM system administration commands in the OAM system command group. Table 85: OAM system commands
Command Description Element Manager

rudpShow routeShow routeAdd ["Host/ Network IP address"] ["IP Gateway"] routeDelete ["IP Address"] ["IP Gateway"]
Displays the current host and network routing table. Adds a route to the network routing table. The route is added to the host portion of the routing table. Deletes a route from the network routing table. Y Y

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

635

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description Tests that a remote host is reachable. This command sends an ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packet to a network host. The host matching the destination address in the packet responds to the request. If a response is not returned, the sender times out. This command is useful to determine if other hosts or Voice Gateway Media Cards are communicating with the sender card. Where: ["host"] = the IP address of the network host to ping [numPackets] = the number of ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packets to send If not specified, ping runs until it is stopped by Ctrl-C.

Element Manager N/A

ping ["host"] [numPackets]

who arpShow arpFlush diskSizeShow memSizeShow swVersionShow date uptime stty [speed]

Displays all active User IDs and ports. Displays entries in the system ARP table. Flushes all the entries in the system ARP table. Displays the total physical size of the hard disk. Displays the total physical size of the memory. Displays software version. Displays the system date and time, and prompts to configure new system date and time. Displays the amount of time lapsed since the last system reboot. Sets console speed. Where [speed] = baud rate for the console Available speeds are 9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200. Displays console speed.

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Y N/A N/A N/A

consoleShow

N/A N/A

ppp [option] [IP Initiates a PPP connection with options. Address] [Options Where: file path] [option] = connection options
Valid values for [option] are: - -l = signifies that the IP address is local Default IP address is 137.135.x.1. - -r = signifies that the IP address is remote

636

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description Default IP address is 137.135.x.2. - -o = specifies the full path to the options file. - -f = specifies no hardware flow control signals during PPP connection. [IP Address] = IP address where the PPP connection is initiated [Options file path] = full path to the options file

Element Manager

sysResShow cppmLoopChange cppmShelfChange cppmLocationShow

Displays the current usage of File Descriptors (FD) on the system. Changes the IPMG loop number location (CP PM Signaling Server only). Changes the IPMG shelf number location (CP PM Signaling Server only). Displays the loop and shelf location (CP PM Signaling Server only).

N/A N/A N/A N/A

OAM tps commands: TPS module

The following table lists the OAM TPS module commands in the OAM tps command group. Table 86: OAM tps commands
Command Description Gracefully disables the LTPS service on the Voice Gateway Media Card. Prevents new IP Phones registering on the card, and all registered IP Phones are redirected to another card when idle. Enables the LTPS service. Assigns UK-specific values to the loss plan of an IP Phone. Increases the Tx level of the IP Phone to match the requirement for the UK. Adjusts the levels of a given transducer by the entered RLR and SLR offsets. Allows a variable offset from the default loss plan, to be entered for the specified transducer (handset, handsfree, or headset). Element Manager N/A

disiTPS

enaTPS UKLossPlanSet

N/A N/A

lossPlanSet [transducer] [rlroffset] [slroffset]

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

637

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command Where:

Description

Element Manager

[transducer] = the handset, handsfree, or headset for which the levels are to be adjusted [rlroffset] = adjusts the level heard at the IP Phone. [slroffset] = adjusts the level transmitted from the IP Phone. Positive numbers reduce the level (add loss). Negative numbers increase the level (add gain).

UKLossPlanClr lossPlanClr

Removes the loss plan adjustments and returns the IP Phone to the default loss plan levels. Removes the loss plan adjustments and returns the IP Phone to the default loss plan levels.

N/A N/A

OAM trace commands: General trace tools

The following table lists the OAM General trace tools in the OAM trace command group. Table 87: OAM trace commands
Command Description Disables the trace facilities from writing to the TTY, SYSLOG, and specified files. Causes all traces that use the monitorLib server to stop their output. This is a temporary disabling function. Enables the trace facilities to resume writing to the TTY, SYSLOG, and/or specified files. Clears the blocking of all trace information imposed on the monitorLib service by the traceAllOff, tracePrintOff, and traceFileOff commands. By default, all tracing is on. Disables the trace facilities from writing to the TTY. Blocks all logging of information received by the monitorLib service to the TTY output. This does not include traces directed through the monitorLib service to the RPT.LOG or SYSLOG.n services. Enables the trace facilities to resume writing to the TTY. Element Manager N/A

traceAllOff

traceAllOn

N/A

tracePrintOff

N/A

tracePrintOn

N/A

638

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description Clears only the TTY output blocking that was imposed by the traceAllOff and tracePrintOff commands.

Element Manager

traceFileOff

Disables the trace facilities from writing to the SYSLOG and specified files. Causes the monitorLib server to stop logging to the log files any and all trace information received by the service. The log files include syslog.n for the Voice Gateway Media Card and rpt.log for the Signaling Server. Enables the trace facilities to resume writing to the SYSLOG and/or specified files. Clears only the blocking of logging to files that was imposed by the traceAllOff and traceFileOff commands. Displays the names of active traces in the system.

N/A

traceFileOn

N/A

traceShow

N/A

OAM uipc commands: Universal ISDN Protocol module

The following table lists the OAM Universal ISDN Protocol module commands in the OAM uipc command group. Table 88: OAM uipc commands
Command Description Displays a menu of DCH diagnostic tools. Displays a menu to perform various information retrieval operations for the D-channel. Element Manager N/A

DCHmenu

oam>DCHmenu
Please select one of the DCHmenu options: 0 - Print menu (default) 1 - Print current DCH state 2 - Print current DCH configuration 3 - Print application error log 4 - Print link error log 5 - Print protocol error log 6 - Print message log

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

639

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description 7 - Enable printing all messages processed by UIPC 8 - Enable error printing 9 - Enable info printing 10 - Enter manual message mode 11 - Print b channel control blocks 99 - Exit menu

Element Manager

OAM ums commands: UMS module

The following table lists the OAM UMS module commands in the OAM ums command group. Table 89: OAM ums commands
Command Description Element Manager

umsPolicyshow firmwareFileGet ["ServerIP"] ["UserID"] ["Password"] ["/ path/to/file"] ["Filename"]

Initiates a firmware download from a specified FTP server. After the download is completed, the downloaded file is checked for Enhanced Header (or proper naming). If the file is considered a valid firmware file, the UMS database is updated accordingly. Where: ["ServerIP"] FTP server IP address from where the firmware will be retrieved ["UserID"], ["Password"] credentials for logging into the FTP server ["/path/to/file"] absolute or relative path to the firmware file (does not include the file name itself) ["Filename"] name of the firmware file on the FTP server Use the firmwareFileGet command instead of the firmwareFileGetI2004, firmwareFileGetI2002, and firmwareFileGetIPP2 commands. N/A

640

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description

Element Manager N/A

firmwareFileGetI2 Initiates a firmware download for an IP Phone 2004 from a specified FTP server. Replaced by 004 firmwareFileGet. firmwareFileGetI2 Initiates a firmware download for an IP Phone 2002 from a specified FTP server. Replaced by 002 firmwareFileGet. umsUpgradeAll ["hh:mmx"]
Upgrades all registered sets according to policy and firmware file. Where: hh:mm = specifies the time when the upgrade will occur x = specifies whether the time is AM or PM - a = AM - p = PM Caution: If the umsUpgradeAll command is used without the time parameter, all IP Phones registered on cards that are logged into are immediately taken out of service. Use the time parameter with the command to prevent this from happening.

N/A

N/A

umsUpgradeTimerSh Displays the upgrade schedule. ow umsUpgradeTimerCa Cancels the scheduled upgrade. ncel

N/A N/A

OAM usi commands: RUDP timeout and retry commands

The following table lists the OAM RUDP timeout and retry commands in the OAM usi command group. Table 90: OAM usi commands
Command Description Element Manager N/A N/A

usiSetPhoneRudpRe Configures the RUDP Max Retries count for IP Phones. tries usiGetPhoneRudpRe Displays the RUDP Max Retries count for IP Phones. tries

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

641

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description

Element Manager N/A N/A

usiSetPhoneRudpTi Configures the RUDP Timeout value (in milliseconds) for IP Phones. meout usiGetPhoneRudpTi Displays the RUDP Timeout value (in milliseconds) for IP Phones. meout

OAM vte commands: Virtual Terminal Emulator

The following table lists the OAM Virtual Terminal Emulator commands in the OAM vte command group. Table 91: OAM vte commands
Command Description Unpacks Virtual Terminal Emulator help files. Element Manager N/A

unpackVTHelp

OAM vtrk commands: Virtual Trunk module

The following table lists the OAM Virtual Trunk module commands in the OAM vtrk command group. Table 92: OAM vtrk commands
Command Description Display information about the Virtual Trunk (VTRK) channels for a particular signaling protocol. Where: [protocol] = VTRK protocol - SIP = SIP protocol - H323 = H.323 protocol - SIPL = SIP Lines protocol If <protocol> is not specified, the command displays a summary of all VTRK protocols. <start#> = the channel number at which to start the trunk summary display Element Manager Y

vtrkShow [<protocol>] [<start#>] [<howMany>]

642

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level One (OAM) CLI commands

Command

Description If <start#> is not specified, the display starts from the first channel of the implicated protocol(s). <howMany> = the number of trunk channels to be displayed If <howMany> is not specified, the command displays all trunk channels for the implicated protocol(s), starting from the channel ID specified in <start#>.

Element Manager

disVTRK

Gracefully switches the registered Virtual Trunks to another Signaling Server in the same node. Note: LTPS and VTRK functions must be enabled on a Signaling Server located in the same node to accept VTRK registrations. The number of VTRK resources available must be equal to or greater than the number of VTRK resources being switched over.

forcedisVTRK enlVTRK vtrkNetMonShow

Forces all registered Virtual Trunks to unregister from the local server. Enables the Virtual Trunk application to accept Virtual Trunk registrations. Display the current list of monitored IP addresses and their status.

Y Y N/A

OAM cds commands: Converged Desktop Service module commands

The following table lists the OAM cds module commands in the OAM cds command group. Table 93: OAM cds commands
Command Description Element Manager N/A

amlAcquiredTNShow Displays the contents of the Acquired DN List table for a specified TN. <"TN">

Where <TN> = terminal number in quotations (for example, "4 0 1 0" If DNs of the given <TN> are acquired by one or more application links, the output is as follows:
The DN1 of the <TN> is acquired by: <Application ID1>

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

643

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description
<Application ID2> The DN2 of the <TN> is acquired by: <Application ID1> <Application ID2>

Element Manager

If no DNs of the given <TN> are acquired by any application, then the following is displayed:
The TN <TN> is not acquired by any application through the AML FE.

amlApplLinkShow [<Application ID>]

Displays the record in the Application Link Table with the given <Application ID>. Where <Application ID> identifies a specific application. If there is a record in the Application Link Table with the given <Application ID>, then the following is displayed:
<Application ID> IP Address: ###.###.###.### Message Filter Bitmap: 0X##(in Hex) Feature Control Bitmap: 0X##(in Hex) Number of Acquired DNs: ####

N/A

If there is no record in the Application Link Table with the given <Application ID>, then the following is displayed:
No record for an application link with the given Application ID.

Note: If no <Application ID> is specified, all records (up to 5) in the Application Link Table are displayed.

amlAcquiredTNClea Clear the Acquired TN Table, all the Acquired DN Lists and their related Application ID Lists, rAll

N/A

and update the Application Link Table accordingly. The "acquired" resources on the CS are not deacquired by this command. The command DACR ALL <AML Link Number for the AML FE> should be issued in LD 48 on the CS to de-acquire all the resources acquired through the AML FE.

644

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (PDT) CLI commands

Command

Description For example, if at least one IP Phone is acquired by at least one application, the output of this command is:
OK. Please issue command DACR ALL # in the overlay 48 on the CS.

Element Manager

If no IP Phones are acquired by any applications, the output of this command is:
No phone is acquired through the AML FE.

Level Two (PDT) CLI commands

This section lists the CLI commands that are only available (visible, executable) in the Level Two (Problem Determination Tool [PDT]) security shell. All Level One OAM security shell CLI commands are available in the Level Two PDT security shell by default; PDT security shell capabilities are inclusive of all OAM security shell capabilities. For that reason, the OAM security shell CLI commands are not repeated in this section. To view Level One OAM security shell CLI commands, see Level One (OAM) CLI commands on page 601. Some of the CLI commands that are only available in the PDT security shell are grouped into Command Groups that are also only available in the PDT security shell. However, some of the CLI commands that are only available in the PDT security shell, reside in Command Groups that span both the OAM and PDT security shells. In this section, the tables for the Command Groups that span both the OAM and PDT security shells contain the CLI commands that are only available in the PDT security shell. To obtain a full list of CLI commands in one of these Command Groups, you must look at the applicable Command Group tables in both the Level One OAM CLI Commands section and this section. To display a list of the Command Groups available in the PDT security shell, type help at the PDT security shell command prompt (pdt>). To display a list of commands in a PDT security shell Command Group, type help <command group name> at the PDT security shell command prompt.

PDT Command groups

The following table lists the Command Groups available in the PDT security shell. Those Command Groups available only in the PDT security shell are in italics. The other Command Groups are available in the OAM security shell, but contain commands available only in the PDT security shell.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

645

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Table 94: PDT CLI command groups

Command group Accounts Description User account administration. PDT Commands Table 95: Accounts commands on page 647 Table 96: PDT built-in commands on page 648 Table 97: PDT Patcher commands on page 648 Table 98: PDT RID commands on page 650 Table 99: PDT cds commands on page 650 Table 100: disk commands on page 652 Table 101: PDT nrsDB commands on page 652 Table 103: PDT rdtools commands on page 655 Table 104: PDT sipnpm commands on page 656 Table 105: PDT system commands on page 658 Table 106: PDT ums commands on page 660 Table 107: PDT iset commands on page 661

PDT

PDT built-in commands

Patcher

Patch commands

RID

Remote iset diagnostics commands

cds

Converged Desktop Service Module commands File system maintenance and diagnostics.

disk

nrsDB

Network Routing Service commands

rdtools

rd tools commands

sipnpm

SIP Network Control Module commands

system

System administration commands

ums

UMS module commands

iset

iset module commands

646

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (PDT) CLI commands

PDT Commands
The following tables list the commands in each Command Group at the PDT access level. To display a list of commands in a specific PDT Command Group, type help <command group name> at the prompt.

Accounts commands: user account administration commands

The following table lists the user account administration commands in the Accounts command group. Table 95: Accounts commands
Command Description Element Manager N/A

adminUserPassword Changes the administrator-level user password for an NRS running on a stand-alone Signaling Change [userID]
Server. Where: userID = userID of administrator-level user

adminUserCreate [userID]

Creates an administrator-level user of an NRS running on a Standalone Signaling Server. Where: userID = userID of new administrator-level user Deletes an administrator-level user of an NRS running on a Standalone Signaling Server. Where: userID = userID of administrator-level user being deleted Displays User ID and access privileges for all users of an NRS running on a Standalone Signaling Server.

N/A

adminUserDelete [userID]

N/A

adminAccountShow

N/A

PDT built-in commands: PDT built-in

The following table lists the PDT built-in commands in the PDT command group.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

647

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Table 96: PDT built-in commands

Command Description Switch user. Switch user. Element Manager N/A N/A

vxshell vxWorksShell

PDT Patcher commands: patcher

The following table lists the PDT patcher commands in the PDT Patcher command group. These commands are in addition to the OAM Patcher commands listed in Table 68: OAM Patcher commands on page 612 Table 97: PDT Patcher commands
Command Description Loads a patch file from the file system in Flash memory into DRAM memory, where [patchfilename] is the filename or path of the patch file. If a filename alone is provided, the patch must be in the /C:/u/patch directory. Otherwise, the full or relative path can be provided. When a patch is successfully loaded, the command returns a patch handle number. The patch handle number is used as input to other patch commands (pins, poos, pout, and plis). The loaded patch is inactive until it is put into service using the pins command. If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted for the patch filename and other information. Puts a patch that has been loaded into memory (using the pload command) into service, where [handle] is the number returned by the pload command. If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle]. If issued successfully, the command indicates the global procedures, functions, or areas of memory affected by the patch. You are then prompted and have the choice to proceed or not to proceed. Deactivates a patch (takes it out-of-service) by restoring the patched procedure to its original state. Element Manager N/A

pload ["patchfilename"]

pins [handle]

N/A

poos [handle]

N/A

648

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (PDT) CLI commands

Command

Description If the poos command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle].

Element Manager

pout [handle]

Removes a patch from DRAM memory. The patch must be taken out-of-service (using the poos command) before it can be removed from the system. If the pout command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a handle. Lists detailed patch status information for a loaded patch. If the command is issued without a parameter, you are prompted to enter a [handle]. Displays summary status information for one or all loaded patches. For each patch, the following information is displayed: patch handle, filename, reference number, whether the patch is in-service or out-ofservice, the reason why the patch is out-ofservice (if applicable), and whether the patch is marked for retention or not. Patch retention means that if a reset occurs, then the patch is automatically reloaded into memory and its state (active or inactive) is restored to what it was prior to the system going down. If the [handle] is provided, only the information for the specified patch is displayed. If the command is issued without a parameter, information for all the patches is displayed. Creates memory patches for the Media Gateway Card. The command has no parameter(s). The release of the patch is assumed to be the same as that of the current load. The address to be patched is checked to ensure that it is in range. For each address that is changed, the "old" contents are assumed to be the current contents of that memory address. If a path is not provided for the new path filename then it is assumed that the patch is in the /C:/u/ patch directory. Once a memory patch is created using the pnew command, it can be loaded and activated like any other patch. Loads one or all deplists.

N/A

plis [handle]

N/A

pstat [handle]

N/A

pnew

N/A

dload

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

649

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description Activates one or all deplists. Displays the status of the requested deplist or all deplists. Displays a summary of the status of all patches in a deplist. Deactivate one or all deplists. Remove one or all deplists from memory.

Element Manager N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

dins dstat dlis doos dout

PDT RID commands: remote iset diagnostics

The following table lists the PDT remote iset diagnostic commands in the PDT RID command group. Table 98: PDT RID commands
Command Description Displays RTCP statistics periodically for an IP Phone for a number of polling periods. Stops previously issued RTPTraceShow command for an IP Phone. Element Manager N/A N/A

RTPTraceShow RTPTraceStop

PDT cds commands: Converged Desktop Service module

The following table lists the PDT Converged Desktop Service module commands in the PDT cds command group. These commands are in addition to the OAM cds commands listed in Table 71: OAM cds commands on page 614 Table 99: PDT cds commands
Command Description Element Manager N/A N/A

cdsCallTraceSetDN Enables CDS call tracing for a particular calling/

called DN.

cdsCallTraceSetAl Enables CDS call tracing for all converged desktop calls. l

650

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (PDT) CLI commands

Command

Description Turns off CDS call tracing for all converged desktop calls. Turns off AML message tracing for Converged Desktop Service module. Enables tracing of AML messages between the call server and the AML FE on the signaling server, with or without decoding. Where: <Level Number> = integer defining the display level for AML messages Where: - 1 = raw AML link messages, no decoding - 2 = raw AML messages, excluding polling messages, with no decoding - 3 = decoded AML messages, exluding decoding of IE data - 4 = decoded AML messages, including decoded IE data integer indicating whether to turn on or turn off tracing of AML messages arriving at the PBXLink Where: - 0 = turns off AML tracing - 1 = turn on AML tracing <Application ID List> = a set of integers indicating specific applications for which related AML messages are traced If no value(s) are specified, AML messages from all applications are traced.

Element Manager N/A N/A

cdsCallTraceOff cdsAmlTrace amlTrace <Level Number> <AML over PBXlink_On/OFF> [<Application ID List>]

amlTraceShow

Displays current status (settings) of amlTrace command when the AML trace is ON.
Trace Level: # AML over PBXLink: # Assigned Application IDs: ##, ##

N/A

When AML trace is OFF, the following information is displayed:

AML Trace is Off

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

651

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

disk commands: file system maintenance and diagnostics

The following table lists the PDT file system maintenance and diagnostic commands in the disk command group. Table 100: disk commands
Command Description Checks the integrity of the file system on the specified device. Errors are repaired unless the mount flag is specified. Where: [m] is the mount flag [devname] is the device to check Element Manager N/A

fsck [m] [devname]

PDT nrsDB commands: Network Routing Service

The following table lists the PDT Network Routing Service (NRS) commands in the nrsDB command group. These commands are in addition to the OAM nrsDB commands listed in Table 78: OAM nrsDB commands on page 626. Table 101: PDT nrsDB commands
Command Description Switches the active and standby NRS database access pointer. Reverses the effect of the nrsDBCutever command. Mirrors data from the active NRS database to the standby NRS database. Undoes the changes effected by the nrsDBCutover and nrsDBCommit commands, whether executed seperately, or as one (nrsDBCommitNow). Performs the nrsDBCutover command and the nrsDBCommit command respectively, as one. Gracefully disables the NRS server. Element Manager N/A N/A N/A N/A

nrsDBCutover nrsDBRevert nrsDBCommit nrsDBRollback

nrsDBCommitNow

N/A

disNRS

N/A

652

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (PDT) CLI commands

Command

Description

Element Manager

Note: This command should not interrupt the existing calls.

forcedisNRS enlNRS nrsGKTestQuery

Forcefully disables the NRS server (puts the NRS server out-of-service). Enables the SIP Redirect Server service. Test query the H.323 routes on the active or standby NRS database. Queries an H.323 Routing Entry with DN and cost information. Test query the SIP routes on the active or standby status NRS database. Queries a SIP Routing Entry with DN and cost information. Database operations and applications log Reset all sets which are registered through S1. This command is going through the list of sets registered and performs hard or soft reset (based on parameter given) of sets which are registered through S1. Reset all sets which are registered through S1. This command is going through the list of sets registered and performs hard or soft reset (based on parameter given) of sets which are registered through S2. Switch all sets which are registered through S2 to S1. This command is going through the list of sets registered and performs server switch to S1 sets which are registered through S2. Switch all sets which are registered through S1 to S2. This command is going through the list of sets registered and performs server switch to S2 sets which are registered through S1. Reset all sets which are in local mode. This command is going through the list of sets registered and performs soft reset of sets which are currently in local mode. Reset all sets which are in normal mode. This command is going through the list of sets

N/A N/A N/A

nrsSIPTestQuery

N/A

spcmd isetResetByS1 <soft | hard>

N/A N/A

isetresetByS2 <soft | hard>

N/A

isetSwitchToS1

N/A

isetSwitchToS2

N/A

isetResetLocal

N/A

isetResetNormal

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

653

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description registered and performs soft reset of sets which are currently in normal mode.

Element Manager

isetResetVO

Reset all sets which are in VO mode. This command is going through the list of sets registered and performs soft reset of sets which are currently in virtual office mode.

N/A

Note: The database cutover, revert, commit, and rollback commands are not available in the Element Manager user interface. The same functionality is available in NRS Manager at Tools > Database Actions . The spcmd command can be used for various operations. The syntax of the SIP Proxy spcmd command is: Usage: spcmd [cmd family][parameter <value> ...] Table 102: spcmd Command description
Family -D -L -d failsafe -v debug | info | all -s on | off Write debug, info, or all (i.e. both) logs in addition to the sipLogFile. Turn on/off the log types listed by the -v parameter. If no parameter is given, the default is set to on. Default is on. Display OM report for 400, 401, 407, or 3XX responses as well as the high water (hw) mark for internal queue memory usage and the number of SIP sessions (ss) that have been established. Parameter Description

-O

-v 400 | 401 | 407 | hw | ss

-R

-s force | wait | now -t now | 1..99 - Execute a shutdown and restart of u min | sec the application immediately or in some given time unit (min\sec) whether call are executing or not by either forcing the application or waiting for call processing to stop. -s force | wait -t now | 1..99 -u min | sec Execute a switching of activity from the running application processing to stop where a timer value can be given.

-S

654

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (PDT) CLI commands

Family -V

Parameter -v app | stack | all

Description Show the version of the application, oSIP stack, or both.

rdtools commands: rd tools

The following table lists the PDT rd tools commands in the PDT rdtools command group. Table 103: PDT rdtools commands
Command Description Element Manager N/A

rdopen [filename] Opens a report log file.

Where: [filename] is the name of the report file to be opened.

rdgo [N]

Goes to a specific record. Where: [N] is the absolute record number.

N/A

rd [S] [R]

Displays a specified number of records starting at a specified point. Where: [S] is the number of steps to traverse to the starting point. [R] is the number of records to display. Both [S] and [R] can be negative.

N/A

rds [S] [R]

Displays a specified number of records, with a symbolic dump, starting at a specified point. Where: [S] is the number of steps to traverse to the starting point. [R] is the number of records to display. Both [S] and [R] can be negative.

N/A

rdshow rdall rdtail [N]

Displays general information about the current log file and the current rd settings. Displays all records. Displays the specified number of newest records.

N/A N/A N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

655

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command Where:

Description

Element Manager

[N] is the number of records to display.

rdhead [N]

Displays the specified number of oldest records. Where: [N] is the number of records to display.

N/A

rdnext rdprev rdsconvert [filename]

Opens the next log file. Opens the previous log file. Converts a log file to text. Where: [filename] is the name of the log file to be converted.

N/A N/A N/A

PDT sipnpm commands: SIP Network Protocol Module

The following table lists the PDT SIP Network Protocol Module commands in the sipnpm command group that are available only at the PDT access level. These commands are in addition to the OAM sipnpm commands listed in Table 84: OAM sipnpm commands on page 631. Table 104: PDT sipnpm commands
Command Description Displays the details of the TLS parameters. Displays TLS configuration parameters for the system as a whole, including client and server session caching parameters, the certificate for the local system, and the certificates that are configured. Displays the details of all SIP TLS sessions or sessions associated with a given server IP address. Displays existing sessions (in connected state and persistent), cached sessions, and the uptime and cipher suites, but does not show key information. Configures filtering criteria for message tracing. N/A Element Manager N/A

SIPTLSConfigShow

SIPTLSSessionShow Displays the details of the TLS sessions.

N/A

SIPMessageTrace

656

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (PDT) CLI commands

Command

Description Changes the SIP status code to the ISDN cause code mapping. Where: [num1] = the SIP status code [num2] = the ISDN cause code

Element Manager N/A

sip2IsdnSet [num1] [num2]

sip2IsdnReset [num]

Resets a single SIP status code to the default ISDN cause code mapping. Where: [num] = the SIP status code.

N/A

sip2IsdnResetAll sip2IsdnShow [num]

Resets all SIP status codes to the default ISDN cause code mappings. Shows one specific SIP status code to ISDN cause code mapping. Where: [num] = the ISDN cause code.

N/A N/A

sip2IsdnShowAll isdn2SipSet [num1] [num2]

Shows all mappings from SIP status code to ISDN cause code. Changes the ISDN cause code to the SIP status code mapping. Where: [num1] = the ISDN cause code [num2] = the SIP status code

N/A N/A

isdn2SipReset [num]

Resets a single ISDN cause code to the default SIP status code mapping. Where: [num] = the ISDN cause code.

N/A

isdn2SipResetAll isdn2SipShow [num]

Resets all the ISDN cause codes to the default SIP status code mappings. Shows one specific ISDN cause code to SIP status code mapping. Where: [num] = the ISDN cause code.

N/A N/A

isdn2SipShowAll

Shows all mappings from ISDN cause codes to SIP status codes.

N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

657

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

PDT system commands: System administration

The following table lists the system administration commands in the system command group that are available only at the PDT access level. These commands are in addition to the OAM system commands listed in Table 85: OAM system commands on page 635. Table 105: PDT system commands
Command Description Look up a symbol. Displays list of the devices. Echoes the input. Displays a list of hosts. Displays memory usage. Displays task information for a specified task. Where: [name] is the name of the task. [taskID] is the ID of the task. [name] and [taskID] are mutually exclusive. Element Manager N/A N/A N/A Y Y N/A

lkup devs echo hosts memShow ti [name | taskID]

i version x [name]

Displays a summary of task control block information. Displays vxWorksTM version, date of build, and other information. Executes a function. Where: [name] = the name of the function.

System Y N/A

ifShow reboot [-1]

Displays the attached network interfaces. Warm reboots the system. Cold reboots the system if the -1 parameter is specified. Displays the contents of a directory. Where: [path] = the path name of the directory. If [path] is not specified, the contents of the current directory are displayed.

Y N/A

ls [path]

N/A

658

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (PDT) CLI commands

Command

Description Displays a long list of the contents of a directory. Where: [path] = the path name of the directory. If path is not specified, the contents of the current directory are displayed.

Element Manager N/A

ll [path]

cd [path]

Changes the default directory. Where: [path] = the path and name of the new directory. The [path] of the new directory can be specified as a relative path.

N/A

pwd copy [input] [output]

Displays the current default directory. Copies from one file to another file until an end-of-file (CTRL+d) is reached. Where: [input] = the name of the file to be copied from. If NULL, stdin is used. [output] is the name of the new or destination file to be copied to. If NULL, stdout is used.

N/A N/A

rename [file1] [file2]

Renames one file or moves one file to another. Where: [file1] = the file to be renamed or moved. [file2] = the new or destination filename.

N/A

remove [file]

Removes a file. Where: [file] = the name of the file to be removed.

N/A

moduleShow inetstatShow tcpstatShow udpstatShow syslogShow

Displays the list of all loaded modules. Displays all the active connections for the IP sockets. Displays statistics for the TCP protocol. Displays statistics for the UDP protocol. Displays the log level for all tasks.

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

659

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description Configures the log level for a task. Where: [tid] = the task ID. [name] = the task name. [level] = the log level in the range 0-7. [tid] and [name] are mutually exclusive.

Element Manager N/A

syslogLevelSet [tid] [name] [level]

uudecode

Decode data that were encoded with

N/A N/A N/A N/A

uuencode
(when ELAN and TLAN are not isolated).

arpPrivLogDisable Disable the Arp Warning messages report arpPrivLogEnable hwdShow

Enable the Arp Warning messages report. Displays the status of the system hardware watchdog timer.

PDT ums commands : UMS module commands

The following table lists the UMS module commands in the ums command group that are available only at the PDT access level. These commands are in addition to the OAM ums commands listed in Table 89: OAM ums commands on page 640 Table 106: PDT ums commands
Command Description Assigns the policy for the particular firmware. Element Manager N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

umsSetPolicy

umsSetPolicyUpgra Set upgrade type for policy. deType umsSetPolicyRetri Sets the number of retries for the policy. es umsSetPolicyProto Sets the protocol for the policy. col umsCreatePolicy umsDeletePolicy
Creates a firmware policy. Deletes a firmware policy.

660

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Level Two (PDT) CLI commands

PDT iset commands: iset module commands

The following table lists the iset module commands in the iset command group that are available only at the PDT access level. These commands are in addition to the OAM iset commands listed in Table 74: OAM iset commands on page 615. Table 107: PDT iset commands
Command Description Re-configure S1/S2 ports and action bytes on the targeted IP Phones. The first 6 parameters are used to specify the "target" IP Phones. Where: <IP> = IP address of an IP Phone <Type> = type of IP Phone (For example, 2004P2). <TN> = terminal number of an IP Phone <Encryption> = type of configured signaling encryption Where: - INSECURE = IP Phones that are not configured for signaling encryption - SECURE = IP Phones that are configured with USEC or DTLS signaling encryption - DTLS = IP Phones that are configured with DTLS signaling encryption - USEC = IP Phones that are configured with USEC (UNIStim Security) signaling encryption - ALL = IP Phones that are configured with any type of signaling encryption <Action> = type of signaling protocol used by the IP Phone to communicate with the signaling server Where: - 1 = UNIStim Note: If the target LTPS node has a DTLS Best Effort policy and the IP Phone is configured as DTLS-capable, the IP phone Element Manager N/A

isetSecUpdate ["[<IP>] [<Type>] [<TN>] [<Encryption>] [<Action>] [<DTLSCap>]"] <ServerID> <Action> [<port>]

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

661

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Command

Description is switched to DTLS by the LTPS when it registers. - 6 = USEC (Secure UNIStim) All signaling messages, including registration messages, are protected by USEC. The LTPS detects IP phones that are using USEC and does not attempt to switch them to DTLS. - 7 = DTLS When a DTLS session is established, the IP Phone registers using UNIStim over DTLS. <DTLSCap> = DTLS capability indicator Where: - YES = IP Phones that are DTLS-capable - NO = IP Phones that are DTLS-incapable - ALL = IP Phones that are DTLS-capable and IP Phones that are DTLS-incapable <ServerID> = indicates the server setting to be updated on the targeted IP Phones Where: - 1 = S1 setting - 2 = S2 setting <Action> = the type of signaling protocol to be configured on the targeted IP Phones Where: - 1 = UNIStim Note: If the target LTPS node has a DTLS Best Effort policy and the IP Phone is configured as DTLS-capable, the IP phone is switched to DTLS by the LTPS when it registers. - 6 = USEC (Secure UNIStim) All signaling messages, including registration messages, are protected by USEC. The LTPS detects IP phones that are using USEC and does not attempt to switch them to DTLS. - 7 = DTLS

Element Manager

662

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

CLI commands in Linux

Command

Description IP Phone registers using UNIStim over DTLS. <Port> = the port number to be configured on the targeted IP Phones Default port number is 4100 if <Action> is set to 1 or 6. Default port number is 4101 if Action is set to 7. Note: Avaya does not recommend specifying an explicit port number unless there is a need to do so. Note: The configuration settings applied by this command will only be in effect if the targeted IP Phones are configured statically. If DHCP or a Provisioning Server is used to supply S1 and S2 configuration to the phones, the corresponding configuration source has to be updated instead of the IP Phones. Reboot of updated IP phones is required for configuration changes to take effect.

Element Manager

CLI commands in Linux

This section lists CLI commands that are not supported in CS1000 Release 6.0 Linux.
Commands isecChgPSK isecChgLevel isecNewTarget isecOutTarget isecEnlTarget isecDisTarget isecPofileShow isecConfirm isecDecom isecIkeShowPAll isecIpsecShowIf disInsecureShells enlInsecureShells statInsecureShells disSecureShells enlSecureShells statSecureShell Description VxWorks IPSec management commands

Vxworks specific

sshKeyClear sshKeyGenerate sshKeyShow Vxworks specific mdp firmwareVersionShow swDownload itgChanStateShow disiVGW enaVGW vgwShowAll vgwShow Deplist support Media Card specific

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

663

Signaling Server Command Line Interface commands

Commands adminUserPasswordChange adminUserCreate adminUserDelete adminAccountShow unpackEmHelp unpackVTHelp

Description Vxworks specific

Vxworks specific

rdopen rdgo rd rds rdshow rdall rdtail rdhead RPT report management commands. rdnext rdprev rdsconvert lkup devs moduleShow arpPrivLogDisable arpPrivLogEnable Vxworks specific Vxworks specific Vxworks specific Vxworks specific

664

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 38: UDT Universal Digital Trunk card Command Line Interface
This chapter describes the UDT Universal Digital Trunk card command line interface (CLI). Command Line Interface on page 665 Main menu on page 666 System Maintenance on page 667 UDT Administration on page 672 UDT Maintenance on page 674 Remote access to the UDT card on page 677

Command Line Interface

The UDT card has two Command Line Interface (CLI) levels: basic level advanced level (in debug mode) which includes all the commands available at the basic level, as well as, additional commands for debug purposes only. CLI commands are organized in a tree structure similar to file system folders and files. See Figure 8: CLI command tree structure on page 666. To navigate the CLI tree use the following commands (similar to the Unix operating system): ls - lists commands and directories in current directory, cd<name> - moves to the specified directory, cd .. - returns one level up ? for help (displays a short description of each command or directory in the current level). Characters input are case sensitive.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

665

UDT Universal Digital Trunk card Command Line Interface

Figure 8: CLI command tree structure

Main menu
The following management activities groups are available: smaint - System Maintenance directory; udtadmin - UDT Administration; udtmaint - UDT Maintenance directory. This is the top layer, which is used for navigation purposes only. Available commands: ls - lists commands and directories in current directory, cd<name> - moves to the specified directory, ? for help (displays a short description of each command or directory in the current level).

666

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

System Maintenance

ls command
In response to the ls command, the following is displayed:

? command
In response to the ? command, the following is displayed:

System Maintenance
The following commands are available within the System Maintenance directory ls - lists commands and directories in current directory, cd<name> - moves to the specified directory, cd .. - moves to root directory ? for help (displays a short description of each command or directory in the current level). stest - System Test directory crestart - Card restart mreport - Maintenance Error Reports qver - Display software version showerr - Display Error Information stad - Set time and date ttad - Display time and date

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

667

UDT Universal Digital Trunk card Command Line Interface

ls command
In response to the ls command, the following is displayed:

? command
In response to the ? command, the following is displayed:

System Test
The following commands are available within the System Test directory ls - lists commands and directories in current directory, cd<name> - moves to the specified directory, cd .. - moves to root directory ? for help (displays a short description of each command or directory in the current level). inserv - for in-service system test outserv - for out-of-service system test Objective: perform system component tests. In response to ls command, the following is displayed:

668

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

System Maintenance

In response to ? command, the following is displayed:

In response to inserv command, the following is displayed:

In response to outserv command, the following is displayed:

crestart command
Objective: manual reset of the card. In response to the crestart command, the following is displayed:

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

669

UDT Universal Digital Trunk card Command Line Interface

mreport command
Objective: browse Maintenance Error Reports in order to analyze system problems. All reports are time stamped (according to the time & date set by using the stad command) and contain verbal information regarding the nature of the problem. To exit before maintenance report file has been presented in full, use *<CR> (star) during printout. The maintenance reports have the following format: <serial number>: <severity> < error code> <timestamp> <error text> For example:

showerr command
In addition to the error text in the message itself, the UDT card provides on-line help for error messages. The CLI command receives as input the unique error code and prints the related information for this message: <syntax> - definition of the message syntax. Meaning: what does this message indicate. Parameters: description of the message parameters (fields). Action: steps the administrator can follow to isolate the problem and/or fix it. Impact: possible visual/ physical/higher level effects of the event. For example:

670

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

System Maintenance

qver command
Objective: display software version. For example:

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

671

UDT Universal Digital Trunk card Command Line Interface

ttad command
Objective: display time and date on the UDT card. For example:

stad command
Objective: set time and date on the UDT card. For example:

UDT Administration
The following commands are available within the UDT Administration directory ls - lists commands and directories in current directory, cd<name> - moves to the specified directory, cd .. - moves to root directory

672

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

UDT Administration

? for help (displays a short description of each command or directory in the current level). E1T1Settings set/modify the E1/T1 settings. The card is restarted after saving the changes.

ls command
In response to the ls command, the following is displayed:

? command
In response to the ? command, the following is displayed:

E1T1Settings command
Objective: set/modify the E1/T1 parameters. For Protocol type E1, set the following parameters: Usage - select one of the following values: BCH, DTI2, PRI2, DDCS CRC4 - select one of the following values: NO, YES AIS in TS16 select one of the following values: (NO), YES available only for DTI2 Usage For example:

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

673

UDT Universal Digital Trunk card Command Line Interface

UDT Maintenance
The following commands are available within the UDT Maintenance directory ls - lists commands and directories in current directory, cd<name> - moves to the specified directory, cd .. - moves to root directory ? for help (displays a short description of each command or directory in the current level). AlarmStatus - display group 1 and 2 alarms; ChannelStatus - display the number of channels which have active digital padding; Lpbck - display/Set loopback; PllStatus display PLL status;. SpanStatus - display span status; UdtConfig display span configuration.

ls command
In response to the ls command, the following is displayed:

674

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

UDT Maintenance

? command
In response to the ? command, the following is displayed:

Alarm Status command

Objective: display group 1 and 2 alarms. For example:

ChannelStatus command
Objective: display the number of channels which have active digital padding. For example:

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

675

UDT Universal Digital Trunk card Command Line Interface

Lpbck command
Objective: Set/Clear/Display remote/local loop-back for span. For example:

PLLStatus command
Objective: display PLL status. For example:

SpanStatus command
Objective: display span status. Is it enabled or disabled For example:

676

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Remote access to the UDT card

UdtConfig command
Objective: display span configuration. The following information is printed: protocol, usage, line coding, yellow alarm mode, framing, LBO and clock reference definitions. For example:

Remote access to the UDT card

The UDT card can be remotely accessed only with a modem. A modem can be connected to the UDT card serial port 9-pin connector. The RS-232 setup is as follows: Speed: 9600 Data bits: 8 Parity: N Stop bit: 1

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

677

UDT Universal Digital Trunk card Command Line Interface

678

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Chapter 39: Linux base CLI commands

This chapter lists Linux base CLI commands. Type (linuxbase-command) -h | --help at the command prompt to display a brief summary of the CLI command, as shown in Table 108: CLI command help on page 679. Type man (linuxbase-command) at the command prompt for a more detailed description, as shown in Table 109: man command example on page 679. Table 108: CLI command help
$ poos --help Usage: poos (patch_id)|-app *(app_name)*|--help,-h Options: (patch_id) Deactivate patch with (patch_id) handle. -app *(app_name)* Deactivate all patches for the application (app_name). --help Print this help message and exit.

Table 109: man command example

$ man poos POOS(1) User Contributed Documentation POOS(1) NAME poos - Put a patch out of service. SYNOPSIS poos (patch_id)| -app (app_name) | --help,-h DESCRIPTION Remove a patch from service. The patch is removed from service from all processes in which it was in service. OPTIONS (patch_id) Deactivate patch with (patch_id) handle. -app (app_name) Deactivate all patches for the application (app_name). --help Print this help message and exit. EXAMPLES

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

679

Linux base CLI commands

Deactivate patch with 2 handle $ poos 2 Patch handle: 2 Please ensure that the application solid is stopped before proceeding patch un-installation. Do you want to continue patch un-installation? (Y/N) [N]? y Performing the uninstallation: Performing uninstall RPM patch... Preparing... ########################################### [100%] 1:cs1000-solid ########################################### [100%] executing Solid DB post install... Installation Avaya Solid database server completed. Unstalling the Solid database server package done Done. The RPM patch uninstallation is completed. The patch 2 has been deactivated successfully. Deactivate all sunAm patches $ poos -app sunAm Patch handle: 0 Performing the uninstallation: The patch 0 has been deactivated successfully. SEE ALSO pload, pout, pins, pstat, plis 5.50 2007-12-18 POOS(1)

Table 110: Common CLI commands

Command appVersionShow baseVersionShow echo find ftp ifconfig ls man printenv scp sftp ssh Description Print the servers application software version. Print the servers base software version. Display a line of text on the terminal screen. Search for files in a directory hierarchy. Transfer files to and from a remote network site. Configure a network interface. List directory contents Format and display the online manual pages. Print all or part of environment. Copy files between hosts on a network using ssh. Transfer files to and from a remote network site secure file transfer program. Run OpenSSH SSH client (remote login program) to provide secure encrypted communications

680

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Command

Description between two untrusted hosts over an insecure network.

su swVersionShow telnet whoami

Run a shell with substitute user and group IDs Print the servers software version. Communicate with another host using the TELNET protocol. Print the user name associated with the current effective user ID.

Table 111: systemadmin CLI commands

Command appinstall Description Install applications. Note: Do not use the appinstall command unless you are directed to use it by Avaya support. appstart appstart dbcom start appstart dbcom stop appstart dbcom status appstart dbcom restart baseparamsconfig datetimeconfig dnsconfig ecnconfig hostconfig networkconfig ntpconfig reboot routeconfig syslogFacilitySet syslogLevelSet syslogShow Stop, start, or restart applications. Start the DB engine. Stop the DB engine. Check the status of the DB engine. Restart the DB engine. Configure base parameters. Configure the date and time. Configure DNS values. Configure Explicit Congestion Notification settings. Configure the static lookup table for host names. Configure network settings. Configure Network Time Protocol settings. Reboot the entire system. Configure routing entries. Set the facility value. Set a value for level. Display syslog processes.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

681

Linux base CLI commands

Command sysrestore timeadj upgrade

Description Perform a restore of the application data (backed up by sysbackup). Specify system clock parameters. Select the backup data source and reinstall Linux base.

Note: You might need to add the primary host entry in the backup and member server before you can access them using the hostconfig command. The command syntax is admin2 ---> hostconfig add -ip <PRIMARY SERVER IP> -host <PRIMARY SERVER HOST NAME> -domain <PRIMARY SERVER DOMAIN NAME>. Table 112: maintadmin CLI commands
Command gnome-system-monitor wireshark pcap gryphon Description

Table 113: logadmin CLI commands

Command Authors note: commands not listed at this time Description

Table 114: securityadmin CLI commands

Command basefirewallconfig checkIPsecStatus disableAllTargets harden sshconfig masterfirewallconfig nfsexportsconfig sshconfig Tool to regenerate and distribute SSH host key on aMember UCM server . Disable all IPSec targets and remove all IPSec data. Manage CS 1000 hardening items. Configure SSH keys Description Configure firewall settings.

682

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Table 115: backupadmin CLI commands

Command sysbackup Description Perform a system backup (both base and applications).

Table 116: patchadmin CLI commands

Command pins plis pload poos pout pstat Description Put the patch in service. Show detailed information about the patch. Load the patch into the system database. Put the patch out of service. Unload the patch from the system database. Show a list of installed patches.

Table 117: dbadmin CLI commands

Command Author's note: No commands listed at this time Description

Table 118: timeadmin CLI commands

Command datetimeconfig ntpconfig timeadj Description Configure the date and time. Configure Network Time Protocol settings. Allow tuning of system clock frequency in case the clock gained or lost time.

Table 119: harden CLI commands

Command harden audit status harden banners set/file harden banners status harden basic harden basic reapply Description Displays the status of the Linux Audit Daemon. Modify the banner text. The banner text will be replaced by the content from the file. Enables or disables the pre-login banners. Apply basic hardening changes. Ensures that the basic hardening items are in secure status. Apply basic hardening changes. Ensures that the basic hardening items are in secure status.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

683

Linux base CLI commands

Command harden coredumps status harden ftp status harden help harden nettools status harden nfs help harden nfs on harden nfs off harden nfs status harden passwd_days off harden passwd_days on harden passwd_days set -max harden passwd_days set -min

Description Enables or disables the coredump service. Shows that FTP service is turned on or off. Displays help information for using the command. Enables or /disables the nettools service. Displays help information for using the command. Enables Network File System (NFS) when deploying the primary security server. Disables NFS after deployment is complete. Shows that NFS is turned on or off. Disable previously configured parameters. Enables previously configured parameters. Set value the value of the PASS_MAX_DAYS parameter. The default value is 90. Set the value of the PASS_MIN_DAYS parameter. Note: This parameter must be set to a value >or = 1. The default value is 1.

harden passwd_days status harden rlogin harden rlogin status harden ssh_filter -allow add subnet harden ssh_filter -allow del harden ssh_filter -allow del -IP harden ssh_filter -allow del subnet harden ssh_filter -deny add -IP harden ssh_filter -deny del -IP harden ssh_filter -deny del <number>

Provides the current value of the parameters from hardening storage. Apply hardening to remote logins. Shows if hardening for remote logins is on or off. Add a subnet to the allowed list. Delete a host IP 1 from the allowed list. Delete a host IP from the corresponding (allow or deny) filtration list. Delete a subnet from the allowed list. Add a host to the deny list. Delete a host IP from the deny list. Delete a host IP from the corresponding filtration list. Each host entity (per line) has logical ordinal number in XML file storage. <number> is this sequence number.

684

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Command harden ssh_filter status harden status harden telnet status harden tftp status

Description Shows the list of the names of the hosts which are allowed to connect to Linux Base by SSH. Retrieve the status of Linux Base Enhanced Hardening options. Shows that telnet service is turned on or off. Shows that TFTP service is turned on or off.

Table 120: VxWorks CLI commands

Command isssDecom isssReset isssShow Description Clean up ISSS settings and delete ISSS configuration files. Reset ISSS configuration. Print out ISSS settings.

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

685

Linux base CLI commands

686

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

Index C
CDSP,30 .....................................................................59 CMAJ,30 .....................................................................59 CMIN ALL,30 ............................................................137 CPED,30 ....................................................................59

S
SHLF,30 ......................................................................59 SLFT,30 ......................................................................59 STAT,30 ......................................................................59 STEI,30 ......................................................................59 Succession 1000 system ..........................................183

D
DISL,30 ......................................................................59

E
END,30 .......................................................................59 ENLL,30 .....................................................................59

T
TEIT,30 .......................................................................59 TEST,30 ......................................................................59 TTSM,30 .....................................................................59 TTWI,30 ......................................................................59

L
LDIS,30 ......................................................................59 LENL,30 .....................................................................59 LOOP,30 .....................................................................59

U
UNTT,30 .....................................................................59

R
RPED,30 ....................................................................59

Software Input Output Reference Maintenance

April 2011

687